


% c%-^ 



'<' 



, -6 



,^ 



,^^ . 



.0 



is^ 



'^ ^ V?^..% "^^^-^ w'^ 



"^^ v-^^ 

X^^.. 



> 

* ,0-^ 



;^ 












.p .^^ 



o^;^:^oV'. 






,0 o >. ^ 



^o 



c^. 



"^i^s:^ 



V 



'^ .#' 









\) '7' 'J *- 



C^. 



^' 















.^ .^> 



v^p- 






>• ^ 




^^- 



.-^"-^d. 



'^.^ * 



,0 r 



.^^^' 



* ^' 



> 



.<^^ 



<p. 



o. 



'"^> .^ 









* .\ 



,^> 



.0^- 



'■S-, I'i'' 









A'. 



^^'' % 



^^xhM'''- 



1 ^ v" 






z^' 






•^^ 



>. 









.0^^ 



^' 



A- -;, 



'^^ ^\^^ 






o ^ .0- 






O /n 






' '^ 




LUDWIG B. LARSEN. 






TO THE 



PiWe anJt H^att^n 



BY 



LUDWIG B. LARSEN. 



"(El^t M^sttv^ 0f ®l}e ^0es ^ettealeb. 



Describing What the Bible Contains Regarding God; Heaven; 
Earth ; Christ ; Holy Ghost ; Angels ; Satan ; Dragon ; Reli- 
gion; Patriarchs; Houses in Heaven; Cycles of Time; 
The United States; The Tv^elve Tribes of Israel; 
The Bull, Goat, Lion and Lamb, and the 
Time of the End of the World. 



Illustrated. 



Published by The Author. 
Portland, Oregon. 



PRINTED BY HAUSER PRINTING CO. 
NEW ORLEANS, LA. 



gS3^ 



^^U 



(\'\^^ 



i ' 



COPYRIGHT 1919 

BY 

LUDWIG B. LARSEN. 

ALL TRANSLATIONS AND RIGHTS RESERVED. 



chh -y i^iy 



©CI.A530712 



to tlye 
^unentecn ^ears attb six montlis olb. 



CONTENTS. 



Preface 

PART I 

CREATION AND PHILOSOPHY OF 
THE UNIVERSE 

Chapter Page 

1. God's Laws 13 

2. Religion 16 

3. End of Time 20 

4. Great Trinity ' 2J 

5. Patriarchs , 25 

6. Lost Law " 29 



PART II 

THE AGES OF HEAVEN AND EARTH 

Chapter Page 

7. The Heavens 35 

8. Houses in Heaven ^^ 43 

9. Nature of Houses 49 

10. Houses and Tribes 52 

11. Finished Mystery 55 



PART III 

RECORDED HISTORY FOR 6,000 
, YEARS 

Chapter • Page 

12. Beginning of History 61 

13. Adam and Eve 68 

14. Genesis 70 

(a) Noah. 

(b) Abraham. 

(c) Isaac and Jacob. 

(d) Joseph. 

15. Exodus 90 

16. Leviticus 94 

17. Numbers 95 

18. Deuteronomy 96 

19. Joshua 99 

20. Repetitions of Cycles .102 

21. Solomon's Empire 108 

22. Nebuchadnezzar's Dream Ill 

23. Alexander's Empire 112 

24. The Savior 114 



PART IV 

BIBLE PROPHECIES 

Chapter Page 

25. Earth Life Compared ' 120 

26. Historical Events 123 

27. The Life of Jesus 129 



Chapter ' Page 

28. Crucifying Christ 134 

29. Isaiah 137 

30. Ezekiel 141 

31. Revelation 146 

32. The United States 153 

33. Millenium and New World 161 

34. The Mormons 164 

35. Reincarnation and Evolution 166 

36. The Acts 167 



PART V 

HEAVENLY CONDITIONS ON BARTil 

Chapter Page 

37. Twelve Tribes in United States.. 171 

38. Egypt, The Pyramids, and Sphinx. 179 

39. The Great Planets 188 

40. Description of the Tribes 186 

41. Head of Man 199 

42. Astrology 202 

43. Meaning of Bible Names 205 



PART VI 

THE UNIVERSAL LAW 

Chapter Page 

44. Science of The Heavens 209 

45. Equinoctial Influence 216 

46. The Heavens and Earth 226 

47. Time and Space in The Heavens.. 237 

48. Constellations 242 

49. Astronomy 252 

50. Location of Suns and Stars 272 



lilST OP CHARTS 

Chapter Page 

1. Author's Photo Frontispiece 

2. The Heavens 35 

3. Houses in The Heavens 44 

4. Man as a Universe 47 

5. Three Cycles 63 

6. End of Time .142 

7. Pacific Coast States Tribes 175 

8. Nations as Tribes 179 

9. The Tribes of Israel 187 

10. Heaven Within Man 199 

11. Astrological Houses 202 

12. Space, Time and Cycles 215 

13. Precessional Zones 237 

14-15-16. Polar Constellations ..244 to 247 
17 to 25. Constellations 253 to 279 



PREFACE. 

In making a brief statement of what the Bible contains, we 
will say that the Bible is an astronomical, astrological and geo- 
graphical book, describing a condition of existence in the 
heavens and on earth. The conditions as described in the 
heavens have been illustrated and applied to life on earth, and 
individual names of the human race have been applied to the 
elements of the heavens, to show that: "as it is in heaven so is 
it on earth." 

The only information we have regarding the history of the 
Bible is, that, all the ancient writings refer to it as history of 
the pre-historic periods. The main points regarding the history 
of the Bible and the study of the heavens are that in all the 
''Sacred Books," "Inscriptions on Stones," and in the Pyramids, 
is found the evidence that the study was of a religious nature 
and considered sacred. 

It is suffiicient for us to know that the study of the heavens 
is pre-historic and that the ancient writers had a detailed know- 
ledge of the operation of the universe. The Bible is the best 
book to study; in fact, it is the only book to read to get any 
information regarding this law. Scientists and Bible students 
have tried for centuries to get the key to the Bible. They knew 
that part of the Bible is a mystery and that it has been impos- 
sible to explain it or use reason in its study. 

It is so, also, with the scientific study of the heavens. The 
original method of the study is lost and all forms of guesswork 
have resulted. The fact is, that the key to the secrets of the 
heavens will be found in the Bible, and it is a very simple 
study after getting the first lesson. 

The Bible contains the study of Astrology, Astronomy and' 
Geography, from which a deduction is made and a philosophy 
produced. The earth is described as globular and the conti- 
nents as well as each nation and race are described according 
to location in degrees. The Bible describes the surface of the 
earth and the measurements were made the same as they are 
now, in degrees of longitude and latitude, with Greenwich and 
Equator as dividing centers. 

The dividing of the earth into continents, nations and 
specified localities is illustrated as the ages or cycles of time, 
and are represented as the children of the patriarchs or races. 

It is evident that the Bible was, and is not understood by 
the exponents of Bible theories according to the ancients. The 



8 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Bible proves positively that the ancient writers knevi^ that the 
earth was globular and that the law of evolution was the funda- 
mental principle of creation. It is furthermore shown by the 
system illustrated in the Bible, that the earth revolves on its 
axis eastward, whereby all cycles of time are calculated in 
degrees of longitude westward and around the earth; which is 
also a positive proof that the Bible writers knew the law of 
creation as a God-given principle. 

The Bible illustrates the principle of creation and the 
philosophy of life in the three planets Uranus, Neptune and 
Saturn; in the movement of these planets in the heavens the 
law of God is expressed. These planets represent a principle 
as a God-given power and illustrate the trinity of creation. 
The space in heaven corresponds to the space on our earth, and 
when the planets pass through the heavens a given condition 
is produced and this condition is reproduced on the earth. The 
God-given principle or nature of the planets is according to 
the will of God, and we have no comment or excuse to make. 

In order to make our study more clear we will give an 
outline of the study as illustrated in the Bible and spoken of 
as the origin of man and the creation of the earth. 

The beginning of time is figured from the meridian degree 
west, around the earth. The time spoken of is in degrees of 
longitude figured in years. The different ages are calculated 
westward in cycles of a given number of degrees. The three 
great cycles consist of 120 degrees each and are called the ages 
of the patriarchs. 

The naming of the continents and dividing of the surface 
of the earth by the degrees of longitude is the naming of the 
races, tribes and children of the ages. 

The first illustration of the division of the continent is 
represented in Adam, Eve and the children. The first cycle 
of 120 degrees represents Adam, the second cycle, Eve, and the 
third cycle, Abel and Cain, covering a period of 360 degrees. 
Th€ children of Noah are Shem, Ham and Japheth and repre- 
sent the dividing of the earth into three great divisions ; Ham 
represents the American continent; Japheth, the European 
continent, and Shem, the Asiatic continent. 

The description of the beginning of the race takes place 
about 5000 years ago, at the time of Noah. The real begin- 
ning of all the races of Bible time is figured from the descend- 
ants of Noah, in the dividing of Asia and Europe. 



Preface. 9 

The patriarchs as described represent a cycle of time; 
figured from the planet Uranus, when he makes a complete 
circuit of the twelve houses of the heaven in 1000 years. The 
travels of the patriarchs are described as an age and are the 
description of the earth as countries and nations. 

In Genesis is described the first or actual beginning of 
the cycles or ages from which to figure time. The family of 
Abraham is the first described and includes the United States. 
Up to this age, the description had been general, but after this 
time, the description is that of an individual family, which is 
illustrated by Abraham. The age of Abraham as we figure 
time was at 1921 B. C. prior to the Chaldean period of the 
East. The actual space of Abraham was figured from Green- 
wich to 120 degrees west, which is the Pacific Coast States. 

The next description is of the life of Isaac, which is for 
the period from the 120-degree west to the 120-degree east of 
Greenwich, which is in China. 

The third age represents the life of Jacob and is a detailed 
description of Asia-Europe ; and at the end of the age at Green- 
wich is where Jacob dies and is the end of the cycle. 

The ages or cycles of time have been represented by others 
known as patriarchs. The life of Moses, Joshua, the Judges, 
including David, covers the same field and is figured in 120 
degree cycles. 

The last three cycles are figured from Solomon and the 
Empires up to the present time. 

The circuit of Uranus is of twelve houses, which are 
divided into three periods of four houses each. Each group of 
four houses constitute an age. The end of each cycle is when 
the three leading planets, Uranus, Neptune and Saturn, pass 
from one 120-degree cycle in the heavens to another; then a 
condition is produced which causes war and pestilence on the 
€arth. 

The cycle of time for each patriarch or age is 336 years 
(degrees), and three divisions to the circuit makes 1008 years 
to a complete age. 

The beginning of the -first cycle as recorded was in 4004 
B. C. Covering four 1000-year cycles to the beginning of the 
Eoman Empire age. 

The real cause or foundation for the apparent worship 
which is described in the Bible is the change in the cycles of 
time called the passover, caused by the changing of polarity in 



10 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

the precession of the equinoxes for the heavens and earth. 
This event was considered religiously sacred and very impor- 
tant as all life in the heavens and on earth became affected by 
it. The ancients saw in this event the intelligent will and 
power of God and that the law of the heavens was the words 
spoken by God to man on earth. From this can be seen what 
is meant by the God power who rules in the heavens and on 
earth. 

That part of the Bible which deals with future conditions 
called prophecy as given in the books of Isaiah, Ezekiel, Daniel 
and the Revelations, is the most disputed and misunderstood 
part of the Bible. It may be permissible here to state that when 
parables regarding God's laws are used, that is has reference 
to the workings of the laws of the universe, and is called 
astronomy. When these explanations deal with the future it 
is commonly known as astrology. 

The contents of the Bible, so far as they refer to the 
material or earthly conditions, are a simple study of the planets 
and houses of the Zodiac. This is a strong statement to make, 
but the object of writing this book is to give a key and to prove 
by the Bible what these mystery writings are. The reason for 
putting forth this book is to show the right way and correct 
a misleading knowledge of God; consequently the opinion of 
individuals will be disregarded. 

It has been known for many years that the Bible con- 
tained an astronomical study, but to what extent or how to 
read it has not been known. One who is somewhat familiar 
with the study of astrology will, when he gets the key or idea 
of this book, read the Bible and see the most harmonious 
scientific teachings. And for those not familiar with the study, 
a little application will give an inclination to know more and 
the study will become so interesting that it will take care of 
itself. The knowledge of being able to read and discern the 
truth of the greatest book in existence is worth the effort made 
to learn to read the Bible correctly. 

To the students of the Bible, the illustrations as pictured 
there are the teachings of perfect character, and not as it may 
appear to the untutored, immoral and the language considered 
filthy. The coarse and vulgar terms as used in the Bible are 
applied to nations, the signs of the Zodiac and planets; to 
illustrate characters and not applied to any human being, con- 
sequently the immoral meaning as generally understood is lost. 



Preface, 11 

From this it will be seen that when the Bible is rightly under- 
stood, the reading of the Bible will be a pleasure and a satis- 
faction. 

There is another very important question which each 
individual has to decide for himself, and that is : Do we survive 
after the so-called death? Today the Bible is our fundamental 
textbook, teaching us what the future life is; or as we term it, 
the life in the next world. Now, if there is something in the 
Bible, which is not understood, the student will be misled into 
a false belief. If this knowledge can be obtained by yourself, 
to your own satisfaction, you can look toward the future life 
without fear. In the study of the Bible this knowledge can be 
obtained, and it is a knowledge and not merely a belief. A law 
will be found in the universe of God, so good, great, and just 
that the fear of a devil and hell will disappear. The satisfac- 
tion of this knowledge alone is worth the time spent in this 
study. 

The scientific study of the Bible, without the idea of 
worship included in it will show to the conscientious student 
that the ancient writers knew that the human race continues 
to live after the so-called death. Anyone who wants to get this 
knowledge can get it out of the Bible, but this information 
cannot be obtained as long as the student maintains the idea 
of a personal or individual God or Devil. 

Lttdwig B. Larsen. 
Portland, Oregon, April, 1919. 



Part I. 

Chapter 1. 

god's laws. 

god and the universe are one. 

"In the beginning was the word and the word was with 
Ood, and the word was God." John I. 

God's laws are the operation or movements of the creative 
Universe, from the smallest molecule to the greatest Solar 
Systems. 

The Holy Spirit or Word of God is the life-giving prin- 
ciple which permeates the entire creation. It is the reproduc- 
tive element in the grain of wheat, in the power of sunlight or 
in the influence of atmosphere. Its operation is caused by the 
action of the elements of nature from all sources. 

God's children constitute every living atom, regardless of 
form or degree of development; whether it may be a human 
being, the earth, or a planet or part of some other solar system, 
in any part of the Universe. 

God and the Universe are one ; are all, and in all ; and the 
creative principle as expressed in what we call natural laws, 
are the expressions of God's will. The Universe was not made 
for the benefit of the human race, but they are only part, and 
a very small part, of a great unit of all. 

To worship God is to know his will, which is to study the 
operation or manifestation of the laws of nature, and to live 
accordingly. 

To sin is to disregard God's laws, or to live and act con- 
trary to nature, whether it be intentionally or by ignorance of 
the law. 

Heaven is the space or place wherein the different solar 
systems exist and operate as an eternal Universe. Heaven is 
not a specific location in the Universe, where the souls of the 
human race go after they pass out of the body; neither is it a 
place of reward for a certain class of people to live in after 
death. 

Hell is supposed to be a place where the Devil exists and 
is outside of the jurisdiction of God. There is no place in the 
Universe where hell is located. Neither is there a Devil or 
Satan as a being, whose aim is to eternally torture human 



14 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

beings. Heaven and hell refer to conditions of existence 
spoken of in the Bible as a reward or punishment. 

To live according to the law is to obey God and the reward 
is heaven here and hereafter. To disobey God is to act con- 
trary to nature and be punished with disease and hell condi- 
tions. 

The law of nature or God does not stop when the human 
being passes out of the body. The being is the same, with the 
same traits of character and individuality, living and existing 
as others who have passed out of the body of flesh. These 
beings enter into a life on a higher atmospheric condition. 
They are subject to the conditions of this earth in its motion 
around the sun, the planets and elements of nature, as well as 
to the local condition of each individual. 

Life is eternal whether it is expressed in a human being 
or in any other form. The expression of life changes form at 
certain given periods of existence. For instance, as expressed 
through the flesh, the living life principle at birth takes on 
the form of a human being in the shape of a child and maintains 
this form until the functions of the body of flesh cease. When 
the human being or life principle passes out of the flesh it takes 
on the form which is known as spirit and lives in an atmosphere 
of spirits. 

The manifestation of all life in the flesh is compulsory and 
is part of God's laws, for it is impossible for any being to stop 
living. The life principle called nature, which eminates from 
God, is indestructible and after it takes on the form of a human 
being it maintains a memory throughout eternity. As it is 
impossible to prevent or stop the manifestation of life in the 
flesh, so is it impossible to maintain the spirit in the flesh in- 
definitely. There is a law which governs all things and the 
law makes it impossible to stop the spirit from passing out of 
the flesh whether the human being desires it or not. 

The life in what is known as the spirit world is similar to 
the life in the flesh; only some of the forms and functions of 
nature are different. It is the same universe and the same 
natural laws to contend with. The fact is, it is the continuation 
of the same life. First Corinthians 15:35-55. 

The existence as a being in the spiritual form is also 
limited to a given period of time. The soul passes out of the 
body of the spirit and takes on another living form again. The 
spirit body after separation of the soul is disintegrated by the 



Part I — Chapter 1. 15 

elements on the plain of the spirit, the same as the flesh is dis- 
integrated by the material elements here. 

These are the fundamental principles of the laws of the 
universe affecting the existence of the human being now and 
hereafter. 

In order to live according to the laws of God, we should 
study the laws and know how to live both now and in the 
future. As God is a living God and includes the entire uni- 
verse, the study of God's laws must be the study of the laws 
of the universe. 

The next most important question is, what constitutes the 
universe and what is known of it that can be studied? Our 
knowledge of the great universe is very limited. The Bible 
and some other ancient writings give us some information con- 
cerning the universe, and the modern science of astronomy has 
verified and confirmed some of the teachings found in the Bible. 
The fact is that the study of astronomy is the actual study of 
God's laws. Astronomers observe the heavens and measure 
space and the movements of the different solar systems. They 
have found that our earth, together with seven other planets, 
make a regular and systematic circuit around the sun, making 
our sun a center for this planetary unit. They have "also found 
that other solar systems exist, and that other planets make 
circuits around other suns, and that there is no limit to space, 
and that space may be considered as eternity. The modern 
science of astronomy gives us the cold figures and facts of the 
actual physical manifestation of some of the operation of God's 
laws, and we take it for granted that it is absolutely correct. 
The Christian Bible and some other ancient writings give us 
the same information and much more. The Bible shows that 
our solar system goes round another solar system and the 
length of time in years it takes to make a circuit. 

The Bible is the best book published, giving detailed infor- 
mation of the operation of the universe. It shows that there 
are sixty seconds in a minute, sixty minutes in the hour and 
twenty-four hours in the day. It also shows that a circle con- 
sists of three hundred and sixty degrees, and that the entire 
creation is operated in cycles. It shows that the manifestation 
and operation of the universe as described in the Bible is the 
same as the science of astronomy, which gives figures and 
measurements and dates of time. 

The teachings of other ancient writings when reference is 



16 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

made to God and the worship of God, is the same as in the 
Bible. They speak of God as the great power, which rules the 
universe. 

The ''Book of the Dead," which is the translation of the writ- 
ings found in the pyramids, shows that the heavens have been 
divided, and that names have been given the different sections; 
that the same fundamental rule was used in their time as now. 
They speak of Isis corresponding to the East or Sunrise, "as 
a Hymn of Praise when rising in the horizon" God is in his 
glory at Midday in the south, proclaiming exaltation and Osiris 
is the west or ''sunset with lamentation" as the elements of 
nature pass to the "underworld," under the earth at night. 
The first part of the "Book of the Dead" contains the meaning 
of what the twelve signs of the Zodiac give in the four cardinal 
points. North, East, South and West, and the rest of the book 
describes details. Much may be said about these writings but 
let it be said that they contain a natural explanation of the 
universe. 

Chapter 2. 

religion. 

In all ages the philosophy of life has been the problem 
that the human race has tried to solve. The writings regarding 
this study as handed down to us from the different tribes and 
nations, show that the human race has existed on this earth 
for the past six thousand years. These writings, whether they 
have been preserved in the Bible or other religious documents, 
or found carved on stones in the Pyramids, or the tombs of 
Egypt or India, show that the fundamental principles of all 
writings are from the same origin. The doctrine of the writ- 
ings, is the study of the operation of the universe ; the relation 
of our earth to the planets of our solar system; illustrating a 
philosophy which is applied to all life. It is unnecessary to. 
mention the different religious doctrines of the past and their 
teachings. We have today three great organizations, which 
are the outgrowth of teachings of the time previous to the 
Christian age. The three great organizations are the Bud- 
dhists, Christians and Mohammedans. 

The original center of population and civilization before 
our age was east of the Mediterranean Sea, in Babylonia, 
Asyria and Egypt. Many books have been published giving 
the details of the origin and history of these religious organi- 



Part I—Chavter 2. 17 

zations, so it will be necessary only to mention here, that they 
all originated from the same place, and that their law and 
philosophy of life come from the same root and their doctrine 
originally was the same. The promulgation of each doctrine 
in the last two thousand years has conformed to the natural 
growth of the nations and the advancement caused by civiliza- 
tion. The Brahman and the Buddhist religion has answered 
the purpose for the Japanese, Chinese and for nations of the 
far east in Asia; the Christian religion for the European and 
American nations, and the Mohammedan religion for the 
Balkans, Turkey, India and Northern Africa. It is apparent 
that each has a mission to perform; a life to live; or period of. 
existence. 

When we look back over the history of Nations and re- 
ligious organizations, we find that from their formation they 
grow to their zenith, then they decline and finally change form 
of existence or die. The history of the three great religions of 
today is no exception, and by observation we now know that the 
great churches or religious organizations will be compelled to 
change. 

The reason why the author refers to religious organiza- 
tions is that the same law which governs nations, also governs 
the religious or spiritual laws of God. The churches represent 
a principle of a spiritual life, and teach the continuation of life 
after death. The priests or teachers of a spiritual life must 
know the laws of God in order to teach others this principle^ 
Many of the teachers of this spiritual knowledge do not know 
the laws of God and are teaching a substitute philosophy whichi 
adheres to a personal God instead of a universal God. It is: 
at this time, God's will, that the truth shall be known and we 
feel it a privilege to present this law as it is written in the 
Bible, knowing, as we do, that the time has now come, when the 
truth shall be known and will become a blessing to future gen- 
erations. 

The correct interpretation of the Bible as well as the 
Vedas and the Koran is very simple. Read it as it is written 
and forget the personal teachings of the Romans or any of the 
other churches and study it as any other book. The language 
and form used in the Bible is apparently put there for a pur- 
pose, for the writers of the Bible did know of the dark ages 
which the Bible had to survive and if it had been written dif- 
ferently, there might not have been a Bible in existence today. 



18 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

The Talmud is the original manuscript upon which the 
Jewish and Christian religions are based. It is the root from 
which the Christian religion originated. The Hebrew religion, 
as a world's teaching, cannot be considered. It has passed its 
cycle of time in its present form and has now become the Chris- 
tian religion. 

The new age is scientifically called the age of the Universal 
Republic. It is the beginning of "God's Sunday," or ''Seventh 
Day." The new age will be the beginning of a new dispensa- 
tion for the Hebrew race, as well as for all others. 

We aim to prove that the study of the Bible is a science 
and that the laws of the universe are the key which unlocks the 
door to this knowledge. We have explained part of the Bible 
and proved by actual figures and facts, that the mystery of the 
Bible is solved. The study of the heaven is as much of a lost 
science as the study of the Bible and as we intend only to give 
the key to the study and not go into detail of its operations, this 
short and conscise explanation is all that is necessary. 

The Bible is an astronomical book. It contains the study 
of the heavens and the movements of the planets through the 
different houses. It teaches the science of the heavens, as it 
is studied today and gives full instruction how to set up a figure 
of the heaven and measure time, space and degrees. The Bible 
contains nothing but wisdom of the heavens and explains the 
philosophy of life to be God's laws. The God as spoken of is 
the Universal God, the law of creation. God is not individual- 
ized, but the son of God is an independent personality as illus- 
trated by the story of Jesus. The writings about Jesus are 
facts ; his life history as pictured in the Bible shows that Christ 
has lived in the flesh during the Christian age. Jesus the 
Christ, as an actual being is living with his father in heaven 
today. He rules and has great power, is merciful, loving and 
tolerant, illustrating a perfect character as a God-given prin- 
ciple. 

We will accept and take for granted as facts the story 
about Jesus as written in the Bible, all the characteristics, the 
individuality, the beautiful history of the Savior, that he is 
the only begotten son of God, that he has lived as Christ and 
that be was crucified. 

The illustrations, as pictured in the Bible as the Life of 
Christ is the Christian Age, which begins at the age or year 
40 B. C. and ends in 1918. It is a misconception of truth to 



Part I — Chapter 2. 19 

think that Christ was a man who lived thirty-two years. 
Christ has lived as a period of time and his life's history is 
not as a human being but it is the planet Uranus which the 
ancient Bible writers called the Son of God. He is the one 
who has the power in heaven and on earth. 

The cycle or period of time known as the Christian age, is 
the time when our solar system has passed through the house 
of Pisces, and as the life of the Christians or Christ was 
thirty-two years, (thirty-two degrees). The ending of the 
Christian Age took place October, 1918, when Christianity 
gave up its spirit and was crucified. From this it will be seen 
that Jesus and Christianity are two different topics. Jesus, 
the Christ is the planet Uranus ; but Christianity is the life of 
Christ or age. The Holy Ghost is the spirit or influence which 
the planet Neptune produces, as represented by the Church. 
Satan, the devil, is^the planet Saturn. From this brief state- 
ment will be seen what the study of the Bible is. 

The Catholic Church has promulgated thej theory of a 
place in the universe called purgatory, but there is notriing 
written in the Bible describing this place. It is supposed to be 
a place where the human race, as spiritual entities are tortured 
for not taking an active part in church organizations. The 
doctrines of the Bible and also the writings of Emanuel Swed- 
enborg describes, that the same conditions prevail in the spirit- 
ual world as here in the flesh, it is however a condition and not 
a place. The life as spiritual beings is the continuation of the 
life which inhabited the flesh and as the laws of the universe 
also govern the life of spirits, we will find that conditions must 
arise to cause a difference of opinions there as well as here. 
The elements of nature and disposition of man produces a con- 
dition which would be a hell to one and a heaven to another. 
To live in environments and places contrary to one's nature is 
to be in hell and with congenial company and climatic condi- 
tions is heaven both now and hereafter. 

When the ego or spirit of man separates from the body of 
flesh, he lives in the realms of spirits. The place and condi- 
tions wherein man exists as spirits is called by different names. 
The Catholics call it Purgatory; the theosophists, the astral 
plain; the spiritualists, a spiritual life; the Indians call it the 
happy hunting grounds, but most of the churches call it heaven 
and hell. 

These different churches or doctrines teach only of one life 



i 



20 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

where the spirit of man lives, and forget that the spirit or soul 
of man continues to die and live. The spirit dies on the plains 
of spirits and the soul or ego goes into a higher life in a higher 
etherial atmospheric condition and continues to do so through- 
out eternity. 

The question of the Sabbath or Sunday and the first day 
of the week has been made an important issue in church organi- 
zations and worthy of consideration. In the old testament the 
^ "Sabbath" means ''the passover;" that is, the solar system 
passing from one cycle into another. At the time of this pass- 
over as described, the children of Israel were numbered. In 
the new testament this passover is called the Sabbath or Lord's 
day and illustrated as the first day of the week. This Sabbath 
is the first day of the new dispensation and is figured from the 
day that Jesus rose from the grave; which is the third day 
after he was crucified. Jesus died in the fall of 1918 and he will 
rise again in the third year or in the fall of 1920, as the evening 
before the morning of the first day or Sabbath. The passover 
or Sabbath for the present cycle begins in September, 1920, as 
the evening before 1921. 

''And the evening and the morning were the first day." 
Gen. 1:5. "From even unto even, shall ye celebrate your Sab- 
bath." Lev. 23:32. 

The real Sabbath or passover is the seventh day whether 
it is figured for a week, year or a thousand years. From this 
can be seen that the Sabbath and the first day of the week are 
two different topics. 

The reformed Christian churches have disclaimed any and 
all connections with the Catholic Church but continue to teach 
the Christian doctrines of the Catholic Church. This includes 
the Mormans, Seventh Day Adventists, Christian Scientists, 
and all Bible societies formed from the outgrowth of the Roman 
Church. Church worship and Catholic holidays are part of 
their religion, inherited from the mother church but they dis- 
honor the giver and worship the gift. From this can be seen 
that the Sunday worship of God, as now used, is a Catholic 
Church day and used for the promulgation of Church organi- 
zations. 

Chapter 8. 
the end of time. 

In the Bible, the Books of Isaiah, Ezekiel and Revelations 
have been considered a mystery. They deal with a period of 



Part I— Chapter 3. 21 

time in the future and the prophecies made there are for 
the end of time. Students of the Bible have figured out that 
the time to which the Bible refers is the present time. They 
calculate from certain given years, w^hen a change of condition 
is due to take place. It is apparent that the Bible students have 
figured correctly, but they do not know the cause or reason for 
such changes or what the end of time means. They look at God 
as a personal God or individual being and as the Bible says 
that *'A Savior will appear to make a new earth and a new 
heaven." So they look at this prophecy from a personal and 
material standpoint, instead of a change in the cycles of time, 
which is the actual meaning of the prophecy. 

It is not the intention to argue with Bible students re- 
garding a religious belief or teachings but to correct a wrong 
interpretation of the Bible as explained by Bible students. We 
aim to prove positively that the Savior as spoken of is not 
going to destroy this earth or make a new heaven, but we aim 
to show by facts and figures, from the Bible, what the correct 
interpretation is. 

We have known for a number of years, that the Bible 
refers to the planets and the signs of the Zodiac, but it was 
not until we found a complete explanation of the Zodiacal signs 
in the "Book of the Dead," v/hich is the writing found in the 
Pryamids, that we obtained the key to this study. 

The "Book of the Dead" contains nothing, absolutely noth- 
ing, but the explanation of the Zodiacal signs and the planets. 
The teachings of Zoroaster, Buddha and all ancient religions, 
contain the study of the heavens. The Babylonian, Assyrian, 
Jewish, and Mohammedan teachings show that the Zodiac was 
the foundation for the study of God's laws. 

It may be permissible to state that Zoroaster, Buddha, 
Adam and Eve, Abraham, Isaac and Jacob, and also Noah, 
Moses and Jesus, are characters used for the illustration of a 
condition or a period of time, as applied to this human race. 
This is a strong statement to make in face of the teachings of 
the different religions of today, but we are happy to say that 
we can prove it and aim to illustrate it, so that others can read 
the different Bibles and understand what they are reading. 
We also say that from the first chapter of Genesis to the last 
chapter of Revelations, the Bible contains the study of the 
planets in the heavens. !We do not say that it contains nothing 
else, as in the case of the "Book of the Dead," but it is a fact 



22 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

that the Zodiac is referred to in the Bible from cover to cover. 
We can honestly state that every book and chapter in the 
Bible contains teachings of the Zodiac and the planets. The 
philosophy of the Bible is to illustrate the condition in the 
heavens as manifested by the planets, and that this philosophy 
of the heavens is to be applied to the conditions of our earth 
life. The Bible informs us that ''as it is in heaven, so is it on 
earth." From this alone is shown that the philosophy of the 
Bible is to teach us of a heavenly or future life. In no place in 
the Bible does it say that the human race lives after the so- 
called death. It does, however, illustrate that the spirit and 
body separate at death, and that the spirit continues to live in 
a new form of existence. This is an indisputable evidence of 
the philosophy of life as illustrated by the planets. 

Chapter 4. 
the great trinity. 

The study of the Bible is the study of our solar system 
and its movement around another central sun, suns or center. 
It has been proved that during the periods of 25,920 years 
which it takes for our earth to make a revolution, that the con- 
ditions of education, living, health, religion, and forms of gov- 
ernment of this earth are effected. The earth ha3 passed 
through dark periods or ages and also ages of progress. It has 
been found that the Bible has stated in a mysterious way that 
this was to be so, and it states also that in the future certain 
conditions would take place at given periods of time, some 
prophecies dating as far ahead as 2000 years or more. It has 
now been proven by Bible students that these prophecies or 
predictions which have taken place in the last 2000 years are 
correct, to the very year. These Bible students differ in opinion 
as to what was the original cause and what the result of these 
prophecies would be. 

According to the Bible we are now living in an age, 
(1^18), when a change of condition is to take place. War, pes- 
tilence, revolutions, changes in form of government and re- 
ligion, in fact a new age or a new cycle of time is to begin. 
The Bible has prophesied the place and condition of the present 
war and the result. This has proven to the Bible students that 
the predictions for the present time are also correct. 

Now the question is, have the Bible students throughout 



Part I — Chapter 4. 23 

the world found the right system which explains these prophe- 
cies, or are they guessing or arguing among themselves as to 
the cause and effects of the prophecies? The class of students 
who have made a business of studying these prophecies in the 
Bible are not in the true sense of the word students. They are 
a class of religious worshipers, blinded by the teachings from 
the dark centuries, worshiping an individualized God made in 
Rome. 

The writers of the Bible were students of the laws of the 
universe and were advanced in learning and enlightened sim- 
ilar to the present generation. The study as spoken of in the 
Bible is the study of the Zodiac and the planets. It explains 
how to calculate time, measure space and distance, calculate 
angles, squares and circles. It instructs how to locate the 
equator and figure longitudes and latitudes, and it explains how 
to estimate degrees, days, hours, minutes and seconds. 

The Bible also shows the location of the planets in special 
houses at the present time. It gives the location of the larger 
planets such as Neptune, Uranus and Saturn, and how long 
they are to stay in each house. The Bible teaches that these 
planets, when in a certain location at a given time will produce 
an effect on this earth peculiar to its own nature, that is: 
Neptune, Uranus and Saturn produce a condition or influence 
which effects the life and governing powers on this earth. 

We will prove that the study of Bible prophecies are not 
a study of a personal God, who lived as a man and returned as 
a God ; one who will utterly destroy this earth and most of the 
human race and save a few belonging to a sectarian organiza- 
tion. The Bible says that this ''Son of God," "Savior" or 
''Lord of the heaven" will return in all his glory and power to 
establish a new cycle of time, a new kingdom, yes, everything 
the Bible students say, he will do. Now, let it be clear in 
everyone's mind that this "Savior" is the planet Uranus. That 
he has come back the same way as they saw him depart years 
ago in the clouds. Uranus will tear down and destroy before 
building better, and is in fact a Savior and reformer. We 
should look to him as a friend, even if he is a planet, as he is 
the beloved "Son of God" and has eternal power. 

The Bible says that Saturn or the devil has great power 
over the earth at the time of the end of this age. He is to fight 
with the Lord but he is to be put into a burning furnace of fire 
to be tortured and destroyed. Saturn is to be assisted and 



34 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

have the help of a feminine element in torturing the people of 
the earth at the time of the end of the world. 

We take it for granted that everyone knows the name and 
works of the devil and those who help him suffice it to say that 
the Devil or Satan is the planet ^'Saturn," with all his evil 
qualities. The one spoken of in the Bible who is to help Satan, 
is the planet Neptune. iShe is helping Saturn at the present 
time. From this can be seen what the entire mystery is about. 

The trinity of the Father, Son and Holy Ghost with Satan, 
are the fundamental characters of Bible study. The father 
is the God power which rules the universe. The Son of 
God is the planet Uranus. The Holy Ghost is the planet Nep- 
tune. Satan is the planet Saturn. There are no other char- 
acters described in the Bible having individual power other 
than these planets who can influence the human race. The 
^reat trinity of Father, Son and Holy Spirit is clearly shown 
to influence the human race for good, acting in harmony to 
produce heavenly conditions on this earth. We find that Satan 
is spoken of in the Bible from Genesis to Revelations. His 
home is in Gehennah, which means "on the north." Satan's in- 
fluence is for evil and produces evil for those with whom he 
comes in contact. Satan is also spoken of as a snake and the 
home of the snake is in the north. We find the constellations 
"Draco" and "Hydra" illustrated as snakes in the north in the 
ancients' pictures of the heavens. From this it will be seen 
that Satan and the snake give the same influence. 

In the middle of the constellation Hydra is a picture of a 
■crater. This is the center of all evil. From this crater a hell 
condition is produced. When a planet is passing this place in 
the heavens he is in darkness and produces darkness. This 
crater is represented as a place to destroy or cremate. The 
term "fiery furnace" has been applied to it. The house of the 
lion is in this part of the heavens and this house is a barren, 
fiery place. At the end of all cycles of time Satan and the Holy 
Ghost are in this place in the heavens. At the same time Jesus, 
as Uranus, the Son of God, is directly in the opposite side of 
the heaven, in the house of Aquarius. In this house is the 
picture of a man with an urn pouring out water. From this it 
will be seen that Jesus is pouring out the water of life from his 
urn and Satan is destroying them from his position in the 
heavens. 

If a hell should be pictured or a statement made that such 



Part I — Chapter 5. 25 

a place existed in the universe, it would be from 10° of Cancer 
to 12° of Libra with the 25th degree of Leo as a center and this 
would be the Hell spoken of in the Bible. 

If we should look for the home of the Lord of Heaven, we 
would find it in 25 degrees of the house of Aquarius, for here 
is the place where the Son of God is crucified and where he 
takes possession of the heavenly kingdom. 

When we can realize what the Trinity of God is, and what 
the influence of Satan means, we will have learned the first 
lesson of the laws of the universe. If we do not understand 
who God is, we cannot know his laws and if we do not know 
his laws, we cannot follow the law and teach others what the 
word of God is. The Bible says that the ''Word was God," and 
as the v/ord of God is in the heavens we will have to look in the 
heavens to find the word of God. As God is in the heavens, we 
look to the trinity of God in heaven for the power which rules 
the world. 

Chapter 5. 
the patriarchs. 

The Bible says that the Christ has lived in the flesh and 
those who say he did not are speaking falsely. In the first 
place there is a distinction between Jesus and Christ as ex- 
plained in the Bible. ''Jesus is the Savior," He is the Lord 
of Heaven," "God's iSon." In other words Jesus is the planet 
Uranus. The Christ is the Christian Age. It is Christianity 
which was established when Uranus was in the same heavenly 
place years ago, that he is now. 

The Christ, or Christianity as an age, has lived in the 
flesh, which means that Christ has actually lived in the 
flesh for the last two thousand years. This goes to show that 
the statement in the Bible is correct. 

Jesus was not an individual man who was crucified ^ for he 
represents an age. It is the same illustration as used about 
Buddha as being born of a virgin and sacrificed. The fact is, 
these stories are an explanation of the Zodiacal houses. It will 
be seen from illustration that the watery house of Pisces is the 
-water that the Savior had to be born from, in order to be born 
again when he enters the new kingdom. 

The Virgin who was the Saviors mother is Neptune in the 
liouse opposite to Pisces, which is Virgo. This is just another 



26 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

illustration of the same story. It is the same principle which 
is represented as the mother of Buddha, in fact the same prin- 
ciple is represented in the maiden who met the lovers at the 
well and watered the sheep and the camels in olden times. 

This virgin is the mother of all the generations of the past 
ages. This same virgin is now watching her Christian children 
being crucified in Europe ; that is, she is now in pain and agony 
to see her child die, but it must be done ; the killing has to take 
place as it is God's will. The Savior knew beforehand that 
this horrible agony would come and he has told his disciples so 
long ago. 

We hope that every student of the Bible realizes what this 
means, for it is the Key Stone and also the foundation of every- 
thing that the Christian religion is based on. We will, how- 
ever, say that before a natural death comes, suffering must 
take place. The reason why the Lord had to suffer death was 
that the human race should live and live eternally. 

The Savior is now in his last dying struggle (in the year 
1918). He will remaiil dead, or in the tomb, for nearly three 
days (years), when he will raise from the dead and speak and 
prove to his disciples that he is not dead. 

Uranus who is the Lord and Savior, entered into his own 
house, Aquarius in 1912. He will stay in this house for seven 
years or during the period that the nations of Europe are un- 
settled. The actual dying of the Christian age will last for 
seven years. Read in Revelations, where every day or year is 
shown, even that Europe had to be ruined and that revolutions 
will take place. 

As Uranus is in Aquarius so is Saturn or Satan directly 
opposite in the house of Leo, representing the heart of things, 
and is a house of fire, or fiery furnace. 

This means that the Lord and Satan are now fighting a 
life and death struggle, and it shows clearly when the end will 
come. Uranus is in direct opposition to Saturn on October 
1st, 1918, being also in parallel position, so this is the end of 
the life of Christianity. Bible students should now read the 
life of Christ from beginning to end ; they will realize that the 
life of Christ is the actual life of the Roman Age. The last 
few years show the trial of Christ before Pilate and all the 
excuses he made that he was not guilty of taking the life of 
Christ. From this illustration we see who started the war. 
The people said crucify, and he is crucified. The Bible says 



Part I — Chapter 5. 27 

that the Lord will overcome Satan and that Satan shall be 
burned to death in the most fearful manner. 

The place of the present struggle is shown to be where it 
is actually taking place and Italy is especially mentioned as the 
home of the woman of the ''seven mountains." The Catholic 
'Church with all her daughters, that is all the Christian 
Churches of all denominations, are shown to be illustrated as^ 
the planet Neptune. Now Neptune is in the house of Leo or the 
Lion with Saturn, and the Bible says, that they are both going 
to their doom and destruction. They are to be killed by the 
Lord when he enters the new heaven or age. It has not been 
generally known what the planet Neptune represents but read 
Revelations 19, and it is all there. Neptune illustrates the 
principle of church religion and morals. She is the Holy 
Ghost. In other words in order to know what the elements of 
Neptune are, compare her with the church. She is called the 
mother of harlots. From this it will be seen that the churches 
at the present time are not teaching the words of the Lord. 
The fact is that Neptune, or the church, is now in company with 
Saturn or Satan in the burning fiery house of the Lion. She 
is in company with Satan and dying. Satan and the Holy 
Ghost will be burned to death before September, 1920, in the 
great furnace of the lions. 

The war today is in the Christian countries and the Cath- 
olic Church is in the midst of the fire, in every sense of the 
word. Neptune represents the Church and her children, and 
when it says in the Bible they will be destroyed and killed, we 
take it for granted that the Bible means the same as when 
reference is made to the destruction of the earth and heavens, 
which means that the old methods and conditions will be killed. 
The Christian Church, as well as all other churches of the 
entire world, will undergo a change. They will all be born 
again into the new age, with new life and new principles and a 
great reform movement will take place. 

Saturn, or Satan, and Neptune or the Church, as they now 
are, will be killed, when the Savior or Uranus rules in the new 
heaven. He is giving his life that the new generation may live 
with him in the Kingdom of Heaven which is the coming age. 

We should adopt the explanation of the planet Uranus as 
used in the Bible and not use the terms as used in astrological 
books. Everyone knows the terms as applied to the character 
of Jesus, which is the character of Uranus, a Lord and Savior^ 



28 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

^reat, good, loving, and willing to die for a principle. Take the 
life of Jesus and the teachings of the Christian Churches as a 
whole, which is the character and life work of Uranus. Let it 
be understood that he kills in order to build up anew, and that 
he destroys for the sake of doing good. 

Saturn is what the astrological books say he is, Saturn is 
Satan and we find in the Bible that Satan is not always bad but 
he can adapt himself to the place he is in. If he is in a good 
place he is good and beneficent. But in a dark place or with bad 
elements he is bad. Saturn's worst place is in the house of 
Leo, in the north, which is his home, but he does not have to 
act bad even at home in hell. Always remember that Saturn 
is Satan wherever he is. Satan is now with the Holy Ghost, 
Neptune, in Leo, killing nations, churches and religion. 

The planet Neptune is not explained in astrological books 
and for good reasons. She has not been known as a planet of 
our solar system very long and there are no books published 
which tell of her nature. Neptune is the "Holy Ghost'' of old. 
!She works on theories and arguments. She is the spirit of prin- 
ciple, which is being promulgated. If her teachings are good 
she must get it from the Lord, Uranus, otherwise from Saturn. 
She is killed with Saturn every one thousand years. 

Neptune becomes a prophet after leaving the company of 
Saturn. She was the many prophets of old. The spirit of 
Neptune will be good in the New Age. The Holy Spirit will 
manifest that Jesus is not dead but that the Lord now rules in 
heaven. After 1921, when the Lord or Uranus enters the new- 
kingdom all of the people (or degrees) of the old generation 
will have passed away. The Lord of Heaven will manifest 
through the Holy Spirit that Christ lives, that he is risen from 
the dead and that his kingdom is of the new heaven and the 
new earth. This is the dispensation spoken of by later day 
■churches. It is the glorious age which begins in 1921. 

Before going further we will find out "why." God's days 
-or years are a thousand days or years with the Lord. 

Uranus makes his circuit around the sun in nearly eighty- 
four years. He makes twelve revolutions in one thousand and 
eight years, which means Uranus is in the house of Aquarius 
•every one thousand years. He is also in the same house every 
five hundred years, or six revolutions of eighty-four years each, 
which makes five hundred years. 

It takes one hundred and sixty-four years for Neptune to 



Part I— Chapter 6. 29 

make a revolution around the sun. Neptune makes six revolu- 
tions in nine hundred and eighty-four years and three revolu- 
tions in four hundred and ninety-two , years. 

This shows that Neptune returns to the same place in the 
heavens every one thousand years. When Uranus is in Aquar- 
ius every one thousand years, is the time when Neptune is in 
Leo. This holds good also for every five hundred years, but 
at no other periods. That is, Uranus and Neptune are in op- 
position every five hundred years at the end of all cycles. 

Saturn makes his revolution in nearly thirty years and 
thirty-three revolutions brings him in Leo, when he will be in 
conjunction with Neptune within thirty years, of the one 
thousand-year period. This means that Saturn and Neptune 
will be in the house of Leo every one thousand years when the 
Lord of Heaven is in Aquarius. This is the time spoken of in 
the Bible when Satan is to be let loose for a short time. It 
depends on the houses how much damage Satan can do. If he 
is in the middle of the house or cycle he does not destroy as 
much, but if it is when he changes from one house or cycle to 
another he will make war and destroy. We realize that God's 
days are as a year or a thousand years, half a day as five hun- 
dred years. 'We find that in the time as history has recorded 
events, a change takes place in religious organizations every 
five hundred years. This record compares favorably with the. 
ages as given in Bible history. The cycle of Uranus is 100& 
years and is as one day with the Lord. 

Chapter 6. 
the lost law. 

The Bible contains a knowledge of the universe which is 
lost to the human race, and as we have obtained the key to this 
study we feel it is our duty to let others know of this law. The 
fact is that the Bible was written by astrologers and is a text 
book of heaven. 

The Bible contains a description of the globular formation 
of the earth, and the dividing of the entire surface of the earth 
into degrees of longitude and latitude in the same manner as is 
used today. It describes the great solar system and the earth's 
relation to the three great planets Uranus, Neptune and Saturn ; 
illustrating the principle of creation and the philosophy of life. 
The earth's circuit in its orbit around the sun demonstrates 



30 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

the principle that the universe is operated in cycles of time, 
having a beginning and an ending within a measured space. 
The revolution of the earth on its axis eastward produces a con- 
dition whereby all life moves westward around the earth in a 
given time and space. 

The Bible demonstrates that the laws of the universe apply 
to the entire creation and the laws of the heavens are also the 
laws of the earth. 

The Bible illustrates a philosophy of life in the operation 
of the solar system; for by the earth, and the three planets are 
pictured the operating principles of the universe. The Bibie 
stories illustrating the patriarchs as human beings are really 
stories of the three great planets, Uranus, Neptune and Saturn. 
The names of these planets are changed with each cycle of time 
to correspond to the certain number of degrees of the earth of 
each location described. 

The laws of Moses, as described in the Bible, are the uni- 
versal laws which govern creation. The Jewish people had 
this law handed down to them and from them it has been passed 
to the Christian nations. 

The laws of Moses are the laws which govern the earth and 
the relation of the earth to the sun and the three planets in 
the heavens. These laws do not represent the history of one 
man's life, living in the flesh for a few years. The laws of 
Moses are the text book for the study of the sun and the three 
planets and describes how the planets will affect the earth. 
There is very little known at the present time about what these 
laws mean, even as seen from an astronomical point of view. 
Information of the Moon's time is about all that is left from the 
original laws of Moses, as a science The time of the earth has 
heen changed from 360 to 365 days for a year, and the rest of 
the law has been discovered by astronomers at great effort. 
The law as laid down by Moses represented by the planet 
Uranus is not a Jewish religion but a law of God for the people 
to follow and live by. From this it will be seen that the Laws 
of Moses are the laws of heaven and earth. The law spoken of 
in the Bible is the law of the heavens. It is the operation of our 
sun, moon and stars, in their respective orbits, and our solar 
system's operation in relation to other solar systems, con- 
stellations or centers. 

The fundamental principle of this law is applied to the 
entire creation. The system and measurement as applied to 



N 



Part I~Chapter 6. 31 

our earth in its relation to other planets are the. Laws of 
Moses. The heavens, with all their myriads of constellations 
and solar systems are measured to the second, minute and de- 
gree. The space in the heaven is as eternity, as there is no 
limit to space. The heavens represent eternal life and God is 
the power of the entire creation and is the universe. The law 
of the universe is the operation of all elements in cycles or 
circles of time and space. Each cycle of time or space has a 
beginning and an ending. 

The first principle of this material universe is that all 
elements are formed globular. The second principle is that 
all elements are formed dual or opposite to each other, as light 
and darkness; good and evil; male and female; spiritual and j 
material. The third principle is the dividing of the operating ' 
force of nature into four elements; fire, earth, air and water; 
and north, east, south and west. The fourth principle is the 
dividing of each of the main elements, force or power into 
twelve detailed characters, showing their nature and relation 
to the universe as a life-giving principle. > 

The entire universe is made globular and operated in ^ 
cycles. So is our earth made and operated on the same prin- 
ciple. The earth is divided and measured from north to south 
by degrees of latitude with the equator as the dividing line; 
west and east are measured by degrees of longitude with the 
dividing line known as Greenwich time. 

The earth moves in its orbit around the sun in a cycle of 
360 degrees (or days). The beginning and the ending of this 
360-degree cycle is measured from the time our earth enters 
the house of Aries on March 21st every year, the measurement 
being taken at Greenwich longitude. This is what the old Bible 
writers called the passover, and is in the precession of the 
equinoxes. 

The cycles begin and end at the first degree of Aries, but 
the great solar cycle begins and ends at the sixth degree of 
Pisces. 

It takes the earth one year of twelve months to pass 
through the twelve houses of the heavens. ^ 

It takes our solar system, which consists of the sun and | 
eight planets, 2160 years (or degrees) to pass through one ' 
house, and 25,920 years to make a complete cycle or circuit of 
the twelve houses in the great cycle. 

The beginning and ending of the cycle for the earth is at 



^ 



32 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

the beginning and ending of the first degrees of longitude west 
and east, known as Greenwich time. The moon's cycle cor- 
responds to the solar cycle, and begins and ends at the same 
time and place. 

The earth's cycle beginning March 21st is divided into two 
periods of six months each, from March 21st to September 23rd 
and from September 23rd to March 21st. The first period is 
from Aries to Libra, which is the north cycle when the earth's 
position to the sun is north of the equator and is the positive 
division of the earth. The second period of six months is the 
division from Libra to Aries, the southern or negative division. 

The dividing of the earth into time and space and into 
west and east is also figured from longitude Greenwich time. 
The degrees west of Greenwich to 180 degrees are one division 
and the other division is east from Greenwich to 180 degrees 
longitude completing the cycle. As the earth is divided north 
and south by the equator, so is it divided west and east into 
four quarters by the degrees of longitude from 1 to 180 degrees 
east and west. The west degrees of longitude from Greenwich 
represents the male principle called the Occident, and the east 
degrees, the female principle, which is termed the Orient. It 
takes the earth twelve months to travel in its orbit around 
the sun. Each month has 30 days (or degrees). The first 
month begins at the first degree of Aries on March 21st every 
year and the sixth month ends at 30 degrees Virgo. The 
second, or female division begins on September 23rd at the 
first degree of Libra, 180 degrees east of Greenwich and ends 
at Aries, March 21st, Greenwich time. 

The fundamental law of the universe is first the globular 
or rounded form of expression; second the male and female 
principle; the third the elements of nature, fire, earth, air and 
water; and fourth the dividing of space and time. 

The law or principle as here described and applied to the 
earth, is the law of the entire creation. It is the law upon 
which the sun, stars, planets and also the earth operate. 

It is also applied to countries, nations, forms of govern- 
ment and religion, as well as to man. When applied to man 
the head is the beginning and the feet the ending, with 180 
degrees in the solar plexus. Man is divided into upper and 
lower portions; right and left; corresponding to north and 
south, east and west. 

This principle is also expressed by the movements of the 



Part I— Chapter 6. 33 

moon, as a complete cycle or age. The moon's phases are full 
moon, half moon, and first and last quarters; the moon making 
twelve revolutions of 30 degrees each, in a cycle. 

The beginning of a 120-degree cycle or age, is the beginning 
of the measurement of tim.e and space, in longitude Greenwich 
time. The earth is now, in the year 1918, within three degrees 
of the end of the cycle and as we count one degree for each year, 
the new cycle will begin 1920-1921. The old Bible and ancient 
writers called this the passover and it was considered very im- 
portant. The Bible contains, as we know, a full description of 
what would take place at the time of this event. This is dealt 
with fully elsewhere. 

We have explained that the world is operated on a scien- 
tific principle and that the same law which governs this earth 
is the law of heaven. 

The movement of the heavenly bodies in space is in cycles 
of time, through a measured area and in a given locality. Each 
planet or star has a period or cycle of its own, governing the 
distance and location of its circuit. The sun and each planet 
represents a creative principle and demonstrates the operation 
of God's laws. As each star in the heavens represents a living 
principle or character of its own nature, so do the planets of 
our solar system represent a complete unit of a whole and part 
of God. 

In the Bible we find certain characters spoken of as human 
beings, these characters represent a period of time. They are 
spoken of as men who talk with God giving orders and advice. 
Their personality represents the houses of heaven. 

There is also another type of characters who represent or 
show the nature of the planets in relation to our earth, and are 
spoken of in such terms as, "The servants of God," "Prophets," 
"Son of God," and "The leaders of Israel," etc. Each of these 
characters are represented as an individual and correspond to 
the nature of the planet they represent. 



Part 2. 

THE AGES OF HEAVEN AND EARTH. 

Chapter 7. 

the heavens. 

The ancients divided the heavens into sections of four 
divisions, corresponding to north, east, south and west. The dif- 
ferent parts of the heavens were again divided into constella- 
tions, which are groups or clusters of stars, operating as solar 
systems. These groups are illustrated by animals such as a 
bear, bird, horse or snake, and by other symbols. The nature 




The Heavens. 

of the groups of stars correspond to the nature of the animals 
in illustrations. It was as necessary to name the clusters of 



36 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

stars and illustrate them in olden times as it is today and 
astronomers use the same illustrations now as the ancients did. 
The illustrations were used for the convenience of memorizing 
these groups. 

Regardless of the positions of the fixed stars or groups of 
stars in the heavens, the ancients divided heaven into twelve 
equal parts or spaces and called them houses or mansions. To 
each of these houses was attributed a peculiar characteristic of 
its own. Each house was named and illustrated by an animal 
or by some other symbol to correspond to the nature of the 
house. This division of the heavens is what we today call the 
twelve signs of the Zodiac. 

The ancients also knew that our solar system consisted of 
the sun and the seven planets, besides our earth; and that our 
solar system travels through the space of the heavens in sys- 
tematic and regular periods. 

The Bible shows that the ancients knew how long it would 
take the earth, moon and each of the planets to make the cir- 
cuit around the sun, and when the planets would be in certain 
parts of the heavens. 

After having divided the heavens into twelve divisions, 
each division being named, our solar system was then observed 
when it passed through the twelve houses. 

As the moon revolves around the earth, so do the seven 
planets and the earth revolve around the sun. The time re- 
quired for each to make a circuit depends on the distance the 
planets are from the sun. 

As the earth and the planets make their revolution around 
the sun, so does our solar system revolve around other centers 
or suns. It must be distinctly understood that the ancient 
writers knew that our sun was not considered to be a final 
center and that they did not worship the sun as a power or God, 
but that they knew of a higher power than our solar system 
which governs the suns and planets, which they called God. 

The movements of our solar system in the heavens becomes 
a matter of calculation, that is, the figuring out of the length 
of time that it takes the sun and each planet to make its revo- 
lution. Thus there becomes a period of time, a cycle or circle, 
for each. The measurements of the heavens and the movements 
of our solar system through space in circuits have been dem- 
onstrated to be a scientific fact and the beginning and the ending 
of all cycles must be at a given place in space. 



Part II — Chapter 7. 37 

The following explanation will show how the ancients fig- 
ured time and the periods of cycles, ages or generations: 

The heavens were divided into twelve divisions called houses, 
and these twelve divisions were again divided into two groups 
of six divisions each, thus making six northern and six southern 
houses. The point in the heavens where the sun appears to be> 
when it crosses the equator on its journey northward in March, 
is taken as a fixed point from which to count for both space and 
time and is called Aries. This passover, the sun's entering 
Aries, takes place in March, when the sun goes north; and in 
September, when the sun goes south. 

A further division of the heavens were made by dividing 
the heavens into two divisions from the center of the south 
division to the center of the north division, thus forming the 
east and west divisions. This gives the four cardinal points 
of the heavens calculated from the equator. 

This may not seem to be important to the present day 
student, but it is of ancient origin and the foundation of all 
Bible study. It must be considered, for thereby is shown that 
north, east, south and west become established localities. 

The space of the heaven which we call the twelve houses 
was calculated by the ancients to contain 360 degrees; each 
house, or one-twelfth division, containing 30 degrees, making 
360 degrees in the twelve houses. This constitutes practically 
all of the fundamental principles of the study of astronomy. 

We now come to the study of astrology and will show the 
method used by the ancient Bible writers and their system of 
applying this knowledge of the heavens to the earth, nations, 
and individuals. 

The heavens, which consist of twelve divisions, the sun and 
planets, were considered as a complete miniature universe. 
The ancient Bible writers saw in it all the elements of nature 
in every conceivable form. The universal condition as they saw 
it in the heavens was applied to the earth and to their local 
conditions. 

We are informed that the Arabians and the Egyptians 
were among the first to adopt this system, but unverified claims 
are made that India and China had this knowledge about the 
period of 3000 B. C. From calculations we are now able to 
make, this knowledge was known thousands of years ago, and 
every two thousand years it has been rediscovered, at the end 
of every 2000-year cycle. 



38 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

The Babylonians applied the condition of the heaven to 
Babylon. The Egyptians applied it to Egypt and so on. They 
established the four cardinal points at four cities or places 
within their country, corresponding to north, east, south and 
west. They applied the names of the houses of the heaven to 
the different parts of the country; the nature and location of 
the houses corresponding to the nature of the land, whether it 
be desert or fruitful; applications were also made to water or 
to mountainous country. The special places of interest such as 
cities, cross-roads and shrines of lakes and rivers were used 
to illustrate the constellations or fixed stars of the heavens. 

It will be observed that every tribe or nation, as then 
existing, consisted of twelve tribes. The country was also 
divided and named to correspond to the tribes. This principle 
of dividing the country and the naming of the people is best 
illustrated by the twelve tribes of Israel, so well known to all, 
which illustrate this idea completely. 

The next point to consider will be the generations or ages ; 
we may call them cycles, a lifetime or a term of years. 

In the early Bible history period called the pre-historic 
time, the cycle of 360 degrees or years was used. It was divided 
into twelve months or houses of 30 degrees or days each. This 
was changed during the dark age of our present era to the 
globular method, when the earth was known to revolve around 
the sun in 365 days of our calendar time. It may be said here 
that this changing of time from 360 to 365 days has brought on 
a conflict among Bible students. They knew that 360 degrees 
means Zodiacal years, but they have tried to prove that the 365- 
day period as well as the moon's periods correspond to Bible 
years, and fit the events of the Bible but they have failed. They 
have neglected to reason that at no time in the Bible is the 
sun's or moon's time of 365 days used. The 365-day period 
was established after the Bible was written, in the Christian 
era, and of no use in Bible study. 

The period of time spoken of in the Bible was calculated 
for 360 degrees or days, for this is for Zodiacal years and has 
reference to the houses or tribes. 

When the Bible says that so and so remained so long in 
this or that country, or that this or that person lived a certain 
length of time, the only figures to use are the 30 degrees or the 
360 degrees. This will positively give the time or age. For 
instance, a certain partiarch lived to be 960 years old ; by divid- 



Part II— Chapter 7. 39 

ing the 960 by 30 degrees gives 32 degrees or years; the time 
of this patriarch's age as a distance. 

If the student finds examples in the Bible where all the 
years or degrees are added together, he should use the 30 de- 
grees in figuring for the house and 360 degrees for a complete 
cycle. The rule will also apply where it is stated that a certain 
number of people were congregated at a given place. It means 
that they were so m.any degrees in that specified house in the 
heavens. The people represent the degrees. 

In order to review our statements concerning the degrees, 
time and space, we shall briefly show what each one contains. 
60 seconds to 1 prime minute; 60 prime minutes to 1 hour, or 
1 degree; 30 degrees to a house; 12 houses to a cycle. This 
gives 360 degrees as a basic number for a complete cycle. 90 
degrees is one-fourth of a cycle of 360 degrees; 120 degrees is 
one-third; 180 is one-half of 360 degrees. The circle of 360 
degrees is a complete cycle which is used for our earth and the 
planets in their circuit around the sun. 

CYCLES. 

The study of our solar system's great cycle is the study of 
the measurement of the heavens, and the measurements for the 
constellations and fixed stars. The solar system travels in the 
heavens within a given space in cycles of time, beginning with 
the point called the vernal equinox, in Pisces, which is the 
Meridian of the heavens. 

The great cycle is the measurement of space which our 
solar system passes through, consisting of 25,920°. This great 
period is divided into three cycles of 8,640° each, and this cycle 
is again subdivided into three lesser cycles or periods of time 
and corresponds to the degrees as measured around the earth, 
the great cycle of 8,640° corresponds to the earth's cycle of 
120° and is the period of time as figured in the Bible, as 72 
times 120 equals 8,640. 

The cycle of 2,880° corresponds to an age of 120°, a third 
of the Zodiacal circle, which contains 40° of 72 years each. 

The cycle of 2,160° is a twelfth part of a complete heavenly 
cycle and is also divided into an age of 30° of 72 years each, 
making 2,160°. 

The solar system complete cycle consists of 72 times 360, 
which equals 25,920°. 

The same rule applies to the measurement of time, space 



40 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

and degrees; that is, degrees of space or distance around the 
earth in miles is measured by the same rule as the measure- 
ments for hours, days, months and years. The terms .days, 
years, degrees, miles, etc., can be used interchangeably accord- 
ing to the requirements of any desired illustration. 

The following table of measurements will be found helpful : 
There are 30 days (degrees, miles) to the month; 60 s,econds to 
1 minute; 60 minutes to 1 hour; 1 hour also contains 360°; 
one-half hour contains 180° ; one-quarter hour 90° ; 1 cycle of 
the earth contains 360°; and 12 houses of 30° each. 

The sun's cycle corresponds to the distance around the 
earth, which is 25,920 degrees (miles). This space of 25,920 
degrees is divided into 72 divisions of 360 degrees each, that is, 
the earth's cycle is contained in the sun's cycle 72 times. 

Each of the 72-degree divisions is used as a unit, as 30 
degrees are used as a unit in figuring the earth's cycle. 

Thirty degrees are one-twelfth of the earth's cycle; 2,160 
degrees are one-twelfth of the sun's cycle. 

The 72 degrees are divided into units of time as follows: 
72 degrees equals 24 hours; 36 degrees equals 12 hours; 18 de- 
grees equals 6 hours; 9 degrees equals 3 hours; 41/2 degrees 
equals IV2 hours; and li/^ degrees equals 1/2 hour. 

Any student who is a little familiar w^ith the study will 
readily see the method used in the calculation of time and 
space. It takes the solar system nearly 26,000 years to make a 
complete revolution through the twelve houses of the heavens; 
so the earth is subject to the condition of each of the twelve 
houses during this period of revolution. The period of time 
that our solar system and earth remain in each house is 2,160 
years. This is an age or generation in itself. The solar system 
is at the present time passing out of the house of Pisces and 
entering the house of Aries (astrological terms) . The birth of 
a nation would be considered the beginning of the cycle of time 
for any particular nation, and the death of the nation is at the 
end of the cycle of time for the age. 

When the period of time is one solar cycle or one year 
of 360 degrees, the lesser cycle of 30 degrees is used in describ- 
ing details ; that is for describing individuals, families or cities. 
The same rule applies to the time of the moon's cycle. To ob- 
tain details of time, use the moon's period of time for one revo- 
lu^tion, which will show the time of the months, weeks, and 
days. 



Part 11— Chapter 7. 41 

It has been shown what the cycle of time is, and what it 
represents. We will now show how it affects each nation. 
This is best illustrated by the use of the watch or clock. The 
watch would represent the nation in question and the different 
periods of the time from one o'clock to twelve o'clock represent 
the different parts of the country. Hold the watch with the 
twelve o'clock figure to the south and you have a map of the 
nation with the twelve houses pictured before you at twelve 
o'clock that day. The movement of the hands of the watch is 
like the movement of the sun and moon in a complete circle. 
The movement of the sun is represented by each hour of 60 
minutes to each of the twelve hours, making 720 minutes for 
a complete cycle or 1440 minutes in 24 hours. The moon's 
action is like the single hour hand of 60 seconds to each cycle 
of 60 minutes, making 3600 seconds. This shows that time was 
figured to the second by the ancient students before a watch 
or clock was thought of. 

It will be observed that the Bible does not mention the sun 
and moon in connection with the planets, except for time and 
space. Time is also figured from the periods when the planet 
Uranus passes through the houses and is called the ages of the 
patriarchs. The twelve hours of the clock represent the same 
influence as the twelve houses of the heavens, that is, they rep- 
resent the nation or country in question. It is the map of the 
heaven which has been applied to a certain part of the earth. 
This is exactly what the ancient writers used in Bible history 
time. 

We now have explained a certain map or place from which 
to calculate time; the locations of north, east, south and west; 
the measuring of time, space and localities; and we see the 
nation or country as a picture in our mind. This gives only the 
location of the land and the people in question, and so far we 
have shown only the time and the place for consideration and 
not what is the cause for certain natural events which take 
place within this cycle or nation. We will show that the move- 
ments of the planets in the heaven affect the elements and pro- 
duce the condition as described on the earth. 

SIDERAL TIME. 

The years, as calculated in the Bible, are not figured by 
the same system as we figure years in the present age. All 
years and dates, as given in the Bible, are figured in cycles of 



42 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

360-degree ages, that is, the age is calculated in 360-degree 
cycles and called generations. The first great cycle is from 
Adam to the beginning of the Christian age. This is a period 
of time of 3960 years divided into cycles of 360-degree ages. 
The Christian age began at 40 B. C. and ends 2000 A. D. The 
method used is to divide the numbers of years as given by 360, 
and the figures left over are the number of degrees w^est from 
the dividing degree. ¥/e can illustrate this by taking 6000 
years and divide them by 360 and the result is 16 generations 
and 240 left over. This leaves us at 240 degrees west or 120 
degrees east at the end of Bible history time, which is at the 
end of the Apostle Paul's time. We next take 3960 years as 
the period for the old testament up to the beginning of the 
Roman age and divide it by 360, which leaves us at eleven gen- 
erations to the very degree. 

The cycle for the Christian age began at 40 B. C. and con- 
sists of 2040 years. We divide the 2040 by 360 and we get five 
generations with 240 degrees left over ; which is 240 degrees 
west. The Christian age includes the first 40 years of the 
Roman age, which miust be added to the Christian age, and 
this leaves us at 240 west or 120 degrees east at the end of 
Bible time calculated from 40 degrees east. 

The life of the Christian age ends at Greenwich in 1920. 
The spiritual life of Christianity is illustrated in the Apostle 
Paul and is for the new age, beginning in 1921 as the American 
age. This age extends over into Japan at 200 degrees west and 
terminates at the year 2000 A. D. of the calendar years. 

This is a very simple system and is the method used in all 
of the books of the Bible. The location of events, as described, 
can be calculated to the very degree of longitude within the 
area of 360 degrees around the earth. 

The Jewish calendar-year for 1920 is 5680 and if we add 
80 years we get 5760, which is the end of the cycle for the Jew- 
ish race. The Jewish year of 5760 corresponds to the year 2000 
of the Julian calendar time and is the end of Bible history. If 
we divide the Jewish time of 5760 by the cycle of 360 degrees 
we get sixteen circuits around the earth, which is the time of 
the history of the Jews. The Jewish age records sixteen gen- 
erations and corresponds to the Christian age of sixteen gener- 
ations. From this can be seen that the Jewish and the Chris- 
tian cycles of time originated from the same age and used the 
same method of calculating time. 



Part II — Chapter 8. 43 

Chapter 8. 
the houses of heaven. 

We will now explain what is meant by such Bible expres- 
sions as ''She was barren," ''Was a fruitful bow," "A pit of 
burning fire," 'In the lion's den," etc. These expressions show 
that the question or topic considered was of the nature of the 
house spoken of. The houses of the heavens have been divided 
and arranged so that every element and condition in heaven and 
on earth is expressed in a systematic and scientific manner. 
The names of the houses have been changed from one genera- 
tion to another, as will be shown by the names of the children 
of Adam, which were the names of the houses of the heavens. 
The names of the children of Noah, Abraham; even to the dis- 
ciples of Christ, were the names of the houses of the heavens. 
In other chapters will be found the names of some of the gen- 
erations which are self explanatory. The last time the names 
were changed was at the beginning of the present cycle, known 
as the Christian generation or age, when the names of the dis- 
ciples of Christ were used. We will now give the names of the 
houses of the heavens which are used at the present time by 
all nations. The names are used today in the same order as in 
the Bible. The names are: Aries, Taurus, Gemini, Cancer, 
Leo, Virgo, Libra, Scorpio, Sagitarius, Capricorn, Aquarius and 
Pisces. The first six houses are the northern houses the last 
six, from Libra to Pisces, are the southern houses. 

The following houses are of a masculine nature: Aries, 
Gemini, Leo, Libra, Sagitarius, and Aquarius. The feminine 
houses are: Taurus, Cancer, Virgo, Scorpio, Capricorn and 
Pisces. 

The houses of a fiery nature are: Aries, Leo, Sagitarius. 
The houses of earthy nature are: Taurus, Virgo, Capri- 
corn. The houses of airy nature are : Gimini, Libra, Aquarius, 
The houses of watery nature are: Cancer, Scorpio, Pisces. 
The Cardinal houses are the movable places representing the 
north, east, south and west, and are named Aries, Cancer, 
Libra, Capricorn. 

Because of the earths peculiar revolution on its axis, 
which causes the distance or period of time to be longer in one 
house than in another, there are houses of shorter and longer 
ascensions. In some of the Bible stories are illustrated the 
action of the houses and represented as human beings. Some 



44 



Key to Bible and Heaven, 



of the people die earlier than others or in other instances some 
were killed before others. This early death is caused by the 
variation of longer or shorter ascension. The short ascension 
houses are: Capricorn, Aquarius, Pisces, Aries, Taurus and 
Gemini. The houses of the long ascension are: Cancer, Leo, 
Virgo, Libra, Scorpio and Sagitarius. The fruitful houses are: 
Cancer, Scorpio and Pisces. The barren houses are: Gemini, 
Leo and Virgo. The double-bodied houses are: Gemini, Can- 
cer, Libra, Aquarius, Pisces and the first half of Sagitarius. 
The equinoctial houses are the houses on the equator: Cancer, 
and Capricorn. The tropical houses are the houses which 
strike the north and south cardinal points. They are Aries and 
Libra. 




Houses in the Heavens. 



We have spoken elsewhere of the different sections of the 
heaven being illustrated to show the four elements of nature. 



Part II— Chapter 8. 45 

There are four distinct elements spoken of and they consist of 
the basic principle for all material life. Through these four 
elements God maintains the universe. They are the tools God 
uses in expressing his will in heaven as v^ell as on earth. The 
Bible says, "as it is in heaven so is it on earth.'* The four ele- 
ments are fire, earth, air and water. The houses of heaven 
have been divided to represent the four elements which can^ 
readily be seen from illustration. 

ANGELS AND ANGLES. 

It is not generally understood what the angels of heaven 
are. They are supposed to be living beings, flying from one 
end of the universe to another, carrying messages. They are 
the servants of God, as his message bearers, always bringing: 
the message given them. There are good angels and there are 
bad angels, depending upon those who send the message and 
where it is to be delivered. In order to be brief, we will say 
that the angels as spoken of in the Bible are really the different 
distances of the heavens measured in angles of degrees. Angel 
is the root word for angle. An angle may be a distance of 60' 
degrees (two houses) or it may be 90 degrees (three houses) 
or 120 degrees (four houses) or 180 degrees (six houses) apart.. 

We will now show the nature of the message which the 
angles or aspects of heaven carry. A good angel or angle i& 
the one which is in a good location or aspect and this carries 
a good message, and the bad angels represent the bad angles.. 
If a message is carried from the Savior or Lord of heaven, it 
is good, but if from Satan, a bad angle, it is an evil angel. A 
conjunction or association with the Savior is good, but a con-^ 
junction with Satan is bad. 

A parallel aspect is an aspect in a line with either a good 
or a bad planet or place. The aspect called the triangle, or 
trine, has always been a powerful aspect. It occurs when the 
heavens are divided into three parts of 120 degrees each. The 
triangle represents the trinity of nature, which is completeness. 
It obtains power from three parts of the universe and is a good 
angle. Sextile (60-degree angle, half of a triangle) has power 
in the nature of the triangle but its importance is not so great. 
Opposition represents a contrary nature, as two or more planets 
placed opposite each other. If the Savior and Satan are op- 
posed to each other, there will be conflict or war, which is detri- 
mental to both. Square is 90 degrees or three houses apart, and 



46 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

is half the distance of the angle of opposition. It is a bad mes- 
senger. There are many other messengers, or angles to con- 
sider, but these are the principal ones. 

There are houses of fire, earth, air and water, that is, the 
nature of the house represents the element spoken of. So when 
it is said that a certain party is in a hot place, or in a furnace 
of fire, he is in a fiery house. The same explanation is to be 
applied to the watery houses, as in the expressions of walking 
or traveling on the water, speaking of drinking feasts and floods. 
When reference is made to the airy houses, such expressions as 
the following are used: ''they went up into the mountains," 
''a mountainous country," or a "high elevation." When earthy 
houses were considered the Bible speaks of peoples or nations 
having a material turn of mind, seeking earthly pleasures as 
opposed to spiritual desires. The same rule is used when the 
term barren or fruitful is spoken of. It means a barren place 
or person. 

This method of expressing the nature of the house, and the 
time and location of the event, is best illustrated by the story 
in the Bible about Jesus, when he was in the wilderness for 
forty days and tempted by Satan. Jesus was Uranus ; Satan was 
Saturn, and the forty days represent the forty degree cycle. 
These planets were in bad aspect at the time, as Jesus was fast- 
ing, showing that he was in a barren house. These planets 
finally separated in the mountains; the mountains represent an 
airy house. Saturn passed Uranus for Saturn is quicker in 
motion than Uranus. 

The Bible mentions the grouping of the houses of the heav- 
ens into four groups of three houses to a group. These divisions 
are very interesting and are also important. First, Aries rep- 
resents the head, and Pisces the feet of man, and the rest of the 
houses represent his body. This is shown in illustrations else- 
where. 

Besides the grouping of the houses to represent the four 
principles of man, the houses also represent time, or an age. A 
complete generation or age is represented by man from his head 
to his feet ; or by the twelve houses of the heavens from Aries 
to Pisces. The beginning of the age or generation is at the head 
and the ending of the cycle or generation is at Pisces, the feet. 

The method of calculating time has been shown elsewhere 
and it should be remembered that time and space are measured 
by the same method. A good illustration of this system, as 



Part II — Chapter 8. 



47 



shown in the Bible, is the well-known story of Nebuchadnezar's 
dream. He had a dream of a great image of a man who had a 
head of gold, breasts and arms of silver, belly and thighs of 
brass, legs of iron, and feet of iron and clay. The Seventh Day 
Adventist Church has solved the problem of figuring time ac- 
cording to the Bible method of measuring an age. The Bible 
says that the image from head to feet represents a period of 
time of 2300 years; the beginning of the period being repre- 
sented by the head of the image and the ending of the period 
being represented by the feet of the image. Each of the four 
parts of the man, as the dream illustrates, is a group of three 
houses, or 90 degrees. It says it is a period of 2300 years, which 
is more than a cycle of four groups. We find the fifth division 
included in the age of iron with the feet of iron and clay. The 
dream simply means this: that there are four full groups of 



Anes. Head and Face. 



Gemini 
The Arms 

Leo 

flhe Heart 

The Reins 

Sag^ittarius 
The Thighs 



Aquarius 
The Legs 




Taurus 

The ISteck 

Cancer 
The Breast 

Virgo 

The Bowels 

Scorpio 
The Secrets 

Capricprnus 
The Knees 



Pisces. The Feet. 



Man as a Universe. 



years, each consisting of three houses of 180 years, making 540 
years to each of the four groups ; gold, silver, brass and iron. 
This gives 2160 years but as the feet and toes of clay were added 
to the age of iron, we will add two degrees of 144 years to the 



48 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

four main elements making it 2304 years in all to the end of 
this age. 

The chapters of Daniel and Revelations have been explained 
correctly by the modern Bible students and the books published 
by them v^ill be of great help in studying the period of time. The 
reason why their period of time is correct is that they believe 
in an individual Savior who is to come to this earth at the end 
of the present age. It has been proved that the Seventh Day 
Adventists were right when they figured that the ''Lord of 
Heaven," or as is termed, a ''Son of God,'' would "enter 
into," or be in "his home" at the end of this age. 

February 1st, 1912, the "Lord of Heaven" and "Savior" 
entered his own house, which is the house of Aquarius. He re- 
mains in this house for seven years, which is from 1912 to 1920. 
If the Seventh Day Adventists would change their belief from 
an individual God and come to realize that the Son of God they 
have been looking for is the planet Uranus, they need not fear 
or worry about the earths being destroyed. 

The end of time, or the age, or cycle, whether it be the end 
of a 30 degree, 360 degree or the end of the great cycle of 6000 
years, is represented by the death of the inhabitants of a certain 
house, cycle or age. It is spoken of in many ways, such as being 
killed by fire or water, but it is always according to the house 
Saturn is in. The strong terms used to show the end of the age 
was : "The temple would be utterly destroyed and not one re- 
main of the old generations." It is stated that at the end of 
the present age that heaven and earth would be destroyed and, 
"a new heaven and a new earth created." It is also written in 
the Bible how many people would enter the new kingdom, that 
144,000 in all would be allowed to enter into the new dispensa- 
tion and live with God. The 144,000 who enter the new age, are 
the population of the twelve houses. This 144,000 people repre- 
sent the smaller and greater cycles in the cycles of heaven and 
earth. In the year 1921, the new heaven and earth begin as a 
new age or cycle, with two degrees of 72 years each making 144 
years; representing the tribes as the population of the United 
States. This illustrates that the new generation will consist of 
144,000. 

As the cycle of time has to die before the new generation 
can begin, and as death causes pain and suffering, as does also 
the process of being born again or made new; so does the earth 



Part Il—Chapte?' 9. 49^ 

and its population suffer from the terrible condition produced 
at the end of the cycle. 

The Bible writers knew of this law for they wrote that at 
the end of the present generation great tribulation and suffering 
would take place. It is written in several places in the Bible 
that extremely troublesome times would take place. The 
world's war is the expression of the suffering which was to 
take place. It is the manifestation of a dying generation. It 
is the crucifying of Christianity. It is the execution of Moham- 
medanism and Buddhism, including materialism, monarchismi 
and inherited governmental power. Much could be said regard- 
ing the dying of the old age, and also the beginning of the new 
age, but as the Bible explains it in detail, it will not be neces- 
sary. 

Christ said that he had to be crucified and die but that he 
would raise from the dead in three days, that is, Christ as an 
age is crucified in 1918 and on the third day (year) he will 
raise which represents the beginning of a new era of peace in 
1921. 

Chapter 9. 

the nature of the houses. 

When figuring space or time of the heavens, it should be 
remembered that an age, or cycle, is complete in itself, whether 
the period is 30 degrees or any division of the cycle of 360 de- 
grees ; or if it be part of the great heavenly cycle. 

An age consists of a period of time from birth to death; 
whatever length of time the cycle may be. When an age, or 
house dies, it means that time has passed through the degrees 
of the house, when the house is killed, or dies, as the case may 
be. 

The Bible divides the cycle in all instances into four main 
divisions, which correspond to the four cardinal points in the 
heavens as north, east, south and west. The houses that occupy 
these positions for that special age, now being considered, are 
the ruling houses, that is, they represent the government, people, 
or the man, who would rule that particular age. 

The houses of the cardinal points east, and west, begin and 
end at the same time, and those north and south at the same 
time. These houses that occupy the east quarters rule first, the 
western last. 



50 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

The southern house represents the man, who takes his 
orders from God and issues them to the rest of the children of 
the tribe and is the leader, called Tetrarchs. 

The houses of the heaven have had their names changed 
with each generation. Each house has been illustrated as ani- 
mals or other symbolic signs, corresponding to the nature of 
the houses. It is a very singular incident that some of these 
illustrations should have maintained the same form during all 
the ages of the past; as the Sheep, the Bull, the Goat, the Lion, 
the Scorpion, the Fishes and the Virgin. The Bible uses these 
names from beginning to end and it is one of the best systems 
to use, in order to know what house or people is referred to. A 
very important point to consider is that when the old house dies 
the next takes its place, as when the house of Pisces ends Aries 
begins, for it is said, "the first should be last and the last first." 

It is written in very plain language in the Bible that at 
the time when the change takes place from one house or genera- 
tion to another that it is time for great events. The old Bible 
writers figured out the time of the end and explained what would 
take place. They said that the date of the time of the end would 
not be known, but when the great destruction took place it would 
be a sign of the time of the end. A detailed description is given 
of what houses would occupy the four cardinal points, and where 
the planets would be at this time. 

The four corners of the earth were represented as a Man, 
Eagle, Lion and Bull. It is easy to look up the old charts and 
see what these illustrations stand for. The "Man" is the house 
of "Aquirius," the water-carrier; the "Eagle" represented for- 
merly by the Scorpion is the house of "Scorpio ;" the "Lion" 
is the house of "Leo ;" and the "Bull" is the house of "Taurus." 

The new generation begins with the first degrees of these 
houses at the four corners. It is said that the Man shall occupy 
the position of the heavens in the south ; the Eagle in the east ; 
the Lion and the Bull in positions opposite to these, or, as it is 
said in his proper place. 

Realizing the position of the houses of heaven and knowing 
the generations or houses which are dying, and seeing the new 
houses and being familiar with the nature of them, it becomes 
easy to explain what the new generation or age will be. 

Animals of all descriptions have been used to illustrate 
certain ages or periods of time. The book of Daniel describes 



Part II— -Chapter 9 51 

the different forms of government by four beasts each of a dif- 
ferent nature according to the time they represent. Each animal 
represents the four quarters of 90 degrees each. 

CUSPS. 

When the writers of the Bible have used symbolic illustra- 
tions to show the houses at the four corners of the earth, at the 
same time they explained that the animal had either one or more 
wings, horns, claws, or had some marks beside the illustration 
in general. It is usually written that two angels, olive trees, or 
candlesticks stood on either side of the symbol, many times called 
a gate. These symbolic signs or marks are the two degrees of 
the house spoken of. When a lion is spoken of as having two 
wings on either side, the event spoken of would last for four de- 
grees. In the "Book of the Dead," four lines are running par- 
allel which means that there are two degrees in the old house and 
two degrees in the new house. These illustrations refer to only 
the period when time changed from one house to another in 
what is known as the cusps of the houses. It is to be under- 
stood that the marks or signs as placed beside the animals de- 
scribed, mean degrees ; one, two, or more, for either side. There 
are seventy-two years to each degree in the great cycle; 36 
years to half degree and 144 years for the two degrees. It is 
very important to know what the degrees and years indicate, as 
will be seen by the history of the United States. The two de- 
grees, as illustrated as standing on either side of the cusps, have 
been figured in the Bible to consist of 72 years each. 

It is a surprising fact that all cycles consist of the same 
explanation, and that Bible students have refused to recognize it. 
What is meant by all cycles is that each age or cycle repeats 
itself, in Adam's generation as well as Abraham's and David's. 
The same years are Used, the same story, the same three char- 
acters, as the trinity of Uranus, Neptune and Saturn. 

From Adam^s birth to his death, 4004 to 3074, is 930 years. 
Jared was born 3544, and lived to 2582. Noah was born 2948 
and lived to 1998. The ark was built in 2469. The flood took 
place 2348. Abraham was born 1996 and died 1846. Moses was 
born in 1571 and died in 1450. Solomon was born in 1033 and 
died 975. David was born in 1085 and died in 1014. Nebuchad- 
nezzar was born in 607 and died in 562. 

From this it will be found that all the leading events took 
place at every 500 years. At every 1000 years the greater ruler 
had control, that is Adam, Noah, Abraham, Solomon, and Jesus. 



52 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

The above dates are taken from the Bible and this shows 
that the Bible is correct. 

The Bible gives us a very clear idea of the movement of the 
earth eastward, in fact the history as pictured in the Bible is the 
movement with the degrees westward. The capturing, slaying 
and utterly destroying of the entire population, when the chosen 
people moved to the west represent the destroying and killing 
of the degrees. It is written in the Bible that God had ordered 
the population to be destroyed in a certain section of the earth 
and so when our earth revolves to the corresponding degrees the 
population as degrees is killed. 

The tribes or classes of people spoken of in the Bible who 
lived on the earth, are degrees of the different divisions of the 
earth as illustrated in the twelve houses of the Zodiac. 

The principal points to be considered are that the age of 
the cycle is degrees and years, and that the degrees are used to 
figure time. 

Chapter 10. * 

houses and tribes. 

The Bible describes the twelve houses as the twelve children 
of the patriarchs when a reference is made to earth conditions, 
but when the Bible refers to a condition in the heavens, the 
houses are called mansions or heavenly homes. These houses of 
the heavens and the tribes on earth illustrate the nature, charac- 
ter, disposition and temperament which these twelve divisions of 
heaven represent. Each tribe or house represents a given trait 
of character and from this character a certain influence or con- 
dition is produced. The ancients indicated the nature of the 
twelve divisions of the heavens by illustrating them as a lion, 
sheep, bull, or goat, etc. The principle or nature of the illustra- 
tion represents the nature of that part of the heaven and also 
of earth. There are forty-eight constellations or solar systems 
in the heavens; the nature of the different constellations cor- 
respond to the nature of the houses in the heavens where the 
constellation is located. From this it will be seen that there is a 
creative principle involved extending throughout the entire uni- 
verse. This creative principle or influence, described as the 
nature of the house, can be demonstrated by the house of the 
lion. This animal produces an environment of fear and anxiety, 
for the nature of the beast is wild, brutish, cruel and destruc- 
tive toward others. 



Part II— ^Chapter 10. 53 

We have copied the illustration of the twelve houses as used 
by the ancients and given the nature of the houses according to 
the description of pre-historic time. 

The dividing of the continents and nations marks the 
placing of God's children. A description is given of the sur- 
face of the earth and the condition the planets produce on that 
given locality for the time described. The earth is described 
as globular and divided into spaces by a cycle of 360 degrees; 
the different subdivisions of this cycle are divided into twelve 
parts and are called the twelve tribes of Israel and are the 
twelve houses of the Zodiac. 

It should be remembered that the Christian Bible is copied 
from the Hebrew Talmud, and that the Jewish names as used 
in the Bible only prove that the Talmud was transcribed by 
and for the Jews. The Egyptians who built the Pyramids used 
the names and illustrations for the twelve houses and the three 
planets, which appealed to them. The book of Mormon de- 
scribes the twelve houses and gives entirely different names 
than those given in the Bible. From this will be seen that the 
names as given and the illustrations as spoken of in the Bible 
represent the descriptive characters given of the twelve tribes 
of Israel. 

The nature and character of the tribes as used in the Bible 
is shown when a certain person speaks to his own or to other 
tribes, expressing an opinion or describing others. The chil- 
dren of the patriarchs and the disciples of Jesus correspond to 
the twelve tribes of Israel and are usually given in the regular 
order, the same as today we place the twelve months of the 
year. 

At the time of the end of the world the children of Israel 
are described as the European Nations; the twelve nations of 
Europe being described as the twelve tribes of Israel. These 
same nations, as tribes, are again described in other books of 
the Bible as the disciples of Jesus. From this comparative illus- 
tration can be seen, that the dividing of the cycle of 360 de- 
grees into twelve parts is the describing of the country, nation, 
or people for that particular time and place. The description 
and calculation of time and space for this cycle of 360 degrees 
are termed the Laws of Moses and are the contents of the 
books of Moses. 

The nature of the illustrations as given in the houses of 
heaven is applied literally to the earth, nations, races or sec- 
tions of the country and also to man as an individual. 



54 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

When we say that the character of the land or nation and 
the nature of the country is described as a tribe, nations and 
as man, it means that the formation of the country must cor- 
respond to the ilkistration as given in the Bible, and when the 
same illustration is applied to a human being his nature and 
traits of character must also correspond to the description as 
given of the tribe. In the first place all nations have a national 
trait of character which the individual represents. The forma- 
tion of the land and the country can readily be illustrated by 
Scandinavia, which is described as the twins of the house of 
Gemini; an airy, double house. The country (Norway-Sweden) 
is dual in nature and divided by mountains which represent 
the air. Not only have the people a dual nature, but also their 
government and religion. Holland, Belgium, and Denmark 
are illustrated as a crab and are given the nature of the breast 
of woman, and is the house of Cancer, a watery, double house. 
The formation of these countries are low and swampy, drained 
by canals and irrigation ditches; the nature of the crab is 
double and his habitation is in a low country by the ocean. 
From this comparative illustration can be seen the method 
used by the Bible writers to describe a nation or a given loca- 
tion as well as the people. 

The earth has been described in the same manner as the 
nations; for the distance around the earth has been calculated 
in cycles of time and called the life of the patriarchs. The be- 
ginning of the cycle of time of the earth is at Greenwich going 
westward, the first 120 degrees represents the house of Aries, 
the ram, and is illustrated as the head of man. The second 
cycle is from 120 degrees west to 120 degrees east and cor- 
responds to Taurus the Bull. The third cycle ends at Green- 
wich and is represented by the Twins, Gemini, and is from 120 
degrees east and includes Asia and Europe, as twins. The 
fourth cycle is from Greenwich to 120 degrees west and is rep- 
resented by Cancer. A complete cycle is measured by the dis- 
tance of the twelve houses around the earth four times, each 
revolution consisting of three divisions of 120 degrees. 

Thus the earth is divided into houses beginning with 
Greenwich and ending with Pisces, illustrated as the feet of 
man and is the last house and cycle. 

In the New World as described in Revelations 21 : 18 to 20 ; 
the names of gems or precious stones are used instead of the 
names of the twelve tribes of Israel, and represent the United 
States. 



Part Il—Chavter 11. 55 

The comparative descriptive chart called "God's Twelves- 
illustrates the nature and meaning of the tv^elve divisions as 
given in the Bible. It names the generations of Adam, the 
disciples of Christ, the tribes of Israel, the nations of Europe, 
the signs of the Zodiac, parts of man as a universe, the houses 
of heaven, the months of the year, and the gems or precious 
stones. 

The Ecliptic circle of the sun is represented in the circuit 
of Uranus on earth and located at 36 degrees North latitude. 
The Bible described a given region or locality from -which the 
north and south is divided and we find that the 36th degree 
north corresponds to the division as described. It is- a peculiar 
fact, but nature has made this degree a feature of demarcation 
for Asia, Europe and the United States. 

. The first story of dividing north from south described in 
the Bible is that of Cain and* Abel in the United States. The 
next age is the dividing of Asia and Europe between Jacob 
and Esau representing the twin brothers. The north is illus- 
trated in Jacob and the south in Esau, who later were called 
Edom and Ishmael. 

The 24 degrees from 30 degrees to 54 degrees latitude 
north are referred to in many places in the Bible as the twenty- 
four elders. In Revelations 4:4 "and round about the throne 
were four and twenty seats ; and upon the seats I saw four and 
twenty elders sitting, clothed in white raiment ; and they had 
on their heads crowns of gold. 

Chapter 11. 
the finished mystery. 

It is a fact that the Bible was written by astrologers and 
that the entire history as described there is the study of astrol- 
ogy. We will continue to prove by the Bible that the Laws of 
Moses are the laws of the universe, as applied in the study 
called astrology. 

The new age which begins in 1921, is caused by the earth's 
passing out of the old cycle, the house of Pisces, into the house 
of Aries, thereby beginning a new cycle. The cycles of the 
planets and of the earth begin with Aries at Greenwich time 
going westward at the rate of 72 years to the degrees for the 
great cycle, and one year for each degree for the earth cycle. 

The sun and moon cause an effect upon the earth which 
causes the seasons of the year. The constellations in their turn 



56 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

affect the earth to a greater extent and produce the conditions 
on the sun, which the sun and moon produce on the earth. The 
planets Uranus, Neptune and Saturn reflect this influence and 
affect our earth the most, in fact control the earth. The posi- 
tion these three planets hold to the sun and to the earth affect 
the physical condition of the earth itself. 

The circuit of Uranus around the sun corresponds to the 
circuit of our earth around the sun. A belt of 24 degrees lati- 
tude around the earth corresponds to the circuit of Uranus. 
The movement of the planets in the heavens corresponds to this 
very narrow space on the earth. The location of the planets 
in the heavens at the present time is the best proof of what 
effect the planets have on the earth. Uranus was in opposition 
to Saturn in Aquarius, the house opposite Leo. Neptune is 
also in the house of Leo, and the location in the heavens cor- 
responds to the location of the present war. As Uranus and 
Saturn reach the point of perfect opposition and parallel, Oct- 
ober 1st, 1918, the war reaches its climax at that time. 

The earth's position in 1918 is nearly 3 degrees east longi- 
tude. The earth's motion will cause it to progress one degree 
per year and reach the dividing line in 1921. This is the be- 
ginning of the new age at 121 degrees west. 

The belt of 24 degrees width going around the earth is 
the zon€ of Uranus and is the center of the earth's population 
and civilization and is the temperate zone of the globe. As the 
earth revolves eastward and the degrees of longitude calcu- 
lated westward, so also do both population and civilization go 
westward. 

The cycle of Uranus consists of 1000 years in the great 
cycle and a space in heaven and on the earth is calculated for 
each 1000 years. Uranus makes twelve revolutions of 84 years 
in 1008 years. This is one of God's days. 

The Uranian age of 84 years can easily be compared to 
Bible time, as figured for the time of Alexander the Great at 
336 B. C. when he went out of Europe into Asia and began to 
lay waste the Persian Empire. Take 336 years and divide by 
84, this gives four, which represents the four trips that Uranus 
makes in 336 years. This is one-third of the cycle of 1008 
years. 

Take the forty-year period. The first book of Maccabees 
counts forty years. From 176 B. C. when Antiochus Epiphanes 
ruled as king in Syria, to 136 B. C. when Ptolemeus murdered 



Part II— Chapter 11. 57 

Simeon, the high priest, is 40 years, or a cycle of the Persian 
Empire of 40 degrees. 

The 70-year period can be found from 130 B. C. when 
John Hircanus took Shecham and demolished the temple, to 60 
E. C. when Jerusalem was taken by Pompey and the Jews be- 
came subject to the Romans. 

The last 40-year period as demonstrated in the B. C. time 
€f the Bible is at 40 B. C. Here begins the Empire of the 
Homans when Julius Caesar won over Pompey at the battle of 
Pharsalia and became dictator. 

It will be found that the period which corresponds to 
Nebuchadnezzar's time also corresponds to Buddha's age. The 
iistory of the Asiatic races is the same as that of the European. 
We can go back 6000 years in their age and find a similar his- 
tory. The beginning of the Mohammedan religion was in the 
sixth century and it will be found that the 84-year period will 
divide the reformation of Mohammedanism into the correct 
cycles. 

I The cycle of time for the Christian age and all others, is 
ihe 84-year cycle, for a reformation has taken place every 500 
Jears. However, the life of Christ is so complete that a gen- 
eral outline is unnecessary. In figuring ' time for Bible ages 
ise a day for a year and a year for a century. 

The three divisions of the earth of 120 degrees each repre- 
sent the three continents of Europe, Asia and America. A 
Ibroscope is set up for each division as a whole, and for each 
nation as a lesser cycle within the greater. This can be illus- 
trated in the cycle as written for Asia-Europe of 120 degrees. 
First the country is illustrated as twin brothers, or double 
period, and divided at 60 degrees east. The children of the 
tA^in brothers are the nations of Asia and Europe. The length 
o:^life for the different ages depends on the size of the country 
asla nation. 

1 The distance of Asia is from 120 degrees east to 60 degrees 
am 30 degrees east. This distance was divided into five ages 
ani called the five races. The distance of Europe was calcu- 
lated after the age of Asia and was divided into seven races. 
Th^se two divisions of five and seven races later become the 
tw^ve nations of Europe and represent the twelve tribes of 
Isr^l. 

lEach age, or part of the earth, is calculated to rule a given 
length of time and has been termed a lifetime of a given man. 



58 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

or a period of years for an empire. The length of the age is 72 
years for each degree as represented by the nation. 

The time as an age for Europe has been divided into 30 
and 40-degree ages; which also represents the 70 degrees 
across the Atlantic Ocean. Previous to the time for Europe 
the dividing degrees between 30 and 60 degrees east, ruled. 
This age was a dividing cycle of time between Asia and Europe 
and was last called the Pompey Age, at 63 B. C. This distanca 
represents the house of Aquarius. 

At the end of each cycle a final destruction of the nations 
and age takes place. The western and younger nations become 
the power of the age and rule according to the size of the coun- 
try east* and west. This can be illustrated from the Bible in 
the ages as given in the Romans, Maccabeans, Syrians, Egypt- 
ians and Macedonians to the Persians, in the time of Alexander 
the Great. 

A given distance of the earth was illustrated as a horoscope, 
which means, that this part of the earth is named according 
to the houses in the heaven and calculated accordingly. The 
influence, as described, which the planets produce when passing 
in the twelve houses is applied to the nature of the country and 
nation. The law explaining this influence is called the '*Lawi 
of Moses." 

We will describe the system used in giving the nature of 
the country as a house. This can best be illustrated by the 
house of Aquarius, as a water-carrier and as a man having a 
writer's ink-horn by his side. This house represents Switzer- 
land, who carries water to the other nations in the rivers which 
run from the Alps. He is described as a man clothed in linen 
with a writer's ink-horn by his side, which is the snow on tie 
mountains and the ink-horn is the water in the rivers. 

The house of Aquarius is the home of the two planets 
Uranus and Neptune, and described in the Bible as a hdy 
mountain or temple. The twelve houses are arranged for efch 
age according to the nature of the country and is described as 
the nativity of the age. We will call attention to a pecular 
fact in connection with the study of the house of Aquarus. 
This house is described as a double, in the sense of an upper 
and a lower region. It also represents a philosophy of life 
demonstrating a spiritual and material existence, illustrasing 
a heavenly condition in the mountains and a hell or destrudive 
condition in the lower plains. 



Part II— Chapter 11. 59 

There are three holy mountains, one for each of the three 
great cycles of 120 degrees. The formation of the country 
at the three mountains of the ages is by nature made to repre- 
sent this upper and lower principle. In the United States Mt. 
Whitney is the holy mountain and Death Valley with the desert 
of Arizona, located within one-half degree of the mountain, 
represents the lower region or hell. In the cycle for Europe 
the Alps represent the holy mountain and Belgium and Alsace- 
Lorraine represent the lower or hell region, also called the 
burying ground of Golgatha. In Asia the Himalaya Moun- 
tains correspond to the holy mountain and the Plains of Thibet 
forming a pocket or hole in the mountains, represent the lower 
region. (The plains of Thibet were first described by Noah and 
called the plains of Shinar.) This principle of a heaven and 
hell condition on earth is described in all books of the Bible and 
given as the word of God, illustrating the philosophy of life. 

Each of the twelve houses represents a universal principle 
and is demonstrated in the nature of the characters described 
in the Bible. The principle of creation is illustrated in the 
house of Virgo as a mother of nations and is Turkey. Germany 
is the heart of Europe and this nation represents the heart of 
man. Spain and Portugal are described as the thigh of man, 
and are of a double nature. It is written in Gen. 49 :3 that 
Spain spoiled the map of Europe. Russia represents the knees 
and is illustrated as a goat in Capricorn. Greece is described 
as a good-looking woman, but barren. The reason for this is 
that there is no nation next to Greece west. Greece is Libra* 
a cardinal house. Austria-Hungary represents Scorpio, a 
double-sexed house of a destructive-creative nature. Belgium 
and Holland are described as a Crab with Denmark as the claw 
of the Crab. These nations are represented as a female prin- 
ciple and illustrated as the breasts of woman in the house of 
Cancer. Scandinavia is the house of Gemini and represents 
the arms of man. France and England represent the head 
and neck of man, as Aries and Taurus; illustrated as a sheep 
and a bull. As England and France are on the dividing line at 
Greenwich, so are these nations to be partly destroyed, as rep- 
resented in the degrees east and west of Greenwich. Italy 
represents the feet of man and the end of the age, illustrated 
in the house of Pisces. As Italy represents the end of the age, 
so will this nation be the last of all the nations of Europe to be 
destroyed. 



60 



Key to Bible and Heaven. 



> 
H 

a 
o 
o 



O 


T-H 


(M 


CO 


'^ 


»o 


CO 


1^^ 


00 


05 


o 

T— 1 


l-H 


T-H 


o 


S3 


2 

ft 
m 


O 


2 

a 


o 

T3 
o3 


CO 

d 


'o 

& 

-d 
O 


pq 


N 

03 
ft 
O 


0) 
CO 

03 

-d 
ft 
o 

m 

o 


1 
O 
03 

1-9 


H-> 

6 

< 


02 


1—1 

i 


o 

Ph 

< 




1— ( 

d 




CO 
bb 

d 


CO 
(M 

-(^ 
ft 

m 


CO 
o 

o 


> 
O 


l-H 

<6 

P 


O 

d 


05 
i-H 

42 

0) 


o 


GO 

<1 


02 

2 


'3 
O 


O 

d 

o 


o 


o 

bC 
> 


03 


o 
'ft 
o 

GO 


CO 

.a 

03 

"Sb 
m 


d 


CO 

•S 

03 

d 

< 


02 


el 






to 

a 

< 


CO 

03 

pq 


-^3 

o3 


xn 
o 


CO 

d 

1 


CO 

-4-3 

m 




CO 

0) 
ID 


CO 

be 


0) 
P>H 




1 


3 
« 


m 

d 


O 


d 
o 


d 


CO 

o 
02 


d 
o 

"ft <» 

02 W 


d 

o3 

a 

o 
pq 


O 

o 


d 

03 

a 

Ol 


02 

CO 


05 

'-+3 

!2; 


1 




o3 

d 

1 
o 


O Ij 


a 
o 


1 

d 


o 
0) 

o 




1 be 


03 

CO 


ID 
N 

02 <1 




QQ 




1 

03 


d 

0) 


o3 

rd 

o 

CO 

CO 

l-H 


41 

03 


1 


(-1 

CO 

<11 


d 

o3 

Q 


d 

d 


-d 

03 

o 


d 
o 

a ^ 
Mi-q 


_d 

03 

'd 


CO 

CO 




< 


1 0) 
CO -rt 

ll 


d 

rd 




a 

o3 

pq 


03 


CO 
03 

a 

O 

-d 


CO 

' d 
S ft 


0) 


r CO 

d <u 

1:2 

tj iH 

ODtSJ 


1 

-a «« 
d 02 

»-5 l-H 


OS 

d 
.2 

'-|3 
f-t 

§ 

o 


<1 


> 


d 

O 

1 




d 


d 

o3 

d 
O 


1 
03 


QJ 
o3 


o 
o 
d 


CO 

d 

43 


43 


a 


43 
03 




Part III. 

RECORDED HISTORY FOR 6000 YEARS. 
Chapter 12. 

beginning of history. 

The Bible description of the creation of the earth is really 
the description of the erection of a horoscope. It says: "in 
the beginning God created the earth," and it describes the uni- 
verse which was created. The description of creation as given 
in the Bible describes exactly the same process as used by 
astrologers, when setting up a horoscope to illustrate the prin- 
ciples of creation. The study of creation as illustrated in the 
Bible is applied to the earth as a whole; and the description of 
various parts of the earth forms the details of the study. The 
astrologers spoken of in the Bible were those who applied the 
same principles to the human race as they applied to the earth. 
From this it will be seen that the ancient Bible writers were 
astrologers and set up horoscopes for the different parts of 
the earth, according to the law which is described as the Laws 
of Moses. 

The Bible demonstrates the fact that the system which is 
used today in dividing the earth's surface into degrees of longi- 
tude and latitude, with Greenwich and the equator as centers, 
was used in pre-historic time. We take it for granted that the 
science of calculating in degrees is of ancient origin, and that 
the present generation is copying the old methods. In other 
chapters are given a detailed explanation of what the study of 
the heaven is and what the meanings of the different locations 
of the degrees are. 

The first three chapters of Genesis describe the creation 
of a universe in general; using the most common terms possi- 
ble, so that anyone knowing how to set up a figure will know 
what is meant by the terms used. The principle as illustrated 
in Adam and Eve is the earth as a whole and is the male and 
female complete universe. Adam, is the first born and repre- 
sents 180 degrees west of Greenwich, to the International Date 
Line. This includes the United States. Eve represents the 
other half of the earth, from Greenwich east, (Europe and 



62 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Asia). The next description given is of Noah as an age, show- 
ing the location of the Pacific Ocean. Noah crossed the Pacific 
Ocean in the ark, illustrating that, there was an ocean there 
and that the ark was a horoscope. The horoscope contained a 
representation of everything on the earth. The water period 
was 150 days on the earth, which means that Noah's cycle of 
time was 150 degrees. Noah's time began on the Pacific Coast 
at 120 degrees, and adding 150 degrees gives 270 degrees, 
which brings us to 90 degrees east, and is in the Himalaya 
Mountains in Thibet. 

Noah had three sons, Shem, Ham and Japheth. The de- 
scription of these sons is the first that is described as a division 
after the description given of the Garden of Eden. We find 
that the three sons of Noah correspond to the three central 
continents of Asia, Europe and America. Ham corresponds to 
America; Japheth to Europe and Shem to Asia. From this it 
will be seen that the dividing of the earth into continents, na- 
tions and races represents the children of each part of the 
earth. 

The period of Adam and Eve is in the beginning of time; 
from this we figure that Adam's age was from the beginning 
at Greenwich going west, including what is now the United 
States, and part of the ''Garden of Eden," where the first 
description is given of the earth as inhabited at the time of 
the beginning of the Bible history. 

The Bible does not describe the earth as a whole nor does 
it give a description of the population of the earth, but the 
description of the country is for a very small space in width 
in each cycle of time. Instead of describing the entire earth 
as a globe, a belt is described going around the earth from the 
24th to the 54th degree latitude north. This very narrow belt 
is located in the center of the most populated area of the earth 
and is the Temperate zone of the life regions of the world. 
Instead of using the equator as a center the principle of the 
equator is applied to the ecliptic belt of 18 degrees in width. 
To the best of our judgment the center which was used to 
divide north from south was at the 36th degree north latitude. 
The "Mason and Dixon Line" in the United States is at 36 de- 
grees and the Holy Mountains of California are in the same 
latitude, so we take it for granted that the 36th degree is the 
natural dividing line. The ancient Bible writers set up horo- 
scopes for a given space within this belt for each cycle of time 



Part III — Chapter 12. 



63 



for 6000 years. They began with Adam and figured from 
Greenwich time and space westward around the earth. The 
space around the earth was again divided into three divisions 
of 120 degrees each, making three ages of time for a complete 
cycle. The different cycles of time, as given in the Bible, rep- 
resent the setting up of horoscopes in rotation going west- 
ward around the earth for the different locations within the 
belt of 24 degrees. From this it will be seen that the Bible 
writers illustrate a place on the earth to calculate distance in 




Plate 5 — The Three Cycles. 

degrees in cycles of time. We now know what is meant by 
time, space and the place on the earth and the Bible says that: 
"as it is in the heavens so is it on earth." From this we can 
reason that a similar belt is figured in the heavens, and we 
know that the ancients illustrated the heavens in charts and 



64 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

applied the identical method of figuring space in the heaven 
as was done on the earth. 

The Bible describes the movements and influence of the 
three planets of Uranus, Neptune, and Saturn in their locality 
in the heavens and applies the conditions which existed in the 
heavens to the corresponding place on the earth. 

The heavens can be illustrated as a big wheel; and that 
each solar system is a wheel within wheels ; the planets and the 
earth are smaller wheels attached to the sun and each planet 
revolves on its axis in harmony with the larger wheels. When 
the big wheel is run in the heavens a condition is produced 
and this is reproduced on the smaller wheels, and is called the 
influence of the planets. 

The suns and planetary systems revolve on fixed axis 
within a given space, so also with our earth. The revolution 
of the earth on its axis corresponds to a wheel running on 
cog-wheels and fits in the cogs of the larger wheels, and there- 
by is a part of a greater machine run from a given center. As 
there is no vacant space in the universe, each wheel is affected 
by the conditions of the other wheels, so is this influence re- 
produced to all parts of creation. From this it will be seen 
that the movements of the planets in the heaven can be cal- 
culated and the locations of the planets applied to the same 
location on the earth. 

The Bible describes what the influence of the three planets 
is, but it does not say where this information is obtained, 
except from the influence of the heavens. 

The fundamental principle as described in the Bible and 
illustrated in cycles of time, called the ages, is illustrated as 
follows : The first principle is the unit of one and is the earth ; 
the second is Adam and Eve, as the male and female, illus- 
trated as the two halves of the earth. The third is the trinity, 
illustrated by the three planets and the three divisions of the 
earth into 120 degrees each, making 360 degrees in all. The 
fourth principle is the dividing of the earth into four quarters, 
using Greenwich and the equator as centers and containing 90 
degrees each. These are the leading divisions of the earth, but 
it is subdivided into several smaller cycles. 

The different distances around the earth, as figured from 
Greenwich west, are calculated and called angles. It depends 
on the nature of the earth at the place calculated whether th§ 
angle is called good or bad, and we will describe the system as 



Part III— Chapter 12. 65i 

used. We will take the greatest division first. It is an angle; 
of 180 degrees, half of the earth from Greenwich. We find 
that 180 degrees strikes the center of the Pacific Ocean; aa 
this is a bad place, it is called a very bad angle. We next take- 
half of 180 degrees, which is 90 degrees; as 180 degrees is 
very bad, so are the smaller divisions of this angle bad. The 
90th degree is at the Mississippi river points in the United 
States, and in China it is at Thibet. These places are called bad 
angles; strife, and disagreement, dividing of people and coun- 
try takes place at these angles. The 90-degree angle also rep- 
resents the north and south poles. The angle of 120 degrees, 
will be found to be on the Pacific Coast in the United States: 
and on the east coast of China. These are the best places oni 
the face of the earth and are the good angles. The 60 degrees 
and 30 degrees, as smaller divisions of 120-degree angle, are 
also good angles and lend a good influence to the country. The 
60th degree east divides Europe from Asia, and the 30th degree 
divides Turkey in Europe and Asia. The 45th degree divides 
Arabia, Persia and Turkey and is a bad place. From 
this illustration can be seen what is meant by good or bad 
angles of the heavens, as described in the Bible. 

We have now given a general outline of what the study of 
the Bible is and we will now go into more details and describe, 
the different places according to the system as used in the. 
Bible. The Bible describes the first period or distance of space- 
and called it the "Garden of Eden." It extends from the? 
Atlantic Coast to the Cascade Mountains and the Sierra Nevada, 
on the Pacific Coast, and from Mexico at 30 degrees to Canada, 
at 54 degrees. This is the place as first described in the Bible. 
The Bible writers were human beings and described the coun- 
try as it was and as it is today. It is apparent that the Bible 
writers lived on the Pacific Coast as this part of the earth is 
described in detail more than any other. In Europe each 
nation is described but in the Pacific Coast States, sections and 
county lines are followed. 

It must be distinctly understood that the use of terms as 
the "Garden of Eden" "Jerusalem," "The Ark," "Solomon's 
Empire," or "The Roman Empire," all mean the same and rep- 
resent an age or cycle of time. The space which these cycles 
represent was degrees longitude. The story as written in the 
Bible corresponds to the description of the earth and the people 



QQ Key to Bible and Heaven, 

described represent the nature of the land and the number of 
people represent the number of degrees longitude and latitude. 

The Bible illustrates a principle of individual characters 
in Adam and Eve, and the Snake. This principle represents the 
injfluence of the planets Uranus, Neptune and Saturn. Adam 
represents Uranus; Eve represents Neptune and the Snake 
represents Saturn. When one spoke to the other it is the in- 
fluence as produced which is expressed in words at the location 
described. 

The second chapter of Genesis begins with the description 
of the "Garden of Eden." The space of the garden was from 
70 degrees to the 110 degrees west, making 40 degrees in all. 
The Tree of Life spoken of is the 90th degree in the center of 
the garden and the Tree of Knowledge was the 36th degree 
latitude. This garden was divided into four divisions or four 
quarters, that is, it was divided at the Mississippi River points 
at 90 degrees, and that the north and south was divided by the 
36 degrees. This division is better illustrated by the Mason 
and Dixon Line, and east and west of the Mississippi. 

God warned Adam not to eat of the forbidden fruits of 
the garden but as the tree of life is the 90th degree longitude, 
it came to pass that both Adam and Eve had to eat of the fruit 
of the 90th degree and they were put out of the garden and 
migrated west. 

Eve was made of the rib or side of Adam; that is, the 
garden period is the Adam from Greenwich to 120 degrees 
west. So is the Eve period taken from the rib of Adam con- 
stituting the country west of the 120 degrees and is the Eve 
as illustrating an age. It is the beginning of another age, and 
is the mother of the Asiatic nations. From this can be seen 
that Eve represents the Pacific Coast States as a cycle or 
space. 

After Adam and Eve left the garden of Eden on their 
journey west, they settled on the Pacific Coast and here is 
where the story of the Bible happenings takes place. 

The Pacific Coast is the ''Promised Land." Bible students 
should know where paradise was located and find out where, in 
California, Eve obtained her fig leaves. It has been assumed 
that the Holy Land was in Palestine, and that the Lord Jesus 
walked on the ground there, was born, lived and died there. It 
is also taken for granted that all the old patriarchs lived and 
died in the country from the Euphrates River to Rome. All 



Part III— Chapter 12. 67 

history and all hapenings, as recorded in the Bible have been 
applied to this very spot on the earth. This is the foundation 
for all error in the Christian age, for the location of the history 
of Bible events follows the degrees of longitude west around 
the earth. The United States has been populated and governed 
as a nation in the same way as it is now, and had the same 
boundary lines north and south, east and west. It had also 
the same number of states, namely 48. The people of the Pa- 
cific Coast at the time when the Bible was written, were the 
leaders of the world. In the Bible, the description of the Pacific 
Coast is perfect. Every section is described in detail. We will 
only mention here that Moses died and was buried on the Pacific 
Coast. Joshua captured the country at 120 degrees west longi- 
tude and led the children of Israel into the promised land. 
They traveled in a direct line and went to California, Oregon, 
and then to Washington. The city of Jericho corresponds to 
San Francisco of today and Jerusalem corresponds to Southern 
California. Portland, Oregon, is the second Antioch and Seat- 
tle answers to Ephesus. Victoria and Vancouver, British Col- 
umbia, were described as Phenecia. The River Jordan is the 
120th degree west longitude and represents the mountain 
range from Washington to Mexico.. We will follow the Bible 
study and explain in due time in what part of the Bible this 
description is given. In the book of Joshua is given the descrip- 
tion of the Pacific Coast, and anyone familiar with the Coast 
will recognize it. 

In the beginning of Bible history, the country spoken of 
was the United States, and when reference is made to children 
being born, it is the dividing of the country. History repeats 
itself and we can see another "Garden of Eden," period in the 
history of the United States. 

In Genesis 4; is described the dividing of the country 
north and south by the birth of Cain and Abel. Cain represents 
the north, and Abel the south. In due time Cain slew Abel when 
he passed over Abel's territory, or degrees. After Cain slew Abel 
he was cursed and he settled outside the garden and went into 
the land of Nod, in the east. This is on the Atlantic Coast, east 
of the 70th or 72nd degree (Massachusetts). Cain settled there 
and had a child by the name of Enoch, and he called the city 
Enocn. Here is where the generation of the United States began. 
Read Genesis 4:16; for information concerning the first children 
of the world, and follow as in the Bible time the same repetition 



68 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

or creation for the present age. It must not be forgotten that 
the world moves in cycles and that the same thing, or happening 
takes place over and over again in each age, and every age is 
1000 years. Now as each 1000-year period extends around the 
earth there will be the change of the events as it affects each 
part of the world. The ages of the world proper are divided 
into three parts of 120 degrees each. The first division or age 
is from 40 degrees east to 80 degrees west, the second division 
begins at 80 degrees west and extends to 200 degrees west 
longitude, and the third division is from 200 degrees west to 320 
degrees west or 40 degrees east. 

The ages, however, were calculated from Greenwich de- 
gree in three cycles of 120 degrees each. 

Genesis 5 describes the generation of Adam. It says that 
Seth was born when Adam was 130 years old. Seth was born 
at 130 degrees from Greenwich time, which is 130 degrees west 
longitude and is on the Pacific Coast. Therefore, Seth is the 
father of the children west of the United States; Cain is the 
father of the children from the Atlantic Coast west. Adam 
Kved 800 years after Seth was born, and he had sons and daugh- 
ters. Add 800 degrees west going around the earth twice, be- 
ginning with 130 degrees west longitude and we have 150 de- 
grees east longitude, which is the beginning of the degrees for 
the children of Asia. Adam lived 930 years. Figure from 
Greenwich west 930 years (degrees), which is 150 degrees 
east longitude. This is east of Japan. Each child of Adam is 
to be figured on the same principle. Adam's children are the 
continents, but the children of Cain are the American conti- 
nent proper and Seth's sons and daughters are Asia and 
Europe. Adam died in 3074 B. C. 

Chapter 13. 

adam and eve. 

The first, second and third chapters of Genesis describe 
the creation and operation of the earth. It is unnecessary to 
repeat here the meaning of these chapters because it is the 
description of the law which operates the entire universe, and 
this has been previously described. It will, however, be found 
to consist of the four principles of creation, namely: first, the 
globular formation of the heavens and earth; second, the 
dividing of the earth by the equator, to form day and night; 



Part III— Chapter 13. 69 

third, the dividing of the earth by longitude into west and east ; 
and fourth, the describing by the three principles mentioned 
above, of the four elements and the four cardinal points. 

The Bible does not say that the earth was made at that 
particular time and at a stipulated spot in the heavens. It says 
in the beginning God created heavens and the earth. It was in 
the beginning of the age, and the description of heaven and 
earth was as God had made it in the previous cycles, or years. 
There is a distinction between created and made. 

We are positive that this earth was not made as a globe 
in the age of Adam. We are also positive and know that this 
good country of the United States has existed and was a nation 
before the time of Adam, and the so-called personal creation 
of the earth is fiction. We state that we can prove this and 
more. It is said that anything outside of the Bible can be 
proved by the Bible, but it is for us to prove by the Bible that 
the writings in it are correct. We will also compare the Bible 
with the law of nature and give positive proof, by the scientific 
facts of astronomy. 

The earth is divided by longitude into two halves from 1 
degree to 180 degrees, and from 180 degrees to 360 degrees. 
That part of the earth west of Greenwich longitude is called 
male and includes the American continent, and the two oceans. 
The female division begins at 180 degrees going west and in- 
cludes Asia and Europe. This is the division spoken of in the 
Bible as the tree of life. Let it be distinctly understood that 
the dividing degrees of longitude are the tree of life. The 
principle, as pictured in Adam and Eve, is the male and female 
part of the earth. Adam is the male principle, as represented 
by the western hemisphere of America, and Eve the eastern or 
negative side of earth. Adam represents the earth in char- 
acter, distance, and an age; as it is said in the Bible, the gen- 
erations of Adam which are Adam's children, or nations. 
Adam's age began at 70 degrees on the Atlantic Coast of the 
United States and if we add his age of 930 years to the 70 
degrees, we obtain the 1000 years as his cycle. 

The Bible states that the generations of heaven and earth 
are the dividing of space in heaven and on earth, and that it 
is not the generations of the human race as taught by the 
churches. It is described in Genesis 2:4 and 5, "These are the 
generations of the heavens and of the earth when they were 
created, in the day that the Lord God made the earth and the 



70 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

heavens, and every plant of the field before it was in the earth, 
and every herb of the field before it grev^: for the Lord God 
had not caused it to rain upon the earth, and there v^as not a 
man to till the ground." It is the heavens and the earth which 
is spoken of and not man ; as the earth is the mother of all gen- 
erations. 

Chapter 14. 

the first book of moses. 

The book of Genesis describes the meaning of a world 
similar to the system as used in astrology. The meaning of 
the different illustrations are described in detail. We will give 
an outline of the first chapters and show the system used. 

The first chapter of Genesis says that *'in the beginning God 
created the heavens and the earth. And the earth was without 
form, and void." This means that the earth is globular or, 
comparing it with a figure of the heaven, the representation 
would be that of a circle. "And God said. Let there be light; 
and there was light." This is illustrated by dividing the globe 
in halves, one side of the globe, or half of the circle, repre- 
senting light, the other darkness. The line of demarcation 
between these two halves is called the equator. And God said, 
"Let there be a firmament in the midst of the waters; and let 
it divide the waters from the waters." This can be illustrated 
as the Greenwich degree of longitude. The two divisions 
spoken of are the tree of knowledge and the tree of life. "Let 
the waters under the heaven be gathered together unto one 
place, and let the dry land appear." This is the distinction 
between earth and water. So far there is light, darkness, water 
and earth; the sun and moon is represented as light and fire. 
Next is illustrated the air, as, "fowl that may fly above the 
earth in the open firmament of heaven." Man is next spoken 
of, with the power to rule over the entire creation. 

The principles as illustrated in the first three chapters of 
Genesis are very simple when making an astrological compari- 
son, everything on the globe must be represented within a 
circle. It is divided into halves, quarters and into twelfths ; one- 
twelfth for each sign of the Zodiac. Each is so arranged that 
fire, earth, air and water are illustrated according to the Laws 
of 'Moses. 

The second chapter of Genesis describes the state in which 
man is to exist ; he is to be both a material and spiritual entity ; 



Part III— Chapter 14, 71 

he is to have dominion over the entire globe. The six days of 
creation are the 6,000 years which the earth passes through, 
and are the creative cycles of the globe. The seventh day is 
the seven thousandth year of the cycle; and during the seventh 
period the manifestation of a spiritual nature takes place. 

Genesis 2 : "And the heavens and the earth were finished." 
It shows in Genesis 1 :27 that God made man on the sixth day, 
that is, God made a name in the earth for man, and other creep- 
ing things, but in Genesis 2:7, ''And Lord God formed man of 
the dust of the ground, and breathed into his nostrils the 
breath of life; and man became a living soul." Remember that 
it is on the seventh day that God gives man a living soul. 

Genesis 2 :8, "And Lord God planted a garden eastward, in 
Eden;" and there he put the man whom he had formed, which 
means that man's home is in the eastern part of the garden. 
The tree of life and the tree of knowledge was in the midst of 
the garden, and a river went out from Eden which parted the 
garden in four heads. The tree of life spoken of in the midst 
of the garden is illustrated by the line drawn from north to 
south and is the degree of longitude. The tree of knowledge is 
illustrated in the line from east to west and is the degree of 
latitude. These two lines mark the cardinal points of the globe. 
It is very important to know the difference between the tree of 
life and the tree of knowledge, and to know that the tree of 
knowledge is crossing the tree of life horizontally. The tree 
of life represents as the name indicates: life, illustrated as 
heaven (south) and hell (north). The tree of knowledge 
means experience or learning; as birth (east) and death 
(west) . 

And a river went out of Eden to water the four quarters; 
which means that an influence emanates in Eden going to the 
four quarters. "The name of the first is Pison: the land of 
Havilah, where there is gold, and the gold of that land is good : 
there is bdellium and onyx stone. And the name of the second 
river is Gihon: which compassed the land of Ethiopia (Gush). 
And the name of the third river is Hiddekel: and the fourth 
river is Euphrates." These represent the cardinal points for a 
figure of the heaven. The four quarters also represent the four 
quarters of the earth and describe a given place, which is the 
United States, divided into the four quarters. Genesis 10:6. 

"Of every tree of the garden you may eat freely, but not 
of the tree of knowledge, which is good and evil; for in the 



72 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

day that you eat thereof you shall die." This passage can be 
explained the same as the tree of life, for both have the same 
meaning-. We will say that the man in the Garden of Eden 
dies when he partakes of this tree of knowledge, that is, when 
the country as a nation has a revolution and the north fights 
against the south, meaning death to the nation. 

God makes Adam a wife of the same material as himself, 
that is, out of the earth. This means that the wife of Adam is 
a representation of another part of the earth and of an earthly 
nature. When we come to the study of the ages we will find 
that Adam and Eve as described, are part of the earth. 

As far as we have studied we can see that the first three 
chapters of Genesis deals with the symbols of the zodiac. 
Namely, that the shape of the earth is globular. That the tree 
of life and the tree of knowledge form a cross in the garden, 
making four corners of the earth, so arranged as to represent 
earth, water, air and fire. The cardinal points are distinctly 
named and described, showing what part of the garden each 
cardinal house occupied. 

In Bible study the cardinal quarters, or as the Bible terms 
it, "the four rivers," are used to explain the operations of the 
laws of the universe. 

Chapter 4 describes the generation of Adam and Eve. We 
will not take space to describe them in detail, but will say that 
they represent the twelve names giving the twelve houses of the 
zodiac. In the United States Abel represents the Southern div- 
ision, Cain represents the tiller of the ground, raising stocks; 
the North. The names of the generation of Adam and Eve and 
the houses that they represent can be found m another chapter 
and there described as God's twelve. 

The different ages as a new figure constitute a new period 
of time for another part of the earth. The names of the houses 
and planets change at each age. The ages of Adam, Abraham, 
Moses, constitute new periods. 

It must be remembered, as stated before that the book of 
Genesis deals with the erecting of a figure and explains briefly 
the movements of the planets. 

The second book of Moses, or Exodus, shows the move- 
ments and the action of the planets westward as they pass with 
the degrees through the houses. Remember that this is Exodus, 
which means to move from one place to another. It is written 
that the children of Israel did move. 



Part III— Chapter 14. 73 

The third book of Moses, or Leviticus, deals with offerings. 
The offerings represent the influence of the houses and the 
planets' aspects. Moses and Aaron in a given house are making 
offerings; God speaking to Moses is a representation of the in- 
fluence of the planet Uranus; God spoke to Moses which again 
shows the nature of the aspect. 

The fourth book of Moses, or Numbers, speaks for itself. 
It describes the degrees, years, or ages, as the first principles. 
It will be found upon figuring, which are the houses of long and 
short ascensions; for the Bible shows clearly the numbers of 
degrees in each house and how long the house lasts. It also 
shows how long the planets stay in the various houses. 

The fifth book of Moses, or Deuteronomy, which is the 
actual reading of a figure, explains the activity of the planets. 
It will be found that Jehovah speaks to Moses and explains 
what he wants; which is the influence God produced on Moses 
as the planet Uranus, when Jehovah gives Moses the law. The 
houses are described in Chapter 33 and given as the blessings 
of the twelve tribes. 

The rest of the books in the Bible deal with each genera- 
tion. It is the repetition of the planets' travel through the 
houses ; and the description of the end of the cycles by the sym- 
bolic death of the planet as a patriarch. 

The story of Moses is the same as the story of Jesus. They 
were both trying to save the people at the end of their life. 
They had wars at the conclusion of each cycle, similar to our 
own days, when many were killed. It will be seen that at the 
end of each cycle there is a new Savior, or leader born, who 
takes the place of the old. They die^ that the new age may live ; 
which is illustrated in all ages from Adam up to the cycle of 
Jesus. The list of the names and ages of the patriarchs will be 
found in another chapter, and will be useful in the study of 
the cycles. 

For those who are interested, it may be of benefit to study 
the question of the tribes of Israel. It will be found that the 
nations of today are the tribes described in olden times. A 
number of books have been published on the subject, but as 
the authors have tried to find the tribes as based on a religious 
principle, they have failed. The nations of Europe represent 
the disciples of Jesus, and also the twelve tribes of Israel. 



74 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

NOAH. 

The cycle of time described as the generations of Adam 
and Eve with Cain and Abel are very brief, however, it. contains 
a complete cycle from the birth of Adam in 4004 to Noah in 
2948. This covers a period of 1056 degrees (years). 

The second thousand year cycle begins with Noah in 2948 
but the flood did not take place until 2348 in the 600th year 
of Noah's age. Noah's cycle begins at 120 degrees west, and 
the cycles from Greenwich westward around the earth consti- 
tute Noah's age. Noah represents the watery house of Cancer, 
which is called the flood and is from 120 degrees west from the 
Pacific Coast to 240 degrees west in Asia. Noah's age begins at 
60 degrees east at the dividing of Europe and Asia, but his 
history is not counted from his birth, but from the period of 
the flood to the death of Noah in 1998, covering a period of 950 
degrees (years). 

In Genesis 6:3 is described how long in degrees a cycle of 
time is, without qualifications. ''And the Lord said. My spirit 
shall not always strive with man, for that he also is flesh; yet 
his days shall be an hundred and twenty years." This is not 
described as the age of Noah, but the age of man as a cycle. 
Noah's age as a cycle of time was 950 years (degrees). In 
verse 4 is shown where the 120th degree is calculated from, 
for it says, ''There were giants in the earth in those days." The 
mountains are the giants and this describes that the 120 degree 
is located in the mountains. The 120th degree is located near 
the Sierra Nevada and Cascade Mountains and has been figured 
as the place from which the age is calculated. The illustrations 
describing the flood were given to show that the cycle of time 
had to pass over the ocean, which was described as the flood. 

The building of the Ark is the same description as the set- 
ting up of a horoscope. It is described that the Ark contained 
a complete universe of all living beings, which again means that 
Noah had in the Ark a complete horoscope of the earth. 

Chapter 7:6 gives the degree when Noah reached the 
International Date Line. "And Noah was six hundred years 
old when the flood of waters was upon the earth." The six 
hundred years equals 180 degrees and is in the middle of the 
Pacific Ocean. The next important degree is described in 
verse 12. "And the rain was upon the earth forty days and 
forty nights." Verse 13, "In the self same day entered Noah,. 



Part III— Chapter 14. 75 

and Shem, and Ham, and Japheth, the sons of Noah and Noah's 
wife, and the three wives of his sons with him, into the Ark." 
This shows that there was a 40-degree space before getting to 
the 180 degrees represented in the 40 days and nights of rain. 
It is shown in verse 12 that it rained 40 days and nights, 
which brings Noah to 180 degrees. In verse 17, "and the flood 
was forty days upon the earth; and the waters increased, and 
bare up the ark, and it was left up above the earth," which 
means that the ark had reached another 40 degrees and was on 
land; this takes Noah at this time to the 140th degree east of 
Greenwich in Japan. 

In verse 20 is described how high the water was. ''Fifteen 
cubits upward did the waters prevail; and the mountains were 
covered." Which means that the place as described in cubits 
were 15 degrees north from a calculated center at Noah's 600th 
year of 180 degrees. The tree of knowledge represents the 
ecliptic and is located at 36 degrees north latitude. We add 15 
degrees north to 36 degrees and we have 51 degrees, which is 
at the Aleutian Islands in the middle of the Pacific Ocean. It 
says that the mountains were covered, which describes that it 
is the islands spoken of. The 51st degree corresponds to the 
location of the present war in Europe, for the northern boun- 
dary of Belgium is at 51st degree. 

The place, as described in chapter 7, covers the space 
across the ocean and when Noah was at the 180th degree at the 
International Date Line, he describes the location and illus-- 
trates this to be the end of a cycle or age, for all life was de- 
stroyed. Verse 21, "And all flesh died that moved upon the 
earth." In verse 23 "Noah only remained alive, and they that 
were with him in the ark." This shows that Noah represents 
a new cycle of time as illustrated in the 180 degrees from east 
to west, which is half of the degrees of the surface of the earth. 

Verse 24, "And the waters prevailed upon the earth an 
hundred and fifty days." The beginning of Noah was in the 
mountains at 120 degrees west and the water period was on the 
earth 150 degrees; so we add 150 degrees to 120 degrees which 
equals 270 degrees and corresponds to the position of Thibet in 
the Himalaya Mountains at 90 degrees east. 

God ordered Noah to build the Ark 120 years before the 
flood; which means, the 120 degrees from Greenwich to the 
Pacific Coast at the 120th degree. 



76 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Chapter 8:4 describes where the ark landed. "And the 
ark rested in the seventh month, on the seventeenth day of the 
month, upon the mountains of Ararat." It will be found that 
the Himalaya Mountains is the place where the ark landed and 
from which all calculations were made for Asia. The ark rep- 
resents a principle similar to the laws of Moses and the giving 
of this law has been illustrated being given from a mountain, 
as being above the earth, as the home of the Lord of Heaven. 

Chapter 9 describes Asia and Europe as the two brothers 
of Shem and Japheth. The third brother, who was cursed, is 
Ham, who represents the United States and he was to be a 
jservant of Asia and Europe. The life and age of Noah is given 
in verses 28 and 29, "And Noah lived after the flood 350 years. 
And all the days of Noah were nine hundred and fifty years." 
The 350 years are figured from 120 degrees east as the place 
after the flood, and is at 130 degrees east of Greenwich (using 
the 360-degree cycle), which is at Korea in China. The 950- 
degree period is from the 120 degrees west at the beginning of 
Noah's cycle and extends around the earth twice, leaving 230 
degrees westward from Greenwich, which is at 130 degrees 
east at the location of Korea. 

Chapter 11:1 describes the beginning of the race and the 
generations of Noah in Asia. "And the whole earth was of 
one language, and of one speech." Verse 2, "And it came to 
pass, as they journeyed from the east, that they found a plain 
in the land of Shinar; and they dwelt there." Verse 4, "And 
they said, Go to, let us build us a city, and tower, whose top 
may reach into heaven; and let us make a name, lest we be 
scattered abroad upon the face of the whole earth." Verse 5, 
"And the Lord came down to see the city and the tower, which 
the children of men builded." Verse 9, "Therefore is the name 
of it called Babel ; because the Lord did there confound the lan- 
guage of all earth; and from thence did the Lord scatter them 
abroad upon the face of all the earth." The interpretation for 
Chapter 11 is that the sons of Noah traveled together until 
they reached the Himalaya Mountains which represent the 
"Tower of Babel," and are holy mountains for Asia 
(Babylonia). In this mountain God spoke to the people and 
scattered them westward into the different nations and races. 
The reason why there was only one language before reaching 
the 90 degrees, is that China is one nation up to this place. The 
scattering of the people means the dividing of the earth into 



Part III— Chapter 14. 77 

nations, as India, Afghanistan and Persia, and all the nations 
west have different languages. In verse 10 is described where 
Shem's generation begins. 'These are the generations of 
Shem; Shem was an hundred years old, and begat Arphaxad 
two years after the flood." From this it will be seen 
that Shem is the name for Asia, beginning at 118 degrees east. 
It will be found in other chapters that this is the beginning of 
many of the calculations for the different cycles, up to the time 
of the Romans. 

The cycle of time as described by Noah, according to the 
Bible, takes place from 2948. The flood comes at 2348, and 
Noah dies in 1998, when Abram's cycle begins. 

ABRAM-ABRAHAM. 

The cycle of time for Abram begins at Greenwich and is 
described in Genesis 12 ; in the year 1921 B. C. The description 
of the age of Abram is the continuation of the time after Noah 
and is the begining of a new cycle and a new generation, with 
Abram as the father of his cycle of time. 

Verse 4: ''So Abram departed, as the Lord had spoken 
unto him ; and Lot went with him ; and Abram was seventy and 
five years old when he departed out of Haran." Which means 
that Abram left Europe and went to the United States and 
reached the Atlantic Coast at the 75 degree longitude, as indi- 
cated by his age of 75 years. The description, as given in 
verse 10, that he is going to Egypt, means that he is going 
south to begin the cycle, which will be verified later, for at the 
beginning of all cycles a trip is made south. Abram represents 
the period for the eastern division of the United States. 

The north and south are divided at the 36 degrees, and 
Abram is the north and Lot represents the south, which is also 
described as Egypt. The story of Abram's wife Sarai, who 
was represented as his sister, also represents a fixed law, for 
at the beginning and ending of all the different cycles the same 
story is repeated. 

The life of Abram is the life of the United States in a 
former cycle, and since each cycle repeats itself, it can easily 
be followed. The period that Abram went to Egypt cor- 
responds to the Mexican war in 1846 as described in Genesis 
13. After Abram came back from Egypt (Mexico) he settled 
and was prosperous. His herdsmen and Lot's herdsmen had 



78 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

trouble about the feeding ground and there was strife. They 
finally divided the land; speaking comparatively, Lot had the 
south and Abram the north. This story corresponds to the 
civil war from 1861, and is described in verse 5. Every good 
American citizen should read the 13th chapter of Genesis in 
full and see what a great country the United States is, as the 
Lord said it was when he spoke to Abraham and described it 
in verses 14 to 18. 

Chapter 14: Abram^s country is described to be from the 
75 degrees to the 115 degrees west. The end of Abram's ter- 
ritory is the Sodom and Gomorrah section, and is in the desert 
of Utah-Arizona. It will be found that at the end of the cycles 
a destruction takes place, when the inhabitants are slaughtered. 
This destruction is divided into two periods and corresponds 
to the nature of the country. The period of Abram told about 
in chapter 14 describes what took place at the Sodom or 
Arizona, when Lot was taken prisoner. The Mamre spoken of 
is the holy mountains, and is Mount Whitney in California. 
This event takes place in 1913 B. C. 

In the 15th chapter of Genesis, God promised Abram a 
son, who should come out of his own bowels, and the popula- 
tion of Abram's son should be as many as the stars of heaven. 
From verse 9 to 18 is a prediction for the country of Abram as 
a horoscope, which is explained from verse 13 : "And he said 
unto Abram, Know of a surety that thy seed shall be a stranger 
in a land that is not theirs, and shall serve them ; and they shall 
afflict them four hundred years; And also that nation whom 
they shall serve, will I judge: and afterward shall they come 
out with great substance." Verse 16 : *'But in the fourth gen- 
eration they shall come hither ag"ain; for the iniquity of the 
Amorites is not yet full.'' Verse 18: '*In that same day the 
Lord made a covenant with Abram, saying **unto thy seed have 
I given this land, from the river of Egypt unto .the great river 
Euphrates." The meaning of the 15th chapter is, that the 
country of the United States, after Abram's time, should be 
forgotten 4,000 years, but in the fourth or last cycle it would 
again be populated as in Abram's time. The two rivers which 
are translated as the Euphrates, is the Pacific Ocean; and the 
river of Egypt is the Atlantic Ocean; for Europe is described 
as Egypt, in all ages. That is, Abram's land is from the Atlan- 
tic to the Pacific. 

The 16th chapter deals with what is now Mexico. This 



Part III— Chapter 14. 79 

country is represented as a handmaid, whose name was Hagar. 
This Hagar had a child by Abram and became despised. 

Verse 7 describes that Hagar was found by an angel 
(angle), at a fountain of water in the wilderness. This foun- 
tain corresponds to the Gulf of California, and Hagar's son rep- 
resents lower California as the son Ishmael *'A wild man." 
This takes place (Abram's age) at the 86 degrees west, as 
described in verse 16, and corresponds to the Mexican trouble 
in 1913. The year, as a cycle, is 1913 B. C. 

Chapter 17 describes the time when Abram became 99 
years (degrees) of age. He had a talk with the Almighty God 
at this time and he was promised children as a reward. This 
is the time he crossed the 99 degrees longitude in the middle of 
what is now t he United States. The name of Abram was 
changed to Abraham and the name of Sarai was changed to 
Sarah. At the time when Abraham is 99 years (degrees) old, 
Ishmael is 13 years (degrees) old and this degree corresponds 
to the location of Mexico in degrees longitude, up to the Gulf 
of California. When Abraham was 100 years (degrees) old, 
Isaac was to be born, illustrating a new age. Isaac represents 
the Pacific Coast cycle and when he becomes 20 years of age he 
will rule. The circumcision spoken of in this chapter is the 
change to the Asiatic race. 

The 18th chapter describes that Abraham entertains three 
angels (angles) and that he was near the mountains of Mamre. 
The three angels represent the three divisions of 120 degrees 
each, and the place is described as being where there was 
water. The angle of 115 degrees strikes the Gulf of California 
and the story as written is described from there. The length of 
an age is 120 degrees and at this time the angel described that 
Sodom, which is the desert in Arizona, is to be destroyed, as 
being east of the 120th degree. The pleading of Abraham to 
save the people, if there were only a few left, is of no avail, for 
there were not 10 left who were pure in heart. This illustrates 
that the cycle of time for Abraham was at an end and that 
there was not 10 degrees longitude left of Abraham's time. This 
takes place in 1898 B. C. 

Chapter 19 illustrates the end of the age in the destruction 
of Sodom and Gomorrah. The end of the cycle is in the west 
and the two western houses, illustrated as daughters, the houses 
of Virgo and Libra, are described in verse 8. These houses as 
daughters are located as Utah and Arizona; one daughter is 



80 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

north, the other south of the 36th degree latitude and that is 
the reason why Lot's wife, who is Utah, had to be destroyed. 
The pillar of salt as described in verse 26 is Salt Lfake of Utah, 
which illustrates that Salt Lake was at this place in the age of 
Abraham and Lot. The location of Moab and Ammon is de- 
scribed as the children born to Lot by his two daughters east 
of the 120 degrees and south of the 36th degree. This place is 
called Zoar and is the desert east of the Sierra Nevada Moun- 
tains. 

The 20th chapter describes the relation between Abraham 
and his wife. Abraham again describes his wife as a sister, and 
God informed Abimelech that she was Abraham's wife. This 
chapter illustrates a principle represented in Abraham's wife 
and is the planet Neptune. 

Chapter 21 describes the birth of Isaac, representing the 
Pacific Coast cycle north of 36th degree. In the same chapter is 
described the son of Hagar (Mexico) which is lower California. 
Hagar is sent south on her way to the wilderness of Beer-sheba. 
In verse 19 "And God opened her eyes and she saw a well of 
water; and she went and filled the bottle with water, and gave 
the lad a drink." The bottle of water represents the gulf of 
California. 

Verse 20, **And God was with the lad: and he grew and 
dwelt in the wilderness, and became an archer." The name of 
lower California as an archer is given to show it is a descendant 
of Spain. The place called Beer-sheba is at the Gulf of Califor- 
nia, at 115 degrees longitude, illustrating the dividing degree 
and spoken of as, "From Dan to Beer-sheba." Verse 33 : "And 
Abraham planted a grove in Beer-sheba and called there on the 
name of the Lord, the everlasting God." This grove spoken of 
is also described by Moses. 

Chapter 22: In this chapter is described that Abraham 
is tempted to offer Isaac for a burnt offering, which means that 
at the end of the cycle, offerings or sacrificing takes place. The 
description given, that he saw a ram which he used for a burnt 
offering, is that the ram is the first house in the new cycle, 
represented as Aries. The angel which called to Abraham at 
this time is the 120 degree angle, who blessed Abraham, show- 
ing it was a good angle. 

Chapter 23 describes the death of Sarah the wife of Abra- 
ham, and Abraham's buying a burying place for future gen- 
erations. The lifetime cycle of Sarah was 127 years (degrees) 



Part III— Chapter 14. 81 

beginning in the holy mountains of Europe, the Alps, at 7 de- 
grees east and ending at 120 degrees west, making 127 degrees 
(years). 

The burying place which Abraham bought from the children 
of Heth is located at Mount Whitney in the Sequoia National 
Park in California. This mountain is called Mamre and the 
cave of Machpelah means Death Valley. This mountain is 
located near the 36th degree latitude and illustrates the prin- 
ciple of a holy place. There are three places on earth described 
as holy places ; they are the Himalaya Mountains, the Alps and 
Mount Whitney in California. There is a principle described 
in the placing of a burying ground at the 120 degrees longi- 
tude. It is described as the burying ground for the genera- 
tions, and it will also be found to be the burying ground for 
the Christian age at the present time. 

Chapter 24: ''Abraham was old and well stricken in age; 
and the Lord had blessed Abraham in all things." This shows 
that the end of Abraham is near. This chapter, illustrated in 
the selection of a wife for Isaac, that his country is not entirely 
in the United States, for he has to go to the place where Abra- 
ham's family lived to get a wife. The well described, where 
Abraham's servants met Rebekah, is the Pacific Ocean. Abra- 
ham's brother Nahor represents Asia and Rebekah is the house 
of Virgo, the virgin, as figured for the cycle of Isaac and is in 
the middle of the Pacific Ocean. The reason Rebekah had to 
travel to Isaac is that his time begins in the United States and 
the age of Rebekah and her children's age is in Asia. The 
Camel spoken of is Camela Pardalis. 

Chapter 25 describes that Abraham again takes a wife 
and has six children which simply describes another horoscope 
with a new generation and represents the Pacific Northwest. 
Verse 7, "And these are the days of the years of Abraham's 
life which he lived, an hundred three score and fifteen years."* 
Abraham was born at 55 degrees east and died at 120 degrees, 
west in the year 1822 B. C. He was buried in Mamre in the 
family cemetery by his two sons, Isaac and Ishmael. 

ISAAC AND JACOB. 

Isaac's cycle is from the Pacific Coast in the United States 
to the 120th degree east longitude in China. This age is de- 
scribed in chapter 25 of Genesis, and is in the year 1822 B. C 



82 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

The beginning of the description of Isaac is written in 
verse 11. ''And it came to pass after the death of Abraham 
that God blessed his son Isaac; and Isaac dwelt by the well, 
Lahai-rai." Which means that Isaac lived near the Pacific 
Ocean. The illustration is given in verse 21 that Rebekah was 
barren, but had two sons as twins. Verse 23 gives a perfect 
description of the two children as nations. ''And two manners 
of people shall be separated from thy bowels; and the one 
people shall be stronger than the other people; and the elder 
shall serve the younger.'* The meaning of the two children to 
be born are, that Asia and Europe are born as twins ; and "the 
elder to serve the younger," means that Europe will be the 
leader. The two children born are Esau and Jacob. Esau 
was born first and represents Asia and Jacob, Europe. Esau 
was later, also, called Edom and lived in the south. Esau sold 
his birthright to Jacob, who also obtained the blessing of his 
father. This shows that Jacob is blessed and is represented as 
a double generation of Asia and Europe, north. 

Chapter 26 describes the same story, that a famine was in 
the land and a trip to the south was planned, but the Lord told 
Isaac not to go south. It is described in verse 7 that Isaac im- 
plied that his wife Rebekah was his sister, because she was 
fair to look upon. This is the same story as described in 
chapter 20; about Abraham. Abimelech is again spoken of 
as a disturbing element. Chapter 26 describes the many places 
which Isaac speaks of as wells, instead of land, as in former 
ages, showing that his age was at the location of the many 
wells, which are the ocean and rivers. 

'Chapter 27 is a description of two animals, with two kinds 
of hair, when Jacob obtains the blessing of his father. In 
verse 11 : "Esau my brother is a hairy man and I am a smooth 
man." The goat's skin, which Jacob put on to deceive his 
father, represents the house o£ Capricorn, always illustrated 
as a goat, and the smooth man represents Sagitarius as a 
horse. The condition is described in the nature of the conti- 
nents, for Jacob is blessed because his country is in the temper- 
ate zone of the life region of the earth. 

Chapter 28 describes that Jacob begins his trip to the 
country of his mother's people, and is charged to take a wife 
over there. Esau is of the south, as Edom, and takes a wife 
from the family of Ishmael. The travels of Jacob are to the 
holy mountains where he had the dream of the ladder reaching 



Paii^ III— Chapter 14. 83 

up to heaven. In verse 17 : "And he was afraid, and said, How 
dreadful is this place! this is none other but the house of God, 
and this is the gate of heaven." This is the Himalaya Moun- 
tains where the tower of Babel was built. It is a dreadful 
place and the house of God, which is a good description of the 
Himalaya Mountains. 

Chapter 29 describes that Jacob is at the place of a well 
where he meets Rachel. As Haran is the place from which 
Abraham came and as his days were 55 degrees (years) east, 
we find this place to be 36 degrees latitude, at the Caspian Sea. 
The 60 degrees longitude divide Europe and Asia, and here is 
where the two houses of Libra and Virgo meet, and at this 
place is the home of Rachel and Leah. So from this calculation 
the well of Haran must be the Caspian Sea. The story about 
Rachel and Leah as the wives, whom Jacob had to work for, 
is simple. Jacob is the representation of Uranus passing 
through the period for Asia and Europe. Uranus stays seven 
years in each house and had to pass both houses as represented 
in Virgo and Libra, going from east to west. The youngest is 
Rachel who was barren and is Virgo, and the oldest is Libra 
and represents Leah east from Greenwich. From this it will 
be seen the reason why Jacob had to pass both houses in his 
cycle. 

Chapter 30 describes the generations for Europe in the 
birth of the children by Rachel, Leah and the maids, Bilhah 
and Zilpah. The names, described and given as children at 
this time, are the names of the twelve tribes of Israel and cor- 
respond to the nations of Europe, as illustrated in the chapter 
on Tribes. Verse 14 is a description of Reuben, finding man- 
drakes at the time of wheat harvesting. Reuben represents 
Arabia in Asia, and Spain in Europe. Reuben and his man- 
drakes represent a saving principle, which will be described in 
the next generation when Reuben aims to save his brother 
Joseph. In order to illustrate the correctness of the birth of 
the nations read chapter 30:16 where it describes the result 
of Reuben's mandrakes and the birth of a new nation. The son 
born was Issachar, which again is Holland-Belgium. As all 
cycles repeat themselves we find that the mandrakes of Reuben 
correspond to the Spanish Influenza in the present cycle, and 
that the child born is Holland-Belgium, which demonstrates the 
saving influence of Reuben. The children born now will be 
the new nation of the present Hollj^nd-JBelgium. The time 



84 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

described in all chapters in the Bible is for the ending and be- 
ginning of the cycles only, and since we at the present time are 
living in a similar age, the happenings are now being repeated. 

In verse 25 begins the description of the dividing of Asia 
and Europe when Joseph was born. *'Send me away that I 
may go unto mine own place, and to my country." The dividing 
of the goats, cattle and sheep as described, is the dividing of 
the races. The ring-streaked, speckled and grizzled cattle, 
mean the white, black and yellow races and is the division of 
the Asiatic and European races. The reason why Joseph con- 
tinued to feed Laban's flocks, was, that the southern part of 
Europe does not begin until Turkey is reached, and that is 
where the dispute takes place. 

Chapter 31 tells us that Jacob, with his two wives are 
going to Canaan and that they get to the Caucasus Mountains, 
which divide Europe and Asia in Turkey, when Laban over- 
takes them. The description that Rachel took Laban's image 
and put it in the furniture of the camel, is the representation 
of some value, as oil in the earth, in the place of the camel; 
which is at the Caspian Sea. The distance of Asia is described 
in verse 41. "Thus have I been twenty years in thy house; I 
served thee fourteen years for thy two daughters, and six years 
for thy cattle; and thou hast changed my wages ten times." 
These periods added together are 50 degrees as years and are 
calculated from the 90th degree longitude to the 40th degree 
east, which is from Thibet to Turkey. The heap of stones de- 
scribed in verse 51 are the Caucassus Mountains, which was to 
be a witness that Laban and Jacob had made an agreement in 
dividing territory. Chapter 32 describes that Jacob and Esau 
are still represented as twin brothers, Jacob north and Esau 
south of the 36th degree. They meet going from the 60th degree 
to the 45th degree longitude. As this is the beginning of an- 
other cycle, Jacob goes south and he meets his brother there. 

Verse 24: "And Jacob was left alone; and there wrestled 
a man with him, until the breaking of the day." The wrestling 
means a bad angle as 45 degrees ; the break of day is the begin- 
ning of a new cycle. The 45th degree strikes the Euphrates 
river in Turkey and is an ancient landmark and dividing line, 
for the beginning of a new age. Verse 25 : "And when he saw 
that he prevailed not against him, he touched the hollow of his 
thigh; and the hollow of Jacob's thigh was out of joint, and he 
wrestled with him." Verse 28 : "And he said, thy name shall be 



Part III— Chapter 14. 85 

called no more Jacob, but Israel ; for as a prince hast thou power 
with God." Verse 30 : "And Jacob called the name of the place 
Peniel for I have seen God face to face and my life is pre- 
served." Verse 32: "Therefore the children of Israel eat not 
of the sinew which shrank, which is upon the hollow of the 
thigh, unto this day; because he touched the hollow of Jacob's 
thigh in the sinew that shrank." This takes place in Arabia 
at the 45th degree, which strikes in the middle of the Arabian 
desert. The thigh on man is illustrated as the house of Sagi- 
tarius, which again represents Reuben. From this will be seen 
that Arabia is the thigh which shrank and became out of joint 
as the location of Arabia indicated. The reason why the chil- 
dren of Israel do not eat of this sinew is that it is desert country. 
The changing of name from Jacob to Israel simply illustrates 
the change from Asia to Europe. The end of the cycle for 
Asia is in Aquarius and when Uranus is in this house he creates 
new nations. 

Chapter 33 illustrates that Jacob and Esau meet and travel 
together in Turkey until they reach the 30th degree east. 

Chapter 34 describes Turkey as the daughter of Jacob and 
gives the first mention that Turkey acts as a harlot, and the 
location is at the gate. Turkey divides Europe and Asia and 
here is where Asia, as an age, had to be destroyed, as described 
from the 25th verse. 

Chapter 35 repeats the same method as used in describing 
Abraham's cycle. It concludes with the description of Turkey 
and the travels to the land of Canaan (United States) and the 
Chapter closes at Mamre in the holy mountains of California, 
where Isaac dies. This chapter is a review of the previous 
chapters and gives the names of the nations of Europe, and the 
birth of Joseph as described in verse 17. 

Chapter 36 describes the generations of Esau, but as his 
life is not described in detail the names of his generation are 
only given. 

Chapter 37 begins with the description of the period in 
Europe as illustrated in Jacob's son Joseph. 

JOSEPH. 

Joseph's cycle, the next after Jacob's cycle, is in Europe 
and begins at 40 degrees east. It is described in chapter 37:3: 
"Now Israel loved Joseph more than all his children, because 



86 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

he was the son of his old age ; and he made him a coat of many 
colors." Jacob's time ends at Greenwich, and Joseph represents 
the last of the age. The coat of many colors is Europe, repre- 
senting the different nations, and is Joseph as an age. The 
dream of Joseph described from verse 5, is a prophecy of what 
would take place in Europe during his period. We can see the 
print of the events then as we see it now ; in that Joseph repre- 
sents the twelfth son of the age and corresponds to the Roman 
Empire in our age. The rest of the children of Israel become 
subject to the rule of Joseph. Verse 14 describes that Jacob 
sent him out from Hebron, which is at the beginning of Europe. 
Verse 23 : ''And it came to pass, where Joseph was come unto 
his brethren, that they stript Joseph out of his coat of many 
colors that was on him." Verse 24 : ''And they took him, and 
cast him into a pit ; and the pit was empty, there was no water 
in it.' The place spoken of as a dry pit is the Arabian desert, 
from which Reuben tried to save his brother; this is the same 
saving trait of character which is represented in Reuben's 
mandrakes, spoken of in a previous chapter and corresponds 
to the Spanish Influenza at the present time. It is a dry well 
and compares favorably with the Spanish Influenza as a disease, 
and is one of the saving influences to stop the world's war on 
Joseph, as Europe now. They took Joseph's coat away from 
him showing he was not in Europe for Arabia is in Asia. Verse 
28 describes that Joseph was sold for twenty pieces of silver 
and they brought Joseph to Egypt. The twenty pieces of silver 
is twenty degrees and as the cycle of Egypt (Europe) is 30 
degrees east, we add the 20 degrees and we get 50 degrees east 
in the Arabian desert and this corresponds to the dry well. 
Joseph was sold to Pharaoh, who ruled in Egypt and cor- 
responds to the European age which ruled at 1729 B. C. The 
country included in the age of the Egyptian extended as far 
east as India to the 70th degree east. 

Chapter 38 describes the period of Turkey, included in the 
Egyptian age. The chapter illustrates a principle of creation, 
which is described in Turkey as a harlot. Turkey is called 
a "harlot sitting in the gate," which means that Turkey is the 
gateway between Asia and Europe and as the 36th degree 
dividing line is also at Turkey, this country is in the true sense 
of the word a mother of Europe. The term harlot means that 
Turkey is a virgin, who is also the mother of all countries, both 
north and south of the 36th degree latitude. 



Part Ill-^Chavter 14. 87 

Chapter 39 describes the planetary condition at the end 
of the cycle. Joseph represents Uranus, Pharaoh, Saturn, and 
Pharaoh's wife is Neptune. The contention of Joseph means 
that he represents Uranus and is in aspect to Neptune who at 
this time is in conjunction with Saturn. Verse 20 tells us that 
Joseph was put into prison which means that Joseph, as Uranus 
became in bad aspect to Saturn, because at this time at the end 
of the cycle he is in prison. 

Chapter 40 describes the butler and the baker of Pharaoh 
being in prison which means bad aspect and war. The butler 
and baker are Holland and Belgium as characters. This chap- 
ter describes the aspect of the planet Uranus in the house of 
Aquarius, in opposition to Saturn in Leo. The life of Joseph as 
an age is from 60 degrees east and extends as a power from 40 
degrees to the Atlantic Ocean and terminates at 70 degrees 
west. The Bible in all cycles describes this distance as the 
space of Europe. 

Joseph's dreams are descriptive of a condition in Europe 
and what would take place during his cycle. The dreams are 
written in chapter 37:9 and means that Joseph was the leader 
of the children of the age. The life of Joseph at this time was 
about 1718 B. C. 

Before going farther we will explain that the beginning of 
this generation was the family of Jacob. His name was 
changed to Israel when his cycle entered Europe and Joseph 
represents Israel. The twelve children of Jacob are the nations 
of Europe, named for the first time in the book of Genesis. 
This shows that Asia and Europe always have been divided at 
the 60 degrees longitude east. A complete cycle consists of 
120 degrees and as Europe and Asia are divided at 60 degrees 
east, nature divided the twin brothers to the very degree. The 
house of Jacob is therefore a double house, represented by the 
double cycle. of Jacob and Joseph. The time of Joseph is there- 
fore the age of his father, but Joseph did not come into exis- 
tence until Europe was entered at 60 degrees east, when his 
mother, Rachael, as Asia, died. The influence of Joseph's 
period began to be felt in Europe when Joseph reached Turkey, 
and Pharaoh; which is the real beginning of Joseph's age. 
From this it will be seen that Jacob represents Asia, and Joseph, 
Europe. 

After all the children of Israel, as the nations of Europe, 
have been born and named as Joseph's brothers (Genesis 41) ; 



88 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Joseph interprets Pharaoh's dreams which again are nothing 
but the explanation of the coming of a great disaster over 
Europe. This disaster is to last seven years, and during this 
period Joseph is to be reconciled with his brothers who have 
wronged him. The dream of Pharaoh and the interpretation 
of the dream illustrates the ending of the cycle in Europe and 
corresponds to the present age and war of seven years. 

Joseph's power began at 40 degrees east and he was 30 
degrees (years) old when he was made ruler by Pharaoh in 
Egypt. It should be understood that Egypt means Europe 
and is the nation called Egypt as a power. It is a singular 
coincident that Alexandria in Egypt and St. Petersburg in 
Russia are both on the 30 degrees east longitude. 

The cycle of Europe represents Benjamin as Joseph and is 
the double house of Pisces. Greece represents the eastern half 
as an Empire and is called the age of Egypt; and Rome as 
the Roman Empire the western half. In the present age this 
same power or empire is illustrated in the Roman and Greek 
Catholic Churches. 

Chapter 41 describes what the conditions in Europe were 
at this time and is very interesting reading, for history is 
repeated in the present age. It will be found that when the 
world's war is over, that the condition which is described in 
the chapters of Genesis 42, 43 and 44, will be the condition of 
Europe. 

In chapter 41:50 the birth of Joseph's two sons are de- 
scribed: "And unto Joseph were born two sons before the 
years of famine came; which Asenath the daughter of Poti- 
pherah priest of On, bare unto him." Verse 51 : "And Joseph 
called the name of the first born Manasseh : For God, said he, 
hath made me forget all my toil, and all my father's house. 
Verse 52: "And the name of the second called he Ephraim: 
^'For God hath caused me to be fruitful in the land of my afflic- 
tion." The two sons of Joseph represent the United States; 
at this time Manasseh is described as first and represents the 
eastern division, and Ephraim, the Pacific Coast States. The 
description of the mother of these two sons as Poti-pherah's 
daughter is similar to the description of Moses and Pharaoh's 
daughter, and also as given in Revelation 12: for the present 
cycle as a woman clothed with the sun, which was the mother 
of the United States in 1776. It is the planet Neptune referred 
to in all cycles. 



Part III— Chapter 14. 89 

It must be understood that France and England represent 
Ephraim and Manasseh for the cycle of Europe and that 
Joseph's two sons are the new age of the United States, both 
sons as one and not one. The blessing of the Pacific Coast as 
the first born is interesting as described in Genesis 48:13-22. 

The story pictured in the famine of seven years when 
Joseph ruled in Europe is a representation of the world's war 
of the present time. The story shows that Jacob's and Joseph's 
cycle of time were nearly over and that the regular seven 
years of hardship toolc place. .The food they got when Joseph's 
brothers went to Egypt are the conditions of famine and war. 
Jacob in the third year of the famine in 1706 B. C. sends his 
family to Egypt to take part in the war ; which is getting food, 
the same as the United States did in the third year of the 
present war. In the end Joseph gets all the money, land, and a 
mortgage on the future production of the country. As this is 
a counterpart of the present war, we can see the handwriting 
on the wall, who gets the money. It is Joseph's family. Any- 
one can follow the history of the present war and apply it to 
these chapters of Genesis. The children of Egypt (Europe) 
had to pay one-fifth of their income to clear their indebtedness 
for food obtained during the famine. From this we may know 
who is going to pay for the present war. 

Jacob does not want to be buried in Europe. He makes 
his son Joseph promise he will bury him in Canaan in the field 
of Mamre and Joseph swore he would do so. The end of 
Jacob's life is concluded in chapter 47. We are now around 
the earth, having made the trip with Abraham, Isaac and 
Jacob. There are still 3 degrees left of Joseph's age and we 
see in chapter 48 that another short period is in the near future. 
Jacob now prophesies what is to take place and what Joseph is 
to do with the children. 

The cycle as represented in Isaac and Jacob are figured in 
degrees. Isaac was born at 100 degrees west and died at 180 
degrees (years) or 80 degrees east. Jacob was born at 160 
degrees west and died at 147 degrees, or 53 degrees east. 
Joseph began to rule at 40 degrees east and ruled to 70 degrees 
west, making his age 110 degrees (years). 

The children of Israel described in chapter 49:1-47, have 
been explained in detail in another chapter. 

Chapter 50 records the burying of Jacob in the family 
cemetery beyond the Jordan where Abraham and Isaac were 
buried before him. 



90 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

A description is given of the last periods recorded in 
Genesis 50:1-3, when Jacob had his father embalmed, "And 
forty days were fulfilled for him; for so are fulfilled the days 
of those which are embalmed ; and the Egyptians mourned for 
him three score and ten days." The 40 days represent the 
space of 40 degrees east as being the space for those who are 
to be embalmed (dead) and the 70 days are the 70 degrees 
across the Atlantic Ocean. This ends the first book of Moses 
as Genesis in 1635 B. C. The second book of Moses begins in 
1706 B. C. and describes the new cycle of time. Joseph's age 
ends in 1635 and the next age begins after the 70 degrees for 
the Atlantic Ocean is added, making it 1706 B. C. 

Chapter 15. 
the second book of moses. 

The book of Exodus describes the continuation of the 
period in Europe, which begins at 3 degrees east, Greenwich 
time; it begins at the end of Jacob's cycle. Attention is called 
to the fact that the 3 degrees or days which are spoken of in 
the first 12 chapters of Exodus, correspond to the 3 degrees 
east in Belgium where the present war is taking place, and is 
the same 3 days or degrees before the passover, or Greenwich 
time is crossed. It will be found that at the end of every cycle, 
there is war and destruction which lasts for seven years, prior 
to entering the new cycle. By comparison Pharaoh (Saturn) 
rules Egypt (Europe) and Pharaoh's time is a cycle of 30 
degrees in space to Greenwich. The time when the Egyptian 
cycle was figured in years was about 1700 B. C. The beginning 
of time for the cycle of Moses was 1571 B. C. 

Moses was found by Pharaoh's daughter, floating in an 
ark, which is the place for the b'eginning of the cycle for Moses. 
The beginning of the cycle proper is at Greenwich, and since 
all the cycles have had their beginning at England, so does the 
time of Moses begin at England. From this it will be seen 
that England is the ark in which Moses was found. The North 
Sea is referred to as the ''Bullrushes." 

The time of seven years which it took Moses to plead with 
Pharaoh to bring the children of Israel out of Egypt is the 
same period of time as our own, that is, the end of the cycle. 
Chapter 2 describes that Moses was hid by Pharaoh's daughter 
for three months which corresponds to the 3 degrees east; 



Part III— Chapter 15. 91 

because the children born east of Greenwich had to be destroyed 
with the old generation, and as time passes on Pharaoh orders 
all children under two years (degrees) of age to be killed. 

In Exodus from chapter 4 to 12 is found a very interesting 
description of the war which took place then, and proves posi- 
tively that all cycles repeat themselves. Each of the seven 
plagues which Pharaoh put on the children of Israel corre- 
sponds to a year. At the end of each cycle there is always 
seven years of strife; we can find many illustrations of this in 
the Bible; for instance, at the end of Joseph's age, when seven 
years of famine took place, and now in the present day. Kaiser 
William, has produced seven years of war. Note the fact that 
the plagues are on the water, on land and in the air and also by 
fire. The story in the Bible is a duplicate of the present war, 
year by year, and the nature of the plague is the nature of 
our war. The place where Moses talks with God was in the 
Alps, which is the house of the Lord. The Alps must have 
been in eruption at the time, for God spoke to Moses from a 
burning bush. It is apparent that both the Alps and Mount 
Whitney in California were in eruption at the age of Moses. 

It is unnecessary for us to copy the ten chapters of Exodus 
which described the life of Moses, but it will be advisable to 
read them in order to get the benefit of this study. 

The 12th chapter begins with the first degree of the New 
Age, west of Greenwich. The children of Israel are now on 
their way westward. The Red Sea, which is spoken of in 
chapter 14, is the Atlantic Ocean. Moses and his Israelites get 
over dry, but the Egyptians, who live east of Greenwich, are 
all drowned. This means that the age east of Greenwich was 
killed, when the new cycle west of Greenwich began. The 
water of the Atlantic Ocean called Marah, described in chapter 
15:23, was bitter, that is, salty, so they could not drink it. 

Next they come to Elim. ''Where were twelve wells of 
water and three score and ten palm trees, and they encamped 
there by the water." Chapter 15 :27 : the twelve wells of water 
mean that they were at the place of twelve tribes, or the United 
States and the 70 palm trees are the 70 degrees west to the 
east coast of the United States. 

Chapter 16 explains that they are at the 90th degree west 
or at the Mississipi river, where Moses gave them quails to 
eat. The manna given them is the fruits of the 40 degrees in 
the space of the old garden of Eden. In chapter 16:35 it says 



92 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

the children had manna 40 years, until they came to the borders 
of the land of Canaan. These forty years are the space from 70 
degrees to 110 degrees west, at the borders of Canaan. 

Chapter 17:15 is a testimony to the Lord; for it shows that 
the old Indians have left a name behind them. The name 
Jehovah-nissie is written very plainly in the Bible and is the 
Mississippi. We are now at 90 degrees west in our travels and 
at the Mississippi river where the children of Israel were beg- 
ging Moses for water. It is apparent that the name of Jehovah- 
nissie is the original name for Mississippi as used by the In- 
dians. The word "nissie" is not common in the Bible and 
being added to the word Jehovah, which is self-sustaining, it 
is evident that the river marked the 90th degree and was the 
stopping place. Read verses 5-6. "And thou shalt smite the 
rock and there shall come water out of it, that the people may 
drink. And Moses did so in the sight of the elders of Israel;" 
this shows that there was a river at this very important place. 
The reason why Moses described the Mississippi river country, 
and had so much trouble there, is that the 90th degree is the 
place where the earth is divided into quarters, and is called a 
bad angle. 

Chapter 18: In this chapter is described a new form of 
government when at 100 degrees west. Moses let the people 
handle the law and assist in governing themselves. This age 
corresponds to the year 1920 of our time, when the law is 
changed. 

Chapter 19 is also very interesting; it is now nearing the 
time of the end of the cycle, and we are now at 110 degrees or 
115 degrees west. Moses remains at this place for some time, 
and speaks to God face to face, in Mount Sinai. 

We believe that Mount Whitney in California is the loca- 
tion of Mount Sinai, from the description given in the Bible. 
It is one of the high and peculiar mountains in Southern Cali- 
fornia and corresponds to the mountains called Mamre. 

Moses* period begins at 70 degrees and ends at 120 degrees 
west; from this we can figure that Mount Whitney was the 
mountain described as Mount Sinai. The Sodom and Gomorrah 
district in the borders of Utah and Arizona was the place 
where the Israelites stopped when Moses was in the mountains. 
The highest and most prominent places have always marked 
the degrees in dividing the cycles. The Grand Canyon of the 
Ccflorado, or possibly Casa Grande, was the headquarters for 



Part Ill-^Chapter 15. 93 

the Israelites when Moses was in the mountains. The sec- 
tion from Mount Whitney to Salt Lake, including the Navajo 
Indian Reservation and the Grand Canyon of the Colorado is 
the location of the country for the time of Moses. This is the 
location of the Mormon Church in Utah, and as near to the 
holy mountains of Mount Sinai as the Mormons could locate. 
Moses went up into the mountains, which were in eruption; at 
the time, as God did not let the children come near the moun- 
tains for they would be destroyed. 

We will advise every citizen interested in the welfare of 
Colorado, Arizona or Utah to locate the place where the chil- 
dren of Israel worshipped the ''Golden Calf," when Moses 
passed through on his way west. In chapters 19 to 40 is 
described what took place between God and Moses at the time. 
The Laws of Moses were delivered here and the Golden Calf 
destroyed, being at the end of the age. 

The teachings of Joseph Smith are the teachings of nature. 
The Laws of the Mormon Church were found by Joseph Smith 
and described in the Book of Mormon and as taught by them, are 
the same as the Laws of Moses. We have been informed that 
Joseph Smith was directed by spirits to locate at Salt Lake as 
the natural place for their teachings, and he located at the very 
degree which represents the end of the cycle. Note that the 
Mormons call themselves the ''Latter Day Saints." 

Chapters 20 to 40 inclusive describe the Laws of Moses as 
given from Mount Sinai; the population was 3 degrees east of 
the mountains, which brings the time to 115 degrees west. This 
is the same place as described as Sodom and Gomorrah and is 
in the desert in Arizona, illustrating a desolate, barren and 
volcanic country, where the race is killed. 

The Tabernacle which is spoken of in chapter 26, is the 
representation of a figure or horoscope. The dimensions and 
plans in general are the calculations of space and time, as given 
in other chapters. The "Tablet of Stone" which was made on 
Mount Sinai for Moses, is the astrological teaching or the 
method used to read the Laws of Moses. The first two slates 
were destroyed, illustrating the end of the cycle, but new slates 
were made for the new cycle. 

The slates or tablets of Moses, given on Mount Sinai, are 
th^ Laws of God. We have studied some of this law and we are 
now trying to show others what this law is and the method 
used in reading it. The Laws of Moses, given to him by God, 



94 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

are the laws of the universe and not the law which man 
originated with a personal God. 

In the books of Moses there are three characters which 
represent the age. Moses, Aaron and Pharaoh. Moses is 
Uranus, Aaron is Neptune and Pharaoh is Saturn. The in- 
influence of Saturn is felt only at the ending of the cycles or 
ages, when Saturn rules and kills Uranus. 

Chapter 16. 
the third book of moses. 

The Book of Leviticus is simply the description of the dif- 
ferent aspects and their influence; these are called the offerings 
of the tribes. The ''burnt offerings" are the destroying, or bad, 
aspects; the ''peace offerings" are the good aspects; the "sin 
offerings of ignorance''' are Neptune's neutral aspects; the 
"trespass offerings" are the passage through a house. Moses 
consecrating Aaron by washing his feet is the description of 
the influence represented by Moses and Aaron, being in con- 
junction in the watery house of Pisces, the feet. The nature 
of the aspect is indicated by the nature of the offering, as a 
"burnt offering of the herd or of fowl," means the nature of 
the house; a burnt offering of the herd indicates a fiery house 
of the nature of the animal described. 

The Mount of Sinai is the holy mountains for the time of 
Moses and is the house of Aquarius. The wilderness of Sinai 
spoken of is the fiery, barren house of Leo and is in the borders 
of Arizona and Utah. The house of Virgo corresponds to the 
state of Utah as the western house, and the end of the age. The 
Laws of the priests, as given, are the laws of the aspect of 
Neptune for the different houses. The laws are always given 
when Uranus is in Aquarius, called the holy mountains. Uranus 
is at the present time in this house and is now making laws for 
the nations of Europe; and the Alps are the holy mountains 
there. 

The entire Book of Leviticus is the description of the laws. 
The offerings at the tabernacle are the horoscope; and the con- 
gregation is the degrees of the houses. The book tells us what 
the nature of the tribes or houses represent and gives the 
explanation of the aspects when the planets are in the different 
houses. 



Part III— Chapter 17. 95 

Chapter 17. 
the fourth book of moses. 

The Book of Numbers begins when the children of Israel 
were 20 years and over (90 degrees west). Each tribe and the 
place they are to occupy are described in chapter 2: It is the 
building of a house in heaven and we can use no better expres- 
sion than the terms of setting up a horoscope. It describes how 
the figure is to be set up ; what tribes are to be at the four cor- 
ners; north, east, south, and west, and gives detailed instruc- 
tions of what the aspects mean. 

Chapter 12 describes the beginning of the westward move- 
ment from the 110 degrees in Utah, when spies are sent out 
by the south-western routes. They came to Colorado river and 
there obtained one cluster of grapes which was carried on a 
staff back to Moses by two men. 

In chapter 13 :29 is described where the tribes are located. 
*'In the south the Amalekites, then the Hittites, Jebusites; in 
the mountains, the Amorites and the Canaanites dwell by the 
sea and the coast of Jordan." 

The period spoken of in chapters 12 : to 36 : is the time of 
the approach to the coast, where is described the Pacific Coast 
country; which is the promised land. The degrees are the chil- 
dren of Israel who had to be killed before they could cross over 
the mountains; they have to wait until Moses becomes 120 de- 
grees (years) of age. 

Moses sent men to the coast in order to describe the land 
before he sent the children of Israel. This is the beginning of 
Joshua's age and he was one of those sent. He came back and 
said that the Pacific Coast country was the land of milk and 
honey; read chapter 14:6. 

God told Moses that it was too early to go west but if they 
wanted to go and get killed, to take the road by the way of 
Arizona, and the south, which is described in chapter 14:. 
They finally did go, and many of them were killed. Chapter 
16:46 to 50 describes where many more were killed and the 
glory of God proclaimed. The third time was by the way of 
Mount Hor when they tried to get to the coast but failed. Chap- 
ter 20:14. The three times they attempted to cross into the 
new age "corresponds to the 3 degrees at the end of all cycles. 
After this follows the description of the killing of Aaron. They 
take him up on Mount Hor and stripped him before he is killed 



96 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

and leave him in the mountains. This is the last of Aaron. 
Mount Hor is one of the mountains near Mount Whitney in Cal- 
ifornia and is at 118 degrees west; and denotes the end of the 
cycle of Aaron. 

The description of the land and the people as fierce and 
giants, means the nature of the mountains and forests of the 
country. The land of Og and Canaan are the Pacific Coast 
country proper, on the west side of the mountains. A special 
description is given in a chapter devoted to the locations of the 
tribes. The country west of the 115 degrees was included with 
the coast tribes. The division is made from Colorado river in 
the south, following the 115 degrees north, as the eastern border 
of the tribes. Moses made the Colorado river when he passed 
by. Chapter 20:2 describes the need of water for they were in 
the desert of Zin at the time. In chapter 27 Moses is told to 
name Joshua as his successor for he is going to die, and also 
to name Eleazar as the successor to Aaron. This takes place 
east of the mountains for Moses could not cross the Sierra 
Nevada Mountains, for they are at 120 degrees; and Moses can 
go no farther west than 120 degrees. 

Chapter 18. 
the fifth book of moses. 

The book of Deuteronomy describes the actual entering 
into the promised land. It took eleven days as described in 
chapter 1 :2 to go from Utah at 110 degrees to the 121st degree. 
In verse 2 the 110th degree is described as the end of the 40- 
degree period. 

The first chapter deals with the trip in the "great and ter- 
rible wilderness" before the Israelites entered the country of 
the Amorites. Moses told them to go, for the way was pre- 
pared. The places are named in chapter 1:7; that they are to 
go by the way of the Amorites and then to the Canaanites and 
to Lebanon and to the Pacific Ocean, described as the Euphrates. 
In chapter 2:9 they are told not to settle in the south as Lot's 
children are to have that land, but to go westward and then 
north. The chapters from 3 : to 38 : describe where they are to 
settle and how to worship God. In all of these chapters Moses 
is giving advice, how to act and what land to possess and to 
avoid. It is the nature of the country, in the different houses 
as tribes which is described. It is written distinctly that the 



Part III— Chapter 18. 97 

children of Israel are not human beings, but that they represent 
the land. In chapter 29:5-6 it says ''And I have led you forty 
years in the wilderness; your clothes are not waxen old upon 
you, and thy shoe is not waxen old upon thy feet. Ye have not 
eaten bread, neither have ye drunk wine or strong drink; that 
ye might know that I am the Lord your God." This is self- 
evident that reference is made to the 40 degrees, for they do 
not use clothing or food. 

The land of Heshbon and Bashan constitute the territory 
of Reuben, Gad and Manasseh and is east of the 120th degree, 
from the mouth of the Colorado river north and west of the 
115th degree. Reuben is in the south and Manasseh in the 
north, described in chapter 29:8. 

The chapter 31 :2 describes Moses' age to a degree. '*I am 
an hundred and twenty years old this day, I can no more go out 
and come in: also the Lord had said unto me. Thou shalt not 
go over this Jordan." If this is not plain, nothing is. The Jor- 
dan is the 120th degree and is the mountain and not a river; 
which explains why Moses can not go over. The life of Moses 
is the period of time up to the 120th degree and here he dies. 
This is the same Jordan which Joshua passes over without get- 
ting his feet wet. 

Chapter 33 gives a full description of the tribes ; it goes so 
far as to say that Benjamin shall dwell between the shoulders. 
The tribes are described whether they are on the coast or in the 
mountains ; read 33 :24, it says that Asher is to be where there 
is oil, iron and brass. Anyone who can read, can see at a glance 
what is meant by the children of Israel. It is the land as the 
location of the tribes which is described. In chapter 32:48-50: 
"And the Lord spake unto Moses that self same day, saying, 
*'Get thee up into this Mountain Abarim, unto Mount Nebo, 
which is in the land of Moab, that is over against Jericho; and 
behold the land of Canaan, which I give unto the children of 
Israel for a possession: And die in the mount whither thou 
goest up, and be gathered unto thy people ; as Aaron thy brother 
died in mount Hor, and was gathered unto his people." Moses 
was east of the mountain in the plains of Moab and mount Nebo 
is in a direct line west from there. The great mountain which 
Moses went up to that he might die there, is the holy mountains 
for the age and is in the house of Aquarius. Mount Hor and 
Mount Nebo are Kaweah Peak and Mount Whitney in Cali- 
fornia. 



98 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Chapter 34 describes the entire coast from Naphtali, to 
Judah, which is from British Columbia to Mexico. Moses 
looked over ''Dan, Naphtali, Ephraim, Manasseh, Judah and to 
the Sea." In other words he stood at Mount Whitney, Tulare 
County, California, and looked over the entire six coast states, 
which was the last thing Moses did before he died. Moses was 
buried east of the mountains but ''no man knoweth of his 
sepulchre unto this day.'' 

The history of Moses is the giving of the law. The explana- 
tions of the aspects and the position of the planets are described 
in such detail that it is tiresome to study it. The description of 
a horoscope for the different tribes is so long and continuous 
that a study of it becomes misleading. It illustrates a system 
of worship instead of the laws of nature. 

The actual travels of Moses described in the Bible are the 
same as those of Abraham, when he travels from England to 
the 120 degrees west. 

Moses' journeys represent the principal angles of the de- 
grees as, at the Atlantic coast 70th degree; the 90th degree in 
the Mississippi river district; the 100th degree when a perma- 
nent government was established, and 110th degree in Arizona- 
Utah where Moses stopped until he died. From this it will be 
seen, that the actual life of Moses in action is not important, 
but it is the Laws of Moses which makes his history so im- 
portant. 

The life of Moses is to be applied to the nation of the United 
States for it really is the history of the United States. The 
travels of Moses represent the time it requires for the emigrants 
to go from Europe and to settle in the west. It can be compared 
in time to the past 142 years of the present cycle. The travels 
of Moses correspond to the time the United States has been 
organized and the laws made; the death of Moses corresponds 
to the end of the present form of government in 1920 of 144 
years, at the end of the first cycle. ► 

The life history of Moses begins in Egypt (Europe) by 
bringing the Israelites out, representing the freedom of this 
country and the birth of a new nation. The story of Moses also 
corresponds to Abraham's cycle and the events of the Mexican 
war, the Rebellion, the Spanish war, and the present war. The 
cycle of Moses ends in 1452 B. C. and includes the life of Joshua, 
ending at 12 degrees in the new cycle. 



Part III— Chapter 19. 99 

Chapter 19. 
the book of joshua. 

The book of Joshua describes the beginning of the Pacific 
Coast cycle in the west from the 120th degree to 120 degrees 
east longitude, including Japan and the coast of China. 

Chapter 1 describes the beginning in regard to the 3 degrees 
in the same way as the other books; verse 11 ''within three 
days ye shall pass over this Jordan," representing the 120th 
degree and corresponds to the mountains. The first four chap- 
ters deal with the capture of Jericho and the country there- 
abouts, as the promised land. Chapter 2: describes the entry 
into the country west and the trip over the mountain. The 
twelve men who were selected to pick up the stones is simply 
the mentioning of the twelve tribes. It is written that the 
stones were carried and put east of Jericho. The place 
called Gilgal where Joshua stopped is that part of California 
east of Oakland; the stones spoken of were dropped here and 
from this place the twelve tribes of Israel were formed. The 
entire book of Joshua is very interesting as it deals with Cali- 
fornia and describes the country 'in the capturing and slaying 
of an imaginary enemy, just forget the people and remember 
that it is the degrees which are being murdered. iWhat is 
spoken of as the Red Sea is the Atlantic Ocean. 

Chapter 6 describes the capture of Jericho, which is San 
Francisco, and corresponds to the emigration in 1848. It is 
evident that San Francisco was a great city at that time, as .it 
is now. The woman Rahab is still living there; she was saved 
by Joshua then and was saved during the earthquake and fire 
of 1906. Chapter 7:22 deals with the tribe of Judah and the 
place Achor. It is shown that in this place can be found gold, 
silver, and oil. The Achor as spoken of is in the tribe of Judah 
which is the Los Angeles part of the country where the gold and 
oil are located. In chapter 8:29 is mentioned the Golden Gate 
and the coast range north of San Francisco which was called 
Ai. It was taken by strategy and is described as being taken 
in two divisions, one on each side of the coast range. 

The country east of the mountains and west of the 115 
degrees was captured during the age of Moses; and is part of 
the country of the twelve tribes described in chapter 9. Joshua 
captured everything around the central part of the state before 
going north, which contains the capture of the Shasta and Sis- 



100 Key to Bible and Heaven 

kiyou Mountains. Chapter 9:3-6: ''And when the inhabitants 
of Gibeon heard what Joshua had done unto Jericho and to Ai, 
they did work wilily, and went and made as if they had been 
ambassadors, and took old sacks upon their asses, and wine 
bottles, old, and rent, and bound up ; And old shoes and clouted 
upon their feet, and old garments upon them; and all the 
bread of their provision was dry and mouldy. And they went to 
Joshua unto the camp at Gilgal, and said unto him, and to the 
men of Israel ,"We be come from a far country; now therefore 
make ye a league with us." Be sure and read chapter 9, it 
means that the people of the country north of San Francisco 
heard that Joshua had captured the territory east of the moun- 
tains and the bay district up to Humboldt County and that he 
was coming north to take their country and they were afraid. 
When the inhabitants of Gibeon heard about Joshua and his 
work, they played a trick on poor Joshua. An agreement was 
made whereby the inhabitants of this part of the state should 
be the servants of the country to the south; they should be the 
"hewers of wood and the drawers of water unto the congrega- 
tion." This describes that there is woods in Northern Cali- 
fornia and that the Sacramento river runs out from this section 
of the coast. The location of the tribe spoken of is described 
in verse 16 as being three days' journey north (3 degrees), 
which is the Shasta district and the home of Gibeon. 

Joshua next goes south and slays all in the country south 
and slays five kings in all. That is, he slew and captured every- 
body from San Francisco to San Diego, which is from Jericho 
to Gaza. 

We aim only to give a reference to the chapters in the 
Bible for topic and location and to show that it is California and 
not Palestine, which is spoken of. We expect all Bible students, 
when they read this book, to refer to the Bible for every chap- 
ter. The description of the country is fairly good, as for in- 
stance the Bible says: "Lachish is two days journey south;" 
and it corresponds to Lake Tulare, which is 2 degrees south of 
San Francisco. Chapter 10 :32. 

Southern California is divided into five sections and is 
described in Joshua 10:5. It is the five kings of the Amorites: 
Jerusalem, Hebron, Jarmuth, Lachish and Eglan. 

In chapters 11 to 19 are the descriptions of the capture of 
the land north of the Shasta mountains, which are the states 
of Oregon and Washington. 



Part III— Chapter 19. 101 

After the three coast states had been captured, Joshua 
divided the country into the twelve tribes and gave their loca- 
tion, described in another chapter. 

The twelve tribes, as described by Joshua, are located from 
the 30th degree to the 49th degree north latitude, that is, from 
the Gulf of California in Mexico to British Columbia. The 
Philistines and Phoenicia are north of the United States. 

The seven tribes are on the west side of the mountains and 
the three tribes of Reuben, Gad and the half tribe of Manasseh 
on the east side. For the description of the seven tribes read 
Joshua 10:19 and try to discern the reference made in the 
description. From San Francisco up to the Columbia river in 
Oregon is a good guide for Ephraim and Manasseh. The Puget 
Sound for Naphtali, Asher and Zebulun; Southern California 
corresponds to Judah and Simeon. 

The entire book of Joshua describes the entering and cap- 
turing of the Pacific Coast and the dividing up of the country 
into the twelve tribes. 

There is neither religion nor philosophy in this book; it 
consists of description of land and boundaries of the divisions 
of the tribes. Joshua's period of time is 110 years (degrees), be- 
ginning at the 120th degree west and extends to the 130th 
degree east, which takes us across the Pacific Ocean to Japan. 

During Joshua's time he made the sun stand still for one 
day. Chapter 10:12. The change of time corresponds to the 
daylight saving of one hour during 1918-1919. 

Joshua was not a prophet, he was a leader and held the 
same territory as Isaac in the age previous. Joshua died in 
1443 B. C. in the Siskiyou Mountains, which is Mount Ephraim 
and was buried on the north side of the hill, as described in 
chapter 24:29-30. It must be remembered that the age of 
Joshua extended across the ocean and that the tribes on the 
coast are part of the tribes in Japan and China up to the 120 
degrees. 

The last two chapters, 23 and 24, refer to the oceans in 
specific terms. In chapter 23 : 4 it says "even unto the great sea 
westward." In chapter 24:3, "And I took your father Abraham 
from the other side of the flood, and led him throughout all the 
land of Canaan." This reference is made to prove that the 
Bible writers knew that there were two oceans and that the 
earth was globular. 



102 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Joshua represents Uranus in all and every act in the deal- 
ings with the tribes. 

The next age is the description of the period north of San 
Francisco with Siskiyou Mountains as a center; which is the 
period of the Judges. This period in the north is also described 
in other books of the Bible as the "Ten Tribes" and "Samaria," 
which is later included with "Galilee." It takes in the states of 
Oregon and Washington. 

The Shasta Springs in northern California are described 
in Judges 1:13-15, showing that the springs were there in the 
time of the Judges. They were called "the upper and nether 
springs." 

The five books of Moses represent the period in degrees 
from the beginning of the Bible history in 4004 B. C. to 2552 
B. C, as degrees. The book of Joshua contains a life history 
of 110 years (degrees), but Joshua's time represents only nine 
degrees on the Pacific Coast. His time in years, as calculated 
in the Bible was from the time Moses died in 1452 B. C. (120 
degrees .west) to Joshua's time. Joshua's period began at 1452 
and ends in 1443; making 9 degrees in latitude. Calculations 
can be made of these years according to the 360-degree cycle and 
the location of Joshua will be found to be at the beginning of 
the 8th circuit around the earth. Divide 2552 by 360, which 
equals seven cycles and corresponds to the Pacific Coast period. 
The age of 1443 can be calculated the same way, as four times 
360 are 1440 and the 3 degrees extra are for the 3 degrees at 
the end of all cycles. 

Chapter 20. 

repetitions of cycles. 

The book of Judges contains a description of the tribes on 
the Pacific Coast and is a continuation of the age of Joshua. 
The age of the Judges is for the country north of San Fran- 
cisco and rules the seven tribes of Israel. It should be remem- 
bered that Moses and Joshua divided the country west from 
Salt Lake and Colorado river, from Mexico to British Columbia 
and to the Pacific Ocean. 

The five tribes of Judah and the seven tribes of Israel as 
the opposing element spoken of elsewhere can be compared from 
description. The twelve tribes, representing the cycle for 
Europe today, are the same division of the five and seven at 



Part III— Chapter 20. 103 

war now. Germany with her allies are the five tribes of Judah 
and the other seven are Israel. 

We will state here that the original five tribes are the chil- 
dren of Shem, which is Asia and the seven represent the children 
of Japhet which again is Europe. These two factions are the 
twelve tribes of Israel. 

The age which began with Moses at Greenwich includes 
Joshua, Judges, Ruth, Samuel, Saul and with David covers the 
cycle from Greenwich to Greenwich. 

The Judges represent the country north of San Francisco 
with the Siskiyou Mountains as the center and holy mountains 
called Mt. Ephraim. This is the section also named ''Canaan"" 
and the 'Ten Tribes." 

The sons of Zebedee represent Zebulun the twins, an airy 
house of a double nature. The two mountains of Mt. Baker and 
Glacier Peak represent this tribe. 

The tribe of Asher is on the coast from California to Puget 
Sound. The Olympic mountains are located in this tribe and 
were called Tyre and Tyrus, representing one of the holy moun- 
tains for Asher. The tribe of Asher represents Greece in the 
cycle for Europe and misled the translators to place all events 
of the tribe of Asher in Greece. 

The tribe of Isacher included the mountains of St. Helens, 
Mt. Adams and up to Mt. Rainer. The original place described 
as the burying ground for the cycles of time is in Cancer, as the 
tribe of Issacher. This tribe is located in the southern part of 
the state of Washington and is described as the original Magiddo 
and the plains of Esdraelon. This tribe and place in the cycle 
for Europe correspond to Belgium as the Armageddon for the 
age of Europe. It is the place where the age is killed and the 
location of the tribe corresponds in all cycles. 

The twelve tribes on the Pacific Coast are called the 
Israelites proper and their home is in Canaan and Judah is in 
Jerusalem. 

The twelve tribes of Asia are in Babylon with Ur in Chal- 
deah to represent the temple of Judah. 

Europe was called Egypt and the temple of Zion is the 
Alps as the holy mountain for Judah and the five tribes of Judah 
were called Jews for short instead of Judah. 

For the benefit of Bible students not familiar vdth astrol- 
ogy, we will explain the reason why the same names are given to 
places in America and also in Europe and Asia. Horoscopes 



104 Key to BMe and Heaven. 

are set up for a 30-degree or 40-degree distance and the names 
of the places within this figure are the same for all cycles. This 
can best be explained by the formation of the twelve tribes; as 
the names of the tribes are the same in Europe as in America. 
The nature of the tribes are also the same and are given in 
the same order as a horoscope, regardless of the country and 
distance it is set up for. This can best be illustrated by the 
name of Moab, which is located as Arabia in Asia and in the 
United States it is located as Arizona. The distance as described 
from "Dan to Beer-Sheba" in Europe is from Austria-Hungary 
to Spain and in the United States it is from Colorado river on 
the 115 degrees to British Columbia. The best way of locating 
the places as described, is in the method used in writing of the 
names, as a slight difference is made in spelling the same names 
in the different cycles. From this it will be seen that there is 
Ephraim, Manasseh, etc., in all cycles around the earth but the 
location corresponds in all cycles. 

It should be remembered that after Joshua's time a cycle 
consists of fifty years. This corresponds to 60 degrees in space 
beginning at the 120th degree west. 

The space calculated for the Judges consists of 60 degrees 
and is the last of the cycles terminating at 120 degrees east. 

Without going into detail in describing the cycle from the 
Judges to David, a general outline only will be given. 

The book of Judges is a continuation of the stoi^ of 
Joshua's age, beginning in 1452 B. C. The life and activity of 
the Judges is extended from America to Asia. The actual work 
of the Judges is the dividing of and judging between the 
tribes; giving judgment and explaining aspects. This can best 
be explained by Samson. His father was of the tribe of Dan 
(Scorpio) and his mother was of Manasseh (Taurus), and 
the son was the tribe Judah as Leo (Lion). The incident of 
Samson and his wives represents the time of age in the Pacific 
Northwest and in crossing the Pacific Ocean. Samson is the 
illustration of the house of Lion. The strength of Samson shows 
the character of the house ; the power of Judah, which the house 
represents. Samson's two wives are Virgo and Libra in the 
Ocean. 

The time of the change across the Pacific Ocean is described 
in the Book of Ruth. This book is for the south and represents 
Mexico as south of 36 degrees in going across the Ocean. 



Part III— Chapter 20. 105 

The time for the change from the American side to Asia 
is described as Deborah and Barak. Judges 5. The Book of 
the Judges covers the period up to the 120th degree in Asia. 

The two Books of Samuel represent the age of Asia and 
Europe. It is the cycle of Samuel, Saul and David which re- 
peats the cycle of Jacob, Israel and Joseph. The age of King 
David corresponds to the age of Moses and also to the story of 
Jesus, covering the distance of Europe. 

The beginning of the new age, as described in Solomon, is 
for the age of the American cycle and written in the Books of 
the Kings. The age of Solomon is from the end of David's rule 
in Europe to Nebuchadnezzar's age, ruling in Babylon as Asia 
from 600 B. C. ; which is from the 180th degree east of Green- 
wich. Second Kings, 24: 

Solomon is the son of David and his age is the most impor- 
tant, for it takes place at 120 degrees west at the Pacific Coast 
division. It will be noted, when the Bible describes events on 
the Pacific Coast, these events always have the greatest leaders, 
men with prophetic power and wisdom, and is the beginning of 
the cycles. 

Solomon became a leader of Israel 480 years after the time 
Moses led the Israelites out of Egypt. First Kings, 6:1. In 
order to prove that Solomon's time was at 120 degrees west, we 
will repeat the four ages of 120 degrees each, making the 480 
years spoken of ; Moses, Joshua, Judges, Samuel, Saul and David 
ruled the time from Greenwich to Greenwich, which is 360 de- 
grees. David began to rule in Europe and extends to 120 de- 
grees west, making 480 degrees in all. 

Solomon's age is from 1012 B. C. to the time of Nebuchad- 
nezzar at 600 or 606 B. C, including all the rulers from the 
Pacific Coast in the United States to China. In this period of 
time the Israelites had been killed and destroyed again and 
Nebuchadnezzar became ruler supreme. 

The Bible students of modern time have figured back to 
Nebuchadnezzar's time and find him to be the ruler of Persia in 
the sixth century B. C. They do not figure farther back and 
here is where the present day Bible students begin. 

The age of Solomon extends over into China at 120 degrees 
east. Nebuchadnezzar's age is figured from 120 degrees east, 
at the east coast of China and his cycle precedes the cycle of 
Alexander the Great at 336 B. C. and also that of Caesar's at 40 
B. C. to the Christian age. From this is will be seen that Nebu- 



106 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

chadnezzar did rule east of Persia and had charge of the Asiatic 
period before what is known as the Christian age. 

Alexander and Caesar are the last of the old cycle and deal 
strictly with Asia-Europe as the age governing the country from 
Asia to Europe, and to the end of the age. 

The Christian, or Christ period, is the European division of 
the age which began with Nebuchadnezzar as the Asiatic age. 
The Christian earth life age ends at Greenwich in 1920. The 
spiritual life of the Christian age is the Apostle Paul's history 
which ends in 2000, in the Pacific division. 

We have taken each period and age consecutively and have 
shown what an age is and who and what the age represents. We 
have shown the westward movements of these periods and ages 
around the earth for four times. Each period consists of three 
cycles or rulers. We explained in detail the first six ages, to 
show the method used in finding the location of the age. Much 
could be written and explained but there are too many chapters 
in the Bible to explain. Some of these explanations will not be 
understood unless the students are familiar with the study of 
the heaven, as well as the Bible, because the names and expres- 
sions used will be as much of a mystery as the Bible. But to 
students of nature history it will be simple. 

The main points to be considered are that the his- 
tory, as recorded in the Bible, is not confined to Palestine and 
the south of Europe, but that it extends around the earth. 
When years are spoken of in the Bible they represent the 
degrees of longitude. An age is a cycle of 1000 years as degrees. 
There are two periods to the cycle. It takes six ages to make 
the six days of the creative period of the earth. The seventh 
age as days is the age corresponding to the "Garden of Eden'* 
story. The Bible contains history for seven ages only. 

The recorded history of the Bible begins at 4004 B. C. and 
the present age ends at 1920 and 2000. From this we figure 
that the age just closing is the last of the great cycles of 6000 
years. We can depend on the actual year to year method of 
figuring ages as applied in the Bible, for it is correct. We be- 
lieve that we have passed a period of time of 6000 years since 
Adam's recorded history and we know we are not far off. The 
beginning of time is 4004 and 1920 makes 5924 and if we add 
one cycle for the spiritual life of Jesus of eighty years (which 
is the time of Uranus) we get 6004 years in 2004 A. D. Wie 



Part III— Chapter 20. 107 

have given the ages as calculated by the degrees and feel confi- 
dent the Bible figures are correct. 

It will be found that the age beginning at 4004 B. C. and 
ending at 1920 is not the complete age of 6000 years. There 
are 3960 years in the periods from Adam to the beginning of 
the Christian age at 40 B. C. The Christian age consists of 
2000 years and 1920 leaves us at 5920, lacking 80 years to com- 
plete the age. This 80 years is the circuit of Uranus in the 
Pacific Coast period and illustrates the end of the cycle for the 
American age. The end of Bible history is not fulfilled as Nero 
in 2000 A. D. v^ill destroy the United States. This period is 
described in the Acts, Chapters 27 and 28; as the life of the 
Apostle Paul. 

When Jesus ascended to heaven it is written that two men 
stood by him. These two men are two degrees, which are 
counted from the time of 1920 when Jesus as an age will begin 
in his spiritual Kingdom. This period of two degrees of 144 
years ends in 2064 when the space representing this age is 
killed, and is for the distance to 264 degrees west, or 96 east in 
Thibet. 

The six ages from Adam in 4004 are divided into the dif- 
ferent cycles from Greenwich to Greenwich in the following 
order. 

The first cycle consists of Adam, Eve and Abel-Cain. 

The second cycle is called Noah, with his three sons. Ham, 
Shem and Japeth, from 2948 to 1998. 

The third cycle represents Abraham, Isaac, Jacob, with 
Joseph and part of Moses, to 1571. 

The fourth cycle represents Moses, Joshua, Judges, Samuel- 
Saul and part of David, to 1015. 

The fifth cycle consists of David, Solomon, Nebuchadnezzar, 
Alexander and up to the Romans, 1012 to 40 B. C. 

The sixth cycle represents the Roman power and is the 
Christian age, from 40 B. C. to 1920. 

The age described as 4 B. C. corresponds to 1776 and repre- 
sents 4 degrees of 72 years each consisting of 288 years. The 
four degrees of 288 years are added to 1776 and we get 2064 
which is the end of the cycle. 

The ages from Adam to the Apostle Paul's time describes 
the condition on this earth for six cycles as the six days of 
creation. 



108 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

The seventh cycle as a day is after the time Jesus ascended 
to heaven when the disciples are teaching the spiritual life of 
Christ, which begins in 1921 as the life of the Apostle Paul. 

There is no reason given in the Bible why God's children 
had to be born and destroyed as illustrated in the cycles. The 
only information given is, that as it is in heaven, so is it on the 
earth; Which is the best and clearest description that it is the 
laws of the heavens which are meant. The Bible has been so 
carefully written that it has been impossible until now to read 
and explain the system used. 

We do not care to make a guess for the beginning of time 
as given in the Bible and when the Bible was last understood. 
It is, however, apparent that the Greeks, Egyptians and those 
in Palestine and in the Euphrates valley did not understand the 
entire system used in the Bible. This fact could not be known 
at those ages when the Pacific Coast country was not known and 
populated. The last age describing America is for Solomon's 
time, previous to Nebuchadnezzar, and we believe that the Bible 
has been a secret ever since, except for what Mohammed ob- 
tained out of the Bible as described in the Koran. 

The final and closing description of history as described in 
the Bible is in the story illustrating the life of the Apostle Saul- 
Paul. 

The spiritual age as represented by the Apostle Paul takes 
place after the cycle of Europe and is for the Pacific Coast cycle. 
Paul travels across the Pacific Ocean and is shipwrecked at the 
International Date Line. (180 degrees). Paul was stung by the 
sign Scorpio at this age. The last part of Paul's story describes 
Japan and China up to the final and closing period of Bible his- 
tory, when at the end of Nero's rule, Paul is killed. 

Chapter 21. 

solomon's empire. 

Solomon's Empire age is a well-known topic and interest- 
ing as a study. Solomon's age is from 1033, he ruled from 1012 
and is supposed to have died in 975 B. C. His empire consisted 
of the territory on the Pacific Coast both in America and Asia, 
his father, David was the founder of the Empire and constitute, 
the American cycle. After Solomon's time the Empire was 
divided into five kingdoms. 



Part III— Chapter 21. 109 

The Kingdom of Syria was on the north coast and westward 
from the Rocky Mountains to the Ocean; it included the entire 
circuft of Washington and the Puget Sound country. (In de- 
scribing the Pacific Ocean, the name Euphrates is used) . 

The next is the kingdom south of Syria and is the Kingdom 
of Israel of Ten Tribes, founded by Jeroboam, 975 B. C, at the 
death of Solomon. At the tim^e this kingdom was a large terri- 
tory; it took in at one time the country from San Francisco to 
British Columbia. This kingdom ruled the country east of the 
mountains and was called **east of the Jordan." This Empire 
of Israel is Oregon and California north of San Francisco. It 
had nineteen kings representing several dynasties. The capi- 
tals were changed to several cities; it was first located at She- 
chem, then at Omri ; the last place was Samaria, which soon be- 
came to Israel a center, as Jerusalem was to Judah. Later the 
name of Samaria was applied to the entire division. This is 
northern California and Oregon on both sides of the mountains. 
They had two sanctuaries within the province, one in the terri- 
tory of the tribe of Dan at the northeast and Bethel on the 
south, where the national calculations were made. At that 
time the calf or bull, as the age of Manasseh was used. The 
country as divided north and south was figured from the Sis- 
kiyou Mountains south to San Francisco and the temple north 
was the border of Syria or Washington. 

The kingdom of Judah included the tribe of Judah, Benja- 
min and Simeon. Their country extended from the Bay of San 
Francisco and west of the mountains to the south into the 
desert east of San Diego. The low hills on the coast were called 
the Shefelah Mountains, and is the Coast Range, v/hich was 
mentioned as important. The kingdom was ruled by twenty- 
nine kings all of one family. It was destroyed by Nebuchadnez- 
zar 587 B. C. The fourth division is the Moab; this section was 
not called a kingdom for it used to be a dependency of the 
Kingdom of Israel, which ruled or controlled all the territory 
east of the mountains. 

Moab, a desert country, extends from Arizona and Colorado 
River as western boundaries including Utah and Arizona, but 
how far east and south is not given. 

The fifth division is Edom, which is also a dependency and 
was subject to Solomon's territory. It is the country west of 
Moab betv/een Arizona and Colorado River as the eastern boun- 
daries and the mountains west. 



110 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

These five provinces, or kingdoms, are represented as the 
age of Solomon to the time of Nebuchadnezzar. The life and 
death struggle of these kingdoms extended over a period of time 
from- 975 B. C. to 884, during which time the three kingdoms, 
Syria, Israel and Judah, were fighting for supremacy. This ex- 
tends from the reign of Jeroboam to Jehu in the north, and from 
Rehoboam to Joash in Judah. 

The next age mentioned is from 884 B. C. to 840; which is 
the beginning of the end ; there were revolutions and trouble in 
all three of the coast Empires ; Damascus, Samaria and Jerusa- 
lem when Hazael mounted the throne of Syria. Jehu of Israel 
and Athaliah the queen-mother ruled in Judah. This is a de- 
scription of the tribes extending from the American side to the 
Asiatic side and is the Pacific States. It should be noted that 
passing the 180-degree longitude the queens ruled and the coun- 
try to the east of their territory will now be captured as all of 
the territory east of Jordan was reduced to a vassalage. Israel 
was conquered; they took Judah and let Jerusalem stay after 
paying a heavy tribute. 

The next topic is in 840 B. C. to 780; it is the time when 
the ten tribes rule in the northwest; it takes place when Jero- 
boam second ruled; both Judah and Syria were in due time 
made tributary to Samaria, which then became the leading 
power of Solomon's Empire. This period was marked as the 
era of two great prophets, Jonah and Joel. The short time of 
this age was called the ''Indian Summer of Israel." 

We will call attention to the fact that in this age, Jonah 
travelled across the Pacific Ocean in a whale. 

The real fall of Israel took place in 780 B. C. t<^ 721, for the 
decline of the nation was very rapid. It was through anarchy 
and uprising that the country was lost and practically melted 
away. The country on the other side in Asia was prosperous be- 
cause their kings were warlike. Samaria was finally taken by 
Sargon and the ten tribes carried into captivity to Halah and 
Habor. This period is part of what is termed the Assyrian age, 
as it extended over into China. 

The fall of Judah, as a power, took place from 721 B. C. to 
587 and extended 100 years after the fall of Israel, but was 
subject to the laws of the ''great king" of Assyria, which is in 
Asia. This is the final history of the Great Solomon's Empire, 
which is the same cycle as that of Joshua and the Judges. 



Part III— ^Chapter 22. Ill 

Chapter 22. 
nebuchadnezzar's dream. 

Book of Daniel, chapter 2, describes that : "There is a God 
in heaven that revealeth secrets, and maketh known to the 
king Nebuchadnezzar what shall be in the latter days." In a 
dream by night the Lord gave to Nebuchadnezzar, king of Baby- 
lon, a clear historical outline of the course of world empire to 
the end of time and the coming of the eternal kingdom. 'Thou, 
king, sawest, and behold a great image. This great image, 
whose brightness was excellent, stood before thee ; and the form 
thereof was terrible." 'This image's head was of fine gold, his 
breast and his arms of silver, his belly and his thighs of brass, 
his legs of iron, his feet part of iron and part of clay." 'Thou 
sawest till that a stone was cut out without hands, which smote 
the image upon his feet that were of iron and clay, and brake 
them to pieces. Then was the iron, the clay, the brass, the 
silver, and the gold, broken to pieces together, and became like 
the chaff of the summer, threshing floors ; and the wind carried 
them away, that no place was found for them; and the stone 
that smote the image became a great mountain, and filled the 
whole earth." 

The prophet next declared the interpretation. And now 
follows the history of the world. The parts of the image, then, 
of various metals, from head to feet, represented successive 
empires, beginning with the Chinese Empire as the kingdom of 
Babylon, represented by Nebuchadnezzar, was the head of gold. 
The breast and arms of silver in the great image represented 
India-Afghanistan, which followed the Babylonian, "inferior" 
to it in brilliancy and grandeur, as silver is inferior to gold. 

"And another third kingfidom of brass, which shall bear 
rule over all the earth." The third kingdom" after Babylon w^as 
Persia which overthrew the empire of India-Afghanistan. And 
Persia's dominion fulfilled the specifications of the prophecy, 
which indicated a yet wider expansion of empire. Its sway was 
to be over "all the earth," said Daniel, the prophet, foretelling 
itsh istory. 

While Persia's supremacy under Alexander w^as disputed 
by none, there was a power rising in the west that was soon to 
enter the lists for the prize of world dominion. Some of the 
ancint writers say that at the time of his death Alexander had 
in mind to push westward to strike down the growing power 



112 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

of the city of Rome, of which he had heard. Plutarch says that 
this man, Alexander, ''who shot like a star, with incredible 
•swiftness, from the rising to the setting sun, was meditating to 
bring the luster of his arms into Italy. * * * He had heard 
of the Roman power in Italy." Sure it is that after Persia there 
followed the Roman Empire, the strongest and mightiest and 
most crushing of them all. This fourth universal empire the 
prophet proceeded to describe, as represented by the legs of 
iron in Nebuchadnezzar's dream of the great image. 

"The fourth kingdom shall be strong as iron ; forasmuch as 
iron breaketh in pieces and subdueth all things : and as iron that 
breaketh all these, shall it break in pieces and bruise." Next is 
described the Kingdoms of Modern Europe. 

"Whereas thou sawest the feet and toes, part of potters* 
clay, and part of iron, the kingdom shall be divided; but there 
shall be in it the strength of the iron, forasmuch as thou sawest 
the iron mixed with miry clay. "And as the toes of the feet 
were part of iron, and part of clay, so the kingdom shall be 
partly strong and partly broken. And whereas thou sawest iron 
mixed with miry clay, they shall mingle themselves with the 
seed of men : but they shall not cleave one to another, even as 
iron is not mixed with clay." The fifth part, or clay, is the 
nations of Europe not controlled by the Roman power. As the 
stone cut out of the mountain "without hands," smote the image 
in such a manner that all its parts, representative of national 
dominion, were ground to dust and blown away, so the coming 
kingdom, set up "without hands," by no human power, but by 
the power of the eternal God, will rule the nations of the earth. 

The stone which smote the image on its feet is a represen- 
tation of the present world's war. The feet of the image repre- 
sent the feet or end of the age in Europe, as a cycle of time. The 
image ground to dust means that the present form of govern- 
ments for the nations east of Greenwich will be destroyed and 
a powerful combination of nations will form a new government, 
as illustrated in the great mountains, which filled the whole 
earth. This is the God's kingdom or Universal Republic, which 
is to have power over the entire world. 

Chapter 23. 
alexander the great's empire. 
This age can be divided into different nations; the Persian, 
the Macedonian, the Egyptian, the Syrian, the Maccabean, down 



Part III— Chapter 23. 113 

to the Roman. Each had part of the country and ruled their 
given time. The Empire began in the east in 536 or 538 B. C 
as the Persian Empire and extended to the beginning of the 
Roman Empire. 

The beginning of a real independent nation in Palestine did 
not take place until the Maccabean age in 166 B. C. Palestine^ 
as a nation, only existed 125 years. The rest of the time Pales- 
tine was a dependency of other nations. After Palestine comes 
Greece as a dividing line. The recorded history of Greece is the 
same story over again, it is a horoscope for that part of country 
for that time. 

Rome as a power over the eastern nations began in 63 B. C. 
when Pompey captured Jerusalem, after which time the Romans 
had control over the entire country. The Maccabean as Greece 
ruled during the Roman age until 40 B. C. 

The beginning of the Roman Empire was the birth of the 
Christian or European age, set at 40 B. €,. which is 40 degrees 
east longitude, and was during the time when Cleopatra was 
queen of Turkey. It was during Cleopatra's time that this part 
of the country became subject to Rome. Cleopatra ruled over 
Egypt and the rest of the nations in Turkey. She was forced 
by Rome to give birth to the Roman Empire as an age. 

Turkey is the house of Naphtali or Virgo as a virgin, and 
Turkey and Palestine is the birthplace of the age. The great 
and beautiful queen Cleopatra ruled in Turkey at the time of the 
birth of the Christian or Roman Empire and she was the virgin, 
through which the Child was born, as seen from an historical 
point of view. 

The years used in the Bible are the degrees; the Roman 
Empire and the Greek and Roman Churches represent the 
Christian religion as the Christian age. The beginning of the 
age was at 40 degrees B. C. The real beginning of the western 
or European age was at 63 degrees east. The rulers from 60 
degrees to 40 degrees were the Maccabees and are included ir 
the Roman division. 

The Bible states that the time of the Roman Empire was 
from 40 degrees B. C. to 70 A. D., which is 110 years or de- 
grees. 40 degrees east of Greenwich gives the eastern borders 
of Palestine where the Roman Empire begins. 70 A. D. gives 
the east coast of the United States at 70 degrees longitude west 
of Greenwich and here is where the Roman Empire as an age, 
dies. 



114 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

Chapter 24. 
the savior. 

Jesus, the Christ and Savior, has been described as a man, 
but is really a representation of a period of time as a cycle. It 
is the Christian age and is also known as the dominion of the 
Roman Empire. 

The cycle as illustrated by Jesus is the last of the twelve 
similar periods of which the Bible gives a record, and is for the 
double house of Pisces. It is the cycle of time for the Greek and 
Roman Catholic Churches, which began when our solar center 
was at 36 degrees east and ends at 4 degrees east. 

The few years of recorded history of Jesus has been illus- 
trated by the Catholic and Christian Churches to have taken 
place in Palestine and this mistake we aim to correct. 

First, it should be remembered that Jesus the Christ is 
always a representation of the planet Uranus "The Savior." 
Jesus as Uranus, was born in Palestine and his life (or cycle) 
continued until he was within four degrees of Greenwich, or in 
the Alps Mountains, where his life cycle ended. We must repeat 
that it is entirely a mistake to think that a philosophy and 
doctrine of life as complete as Jesus represents, covering the 
laws of the universe, could have been lived in thirty-two years 
by any human being. We should follow the laws as laid down 
by Moses and we will see, that the life principle as illustrated 
in the life of Jesus and his disciples is greater than any one 
man's life. 

Christ represents a principle, a doctrine of life, the teach- 
ings of the Christian spirit of the age. The philosophy as pre- 
sented in the Christian religions is in the true sense of the word 
Christianity, but the teachers of this doctrine are misinformed 
as to what the terms Christ or Savior mean. The Bible illus- 
trates the doctrine of the Christ as a universal law of God. The 
Christian churches have made it a teaching of ceremony and 
church worship of a personal God. The Bible describes a uni- 
versal and eternal life and the churches teach personal opinions 
regarding conditions in places called heaven and hell. 

There have been millions of books published on the life 
of Christ in Palestine, and not one book about his life of 2000 
years, giving the truth of what his life actually was. 

The Savior has lived, as an age, in the name of the Greek 
and Roman Catholic Churches, and has been misrepresented. 



Part III— Chapter 24. 115 

His life work was perfect but the human race did not want to 
accept his teachings, and at the end of his time he was taken by 
force and crucified. He did not object to being crucified as he 
knew the scripture had to be fulfilled and he carried his cross 
and was crucified by the multitude who had listened to his teach- 
ings. From this it will be seen that the Christian nations are 
the crucifiers of Christ. 

During the life of Christ a great mistake was made by all ; 
that God needed an authorized assistant on earth, one who God 
appointed as dictator over his children. God needs no pope, 
priest or clergyman to represent him in the manifestations of 
His Laws of the universe, as his doctrines are for an eternal 
life, regardless of belief or man's opinion. The Bible illustrates 
that life is eternal and it does not matter where man lives and 
what his belief or opinions are, because life cannot be destroyed. 

The circumcision (or reformation) spoken of in the Bible 
referred to the different races and in educating them to follow 
Christ and live according to Nature which is to worship God. 
To sin is to make error or mistakes and abuse the law, if we 
realize that life is eternal we should be educated not to make 
mistakes, which we will be sorry for later in life. 

As the Christian age, as a period of time, had a beginning 
and ending, so has all life a time to manifest in, whether this 
manifestation be what is considered erroneous or not. The 
cycle of time for the Christian churches as well as for all other 
churches is now at an end, when the facts shall be known and 
the truth shall make all mankind free. 

We have spoken of the life of Christ, which com.es to an end 
in 1918 as an age. We will now take up the life of the Apostle 
Paul as a principle, described in the Book of Acts. The perfect 
and beautiful teachings as presented in the character of Christ 
is now illustrated by the Apostle Paul. The ancient Bible 
writers knew what would take place at the end of time, for they 
had observed the same conditions in former ages. We know that 
history has been written ahead of time for a reason. Disre- 
garding the reason why, we will aim to explain that the philoso- 
phy of life as presented by Paul is transferred from Europe to 
the Pacific Coast. There is a reason why the life of Christ 
should be lived in Europe. After the termination of His age, a 
spiritual life or a life after death, is to be known, and brought 
out from the Pacific Coast States. We will give the same reason 
for this as the Bible does. Abraham, Isaac and Jacob 



116 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

did not want to be buried outside of the Land of Canaan; so 
the Christian age also is to come to an end in Canaan. 

We will say for example that Christ as an age is dead and 
buried, that the time between 1918 and 1921 has passed. The 
three years between 1918 and 1921 represent the three days 
before Christ's resurrection. When the new age begins it will 
be found that a teaching will come from the Pacific Coast States 
which will positively prove that Christianity in the flesh is dead, 
but that a higher life, a life after death is a reality. The Bible 
gives us this information in the New Testament which is the 
law for the new age. The life as illustrated by the Apostles is 
the teaching that Christianity is not to die when Christ dies ; but 
that Christ lives in the spirit. We will find that Christianity 
will leave the churches as creed organizations but will have the 
Christ within their hearts. This is the New Age. It is the life 
whiQh shows that Christ had entered his heavenly home and 
lives with his father and rules the spiritual kingdom. 

The teachings written in the new testament are to begin 
on the Pacific Coast and will spread over the entire world ; this 
doctrine of eternal life will be the religion of the world for the 
next one thousand years. 

The reason for this law is that there is a God-given law, 
a power above all, which is the father of all creation. God, the 
almighty father, and creator of worlds, has given this law. It 
is the same God who let the sun shine, the rain fall and the wind 
blow. Those who question the power of God to make this' law 
are the ones who have false Gods, but we are informed that 
they have eyes to see and ears to hear, but see and hear not. 
In the new age the spirit will come over them and they will see 
and hear God. They will see that the death of Christ in the 
flesh on the battlefield of Europe is comparatively the same as 
the death of the human body of flesh; but as Christ rises from 
the dead and lives in the spirit so does the human being live after 
the torture of death, as life is eternal with the father. The 
philosophy of the Bible is to teach the principle that to die is 
to be born again from a lower to a higher form of expression. 
From this comes the term that ''there is no death" for it is only 
a change. 

We happen to live in the age when the Christ principle or 
doctrines change from the material, or church age, to the new 
age of the Universal Republic. The Christian spirit will now 
manifest God, and worship in temples not made with hands. 



Pai^t III— Chapter 24. 117 

This is when God has destroyed the old and made all things 
new. 

We have said that the manifestation of the new age will 
take place on the Pacific Coast and that the doctrine shall spread 
all over the worlds. We will now mention the places on the 
Pacific Coast where this teaching is going to originate. The 
Bible writers have described the place and we will give them 
according to the Scripture. 

The City of Jerusalem corresponds to Los Angeles, and is 
to be the headquarters for missionary work. The Los Angeles 
section belongs to the tribe of Judah, as Leo, and is the heart 
of things on the Coast, spiritually. The people of Los Angeles 
will be the first to realize that Christ is not dead. Whenever the 
place of Jerusalem is spoken of in the Apostles' time, the Los 
Angeles section of California is meant. 

The City of Gaza is San Diego, and here will be the estab- 
lishment of schools and hospitals. San Diego will be the city 
for right and justice and the citizens there will practice the 
golden rule. As Los Angeles will be the headquarters for busi- 
ness, so will Gaza, as San Diego, be a place for spiritual unfold- 
ment, a place for training of teachers who understand the Lav^^ 
of God. The Theosophical Society will now find Christ within, 
and they do not have to come back and reincarnate. San Diego 
County is in the country of the tribe of Simeon and is the home 
or house of the Son of God. 

The city of San Francisco has been called by many names 
in Bible history. A new name has been given to this city in 
nearly every age. The oldest name on record is in Joshua's 
time when it was known as Jericho. San Francisco has alway? 
been illustrated as a bad woman but she was healed and saved 
in every instance. 

It will be found that when San Francisco is spoken of, 
that the one who saved her was let down in a basket. The name 
of Ceasarea was used for San Francisco. There are many other 
names but these are the principal ones. In the later years 
Ceasarea was used. San Francisco is apparently not going to 
produce any special spiritual manifestations, but will be one 
of the headquarters for the reform movement. When the 
Apostle Paul is spoken of as going to Ceasarea he is going to 
San Francisco, and each one of his stops made on his various 
trips is made at this city. San Francisco is in the country of 
the tribe of Benjamin. 



118 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

The city of Portland, Oregon, corresponds to Antioch and 
to Antiochus — Epiphanes of Greece. It is situated by the river 
Orontes, which corresponds to the Willamette River. 

Antioch is situated, the Bible says, near a deep pass in 
the mountains, this represents the pass betv^een the Taurus 
Mountains of Washington and the Lebanon Mountain range, 
which is the Cascade Mountains in Oregon. We will ask Bible 
students to take notice, that the Columbia River separates the 
Taurus and the Lebanon Mountains, and that the Willamette 
River is spoken of as the Orantes River. The city of Antioch 
corresponds to a great city and covers the territory where Port- 
land is located. It must have been located on its present site 
because the description is perfect. It is one of the stopping 
places for the Apostle Paul and one of the places from which 
the gospel of truth is to come. Joshua sent his army north from 
Jericho; they came up through what is now the Willamette 
Valley but did not stop long in any place. They went as far as 
the Puget Sound and captured the country there. The Siskiyou 
Mountains are the Carmel Mountains spoken of. Portland is 
in the country of the tribe of Manesseh. 

Ephesus corresponds to the city of Seattle. Speaking com- 
paratively it is situated in Lydia and belongs to Greece. The 
population are Greeks and not very religious but good business 
people. This is at best the description given in treatise pub- 
lished in church literature. The cities on the Puget Sound are 
described in Bible study literature as being located in Greece 
and part of them in Asia. The travels of the Apostle Paul from 
Antioch and to the seven churches are very plain; the descrip- 
tion is as accurate as though it had been written today. 

The Puget Sound is illustrated as the Eagean Sea; Van- 
couver Island, British Columbia, is shown as Peloponesus, Cor- 
inth is Victoria and Athens corresponds to Vancouver City, B. C. 
The counties of the state of Washington on the Sound correspond 
to the places in Greece as from Thessalonia to Lycia. The in- 
land country corresponds to Galatia, the situation of Spokane. 
The city of Tyre is the Olympic Mountains. The great Zidon is 
the mountain of Rainier; which is the highest mountain in the 
northwest. 

The Bible students have made a great mistake in placing the 
travels of the Apostle Paul in Greece; but they had no other 
place to locate them for they did not fit in Palestine. The Bible 
says it is located west, so the translators made it Greece. It 



Part III— -Chapter 24. 119 

says he traveled from and to certain places and described tlie 
places. If the corresponding cities on the Sound were travelled 
by Paul; he took in Olympia as Tarsus; Tacoma as Patara in 
Lycia ; Seattle as Ephesus in Lydia ; Everett as Troas in Mysia ; 
Spokane as Tavium in Galatia ; and we believe the city of Icon- 
ium is located east of the mountains. 

Paul, like Jesus, had a definite circuit to travel and he made 
his four journeys, including the retrograde action of Uranus, 
when Paul made a return loop on his trip. We must not forget 
that Paul is the planet Uranus and when it says he visits the 
seven churches in the west, he calls at the same time on the 
seven tribes or houses which are located west of the mountains. 

At the time of the beginning of the new age in 1921, the 
Pacific Coast States will consist of five sections. See chapter 
on the United States regarding Judeah, Samaria, Galilee as the 
States of California, Oregon and Washington. East of the 
mountains Perrea is Nevada and Decapolis is the inland empire. 

The next division is that of California, becoming a separ- 
ate nation and having five tribes within her boundaries. The 
northwest as Oregon and Washington is to be a nation and has 
the seven and later the ten tribes. Paul travels the same road 
as Joshua and the Judges ; he first stays in California, then he 
moves northwest and finally passes north on his way to China, 
w^here he is finally killed. 



Part IV. 

BIBLE PROPHECIES. 

Chapter 25. 
earth life compared. 

It is our aim to show that the Bible contains the study of 
the heavens and that the Laws of Moses are the laws of the 
universe which govern the sun and planets in their respective 
orbits. Each and every one of the cycles of time which have 
passed have been illustrated as a human being and the life of 
each of the individuals, from birth to death, has been the repre- 
sentation of an age. The last of the periods of time is the life 
of Christ as illustrated in the Christian age, beginning with the 
Romans and Julius Caesar and ending with the Romans and 
Kaiser Wilhelm. 

The Christian age comes to an end with the crucifying of 
Christ in the present war, terminating in 1918. 

The next age is the life of the Apostles and the same system 
is followed out in the new dispensation as in the former. When 
the patriarchs die there is always an individual who takes the 
place of the leading spirit. When Christ died the Apostle Saul- 
Paul became the leader ; he will now represent the planet Uranus 
in the next generation for he is Saul at the beginning of the 
cycle at 120 degrees west and becomes Paul in the north Pacific 
Coast divisions. It is the same story over, only the story is now 
of a spiritual nature. 

We will repeat here what we have stated elsewhere that the 
illustrations as pictured in the Bible are the moving westward 
with the degrees of the Zodiac and that the planet Uranus is the 
center from which this calculation is made. 

The earth is divided into three great divisions of 120 degrees 
each constituting an age. The great cycle begins and ends at 
Greenwich time, but the ages begin at 40 degrees east and ter- 
minate at 80 degrees west from each of the three 120-degree 
cycles. This means that 360 degrees are divided into three 120- 
degree ages ; which is again divided into three 40-degree ages. 

In order to illustrate this, we will say that the constellations 
and the stars constitute a universe. The earth is a universe in 
itself and so is each part of the earth within certain degrees, a 
cycle within a cycle. There are several divisions of the earth 



Part IV—Chapte7' 25. 121 

within the zone of Uranus, which according to the Bible, are 
centers for the patriarchs. The Uranus zone is a belt of 24 de- 
grees width and is between 24 degrees and 54 degrees latitude 
north, which encircles the globe. 

The calculation of ages is for a distance of degrees and the 
length of the age is according to the number of degrees within a 
given space. The cycle, or ages, as figured within the zone of 
Uranus consist of degrees counted from Greenwich, and contain 
one year for each degree; the different cycles are divided into 
minor angles or ages according to the nature of the country 
described. A center is established and degrees calculated west- 
and east from this center, which constitute a cycle. 

The ancient or Bible writers set up a figure of the heavens 
and called it a life time for their particular section according 
to the age they lived in. That is, the Greeks set up a figure for 
their cycle; the Babylonians set up for Asia and the Turks set 
up a figure for Palestine for their time. This is what is known 
\today as the setting up of a horoscope, called a nativity. 

The figure for a nation or age is the building of their temple ; 
lat is, if a figure is to be set up for the United States, the 40 
agrees east longitude and the 80 degrees west of the 120th 
d^ree is used as a center. The twelve houses or signs of the 
heavens are then arranged according to the law, as laid down by 
Moies, and calculations made for the time when the planets pass 
tirough the twelve houses. The planets Uranus, Neptune and 
^turn are the planets which are spoken of in the Bible together 
wth the fixed stars. 

The dividing and subdividing of each part of the country is 
decribed in detail in the books of Moses and Joshua. The 
twQve children of any of the old patriarchs or the twelve div- 
isiois of the heavens are simply the dividing of space into the 
tweve sections. The division of seven spoken of in the Bible 
are -he seven houses ; for instance, the seven churches are the 
sevei tribes of Israel; the five houses are the five tribes of 
Juda^; which are the opposition element in Israel. 

lie main features to be considered are the travels of the 
planet as illustrated by the patriarchs or age through the 
heaven and the aspects of the planets to each other and to the 
differet locations. When it states in the Bible that Jesus 
travell^ from one town or location to another it is a represen- 
tation c* ihe travels of Uranus through the twelve houses of 
the figU-B for Europe. From this will be seen why Jesus did 



122 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

not get outside of a very small space, as the horoscope set for 
Palestine was for only a few miles. 

The horoscope which was set up by the ancient Bible writers 
for the Apostle Paul, is set up for the Pacific Coast section. The 
entire coast is laid out and described in the Bible. We will take 
the space and describe this part of the story in detail, as it is 
apparent the writers were very well familiar with the country. 

The horoscope for the Pacific Coast reaches from Mexico to 
British Columbia and from Utah to the Pacific Ocean. The 
coast was laid out in the twelve divisions and called tribes. The 
same names for the twelve tribes are used here as were described 
to be in Palestine and represent the character and nature of the 
country. The names of the cities as described in the age of Pal- 
estine were used, but many new names were given. The names 
of the cities of Jerusalem, Gaza, Bethlehem and many others 
were used, but in the north, Greek names were given. The 
Bible students who have illustrated that the Apostle PauFe 
travels were in Greece have failed utterly, and they say then?- 
selves that they do not know where the travels, as recorded, tale 
place. 

The Apostle Paul is Uranus and his trips up and down >he 
Pacific Coast are the travels in the twelve houses. Uranus sfeiys 
seven years in each house and his time can easily be figured. 
The other Apostles or helpers he had represent the houses l^e 
meets and works with in his mission. The Apostle Peter spokm 
of is the house of Ephraim or Aries and when it says that Pail 
sent for a certain helper to meet him in a city or place, it meais 
that the helper is the house he is going to, which he has siit 
for. So instead of going to the place, he sends for the plac^to 
meet him. It will be found that the description of Simon-Pf/er, 
James and all the disciples of Jesus representing the trib^ is 
written in the New Testament and is a representation ofthe 
European Age. The description of the Israelites is foup in 
the Old Testament and represents the nations of Europe /ailed 
Egypt, and in Asia is called Babylonians. 

It should be remembered when studying the Bible tjat the 
Israelites and Judeah tribes are the Twelve European Nafons of 
today, and are called the Jews and Israelites in manV places 
in the Bible. The opposition of Israel are the Jews anjconsti- 
tute the five tribes of the Germans, Turks, and their Alp. The 
records of the Judah tribes are the Mormon Bible and tW ^^^^ords 



Part IV— Chapter 26. 123 

of the Israelites as twelve tribes are the Jewish or Christian 
Bible. 

The seven tribes of Israel are the nations of France, Eng- 
land, Scandinavia, Italy, Switzerland, Russia and Spain. The 
five tribes of Judah are Germany, Austria-Hungary, Greece, 
Turkey and Holland-Belgium. 

The two Bibles with the prophecies for the present time 
correspond, that is, both Bibles say that the Israelites will win 
the war and that Judah will lose and be driven out of their coun- 
try. The coming or new age, however, will be in peace and 
harmony, for the ''lion and the lamb shall lay down together" 
and one shall not hurt the other. From this we see in the 
prophecies what the condition in Europe will be, as it will termi- 
nate in peace, happiness, and friendship. 

Chapter 26. 
historical events. 

It will be necessary to give an outline of history as re- 
corded by historians of Bible study, so we may know that it is a 
fact that the historical events as recorded are the moving of 
the tribes westward. It must be remembered that a nation, 
tribe, a section or an empire, means the same. It is the building 
of the temple as the building of Jerusalem and means the setting 
up of a horoscope for a given territory. It is the same as the 
Roman Empire, which means an age. The temple, or age, for 
Rome is from 40 degrees east to 70 degrees west. The destruction 
of the different temples is the capturing and killing of the old 
cycles or territory when the new and western kingdoms and 
empires become rulers. This is the slow^ progress of the moving 
with the degrees and civilization westward and around the earth 
which is spoken of elsewhere. 

As the history of all ages has been recorded to have taken 
place in Palestine and nearby countries, so have the names of the 
cities and places there been given by the translators of the Bible. 
This is best illustrated by the name of Jerusalem; this city is in 
Palestine and represents the same to Palestine as Rome does to 
the Roman Empire. It is not Rome as a city which is meant ; it 
is the Roman power as a nation and church controlling an age. 
The citj^ of Rome is a Jerusalem, and the Christian religion is 
now being crucified and the Romans as Catholics and Christians 
are the crucifiers of the age. The city of Constantinople is 



124 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

described the same way and is another city on * 'Seven Hills/' the 
same as Rome. Constantinople is the home for the harlot of the 
Mohammedan Church and represents the cycle of Asia and is 
the Jerusalem for the degrees between 30 and 60 east. It is very 
unfortunate that the names of Palestine should be translated and 
used for places in Asia, Europe, and America, but as all names 
and places correspond to a given location it is easy to follow. 

In reference to the period of time as recorded in the Bible, 
we find that the beginning of Bible history corresponds to the 
year 4004 B. C. We will copy a few eventful cycles in order to 
show that all dates correspond to the cycles we have given. 

From Adam's time 4004 to the cycle of Noah 2948 is 1056 
years. From Noah to Abraham in 1996 is 952 years. From 
Abraham to David 1085 is 911 years. From David to the Roman 
Empire in 40 is 1045 years. The first 40 years of the age of the 
Romans are added to the old cycle in order to make it correspond 
to 4004 years in all. The ages as given are copied from the Bible 
and are correct. 

The following years also copied from the Bible for the pur- 
pose of giving students of cycles dates to figure from. 

From Adam 4004, at Greenwich, to Noah on the Pacific 
Ocean at the time of the flood in 2348 is 1656 years. From the 
flood to the beginning of Abraham's cycle at Greenwich in 1921 
is 427 years. From the time Abraham enters Canaan in 1921 to 
Moses* death in 1452 is 469 years. From the death of Moses in 
1452 to the time of Solomon in 1012 is 440 years. From the 
time of Solomon in 1012 to the time of captivity in Babylon in 
588 is 424 years. From 588, which is the beginning of the 
Asiatic age called the captivity, to the Roman Age at 50 B. C. is 
538 years. We must add the 50 years of the Roman cycle to 
make the full 4004 years. 

It is interesting to note that the year when Abraham en- 
tered Canaan (United States) was 1921 B. C. This is the time 
of the ending of the cycle at Greenwich and corresponds to our 
own year of 1921 A. D. Abraham was born in 1996 but he is 
allowed 75 years to build a temple, which is the 75 degrees across 
the Atlantic Ocean. We subtract the 75 from 1996 and get 
1921. Take the age of Belshazzar's feast in Nebuchadnezzar's 
time at 538. This age can be figured accurately and the location 
of the place calculated to the degree. We follow the system, as 
explained in the chapter of cycles, and use the 360 degrees for 
years. Deduct first one cycle of 360 degrees from 538 and you 



Part IV— Chapter 26. 125 

have 178 degrees. From an atlas of the world can be figured 
178 degrees west of Greenwich and we find the place where the 
cycles begin at the International Date Line. 

This is the beginning and place of Modern Bible study, 
where history was made, as pictured from Nebuchadnezzar to 
the time at 30 degrees east to the Egyptian age. The Julian Cal- 
endar's age begins with the Egyptian period and extends to 
1921. 

The 2300-year period as spoken of in the Bible is the 32 
degrees from Palestine to the Alps. This is the time that the 
Bible system of figuring 72 years to the degree can be proved, for 
32 times 72 is 2304 years. Palestine is 36 degrees east and 
Belgium 4 degrees east, making the age of Christ 32 years. 

Egypt is translated as the center from which all the calcu- 
lations were figured for Joseph's time. 

Egypt is located at 30-degree latitude as well as 30-degree 
longitude and was a great center up to the time of Greece and 
Rome. It must be remembered that the time of figuring degrees 
for Egypt stops with the Roman age. It is, however, interesting 
to follow Bible history to see what periods each age describes. 
Nebuchadnezzar began at 600 B. C, which is 62 degrees before 
Belshazzar, who ruled at the 182nd degree east. The beginning 
and ending of the empires is figured the same way in degrees. 
Nebuchadnezzar's period began at the 120th degree east and 
from this to the 30th degree in Egypt is easy to follow. The 70 
years referred to as Jerusalem's fall, is the 70 degrees west of 
Greenwich as being added to the Roman age. 

The degrees to figure from are, Nebuchadnezzar at the 120th 
degree east and the beginning of the Roman Empire began 
40 B. C. (degree) east to 70 degrees west of Greenwich. From 
this can be figured all the ages within this period in years. Do 
not confuse the Julian Calendar years with the beginning degree 
of the Roman Empire, for the Calendar changed time later. We 
will, however, follow the story of the Bible and make compari- 
son as to the time of events. 

It should be understood that both the Mohammedan and 
Christian Churches are described in the Bible and that it is very 
difficult at times to know which one is meant, but since both 
represent the same principle and are described the same, and 
both are going to their doom at the end of time, it is immaterial 
which one is meant. 



126 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

We can go back and figure from the time at the beginning 
of the cycle at 538 B. C. All Bible students know that this is 
the beginning of a complete generation. From 538 B. C. to 538 
in the Christian Age gives 1076 ; this is Pope Gregory's time. 

Bible students have found that the year 1798 is the end of 
a certain cycle, but can give no reason for it. It is apparent 
that this year is the end of the time for church cycle; which is 
correct. The darkest of all the periods of church time was when 
Pope Gregory the seventh (Hildebrand) held the power in Rome 
at 1078. It was at the time of the trouble with King Henry of 
Germany that the Pope ruled and ruined. The central or con- 
trolling power of Christianity reached its height in the year 
of 1078. The cycle began at 538 degrees to which we have to 
add the 1260 degrees (years) which brings us to 1798. The 1260 
represents the seven houses as the time from 538, which is 7 
times 180 and equals 1260. Which again is from Belshazzar's 
space to Greenwich. The year 1798 subtracted from 1918 
leaves 120 years (degrees west). 

In 538 at the time of Belshazzar, who is also called the 
Prophet Daniel. He gives us time to figure, and describes the 
different periods up to the end. He illustrates the different times 
with the picture of animals to show the nations and conditions 
which would be during the next 2300 years. Read in the 10th 
chapter of Daniel and the entire vision is very clear. It should 
be remembered that each division consists of 180 years to each 
house of the heaven and three houses make one division of a 
quarter cycle of 540 years. When Daniel makes a calculation of 
time, it is for the houses of heaven, but Gabriel is the planet 
Uranus and when he is spoken of for time, it is the 84-year 
period. 

We will take 538 B. C. as the beginning and add a cycle 538 
A. D. giving 1076 the time of Pope Gregory. The time of Uranus 
is 84 years and he has made twelve revolutions, 12 times 84 
equals 1008. Add the 70 years (for Jerusalem's fall) making 
1078. It will be found that 1080 is one-half of 2160 years and in 
this age all three of the planets were in the same aspect to each 
other, as they are at the present time. 

The following is an extract from a book published by the 
Seventh Day Advent Church: "Which then is the Church? 
The one which rose at about the time, and operated 42 prophetic 
months, or 1260 years, (538-1798) was the papacy. She calls 
herself the Holy Catholic Church." This is a fact in both ways 



Part IV— Chapter 26. 127 

and we take it for granted the cKurch was established in 538. 
We will show that God established the church Empires according 
to his wisdom, and also all other churches. Take the year 538 
or 540, figure any way you want, you will not go many years out 
of the way. The 1260 year, as here spoken of, is the time of the 
seven houses of the earth, each house is 180 years and seven 
churches of Israel makes 1260 years. The planet Uranus makes 
a circuit in 84 years ; half of 84 is 42 years or prophetic months. 

The 2300 period can also be calculated in a previous cycle 
from the time of the flood. This is in 2348 B. C. and when we 
allow for the 49 years to the Roman age, it will be found correct. 

We will give one more positive figure that the Bible ages as 
given in years, are the degrees as figured from Greenwich. The 
ages, as given by the Prophet Daniel, gives us the correct degrees 
to figure from. Daniel describes the beginning of the age for 
Asia-Europe as the Church-Empire from 538 B. C. It is de- 
scribed in the book of Daniel that at the time of the end certain 
events would take place. The years of 1260, 1290 and 1335 are 
spoken of as eventful and at the conclusion of these events as 
described, is the time of the end. The year 538 B. C. together 
with 1260 brings us to 1798. Which is the year of the beginning 
of the end of the Roman Church, when the Pope was taken pris- 
oner by France. The next is 538 degrees and 1290 degrees ; by 
adding these we get 1828; this is the end of the Turkish rule 
as a Mohammedan power when Turkey lost in the war with 
Russia. The year of 1828 was the beginning of the special cycle 
of Uranus of his last circuit of the houses. To 1828 add 84, the 
time of Uranus and this gives 1912, which is the year Uranus 
entered the house of Aquarius and when the Balkan war started. 
We next take 538 and add 1335 and we get 1873, the end of the 
Prussian-Franco wars; which brought on the hateful condition 
between France and Germany. 

In Daniel 12 :5 is described a prophecy of a period of years 
to the end of time. It says ''it shall be for a time, times and a 
half.'' ''A time'' is a cycle of 360 degrees, "times" is two 
cycles or 720 degrees, and ''A half time" is 180 degrees. Adding 
these together we get 1260 degrees, which is the correct age. 
Bible students have figured this cycle but they did not know 
how it was calculated by Daniel. The 538 degrees is calculated 
the same way; 360 degrees from 538 degrees is 178 degrees, 
which is near the International Date Line. These degrees indi- 
cate that the Mohammedans and Romans would rule Asia and 



128 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Europe up to the time of the end. The calculations for the events 
of the two great religions will be found in Daniel 12 and in Rev- 
elation 18 and 19. 

We find that the calculations of space and time around the 
earth, as described in the Bible, is correct and that the 360- 
degree cycle is used entirely for the tribes when time is figured. 
This is what we have termed the location for events which take 
place where time and space are measured. 

The events figured in degrees from Adam to the present 
time is in cycles of time of the planet Uranus and is calculated 
in 84-year cycles. The Uranus cycle of 1008 years has been lost 
to the church people during the Roman age, but the astrological 
books give his cycles and the knowledge of Uranus is now 
known. In mythology the Uranian age was described as Uro- 
anna, which means the Uranus cycle of time. 

The 6000 years from Adam to the present time is figured 
from the cycles of Uranus. From this we figure that the time of 
the end is now. iWe also know that Uranus entered Aquarius 
in 1912 which is the time from which to calculate, together with 
1918 when Uranus and Saturn were in opposition. 

By adding 4004 to 1912 gives 5916 years; if we add one 
cycle of 84 years it brings us to 6000 years. If we begin with 
the Julian calendar year and calculate to the end of the age at 
1912, adding 84 years we have 1996 which coresponds to the 
year Abraham was born. Adding 1920 and 84 years gives 2004 
years, the beginning of the Julian age, to the end of the Uranus 
cycles. The four years of the 4004 in the ''Garden of Eden" and 
also the 4 B. C. is for the 4 degrees east of Greenwich when 
Uranus is killed at the end of the cycles. 

The modern Bible students have proven that the prophecies 
of Daniel are the prophecies concerning the Persian, Greek and 
Roman periods. The history as described by Daniel is from 
538 B. C. to the present time, and the events as described have 
actually taken place. Students of Bible prophecies have fol- 
lowed events described in the Bible and traced the leading events 
of the age, and found that history was actually written before- 
hand from 540 B. C. time to the present. 

There is a singular similarity between the modern Bible 
students' view on Bible time and the Catholic Church's time, 
that is, they both stop at the time of their prophecies. The 
Roman Church stopped at the birth of the Christian age in Pal- 
estine and is no further today than it was at the beginning of the 



Part IV— 'Chapter 27. 129 

age. The present day Bible students have found that the time 
of the Bible extends to the Roman age and read in the prophecies 
the history of the Catholic Church and of the period up to Rome 
and stop there. If they will continue to read the Bible and see 
what is to take place, they will see their mistake. Modern Bible 
students are still talking about the Turkish Empire and the Pal- 
estine time and age. The Roman doctrine is that the world with 
Jesus, as a man, lived in Palestine and this doctrine has been 
forced into their minds until they are all blind. If our good 
friends will extend their philosophy a few miles west of Rome 
and on to Greenwich they will find that the end of the age and 
also the end of the world is there. It is a mistake to think that 
the age began with Adam and stopped with the birth of Christ 
in Palestine. It stands to reason that the age has to be lived 
and that the Christian age does not terminate before the death 
of Christ. The Christian age is now being crucified on the bat- 
tlefield of Europe, and the power, which was held by nations and 
churches east of Greenwich, is now at an end for now is the time 
of the end. 

The cycle for the Christian age constitutes 2000 years which 
means 200 degrees in distance on the earth. This cycle began 
at 120 degrees east and extends to 80 degrees west, making the 
200 degrees in all. The Bible describes that the philosophy of 
life, which originated in Babylon (Asia) would continue for 
2000 years and be destroyed at the time of the end. From this 
we can see that the philosophy promulgated by the Roman and 
Greek Catholic Churches did not originate in Greece or Rome, 
but followed with civilization westward from Asia to Europe. 

We have given a number of comparative illustrations of 
the method used in the Bible from which to calculate time and 
space and we feel confident that this system is understood. 

Attention is called to the fact that the three great religious 
organizations of the world are located within the 120-degree 
cycle east of Greenwich. They are the Buddhist, Mohammedan 
and Christian. These organizations are spoken of as harlots, 
robbers and murderers who are to be destroyed at the time of 
the end of the world. 

Chapter 27. 

the life of jesus. 

The life of Jesus, described in the Bible, contains too many 
topics to be referred to in detail, but we will select a few prin- 
ciples to illustrate the system used by the Bible writers. 



130 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

The method used in the Bible to locate the degrees within 
the age is very interesting. We will describe the age of Jesus 
as an example and show how to locate the different degrees given 
for his age. 

The life of Jesus is described to take place during the time 
of the Roman Empire and as the Roman Age begins at 40 
degrees east, (in Turkey) and lasts to 70 degrees west we must 
figure within this distance to locate his life. It is written that 
Jesus was born of a virgin and we find that this house is located 
at 36 degrees east. The period of time or life of Jesus was 32 
years, (degrees) when he is described to have been crucified. 
As Palestine is 36 degrees east we subtract 32 degrees from the 
36 degrees which equals 4 degrees east or 4 B. C. where he was 
killed. The 4 degrees east strikes in Belgium and France where 
Jesus, as an age, was crucified, as illustrated in the present war. 

The children of Israel and the disciples of Jesus represent 
the nations of Europe and it is for the period of Europe, as the 
Christian Church age, that the life of Jesus is described. The 
first event in the life of Jesus was at 8 days of age, when the 
circumcision took place. The 8 days means 8 degrees east and 
represent the location of the holy mountains of the Alps, giving 
the exact degree. The second event describing location is where 
he was taken from Bethlehem ot Jerusalem at 40 days of age, 
which means that he was represented as the entire 40 degrees 
as from his birthplace to the temple (the Alps) in this Jerusa- 
lem. He was here recognized as the Messiah of Israel (Europe). 
The third event described is when Jesus was taken to Egypt 
(Europe) in order to escape the jealousy of Herod the Great. 
This illustrates the end of the age of Asia, when the children 
under 2 years of age east of the 30 degrees are ordered to be 
destroyed by Herod. The fourth event of the life of Jesus is 
described at 12 years of age, when he went to the temple to at- 
tend the passover. The 12 years indicates the location of Rome, 
which is 12 degrees east. He attended the passover, showing 
the end of a period of time in the Roman age. The fifth event 
is described at 30 years of age, when he began to teach Chris- 
tianity to the Israelites. The 30-year age spoken of is the 30 
degrees from Egypt to Greenwich as a complete house of 30 
degrees. The sixth and last age is at 32 years of age when he 
was crucified. This constitutes all the actual years as degrees 
described in the Bible for the events of the life of Jesus. 

The other events giving the life work of Jesus are the 



Part IV— Chapter 27. 131 

description of the nations of Europe showing the travels of Jesus 
in the different locations. It must be remembered that the life 
of Jesus is the representation of the planet Uranus and that the 
philosophy of life as given in the name of Jesus is the influence 
the planet Uranus gives in the different houses of the heaven. 
The same condition is produced and illustrated in the name of 
John the Baptist, who is the representation of the planet Nep- 
tune. John the Baptist as a prophet and teacher represented the 
church as a principle of a spiritual life. Jesus, as the Son of 
God, represents the doctrine of life for the entire human race. 
The story describing the beheading of John the Baptist is the 
same repetition of the death of Neptune a short time before that 
of Uranus. Neptune was described in all ages as the wife of the 
patriarchs, or the prophets, who assisted the leaders of Israel 
and this character as Neptune always died first. It was a virgin 
(Virgo) who asked for the head of John the Baptist and re- 
ceived it. The meaning of the asking for his head is that Neptune 
was in bad aspect to Saturn in the house of Virgo, (Turkey) ; 
illustrating the death of Neptune being at the end of the age. 
This event, as illustrated in the death of John the Baptist, is 
the killing of the power of the church empire or spiritual power 
of the church. John the Baptist was the prophet of the Chris- 
tian Age and represented the church power of the Roman Cath- 
olic Church ; when he was killed the church lost its power. The 
death of Neptune as John the Baptist took place in 1776, and 
after this time the Roman Church lost its power. 

The Life of Christ at the present age is referred to in the 
Bible when Jesus partakes of the passover. Read Matthew 26 : 
which corresponds to the year 1912 when the Balkan Nations 
began to make real trouble. From this period the powers of 
Europe tried to produce war. (This is the year Uranus entered 
the house of Aquarius). It mustbe remembered that the World's 
war is the crucifying of Christ and the arguments about Jesus 
before Pilate and other authorities are preparation or excuses 
for starting the war. In Matthew 26:57 Germany is named as 
Calaphas. The United States is called Peter who was repre- 
sented in Germany to see the end. 

The actual crucifying of Jesus is the war of the present 
time, each day as written in the Bible represents a year and the 
seven days as years count from 1914 to the beginning of 1921. 
The first 2 days (from 1912 to 1914) represent the events as 
described in Matthew 26. It says in verse 2: "ye know that 



132 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

after two days is the feast of the passover, and the son of man 
is betrayed too be crucified." That is, after 2 days, the war was 
to begin, which it did in 1914. The woman with the alabastar 
box represents Turkey, and the wasting of the ointment de- 
scribed in verse 8 represents the Balkan nations' first disturbance 
and war which took place then. The description, as given in 
verses 14 to 16, shows what the Roman power did to start the 
war. In chapter 26 : 17-57 is the description of the time of 2 years 
from 1912 to 1914 as the period of preparation for the crucifying 
of Jesus. From verse 57 is described the actual war in the tak- 
ing of Jesus and bringing him before Calaphas who represents 
the German power. It is written that Jesus took Peter and the 
two sons of Zebedee with him ; they represent the United States 
and Scandinavia. He asked them to wait for him, but they 
went to sleep; which means that they did not take part in the 
war. 

In Matthew 27 is the description of the war from day to day 
as years. Pontius Pilate represents Saturn. From verses 3 to 
10 is described the part the church takes in the war as Judas 
Iscariot. In verses 11 to 17 is described an imaginary accusation 
of crime, ''Art thou the king of the Jews?" which means: Are 
you representing the Christian nations of Europe? In verses 
19 to 25 is a description of Turkey and the part she took in the 
war at this time. In verse 19 is shown that Turkey did not 
want to enter the war. From verses 26 to 28 shows the time 
Turkey entered the war, when Barabbas was released and when 
''they stripped him and put on him a scarlet robe," meaning a 
robe of blood. In verses 29 to 32 is described the main part of 
the war and the man Simon of Cyrene represents Belgium, 
whom they compelled to bear his cross. In verses 33 to 34 "And 
when they were come unto a place called Golgotha, that is, a 
place of a skull, they gave him vinegar to drink mingled with 
gall." The place of the skull is the head of man and as France 
represents the head, it is in the upper part of France as the top 
of the head or skull, the Golgotha spoken of is located. The 
vinegar given is the liquid fire which was used by the Germans 
on this battlefield. From verses 35 to 44 is described the con- 
tinuation of the war, when the Germans were dividing the coun- 
try spoken of as the dividing of his garments. In verse 36 it says 
"And sitting down, they watched him there," which means a 
period of time. The two thieves crucified with him are the Bud- 
dhist and Mohammedan doctrines. 



Part IV— Chapter 27. 133 

The time of the actual death of Jesus is described from 
verses 45 to 50 when he died. This period corresponds to Octo- 
ber 1st, 1918, when the Germans recognized their defeat. The 
condition in Germany and her Allied countries are described 
from verses 51 to 56. The many women spoken of are the na- 
tions named in verse 56, and are named respectively Greece, 
Turkey, Holland, Denmark and Scandinavia. 

The rich man of Arimathsea, as Joseph, represents the 
United States, spoken of in verses 57 to 60. He asked for the 
body of Jesus from Pilate and obtained permission to bury him, 
which he did in his own new tomb, wrapped in clean linen 
cloth. The body of Jesus represents churchology; the linen 
cloth is a book and the tomb represents the mysteries of the 
ages. This means that a book will be published from the 
United States and in Europe explaining the life of Jesus and 
the teachings of the Bible. It says, "he rolled a great stone to 
the door of the sepulchre, and departed.'' The great stone is 
the astrological teachings which the new book contains. In 
verse 62 is described the condition from 1919, when the sol- 
diers are still watching the grave so the war will not come to 
life again. 

Matthew 28 describes the year 1919-20, *'as it began to 
dawn toward the first day of the week." Verse 2, **And be- 
hold, there was a great earthquake; for the angel of the Lord 
descended from heaven, and came and rolled back the stone 
from the door, and sat on it." The earthquake means revolu- 
tion, strikes and war all over the earth; the angel is the angle 
of 120 degrees from the Pacific Coast in the United States. It 
is this angel who sits on the stone after it has been rolled 
from the grave. The meaning of the stone being removed is, 
that the knowledge of what the Bible contains has become 
known. This knowledge comes from the good angle of 120 de- 
grees and is in the publication of a ''Little Book Open" as de- 
scribed in the book of Revelation. Chapter 10. 

We will describe the condition during the three years after 
the death of Jesus in 1918 to 1921. This is the three days 
referred to when Jesus remains dead and is in the tomb before 
he raises from the grave. It is during this period the soldiers 
are stationed at the grave as watchmen. The soldiers are the 
Allied nations' army, which are maintained in Europe to watch 
so that the war does not come to life again. It is during this 
watchful-waiting period of three years that the earthquake is 



134 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

described to take place. The earthquake represents a revolu- 
tion in Europe and as this has not taken place, we look for 
this event to take place in 1919-20. This revolution or earth- 
quake is described to be so great that the v^hole earth is affected. 
The soldiers stationed at the grave left their post of duty and 
fled for their lives. From this can be seen that a great dis- 
turbance is to come over Europe, v^hich is to spread to all parts 
of the v^orld. The soldiers, as the Allied army, v^ill, however, 
remain as guards at the grave until the real revolution takes 
place and peace restored. 

Chapter 28. 
crucifying christ. 

We have made the statement that Christ, as Christianity, 
is the Christian age. The following explanations show that the 
age is being crucified and that we live in the last days of the 
present cycle. 

Isaiah 6: to 12: Read this part of the Bible. It is a 
prophecy of the present time. It describes the different nations 
at war, showing the conditions which would exist at this time. 
Germany and Austria-Hungary with the Turks are now, in the 
year 1918, dividing the garments of Christ. Remember that 
the Golgotha, where Christianity is being crucified takes plac^ 
in Belgium and France. 

Read chapter 10:26-34. This part shows that the United 
States enters the war and that they are "over the pass,'' and have 
taken lodging at Geba (in France) . This is very clear, for it 
is the part the United States takes in the war. It shows clearly 
that the United States will do justice and help the Allies to win 
the war so completely that there will be nothing left to do. The 
Kaiser is not forgotten; his name is written in chapter 10:31, 
it is as "Madmenah, a fugitive," and the inhabitants of the 
country flee for safety. 

It is not the intention to explain the Bible prophecies, but 
only to show what they mean and how to read them. The 
best and clearest part of the Bible showing the present time is 
written in Matthew 26:47. Read to the end of 28: The be- 
ginning of verse 47: describes the beginning of the war. In 
verses 51 and 52 describes the killin'g of Archduke Ferdinand, 
as being a servant of the high priest. The individual repre- 
senting Judas Iscariot is Italy who had authority as a disciple 



Part IV— Chapter 28. 135 

to deliver Christ for a price, and when he saw the result of the 
war he died. 

In Matthew 26:57 they take Christ to Calaphas, another 
country, and have consultations where the high priest, scribes 
and elders were gathered together. This takes place in Ger- 
many when they decided to make unreasonable demands of 
Serbia. In verse 58 begins the explanation of the United States. 
Peter is the United States. ''He was standing afar off unto the 
court of the high priest, and entered in, and sat with the of- 
ficers to see the end. The chief and the entire council sought 
false witness against Christ, that they might put him to death 
and they found it not." That is, Germany tried to get a reason 
for starting the war and the United States, as Peter, was there 
at the time, for Ambassador Gerard was there representing this 
country. In verse 69 is shown that the United States, as Peter, 
denied Christ or that "he knew Christ," and that he denied 
Christ three times before "the cock crew twice." This part is 
very well known to all, so we will only repeat and say that 
during the first tw^o years of the war is the time the "cock 
crew three times." (The cock represents France.) The United 
States refused three times to enter the war and said "he is not 
one of them." During this period the citizens of the United 
States had to deny that they were not English. Read verse 
73 ; "of a truth thou also art one of them ; for thy speech maketh 
thee known." This shows that the United States was not to 
enter the war before the third year. The first two years of the 
war were the preparation for the final act of destroying 
Christianity. The Bible counts days as years and in chapter 
27 begins the third year of the war, when "the chief priests 
and the elders of the people took counsel against Christ to put 
him to death:" This was when unrestricted submarine war- 
fare was declared, in other words, when Germany began killing 
innocent people of all nations simply for the sake of destroying 
life and property. This was when Christ was delivered up to 
Pilate, the governor. Matthew 27:3; "Then Judas, who be- 
trayed him, when he saw that he was condemned repented him- 
self." It shows that Judas was the catholic nations and means 
that they committed suicide for playing the Judas and repented. 
The price they received was of no benefit to them as it was 
used to buy a "potter's field," which is a graveyard. From this 
it will be seen why Russia is a living graveyard and that Italy 
will be destroyed. 



136 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Matthew 27:6, "And the chief priest took the pieces of 
silver and said, '*It is not lawful to put them into the treasury, 
since it is the price of blood." From this it will be seen who 
was the real Judas Iscariot and that the money went into the 
potter's field. Matthew 26:24, ''The iSon of man goeth, as it is 
written of him, but woe unto that man by whom the Son of 
Man is betrayed; it had been good for that man if he had not 
been born." From this we see why the church in Russia is 
suffering destruction for betraying the confidence of other 
nations. 

Matthew 27:11 tells of the beginning of what was done to 
the Turks. The question was if they should sacrifice Turkey 
or end the war. The answer was, release Barabbas (Turkey) 
and prosecute the war. Verse 20. ''Now the chief priest and 
the elders persuaded the multitude that they should ask for 
Barabbas and destroy Christ." This means that the German 
government wanted the war to continue, and they had their way 
about it. In verse 22 is shown clearly that all nations wanted 
to continue the war, for they said "Let him be crucified." In 
verse 25, "And all the people answered and said His blood be 
on us and on our children." As this is the final act of all 
Nations, it shows clearly that all the people are backing their 
governments and that they want to prosecute the war to the 
end. They said that the responsibility or the last- part of the 
war shall fall on them and their children. 

In Matthew 27:33 is shown where the battlefield is called 
Golgotha, the "place of the skull." It shows that Christ suf- 
fered on this battlefield, that He was given wine to drink, 
mingled with gall. This is the liquid fire given to the Chris- 
tians. Finally at the end of the fight for life on this battlefield 
the Christ dies. 

When the critical period is nearly over, even before Christ 
dies, the crucifiers began to divide his clothing among them- 
selves; this is the dividing of the country they have captured. 
In verse 36 is shown that a time has to pass, as it says, "and 
they sat and watched him there." In verse 37 a notice was 
put up over Christ's head on the cross: "This is Christ, the 
King of the Jews." Which means that the Israelites as the 
nations of Europe are the crucifiers of Christianity. 

Verse 38 speaks of a new subject not previously men- 
tioned, two robbers are to be crucified with Christ. As Christ 
stands for Christianity and the other two who could be crucified 



Part IV—Chavter 29. 137 

with him on this battlefield are the Mohammedans and the Bud- 
dhists, and they are there in battle today. The churches have 
always been called robbers, so we take it for granted that it 
is these two organizations which are meant as robbers. 

Matthew 27:45 begins with the sixth hour and says that 
from the sixth to the ninth hour there was darkness over the 
land, that is, war continuous. This takes place in the fourth 
year as the year begins in March. The time from the sixth to 
the ninth hour is the third quarter of the year, which makes 
the sixth hour September, the ninth hour November, according 
to our time. So we figure that from September to November 
is the time when Christ actually dies. In this period of time 
the outcome of the war will be decided. 

In verse 46 it says about the ninth hour Christ cried with 
a loud voice saying ''My God, My God, why hast thou forsaken 
me!" This is to show that between September and November 
1918 there will be the greatest battles of the present war In 
this period Christ gives up the spirit, and what will take place 
then must be the closing of the war. We look to October 1st, 
1918, as the time when the big drive will take place and will be 
the climax of the war, and the end of Christianity as an age. 

Verse 55 describes the many women who were there 
watching the Christ being crucified. The many women as the 
"Mary Magdalene and the other Mary," are the Red Cross 
workers and nurses who are administering to relieve the suf- 
ferings of Christianity. 

Chapter 29. 

the book of isaiah. 

Chapter 1 of the Book of Isaiah describes the time of the 
end; "The vision he saw concerning Judah and Jerusalem." 
First the four cardinal houses are named showing the time in 
Judah. From verse 2 to 7 is described the condition of Europe 
today. In verse 7 "Your country is desolate; your cities are 
burned with fire; your land, strangers devour it in your pres- 
ence, and it is described as overthrown by strangers." This 
chapter speaks of the condition of Judah at the time of the end. 
In verse 18 Jehovah asks Judah (the tribe of Judah is Ger- 
many) to reform and to do right and all will be forgiven, and 
in verse 20 "but if ye refuse and rebel, ye shall be devoured 
with the sword, for the mouth of Jehovah hath spoken." Jehovah 



138 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

is Uranus and he speaks to the five nations of Judah to stop 
burnt offerings of rams, bullocks, lambs, or of he goats; which 
means that the wars should be stopped on the nations repre- 
sented by these animals. We will see later what is the mean- 
ing of this admonishing and what the threats refer to. 

In Isaiah 1 :8 is described Alsace-Lorraine, and brings 
out another question from which we can read the meaning of 
the chapter. ''And the daughter of Zion is left as a booth in 
a vineyard, as a lodge in a garden of cucumbers, as a besieged 
city." Verse 9, "Except Jehovah of hosts had left unto us a 
very small remnant, we should have been as Sodom, we should 
have been like unto Gomorrah;" which means that Switzerland 
and Alsace-Lorraine would have been as naked as the desert of 
Arizona and Mt. Whitney in California. 

The two first chapters of Isaiah deal with the house of 
Zion and as Zion is the same as Sodom and Gomorrah we know 
what this means. A few is left and Zion is not to be destroyed. 
Zion as Gomorrah is Alsace-Lorraine and Switzerland. The 
house of Zion is divided in two, that is, the house is of a dual 
natui'e, a double house. It is a mountain and a valley. The 
mountain is the masculine and the valley is the daughter of 
Zion. Switzerland is the Holy Mountain and Alsace-Lorraine 
is the daughter of Zion. These two countries represent the 
house of Aquarius. Much can be written of what these two 
countries represent in Bible study, for it teaches a principle of 
a higher law; than the government made by man. The mean- 
ing of the chapter is that if these countries were not saved the 
entire tribes of Zion and Judah would be destroyed. 

From this it will be seen why Switzerland and Alsace- 
Lorraine are the central countries of the war and not destroyed. 
Aquarius is the house of the Lord of the heaven, the house of 
the Prince of Peace. In verse 21 it speaks of what Alsace- 
Lorraine is today. "How is the faithful city become a harlot; 
she that was full of Justice! righteousness lodged in her, but 
now murderers." The rest of the chapter is devoted to both 
Switzerland and Alsace-Lorraine saying they will both suffer 
in order to rid them of outside influence. 

In verse 27, "Zion shall be redeemed with justice, and her 
converts with righteousness." But the "destruction of trans- 
gressors and sinners shall be together and they that forsake 
Jehovah shall be consumed." 



PaH IV— Chapter 29. 139 

In Isaiah 2:2, ''And it shall come to pass in the last days, 
that the mountains of Jehovah's house shall be established on 
the top (or at the head) of the mountains, and shall be exalted 
above the hills, and all nations shall flow^ unto it, and many 
people shall go and say come ye and let us go up to the moun- 
tain of Jehovah to the house of the God of Jacob; and he will 
teach us of his ways, and we will walk in his paths ; for out of 
Zion shall go forth the law, and the word of Jehovah from 
Jerusalem. And he will judge between the nations, and will 
decide concerning many peoples; and they shall beat their 
swords into plowshares and their spears into pruning hooks. 
Nations shall not lift up sword against nation, neither shah 
they learn war any more." The meaning of this is very simple, 
as it shows, at the end of the war the meetings and arrange- 
ment of peace will be held in Switzerland. The new form of 
government to be established in the different countries will be 
of the pattern of Switzerland. The headquarters of the world 
peace conference will be held there ''for out of Zion shall go 
for the law and the word of the Lord from Jerusalem" from 
the Allies. The peace conference will not be held at the Hague, 
but in the holy mountains. The word spoken of means terms 
which are to come from the British Allies. 

The peace conference will have the power to decide many 
international questions and in the settling of the war, the 
dividing of the nations will be settled in justice. 

The rest of the second chapter of Isaiah deals with the 
war as it describes the condition of the present war. In verse 
20; "In that day men shall cast away their idols of silver and 
their idols of gold, which have been made for them to worship, 
to the moles and to the bats ; to go into the caverns of the rocks, 
and into cliffs of the ragged rocks from the terror of Jehovah, 
and from the glory of his majesty when he ariseth to shake 
mightily the earth." There is no doubt about the meaning of 
this, for it is an every day occurrence; men are living in holes 
in the mountains and in the ground. Read in full the first two 
chapters of Isaiah ; they deal with Alsace-Lorraine and Switzer- 
land ; together with the conditions which exist today in Europe. 

In Isaiah 9:14 "Therefore Jehovah will cut off from Israel 
head and tail, palm branch and rush in one day. The elder 
and the honorable man, he is the head and the prophet that 
teacheth lies, he is the tail." This means that the countries re- 



140 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

ferred to are the head and the feet, and are France and Italy. 
The prophet spoken of represents the church. 

Isaiah 9:19, 'Through the wrath of Jehovah of hosts is 
the land burnt up; and the people are as the fuel of fire; no 
man spareth his brother. And one shall snatch on the right 
hand, and be hungry ; and he shall eat on the left hand, and they, 
shall not be satisfied; they shall eat every man the flesh of his 
own arm. Manasseh, Ephraim; and Ephraim, Manasseh; and 
they together shall be against Judah." This is very clear for 
it refers to the present war and the conditions which exist now. 
It also shows that France and England should be together as 
one to fight Germany. 

The chapters of Isaiah from the 13th to the 23rd describe 
the nations in war at the present time. It is a peculiar fact 
that the events as described in Isaiah have already taken place. 
Isaiah 19 describes the condition in Europe which is described 
as Egypt. In verse 2 it says, ''And I will stir up the Egyptians 
against the Egyptians and they shall fight every one against 
his brother, and every one against his neighbor, city against 
city and kingdom against kingdom. And the spirit of Egypt 
shall fall in the middle of it, and I will destroy the council 
thereof." Verse 4, "And I will give over the Egyptians into the 
hands of a cruel lord, and a fierce king shall rule over them." 
"And the waters shall fall from the sea, and the rivers shall be 
wasted and become dry." Verse 13, "the princes of Zoan are 
become fools, the princes of Memphis are deceived, they have 
caused Egypt to go astray, that are the cornerstones of her 
tribes, Jehovah hath mingled a spirit of perversness in the 
midst of her and they have caused Egypt to go astray in every 
work thereof as a drunken man staggering in his vomit. And 
the land of Judah shall become a terror unto Egypt, every one 
whom mentions thereof shall be afraid." Verse 18; "In that 
day there shall be five cities in the land of Egypt, that speak 
the language of Canaan and swear to Jehovah of hosts, one 
shall be called the City of Destruction." Verse 20; "and he 
will send them a Savior and a defender and he will deliver 
them." This chapter is very interesting as Europe has actually 
passed through part of what is described in chapter 19. The 
nations have fought between themselves ; their spirit is broken ; 
the cruel lord who rules them is Germany; the waters falling 
away is the taking of the coast by Germany; the "princes to 
be fools" means that the government acts as fools and goes 



Part IV— Chapter 30. 141 

astray. The land of Judah is Germany, also known as Assyria, 
they are afraid of. It says there shall be five cities, that is, 
they shall be divided into five sections and one of them is to 
be a traitor (Russia) . A savior will be sent to save them, that 
is, some other nation (the United States) will go to Europe and 
free them from war and help to establish a government. 

Chapter for chapter of Isaiah describes year for year the 
nations, their location and their activities for the present time. 
The book of Isaiah does not describe any cycle as a period of 
time, but for only the time of end. 

Chapter 30. 
the book of ezekiel. 

The Book of Ezekiel represents the present time and it 
describes the time, place and condition at the time of the end 
of the a^e. Ezekiel's book was written from 595 B. C. or 
125 degrees east. 

Ezekiel 1. "Now it came to pass in the thirtieth year, in 
the fourth month, in the fifth day of the month." "In the fifth 
day of the month, which was the fifth year of King Jehoiachin's 
captivity." This means that the thirtieth year is thirty de- 
grees. The fourth month is June being the fourth from March 
and the fifth day corresponds to the 25th day of June. In verse 
2, it says "the fifth year of the captivity" which is the fifth 
year of the war, when Uranus is in Aquarius. In other words 
Ezekiel gives the date of June 25th, 1919. 

The first chapter describes the time, place and the location 
of the signs of the houses in the heavens. In verse 10 is men- 
tioned the face of a man, the face of a lion, the face of an ox, 
the face of an eagle. This describes the houses of the four prin- 
cipal points of the heavens. The description and the location 
of these houses (or tribes) are correct. 

The wings which are spoken of in this chapter are the four 
degrees on the cusps, two on each side. The wheels within 
vvheels referred to represent the different nations of Europe 
being wheels as nations within Europe as the big wheel. This 
description corresponds to the coat of many colors in Joseph's 
age and means that the description given is for Europe at the 
present time. 

Ezekiel 2 : He is sent to the children of Israel to see their 
condition which is bad. The children of Israel represent Eu- 
rope. 



142 



Key do Bible and Heaven, 



Ezekiel 3:15. He is sent to the country which corresponds 
to Turkey to inform the inhabitants that Turkey is the watch- 
man, and to watch for the time. In verse 22 he is sent to the 
country of Switzerland, where he is to be abused, imprisoned 
and not allowed to talk. When he is in the different places he 
describes the conditions which exist there. Of Germany he 
says: it was written lamentation, mourning* and woe." Of 




Plate 6 — The End of Time. 

Switzerland he says to ''Go and shut thyself within thine 
house," which means that they will be closed in on all sides, 
and not allowed even to give information or, as it says, to be 
"a reprover." 

Ezekiel 4 says that Israel will be besieged 390 days on one 
side and 40 days on the other side. The 390 days equal 30 de- 
grees west and the 40 days are 40 degrees east. The thirty 



Part IV— Chapter 30. 143 

degrees mean that the war extends to the place at 30 de- 
grees in the Atlantic Ocean and the 40 degrees east is in 
Turkey. Verses 9 to 17 describe the condition of Germany at 
the present time. 

Ezekiel 5 deals with France and describes the location and 
condition of the battlefield. ''At the top of the head and to the 
beard.'* France represents the head or Aries and this part is 
to be shaved as with a sharp razor. A third part of France 
is to be taken, when a sword is to stop the conquest. In verse 
3 it says a few Germans are to be taken prisoners. In verse 
4, ''Then take of them again and cast them into the midst of the 
fire, and burn them in the fire, for thereof shall a fire come 
forth into all the house of Israel," which means that the Ger- 
mans are to be driven back into Germany, represented by the 
fiery house of Leo, and a fire or war is to start from within 
Germany. The rest of the chapter speaks for itself and shows 
what is to take place in Germany, as disease and famine. A 
third part of France will be destroyed and laid waste. 

Ezekiel 6: The topic is now changed to the mountains. 
These are Switzerland, showing that all nations (tribes) shall 
be destroyed and suffer for they have not followed after the 
word of God. 

Ezekiel 7: Deals with the condition which will exist 
within Germany in the year 1919, at the end of the age. Verse 
14: "They have blown the trumpet, even to make all ready; 
but none goeth forth to the battle: for my wrath is upon all 
the multitude thereof. The sword is without and famine 
within, he that is in the field shall die with the sword; and he 
that is in the city, famine and pestilence shall devour him." 

Ezekiel 8 : Describes exactly the time of Germany's down- 
fall. It is in the sixth year, the sixth month, and the fifth day 
of the month. Uranus stays seven years in Aquarius, which 
is from 1912 to 1920. The sixth year is 1918, and the time as 
described is September 26th, 1918. Verse 5 speaks of trouble 
being close to the borders of Switzerland, and Alsace-Lorraine. 
The door of the court is Alsace-Lorraine and the condition there 
is described in verse 7. The American army will pass througli 
there and with the help of God will overcome the Germans. 
The woman weeping for Tammus is Alsace-Lorraine, as de- 
scribed in verse 24; she is weeping at the destruction of Bel- 
gium. In verse 16 he says "between the porch and the altar 
were about twenty-five men with their backs toward the temple 



144 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

of the Lord, and their faces toward the east, and they wor- 
shipped the sun toward the east." This is the twenty-five 
degrees of Aquarius the planet Uranus was in at October 1st, 
1918. Uranus is to retrograde and goes backward in his house 
when he is in opposition to Saturn. The place of the porch and 
altar is at Alsace-Lorraine, where the United States army now 
is. Here is where the Christ or Uranus dies, and where the 
war is settled. 

Ezekiel 9: This is the most important part of the 
prophecy. It says that six men come from the porch near the 
higher gate toward the north; which is from Switzerland to- 
ward the north and is where the United States army is located. 
These men are prepared for slaughter. The six men are the six 
great nations of the Allies. It says in verse 3 : "And he called 
to the man clothed with linen, which had the writer's ink-horn 
by his side," this man is Switzerland. Verse 4 describes the 
condition of Alsace-Lorraine. At the proper time the American 
army will destroy the Germans but not the French people there. 
In verse 5 Uranus is represented as directing the Allies to "Go 
ye after him through the city, and smite : let not your eye spare, 
neither have ye pity; slay utterly old and young, both maids 
and little children and women, but come not near any man upon 
whom is the mark, and begin at my sanctuary. Then they 
began at the ancient men which were before the house." This 
means that the Allies will start "at" Switzerland and destroy 
the Germans; but the Bible does not say "in" Switzerland. 
The ending of the fight is really in Alsace-Lorraine. It is ap- 
parent that the war will utterly destroy the country, as it is 
said in verse 11. "I have done as thou hast commanded me." 

Ezekiel 10: Begins a new term of expression; the names 
of the gems or stones representing the new tribes is now used. 
He (Ezekiel) speaks to the United States as the gem of Sap- 
phire, and tells him to go and bring fire for the other nations 
from under the cherub which is England. In 10:4 "Then the 
glory of the Lord went up from the cherub and stood over the 
threshold of the house." This means that the United States 
will take charge of the affairs of supplying "fire" (ammunition) 
to the other nations. The vision described as cherubim, repre- 
sents the figures of the houses as it appears at this time. The 
cherub is England; the face of a man is Switzerland; the lion 
is Germany; the eagle is Austria-Hungary. These houses will 
occupy the four leading houses of Europe at the end of time. 



Part IV— Chapter 30. 145 

Austria-Hungary (the tribe Dan) will decide the ending of the 
war and not Germany or the allies. 

Ezekiel 11 describes the condition at the east side of 
Switzerland when Uranus is in twenty-five degrees of Aqua- 
rius. After the surrender in 1918, there is trouble on this side^ 
It will be a caldron and the Austrians will be the flesh. The 
fight will take place east of Switzerland, verse 8, "Ye have 
feared the sword and I will bring the sword upon you.'* 

Ezekiel 12 described the closing chapter of the war. The 
final act of overcoming Germany is described in this chapter.. 
It says that a secret or unobscure transfer of the army wilil 
take place. Chapter 12:11, ''I am your sign: like as I have 
done, so shall it be done unto them: they shall remove and ga 
into captivity." This means that Germany will withdraw her 
army and many will be taken prisoners. In verse 13, "My net 
also will I spread upon him, and he shall be taken in my snare; 
and I will bring him to Babylon to the land of the Chaldeans, 
yet shall he not see it, though he shall die there." This is clear; 
the Kaiser is to be captured and confined in Germany to the 
end of his days. Verse 14, ''And I will scatter towards every 
wind all that are about him, to help him, and all his bands ; and 
I will draw out the sword after them. And they shall know 
that I am the Lord, when I shall scatter them among the na- 
tions, and disperse them in the countries." From verses 17 to 
20 is shown the conditions within Germany and the allied coun- 
tries. It is seen clearly that Germany as representing Judak 
is the opposition in Israel. 

Chapter 13 described the Christian Churches and says 
that ''she is a false prophet." 

Chapter 15 deals with Europe as Jerusalem; It says they 
shall go from one fire into another and be destroyed. 

Saturn becomes retrograde December 10th, 1918, and 
remains retrograde to April 28th, 1919. This is the time of the 
end proper for Germany when this nation begins to retrograde 
from internal trouble spoken of in chapter 12. 

The beginning of the war is described in Ezekiel 21:19 
describing Germany's destruction of Belgium and what must 
result to Germany. The chapters 21-22 show without a doubt 
that this is the time of the end and Germany is the cause of the 
war. 

France is the head, or sheep, Aries. The French are the 
shepherds of Europe. Ezekiel 34 explains the ultimate of 



146 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

France. The United States is to protect France for many 
years for France will be a dependent of the United States. 

Switzerland represents the Holy Mountains and Alsace^ 
Lorraine represents the house in the valley, both are as one and 
not one. It is represented by Aquarius, the water carrier, a 
double house as one. Ezekiel 35:36 described these countries. 
It is shown that the United States army is to play an important 
part in Alsace-Lorraine for the Germans will be driven from 
this section of the country. This is Gog and Magog: Meshech 
and Tubal. The resurrection of dry bones takes place here and 
is the making of new nations in the United States as is written 
in chapter 37. In chapter 39 is described the results of the 
war to Germany — death. In Alsace-Lorraine is where the 
death struggle will take place It is the place of the porch to the 
Holy Mountain. Switzerland is the man clothed in linen with a 
v/riter's ink-horn; the linen is the snow-capped Mountains, and 
the ink-horn is the rivers, which start in the mountains. 

Greece and Italy represent the two sisters of Libra and 
Pisces spoken of in Ezekiel 23. They are representing Europe 
as the Catholic age. This chapter is written with the idea to 
represent character but the language used is of such a nature 
that we cannot repeat it here, nor do we care to explain the 
meaning of the terms used. 

Europe corresponds to the land of Egypt. The chapters 
of Ezekiel 29-36 describe Europe in detail. Pharaoh is Saturn 
who rules Europe. Germany is spoken of in Ezekiel as Assy- 
rians. It is the house of Leo, the Lion. Turkey is described 
in Ezekiel 33. Turkey is the mother of nations and is repre- 
sented by Virgo. It is described as the watchman sitting in 
the gate of Europe. The resurrection of dry bones spoken of 
in chapter 37 is the repopulation of the United States after the 
nations of Europe are destroyed. 

Chapter 31. 

the book of revelation. 

The book of Revelation is similar to the other books of the 
Bible in that it contains a similar description of the study of 
the earth and the conditions which would exist at the time of 
the end. This is the most interesting book of all the books in 
the Bible for it deals entirely with the time of the end. 



Part IV— Chapter 31. 147 

There is a description of seven churches, seven spirits, 
seven stars, and seven angels, all of which refer to the seven 
tribes, as nations at M^ar, who are the opposite power to Judah 
and described in the first chapters. 

Chapter 4:6 begins with the description of what he (John) 
saw "And before the throne there was a sea of glass like unto 
crystal; And in the midst of the throne, and round about the 
throne, were four beasts full of eyes before and behind. And 
the first beast was like a lion, and the second beast like a calf, 
and the third beast had a face of a man, and the fourth beast 
was like a flying eagle." This is simply the same description of 
the horoscope for the time of the end as is given in the other 
books. 

Chapter 5 is the description of Uranus as sitting on the 
throne with the power of heavens. The sealed book spoken of 
is the Bible, which describes the great war. The opening of the 
book describes the beginning of the war, and Judah was the 
one to open the book. Verse 3, "And no man in heaven nor in 
earth, neither under the earth, was able to open the book, 
neither to look thereon." Verse 5, "And one of the elders said 
unto me. Weep not: Behold the Lion of the tribes of Judah, 
the root of David, hath prevailed to open the book, and to loose 
the seven seals, thereof." The tribe of Judah, the Lion, is Ger- 
many who is the one to begin the war, and the lamb spoken of 
in verse 12 is France. He is the one which was slain, but will 
receive "power and riches," as his reward. Verse 6 describes 
"seven Spirits of God" which represent the seven tribes of the 
allied nations. 

Chapter 6 describes the opening of the seven seals, which 
means the beginning of the war. Each seal describes the condi- 
tions caused by the war from year to year. In the third year 
when the third seal was opened, the condition in Europe is 
described in verse 6, "And I heard a voice in the midst of the 
four beasts say a measure of wheat for a penny, and three m.eas- 
ures of barley for a penny, and see thou hurt not the oil and the 
wine;" which means the preservation of food for all in Europe 
at this time. 

The fourth seal is the fourth year of the war, and the time 
the United States sent its army to the front and their mission 
was death as described in verses 7 and 8. "And power was 
given unto them over the fourth part of the earth, to kill with 



148 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

the sword, and with hunger, and with death, and with the 
beasts of the earth." 

The fifth seal (year) is described in verses 9, 10 and 11. 
The white robes referred to represent those who have died from 
the effects of the war. "And they cried with a loud voice, 
saying How long, 0. Lord holy, and true, dost thou not judge 
and avenge our blood on them that dwell on the earth. And 
white robes were given unto every one of them ; and it was said 
unto them that they should rest yet for a little season, until 
their fellow servants also and their brethren that should be 
killed as they were, should be fulfilled." 

In verse 12, is described the opening of the sixth seal, 
"And lo, there was a great earthquake, and the sun becomes 
black as sackcloth of hair, and the moon becomes as blood: 
And the stars of heaven fell unto the earth." The stars falling 
unto the earth means the fall of the rulers of the nations and the 
earthquakes mean revolutions. Verse 15, "And the kings of the 
earth and the great men, and the rich men, and the chief cap-' 
tains, and the mighty men, and every bond-man, and every 
free-man, hid themselves in the dens and in the rocks of the 
mountains; And said to the mountains and rocks. Fall on us, 
and hide us from the face of him that sitteth on the throne, and 
from the wrath of the lamb." This describes the conditions 
beginning after the fall of the Kaiser in 1919, when the revolu- 
tion begins. The one spoken of as sitting on a throne is Uranus. 

Chapter 7 describes the astrological calculations of the 
degrees in each house referred to as tribes. The tribes sealed, 
spoken of in this chapter is to show that all the degrees in the 
twelve houses have been killed. The 144,000 represents the 
two degrees of 72 years. This chapter is the best and clearest 
of any in the Bible to show that there is a life after death. 
Read from the 9th to the 17th verse. In verse 13, "What are 
these which are arrayed in white robes and whence come they? 
And I said unto him. Sir, thou knoweth. And he said to me. 
These are they which came out of the great tribulation, and 
have washed their robes, and made them white in the blood of 
the Lamb. Therefore are they before the throne of God, and 
serve him day and night in his temple, and he that sitteth on 
the throne shall dwell among them. They shall hunger no more, 
neither thirst any more ; neither shall the sun light on them nor 
any heat." 

Chapter 8 begins with the description of the opening of 



Part IV^Chapter 31. 149 

the 6th seal and at that time there was peace on earth for half 
an hour (six months). From this we know that there will be 
peace from the 5th to the 6th year or from 1918 to 1919. 

When the sixth and seventh seals are opened it means 
that strikes, revolutions and war will start all over again and 
that all nations will be at war five months, in the revolution de- 
scribed. In chapters 8 and 9 is described this last war in detail 
and the use of airo-planes. 

Chapter 10 describes that an angel (angle) with one foot 
on the earth, the other on the sea, has a little book open. The 
explanation of the angel means that a book will be published 
from that part of the earth illustrated as an angle from land 
and sea, which is the Pacific Coast division, for this is the only 
angle which includes the earth and sea. What this book will 
do is best explained from the Bible; it is written in chapter 
10:9 "And I went unto the angel, and said unto him Give me 
the little book. And he said unto me. Take it and eat it up; 
and it shall make thy belly bitter, but it shall be in thy mouth 
sweet as honey." The little book spoken of is the explanation 
of the Bible for the mysteries of the ages are now to be re- 
vealed. 

Chapter 11 describes the condition at the end of time where 
it is and what the conditions would be. The two witnesses 
spoken of in verse 3 are the two degrees of 144 years. 

Chapter 12 describes the prophecy for the United States 
which began in 1776, when the United States, as the child 
spoken of, was born. The dragon or Satan is Saturn and 
Michael is Uranus. It says that the woman fled into the wilder- 
ness and was hid for 1260 years. This means that Neptune, 
representing the church, will be void of power for this length of 
time, or to 180 degrees west. 

Chapter 13 is the continued description of the planet Nep- 
tune represented in the Christian Churches. The number 666 
is the space of the church. Verse 18; ''Here is wisdom. Let 
him that hath understanding count the number of the beast; 
for it is the number of a man; and his number is six hundred 
three score and six." We leave this question unanswered, as 
we would like to have the Bible students figure the space 
and end of the Christian nations but it is to 54 degrees east. 

It will be observed that the first ten chapters of Revela- 
tions deal with the destruction of the government and nations 
of Europe and the present war. Chapter 13-20 is the descrip- 



150 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

tion of the church and religions of the world. The same 
method is used and the same prophecy is made for the church 
as for the nations. It should be remembered that Saturn rep- 
resents the nations and that Neptune represents the church 
and that the churches have not been destroyed as yet and that 
this takes place after the destruction of the nations. 

Chapter 13 describes a general history of the church as 
written in other books of the Bible, showing that it is the 
church which is meant and that the end of the church as an 
organization is near. 

Chapter 14 describes the change of cycles. The different 
angels spoken of, represent new doctrines and laws, coming 
from the different angles of the earth. This philosophy will 
produce the condition as spoken of in this chapter. In verse 
20 it says, "And the wine-press was trodden without the city, 
and blood came out of the wine-press, even unto the horse- 
bridles (Pegasus), by the space of a thousand and six hundred 
furlongs." This means that there will be a religious war to 
extend for 1600 furlongs (which equals 160 degrees). This 
distance is figured for *'Zion" and is for Europe. A sudden 
destruction will take place covering a distance of 160 degrees 
of the nations of Europe east to the 54th degree. 

Chapter 15 gives the description of the religious war which 
is to take place and describes the seven plagues which are put 
on the earth. The "sea of glass" again spoken of is the horo- 
scope of all the churches (Neptune). The term used in the 
next verse that they "sing the songs of Moses," means they are 
able to read and study the laws as given by Moses. 

The 16th chapter describes the seven plagues poured out 
on the earth in this war; part of this chapter is a repetition of 
what has already been described. It should be remembered 
that the war which ends at 1918 has only five plagues and that 
the sixth and seventh plagues begin in 1919 and are to last 
thirteen months. 

The chapters 17, 18 and 19 describe the Christian Churches 
and the conditions produced in church worship. The term 
"beast" is used to illustrate the condition which is produced by 
the planet Neptune. The Catholic Church headquarters at 
Rome are called the "City of Seven Hills" or "Seven Waters" 
as spoken of in chapter 17. These verses are self explanatory 
and explain one topic and includes all churches. The Lamb is 
the Savior or Uranus, who will destroy the power of the church. 



Part IV— Chapter 31. 151 

It is shown very clearly that it is Neptune which is spoken of 
as representing the church, **And the beast that was, and is 
not, is himself also an eight, and is one of the seven and he 
goes into perdition. Verse 11 : The explanation of this is that 
Neptune as well as Uranus is lost to the people of the earth 
during every dark age, for Neptune is in the middle of the 
house at that time. He is one of the ''Seven and is an eight," 
planet. He is the one that was and is not known. 

The original five tribes of Judah came from Asia called 
Babylonia as the descendant of Shem. The seven tribes of 
Israel are the descendants of Japheth as Europe today. From 
this will be seen the reason why the Germans are called Assy- 
rians and as the Catholic Church originated with the Germans 
in Asia, the Church is called Babylon. The seven nations of 
the Allies are the proper nations of Europe and the five nations 
associated with Germany in war today are the Catholic nations 
from Asia. The description given in the three chapters, 17, 18 
and 19, regarding the Catholic Church is written in such strong 
language that we do not care to explain the meaning of them. 
The law and the judgment of the heavens will regulate all things 
and in the proper time God will explain these chapters in his 
own way. 

The 20th chapter describes Saturn, as Satan, who is to be 
bound for a thousand years, which means that the power of 
Saturn is destroyed by Uranus up to the end of the next cycle. 
It deals with the degrees as calculated for the houses and refers 
to the earth only. This is illustrated in verse 5, "But the rest 
of the dead lived not again until the thousand years were fin- 
ished." ''This is the first resurrection" (First cycle). It means 
that the doctrines, as referred to in the Bible, will be resur- 
rected in one thousand years, when Saturn and Neptune will 
again be let loose for a season. The first resurrection is the 
first cycle in the new age. It is the degrees of the houses which 
are termed dead, for it could not be applied to anything else, 
when it says: "that the rest of the dead lived not again." In 
verse 7, "And when the thousand years are expired, Satan shall 
be loosed out of his prison." This is an astrological calcula- 
tion for a period of time and is for the next cycle of Uranus, 
when another destruction takes place. 

Chapter 21 describes the New Age beginning with 1921. 
This chapter is also very simple as it is applied to the govern- 
ment of the United States on the earth and not to heaven. It 



152 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

deals strictly with the material and political affairs of the people 
here. It should be remembered that it describes a horoscope for 
the nation and that they were human beings who wroie the 
Bible describing the conditions seen from an astrological point 
of view. 

The time of the new heaven and the new earth is described 
in chapter 21. It follows after the description of the great war. 
The United States is the place described in this chapter and 
spoken of as "that great city, the holy Jerusalem." From verse 
12 is a description of a horoscope, describing the twelve houses 
by giving the names of the twelve gems instead of the twelve 
tribes. 

The measurement of the wall is the same as calculating in 
numbers of degrees for this horoscope. It is a similar descrip- 
tion as given in other chapters when describing the United 
States, namely, that it is in four squares and divided into twelve 
parts. The condition which is to manifest itself in this country 
is described in verse 26; ''And they shall bring the glory and 
honor of the nations into it. And there shall in no wise enter 
into it anything that defileth neither whatsoever abomination, 
or maketh a lie, but they which are written in the Lamb's book 
of life.'' The gems or stones representing the twelve tribes are 
dealt with in another chapter, v^here it is told what each gem 
represents, The names of the gems merely take the place of 
the names of the tribes and other forms of expressions. 

Chapter 22 describes the United States as the coming 
nation of the world. This is the description of a second garden 
of Eden period. "In the midst of the street of it, and on either 
side of the river, was there the tree of life, which bare twelve 
manner of fruits, and yielded her fruit every month; and the 
leaves of the three were for the healing of nations. And there 
shall be no more curse, but the throne of God and of the Lamb 
shall b€ in it ; and his servants shall serve him ; And they shall 
see his face; and his name shall be in their forehead." This 
is a description of the horoscope for the United States in the 
coming age. 

Verse 10, "And he saith unto me, seal not the sayings of 
the prophecy of this book; for the time is at hand." 

Verse 13, "I am Alpha and Omega, the beginning and the 
jend, the first and the last." 



Part IV— Chapter 32. 153 

Chapter 32. 
the united states. 

The discovery of the American continent was not an acci- 
dent or a mere event; but it was according to the laws of the 
universe. We find in Revelation 12 a calculation for the time 
when the next nation was to be born. It also gives us the con- 
dition which was to exist in Europe at the time of the birth of 
the new nation for it says: ''and there appeared a great 
wonder in heaven, a woman clothed with the sun, and the moon 
under her feet and upon her head a crown of twelve stars, and 
she being with child cried travailing in birth, and pained to be 
delivered.'' The entire chapter deals with the birth of the 
United States and describes the Christian Church and her in- 
fluence as produced by Neptune. The great wonder is the 
Eoman power, she is the woman, clothed with the sun and the 
moon under her feet. The power of the sun is religion and the 
moon is the common people which were under her feet. The 
war in Europe at the time of the birth of the nation in 1776 is 
when she suffered to be delivered. The twelve stars are repre- 
sented as a complete form of independent government for 
Europe. 

In the chapter on cycles is explained that years are calcu- 
lated by degrees; one degree equaling seventy-two years; half 
a degree equaling thirty-six years, and two degrees one hundred 
and forty-four years. The Bible illustrates that the begin- 
ning and at the ending of all cycles, ages, nations, or any event 
which takes place in figuring degrees is symbolically illustrated 
by one or two degrees; these demonstrate the nature of the 
event. This we will illustrate with the age of the United 
States as figured in degrees. The United States was declared 
an independent nation in 1774 to 1776. We will add thirty-six 
years or one-half degree and get an event at 1812. This is 
when there was war and trouble everywhere. Next add one 
degree of seventy-two years and we have 1846-1848, which is 
the years of the ending of the Mexican war and of the religious 
movements all over the United States. This is one of the most 
eventful periods of the country, when the law was made and 
the Pacific Coast country taken in. Next add two degrees of 
one hundred and forty-four years and we have 1918-1920. This 
will prove to be the real beginning of the United States as a 
nation. The previous events have been the childhood and in 



154 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

1921 is the beginning of manhood of the United States. This 
method of figuring events in the future is used in all ages, as 
written in the Bible. 

It is written "a little child shall lead us;" this little child 
is the United States and he is now leading the nations of the 
world. There are two distinct degrees marked for the future 
which we will describe. Add 36 to 1921 which equals 1957. 
This is a year for war in Europe which Uncle Sam will settle. 
The next event is in 72 years from 1921 which is 1993, when 
the Pacific Coast States want to be a nation. The last date is 
144 years from 1921 giving 2065, when the United States proper 
will be divided. In 4000 France and Germany will invade the 
eastern part of the United States, and annex the country as far 
west as Utah. The Bible also says, that Europe shall be for- 
gotten for 70 years, when she again will become a great power. 

The United States will be as a new nation in 1921 with a 
new form of government; when new constitutional laws and 
amendments will be enacted. The Monroe doctrine will be the 
first principle for all nations and will be applied internationally. 

We have explained elsewhere that the United States was 
the first country described in the Bible. The original race 
which inhabited the country was the Hametic, who apparently 
are the forefathers of the Indian races; as the word Adam 
means red. The dividing of the races from the time of Noah 
with the description of the descendants from Shem, Ham and 
Japeth, show that Ham was the father of the Hametic race of 
America, that Japheth was the father of the European races 
and Shem was the father of the Asiatic races. Genesis 10. 

There are four distinct races described as belonging to 
Ham, Genesis 10:6, "And the Sons of Ham; Gush and Mizzain 
and Phut and Canaan." In verse 15 is described the children 
of Canaan as a separate race but are the descendants of Ham. 
When a reference is made to the Pacific Ocean the translator 
called it the river Euphrates, and the Atlantic Ocean is called 
the Red Sea, or the "river of Egypt." 

It is a singular coincidence that the United States at the 
beginning of the present form of government was divided into 
five parts, as territories or concessions, and later - into the 
forty-eight states which again correspond to the forty-eight 
constellations of the heavens. 

There is another very clear comparison and that is that 
the five states on the Pacific Coast are arranged the same in 



Part IV^Chapter 32. 155 

states as described in the Bible as provinces. The state of 
Washington is Galilee; Oregon is Samaria and California is 
Judeah. The state of Nevada v^as called Perrea, and Eastern 
Washington, Oregon and Idaho was called a Decapolis. The 
River Jordan was translated as a river when it is the 120th 
degree west, and is on top of the Cascade and Sierra Nevada 
range of mountains. Read "The Acts.*' 

The principle described as the birth of the United States 
as a man child took place in 1774, when independence was de- 
clared in Philadelphia and two years later in 1776 when the gov- 
ernment was formed. This period, or cycle, corresponds to 
the age of Moses and Joshua for their time, and to the age of the 
Apostle Saul-Paul for the present. The entire history as de- 
scribed, contains two degrees of seventy-two years each or 144 
years in all. 

In order to prove that the cycle for the United States, as 
a nation, and the Pacific Coast States, as a division, corresponds 
to the description which is given in the Bible, we will describe 
the method the Bible writers used. 

The death of the old country and the birth of the new 
world takes place within this two degrees or 144 years. The 
beginning of the end as the killing of the Roman Age began in 
1774-1776 and lasts to 1918-20. Within this period of time the 
formation and development of the United States as a well-organ- 
ized nation, takes place. This is the age as illustrated by Moses 
and Joshua as the capturing of the country and the locating of 
the tribes. The events which take place are described by the 
travels of the planet Uranus in the twelve houses of the heavens. 
The last 84-year circuit of Uranus began in 1828, when he vv^as 
in Aquarius and caused war. At this time Turkey lost in the 
war with Russia. The activity of Uranus from the year 1828 
to 1918 is described as part of the life of Jesus, and corresponds 
to what has taken place in the last century. This can be illus- 
trated in the leading events of the nations. Take 1828-30 and 
add half of the cycle of Uranus, or forty-two years, which gives 
1870-72, when France and Germany had war. To the cycle for 
the United States, beginning in 1776 add 84, which equals 1860, 
when the civil war took place. From this can be seen the 
method used in describing the cycles of time and the history 
of the nations. It should be remembered that the disciples of 
Christ are the nations of Europe and that the Pacific Coast div- 
ision of the United States is described as Judeah, Samaria, 



156 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Galilee, Perea and Decapolis. From this can be seen what 
country and nation is described in the travels of Jesus. 

The development and history of the United States cor- 
respond to this system of calculation and will be found to be 
correct. The Bible illustrates that all cycles or nations are 
first divided into five and seven sections and later into the 
twelve divisions. This can be illustrated in the history of the 
United States, as in the formation of the seven and five divisions 
which later became the forty-eight states. The dates, as given, 
will be useful in figuring the time for the annexation of terri- 
tory and for the wars which have taken place. The 84 and 42- 
year period for Uranus should be used for events and the 72 
and 36-year period for time and space representing territory. 

The founding and developing of the United States took 
place in the years, as we have given, in the follo^ving order 
westward. The original thirteen states constituted the terri- 
tory east of the Mississippi, obtained by treaty in 1783, after 
the well-known seven years of trouble from 1776 to 1783 when 
the treaty was signed. The second section is the middle west, 
known as the "Louisiana Purchase," from France in 1803. The 
third division is the southeast, including Florida, in the purchase 
from Spain in 1818-19. The fourth territory is the annexation 
of Texas in 1845. The fifth section is what was known as the 
"Gadsden Purchase'' of southern Arizoona in 1853. The sixth 
division consists of the "Oregon Territory," obtained by discov- 
ery and treaty from England in 1846. The seventh and last 
territory is the great southwest of California, Arizona and 
Nevada, which was obtained from Mexico in 1848. The Pacific 
Coast section was later divided into five states, which makes 
the twelve divisions, which in former ages were called pro- 
vinces. 

At the same time when the United States government was 
formed, it was also the year v^hen the Oregon Country was dis- 
covered and named Oregon by Jonathan Carver. It took 72 
years for the emigrants to settle in the west and by adding the 
72 years to 1774-76, we have 1846-48. These are the years 
Oregon and California became populated and part of the Union 
as territory, and also the time when gold was discovered in Cal- 
ifornia, which produced the emigration west. 

The age as described as the Apostle Saul-Paul is for the 
Pacific Coast cycle and begins in 1918-20. California is de- 
scribed as a Jerusalem in Judeah and is to rule first. Oregon is 



Part IV— Chapter 32. 157 

next described with Antioch as a center. Washington is the 
third division with Ephesus as the Metropolis. The meaning 
of this description is that California is to be developed first, 
next Oregon, and last Washington, which means a new Era of 
progress for the Pacific Coast States. From this illustration 
can be seen the system used by the Bible writers to describe the 
ending and beginning of the cycles and the moving with the 
degrees westward. 

The general description given in the New Testament repre- 
senting the Pacific Coast country is very clear and we will 
give a general outline of it. The Bible is translated so as to 
describe the event to take place in Palestine but it is on the 
Pacific Coast that the Nev/ Age is described. 

The country was said to consist of fivQ territories, called 
cities, each section or city is described according to the geo- 
graphical location and divided by mountains, valleys and rivers. 

California is called Judeah; Samaria is Oregon; and Gali- 
lee is Washington. Idaho and the country northeast has no 
special name but is a Decapolis or section by itself. The fifth 
division is Nevada, which is called Perea. Arizona is not men- 
tioned, for it is in Edom, in the Sodom and Gomorrah district. 

Judeah as California is named first. It consists of the ter- 
ritory anciently belonging to the four tribes ; Judah, Benjamin, 
Dan and Simeon. Modern Bible students fail to find the divid- 
ing line of Judeah in the north, in Palestine proper. 

Samaria is the central province west of the mountains 
between Judeah and the Galilee country and is northern Cali- 
ifornia and Oregon. Its share of the plains by the sea was 
known as Sarona (Sharon) and is the Coast Range. The moun- 
tain region is described as being held by the Samaritans, who 
were the descendants of the old Ten Tribes. Later Samaria is 
included in Galilee. 

Washington, called Galilee, is located at the sea of Tiberius, 
which is the Puget Sound. Phoenicia spoken of is British Col- 
umbia and the Lebanoon Mountains are the Cascade Moun- 
tains. The Firs and Cedars of Lebanon are the woods of Ore- 
gon which again are to become valuable. 

The description of the people of Washington was given; 
that they had the nature of the Jew and not like the people of 
Jerusalem, which is Southern California. It is written that 
great work was to be done in this state for the missions in the 
New Age. 



158 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

It will be seen that California rules first, then Oregon, and 
last Washington. In the time of the twelve churches, as de- 
scribed by Paul, the state of Washington ruled and the rest 
of the country from the Shasta Mountains in the south to Utah 
east, was subject to the Puget Sound country. The twelve 
churches included in Paul's travels and which he visits are at 
first located on the entire coast, but the churches to which he 
writes the Epistles, are located in western Washington. 

"Perea" is Nevada and extends from the mountains in the 
west to Salt Lake, described as the Dead Sea, and the Desert 
south and east was called the Syrian desert. Its boundary 
reached to the river Arnon on the south, which is the Colorado 
River. 

The line was drawn to a place in the north called Pella, which 
corresponds to the location of the tribe of Dan north of Coeur 
d'Alene in Idaho. This division represents what was known 
"from Dan to Beer-sheba" and is from Cceur d'Alene to Colorado 
River. This territory covers the tribes of Reuben, Gad and 
Manasseh. The terms used for this part of the country were, 
"the farther side of Jordan" or "beyond the Jordan." Today it 
is called "east of the mountains." 

The fifth and last territory, as described, is "The Decap- 
olis" and is the section east of the mountains as Oregon and 
Washington. This section has no given name and is called a 
Decapolis, which means a nation or headquarters within itself. 
This section includes the location of the ten tribes. It takes in 
as far as we can judge, the entire territory east of the moun- 
tains, north of the Snake and Columbia Rivers, but the eastern 
borders are not defined. However, it takes in a lake by the 
name of "Merom," possibly Cceur d'Alene. The flat country 
around Spokane was called the "Bashan." The Blue Mountains 
were called "El Ledja." The Rocky Mountain range in Idaho 
is called "Mt. Hermon." 

It is apparent that the mountains, rivers and country in 
general have not changed in the last 6000 years, for the descrip- 
tion given in the Bible is as good today as it was when it was 
written. 

The names given in the Acts, have been translated from 
the Greek language and the names of Greece and Italy used to 
show that Paul lived there. 

A good description of the United States as a nation is given 
in Isaiah, chapters 60-^66. It is for the conditions which exist 
at the present time. 



Part IV— Chapter 32. 159 

The Pacific Coast States, when described in the Acts, the 
years of 1918-1921 is given as 33-35 Anno Domini. The year 
1920 is described in chapter 8, and gives the conditions on the 
west coast of the country which will be far from good. 

The cycle after 1920 is figured from the 120th degree west 
longitude and the disaster which will take place then is for the 
United States. The first cycle for the United States contains 40 
degrees and if the United States has war between the years 
1992 and 1996, the country east of the 115th degree will be 
destroyed and annexed to Europe. There is a prophecy in the 
Bible that France and Germany may invade the United States 
as far west as Utah and destroy the eastern States. 

The period of time between 1920 and 2992 is called the 
Millenium age, and during this cycle the conditions and mode 
of living in the United States will be as a Garden of Eden. The 
population in the United States will be ten per cent, greater 
than the entire population of the nations in Europe; according 
to the description given in the Bible. The 120th degree west 
longitude is the next center for the world's population and civ- 
ilization for the next 2000 years. 

The disturbances described in the Bible as earthquakes, 
etc., mean the revolutionizing of the existing national condi- 
tions. It has reference to all nations on earth and is described 
to take place at the time of the end of the world. 

The conditions, as described in Europe, need no explanation 
for the Bible stories give this in detail. The country of the 
Pacific Coast is described in the Acts, chapters 4-12 and in 
Revelations as the sixth plague and these predictions will soon 
come to pass. 

It should be remembered that the cycle which begins in 1921 
is for new nations under new conditions with new laws and form 
of government. The laboring and lower classes are to rule and 
be at the head of the government in America and Asia, as well 
as in Europe. Before this takes place, however, a great disturb- 
ance is to affect all nations ; which is the cause of the change in 
the government. This disturbance as described in Revelations 
9:13 as the sixth plague is to begin in Germany and at the 
Euphrates. All the nations of Europe will change their 
form of government and the common people will rule this Millen- 
ium age. 

Up to the fall of 1920 the world is ruled by Saturn as 
Satan. The nature of the spirit of the age is to be selfish, dis- 



160 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

contented, destructive and domineering. All seeking to get 
something for nothing, and if they do not get it their way, they 
will produce trouble for themselves and others. It will be found 
that before we enter 1921, that the elements which are ruled by 
Satan whether rich or poor will do much damage and will upset 
the present forms of governments. It will be like a cyclone and 
when it is over the conditions, within all nations, will be satis- 
factorily adjusted with new and better form of government 
and living conditions ; which is described as the Millenium age. 

This disturbance is described as the sixth plague, will last 
for five months, which will begin in 1919 and will nT)t be satis- 
factorily settled until the new form of government is estab- 
lished. 

The seventh plague is described in Rev. 10; after the sixth 
plague has begun. It will take place at the time of the publica- 
tion of a book explaining the mysterious writings of the Bible. 

The eclipse of the Sun and Moon, which took place in the 
fourth year of the war in 1918, is spoken of in the Bible in a 
number of places when the end of time was referred to. It is a 
scientific fact that an eclipse of the sun and moon takes place 
every eighteen years. The ancient writers figured out, or knew, 
that at the end of each cycle of time this eclipse and the war 
comes at a given time. Eighteen times 120 equals 2160 years 
and this constitutes a cycle of time. From this it will be seen that 
at the end of every great cycle an eclipse will take place. This 
is the mystery which the Bible students have magnified and dis- 
torted ; for all kinds of explanations have been brought forth to 
shov/ why the sun and moon became dark. The Bible contains 
the statement that at the time of the crucifying of Christ, the 
sun and moon were to be darkened. Christ has now been cruci- 
fied for the past four years, and this is one of the facts to show 
that Christ is being crucified now and not 2000 years ago. 

The United States is represented in the character known as 
Uncle Sam and corresponds to the eastern or male division of 
the country. The female principle is represented in the wife 
of Uncle Sam, who is called Columbia and represents the Pacific 
Coast States. Uncle Sam and Columbia have a legal family of 
forty-eight children (48 States) but Uncle Sam has children out 
of wedlock, his outside possessions. He is doing as Abraham did 
and has children with his handmaids outside of his own home, 
which is self explanatory. 

For the next age, the United States will, as a power, rule the 



Part IV— Chapter a3< 161 

nations of the world. The end of the cycle and power for the 
United States is described in John 21:18, ''Verily, verily, I say 
unto thee, when thou wast young thou girdest thyself, and 
walketh whither thou wouldst: but when thou shalt be old,: 
thou shalt stretch forth thy hands, and another shall gird thee^ 
and carry thee whither thou wouldst not." 

The wise men who wrote the Bible were Astrologers. They 
produced a story of the heavens to show the coming age the 
law. 

Chapter 33. 

millenium and new world. 

The Bible describes the New World, commonly called the 
United States. This country is described in the Bible as a real 
heaven on earth, where living is a perfect dream of happiness. 
From the beautiful description given in church literature of 
this New World, and the future home of the races, a real, 
glorious, heavenly home on earth has been described and not 
mansions in the clouds. It has been so illustrated that at the 
end of a given cycle of time, the conditions of the old country,, 
described as the old world, were to be destroyed, and the New 
World would be the future home for the races. The country of 
the new world is described as having golden streets and the 
people living there, playing on harps and singing the songs of 
Moses; speaking with Angels; and sitting on footstools made 
by God. It was to be neither night nor day in this heavenly 
home and they would worship God and work day and night. 

What is written in the Bible of the New Heaven and the 
New Earth is a description of a paradise on earth and is the 
United States and not a place in the clouds. The place and 
conditions which were to exist there were described as a per- 
fect life, with personal freedom and liberty without limit. God 
would five with the people and produce a condition where tears 
and sorrows should be unknown. 

The New Jerusalem is described in Revelation, Chapter 
21:1 "And I saw a new heaven and a new earth, for the first 
heaven and the first earth have passed away; and there was no 
more sea." The first heaven and the first earth which have 
passed away are the old conditions in the old country east of 
Greenwich. The new heaven and earth is the United States 
and the expression that the sea has passed away is that the 
Atlantic Ocean is passed, (has been crossed) . There is a men- 



162 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

tion of a third heaven in which is paradise and where the tree 
of life is located. (2nd Cor. 12:2; Rev. 2:7). This has refer- 
ence to the third division of the earth and is the Pacific Coast 
States. This part of the earth is really the paradise described 
and is the best and healthiest part to live in of all the countries 
of the earth. 

The reason why some people (the church element) at 
death expect to go to a certain place called heaven, is because 
of the description given for the new cycle of time. The country 
was described as a paradise on earth, where the human race 
lived with God, who also was in a new heaven at this time. An 
example of the description of this imaginary heaven and earth 
in the clouds is found in Rev. 21 :2, ''And I John saw the holy 
city. New Jerusalem, coming down from God out of heaven, 
prepared as a bride adorned for her husband. 3 And I heard 
a great voice out of heaven saying: 'Behold the tabernacle of 
God is with men, and he will dwell with them, and they shall be 
his people, and God himself shall be with them, and be their 
God.* 4 And God shall wipe away all tears fromo their eyes; 
and there shall be no more death, neither sorrow, nor crying, 
neither shall there be any more pain; for the former things 
have passed away." The explanation of these verses is that 
the bride as described, is the Pacific Coast States, as 
the female principle of the earth. The bridegroom is the 
eastern section of the United States. The tabernacle of God 
is to be with men, which is the true Christian spirit that of 
having God within. God is to be with men which we call the 
American spirit today. The expression that there shall be no 
more death means that the knowledge of that life is eternal 
will take away the sorrows and fears of death which aloi^e will 
be enough to call this age a real paradise. 

In this Millenium age called Paradise, the Lion and the 
Lamb, as well as the Bull, Scorpion and the Goats shall dwell 
together in peace and happiness; that is the tribes as repre- 
sented by these animals will be peaceful nations living as God's 
children. The good country of the United States which is 
God's country on earth and a Paradise from the beginning of 
time. 

The Millenium is the beginning of the New Age history; 
at this time all nations of the earth will live in peace and har- 
mony. The illustrations, as pictured in the stories of the Mil- 
lenium, show that there is a law in the universe which rules all 



Part IV— Chapter 33. 163 

things, and that there is an intelligent power above or rather 
a heavenly power which produces conditions on this earth for 
good or evil. Take the great war as an example. The war had 
to be, in order to break up the military or ruling class of Europe 
for all nations are military, so all the nations had to be de- 
stroyed. It is like washing a nation as we would wash a soiled 
garment. It has to be washed in order to be clean and ready 
for use. That is what Europe will be in the future, a clean 
nation, with a clean form of government. Then all the nations 
will be striving to live according to the golden rule. This will 
be the millenium age and a New Testament. We are assured 
that at this time there will be a reorganization of Europe, 
giving new nations and new forms of governments, and also 
that the Christian church, as operated now, with its extreme 
power and rulership over nations and individuals and the col- 
lecting of tribute for the salvation of man for the next world, 
will cease during the time of the millenium. If this form of 
power were to continue, the Christian church would then rule 
the world. The Bible states positively that the Christian church 
will be destroyed. There must be a reason for destroying this 
great organization, possibly the same reason as the destroying 
of militarism and capitalism together with other monopolistic 
powers. If nations are operated justly, the Christian churches 
will not be allowed to collect a tribute for a life after death, when 
the fact becomes known that there is no death. The churches 
of today will be unnecessary and will have to reorganize on the 
principle of doing good. The people will not go to church to 
find out what to do to be saved in the next life but to learn the 
truths of the present life. To correct the adverse conditions 
and bring about reorganization the great war takes place. It 
is the working of law, which we do not understand, but before 
long all will be understood. Peace and war are apparently as 
necessary as the heat in summer and the cold in winter; so we 
have no right to condemn war or winter and praise peace and 
sunshine. One is as essential as the other in this great universe. 

If the nations of the world today have violated the laws of 
God and sinned, they are in hell and have to take the conse- 
quences, as every human being does when he violates the law. 

If the churches in their teachings stray away from the 
right path of God and teach doctrines of their own, that is : if 
they live according to their own desires as do nations and in- 
dividuals and take the law into their own hand, leading human- 



164 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

ity to worship a false God, punishment must follow. This will 
be endured for a time but not always, so the day comes when 
the churches, as well as nations, have to reorganize. That is 
what is meant when it is said that the Christian church and all 
other churches will be destroyed. 

The Catholic Church is called the Mother of Harlots and 
all the rest of the churches, the daughters. A millstone is to be 
put around their necks and they are to be thrown into the ocean. 
So we know God will make quick work in reorganizing these 
churches and it will be a sad day when it takes place. The 
creed of the church will go but the spirit of the church will 
live and be followed. Many a defender of the church will be 
made white during this calamity, but the soiled garments of the 
church have to be washed, and it will be washed in blood, as it 
is written in the Bible. Rev. 17:18:19. 

Chapter 34. 
the book of mormon. 

In the teachings of the Mormon church are brought out 
clearly that the United States has been populated before the 
present generation. Joseph Smith discovered the writings 
known as the **Book of Mormon" and is a Bible for mother 
earth. The writings or slates found by Joseph Smith, buried 
in an underground vault in the State of New York, are made of 
metal and are written in the Egyptian language. The writings 
of the Mormons are similar to the description of the races given 
in the Bible. It gives the history of the race from the begin- 
ning of time. 

In the book of Mormon is found a full description of the 
cycles of the Christian age. The book of Mormon and the 
Hebrew Talmud come from the same class of writers. It is 
translated in plain language and easier to understand than the 
Bible. 

In the book of Mormon proper and the book of Nephi are 
a full description of the time and place of the present war. It 
describes the present time, better than the Bible, for it gives 
the degrees for location in detail. The book of Mormon is a 
part of the Bible and takes up the study of the children of 
Adam and brings history down to the end at Greenwich. The 
Mormons' description of ancient time is as clear as the descrip- 
tion given in the Bible. In fact it gives information which is 



Part IV— Chapter 34. 165 

not given in the Bible, as it deals with the conflict of the north 
and south as being the opposition in Israel. We will advise 
students to obtain the book of Mormon for it is worth the time 
and money. The contents of the book of Mormon correspond 
to the laws of Moses. In the *'Book of Mormon" is a single 
book entitled ''Book of Mormon;" this book together with the 
"Book of Moroni," (Moroni is the son of Mormon) represent 
the heavenly conditions produced by the planet Uranus. 

To the Bible students these books are very important for 
they give the missing link in the history. There is nothing new 
or important which is not in the Bible but the book of Mormon 
represents the five tribes, while the Bible describes the twelve 
tribes. 

We believe that Joseph Smith actually found the brass 
plates and we also believe that Mr. Smith knew that the plates 
were astrological for we are informed he calculated space and 
directed the movement of the church in future time. He figured 
the time of the civil war and many of the national events to 
come. He used the equinoctial time to place his calculations 
and must have been familiar with the law of nature. 

The action of Joseph Smith in hiding the plates after he 
had translated them was according to instruction given in the 
Book of Mormon. The spirits which instructed Mr. Smith how 
to read the writings of the plates instructed him to hide them 
for the time being, for there always is a reason for things. 

The Mormons are the last church and located at the last 
degree a church could be located in the old cycle. The church 
of Mormon is located in the house of Virgo. The Mohammedan 
church and the Mormon Church correspond for both are in the 
west end or gate of a cycle of time. 

When Moses was in Utah at Mt. Sinai he brought down two 
slates and when he beheld the ''golden calf" he destroyed the 
first two slates. After a time Moses brings down two more 
slates out of the mountains to the Mormons and the two slates 
were adopted as the laws of Moses. We will say that "Moses 
and Mormon" are the same, and when the first slates were 
destroyed it is the destruction of the present worship of the 
Mormons. The golden calf is church worship for church organ- 
ization is a personal representation of God. This wor- 
ship will be destroyed and the people of the Mormon church 
will receive a new set of slates from Moses and they will call 
him Moroni. These slates are the same as described in the 



166 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

*^Book of Mormon" in the book of Nephi, chapter 13:20 as the 
"Book of the Jew.'* Their own Bible tells them what kind of a 
book it will be and what it will teach. The Jews are the people of 
Judah in Europe and it will be a man from Europe of the tribe 
Leo who will write a book which is described in the Book of 
Mormon. They will accept the teachings of the new book of 
the Jew, which again corresponds to the two new slates of 
Moses. This is very simple and it is for the Mormons to 'figure 
out from their own book when the new book of the Jew will be 
published. It is written in very plain, good language following 
the description of the destruction of the Christian Churches. 

The Mormon church proves that the "Garden of Eden" de- 
scribed in the Bible was in the United States. They also be- 
lieve that the center of the garden calculated in degrees is at 
95 degrees west, instead of 90 degrees, to correspond to the 
location of Salt Lake. The actual place as a center must be 
where nature divides the country. It will be found at 90 de- 
grees west and 36 degrees north and is in Missouri. At this 
place within a radius of two degrees the States of Missouri, 
Arkansas, Tennessee, Mississippi, Kentucky and Illinois are 
divided. This section of Missouri is a freak of nature and is 
the center of the "Garden of Eden." 

The Mormons are filling in a space in the history of Chris- 
tianity, they are part of Christ and belong to Christ, but they 
are of the later day. From this they know they are at the end 
or last days of Christianity. They have the Christian spirit 
and are the followers of Moses, and when they get their New 
Slates in the New Dispensation they can then follow Christ and 
worship a living God in the eternal universe. 

Chapter 35. 

reincarnation and evolution. 

We have been unable to find in the Bible, or any of the 
other sacred books, the principles of reincarnation. Every 
subject or topic we have been able to observe deals with endless 
cycles of time. The sun and planets are continuous in their 
, eternal revolutions in circuits. They have been given different 
names at the end of each cycle but a new cycle is not reincarna- 
tion. Uranus has been called Adam, Noah, Moses, Jesus and 
'Saul and Paul; this does not mean reincarnation. We do not 
say that the human race cannot reincarnate, but we have failed 
to find it in any of the fundamental principles of life written 



PaH IV-^Chapter 36. 167 

in the Bible. The principle of evolution is the philosophy 
brought forth in the Bible and not the teachings of man's de- 
sire where to live and in what form to exist. The Bible states 
that the soul and body of man part and that the evolution of 
the being continues in the next form of expression. The Bible 
also says that reproduction takes place in our present form of 
existence and that we do not reproduce in the next life. Repro- 
duction and cycles of time do not go backward. 

Our present form is the first expression of conscious life^ 
when memory and individuality are obtained. If individuality 
and memory are lost in reincarnation, the existence of the 
being becomes a new expression of life. 

If we are not mistaken, there is a continuous change from 
birth to death and all life is eternal. When the elements of 
nature have served their purpose, they are discarded and a new 
expression is taken on. There is not in any expression of life 
a demonstration that the same life principle exist in the same 
form twice. 

We do not know whether reincarnation is a fact or not, as 
it is now known or understood, but we do know that the law 
of nature is regulated and unchangeable ; that the same law ap- 
plies to the smallest as well as to the largest manifestation in 
existence, because as it is in heaven so is it on earth. 

The leaders of Theosophy base their opinion regarding re- 
incarnation on what is written in the book of Matthew 17 : 10-14, 
**And his disciple asked him, saying, 'why then say the scribes 
that Elias must first come' and Jesus answered and said unto 
them, 'Elias truly shall first come, and restore all things, but 
I say unto you; That Elias is come already, and they know him 
not.' Then the disciples understood that he spake unto them of 
John the Baptist." Read Mark 9:11-13. Also read Malachi 
4:5, "Behold, I will send you Elijah the prophet before the 
coming of the great and dreadful day of the Lord." Eli>ah and 
John the Baptist are representations of Neptune. Neptune has 
again been reincarnated in the furnace of the lion which is the 
killing and reincarnation of Elijah. Matthew 11:12-15. 

Chapter 36. 

THE ACTS. 

The book of The Acts is the description of the events 
which are fo take place in the New Age. ^e will refer to a 



168 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

few chapters to show what is meant by the travels of Paul and 
what the names of the different places are. At the beginning 
of the description of the Apostle's time, new names were given 
the characters which represent the planet Uranus. A new 
name was given to both divisions for the name of Saul was ap- 
plied to the first cycle and Paul to the Pacific Coast section. 

The first three chapters deal with the condition in Europe, 
and the description given is what will take place at the present 
time. It must be remembered that the disciples of Jesus represent 
the nations of Europe and when it is said in the Bible that certain 
disciples meet together, speak, etc., it is really a representation 
of action of the different nations. When the disciples speak in 
different tongues (cloven tongues), as is written in chapter 2, 
it means that all nations are speaking in their own languages. 
It says that they were "filled with the holy spirit," when 
speaking; which means that the nations are on friendly terms 
and have the Christ spirit within. 

Chapter 3 describes that Peter heals a lame man sitting 
at the gate of the temple. In the New Age, Peter is the United 
States and the lame man is Ireland, who sits at the gate; the 
gate means near Greenwich degree. This is the same cripple 
or beggar who has been sitting for ages at the door of the 
temple. It means that within a few years Ireland will again 
stand on her own feet and walk as a nation, but it will be by 
the help of the United States. Verse 6, "Then Peter said. Silver 
and gold have I none; but such as I have give I thee; In the 
name of Jesus Christ of Nazareth, rise up and walk.'' The rest 
of the chapter is self explanatory, for it shows that the spirit 
of the age spoken of by Peter is the great American principle 
of Freedom. 

Chapter 4 describes the imprisonment of Peter and John; 
the imprisonment means war. Peter is the United States and 
John is either Holland or Belgium. Peter was bold and de- 
clared a principle of right and justice, described in verses 8 to 
12. This is the American Spirit of the age, called the "Holy 
Ghost" in verse 8. It also says that the other Apostles were 
threatened, which means that there was danger of war for other 
nations. 

Chapter 5 is a description of Annanias and his wife Sap- 
phira, who sold some land and did not act honest about it. The 
characters representing Annanias and his wife are Mexico. 
The eastern and western part of the country represent man and 



Part IV— Chapter 36. 169 

^fe. It is the same story over again at the end of the age, 
when Uranus, described as a patriarch, goes south, us- 
ually called Egypt, to avoid some imaginary persecution. At 
the beginning of all cycles or ages a trip is made south and at 
this age it is to Mexico. The story, described in chapter 5, is 
that Mexico is in some manner involved in a deal to sell part 
of her country. We are inclined to think that before 
many years are passed that Mexico will give some 
other nation part of her territory for money; this will pro- 
duce war with the United States. It is shown that Peter is the 
master and will merely say the word, and Mexico from the 
Atlantic to the Pacific will fall dead at the feet of the United 
States. 

In all the chapters of The Acts, where Peter is used as an 
illustration, it is the United tates which is meant; as in the 
first part of The Acts Simon or Peter is the leading character. 

In chapter 13 :9 Saul is called Paul to show the change of 
cycles, which takes place after the destruction spoken of in 
chapter 11 :27. This is the end of the age (the first 40 degrees) 
and at this time Herod dies as described in chapter 12. The 
age as represented by ''Herod the Great" is to Greenwich and 
is described as belonging to the European cycle. 

The rest of the chapters deal with the condition on the 
west ocast, where the Apostle Paul travels and visits the differ- 
ent tribes described as churches. There are twenty-eight 
chapters of The Acts and all are repetition of what could and 
should be done in the different churches, which again is nothing 
more or less than a representation of the houses of the heavens, 
describing the philosophy of the universe. 

The age of Paul is for the Pacific Coast states and extends 
across the Pacific Ocean and includes the eastern part of China 
and Japan. The life of Paul is easily followed, for the Pacific 
Coast country has been described before, showing the different 
divisions, as it is a similar history as thai; described after Sol- 
omon's time. When Paul travels across the Pacific Ocean, it is 
transcribed to be a trip to Rome, when he was shipwrecked as 
described in chapter 27:10. The shipwreck story is the passing 
of the 180th degree west. Paul (Uranus) made the trip in the 
sign for Caster and Pollux which is Gemini, chapter 28:11. 

The life of Paul in China is described in chapter 28:8 when 
he was with the barbarians and healed many in the islands. 



170 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

This is as far as the Apostle Paul can go and he is at the end 
of his cycle of time. 

The chapters of Paul, written from the Asiatic side of the 
Pacific Ocean, is described as Epistles to the Romans, Galatians, 
and others; these letters or epistles are written to the churches 
on the American side, which were located in the Pacific north- 
west. In former ages ten tribes used to be described but Paul 
writes to the twelve churches, representing the twelve tribes. 

The ruler, described as Agrippa, in chapter 26, is for the 
Pacific Coast, described at this time as a nation having a ruler. 
It is apparent that he was not the highest officer of the nation, 
for Paul appealed to a higher court above Agrippa. The Caesar 
spoken of corresponds to the government at Washington, D. C, 
in our time, and is represented in Saturn. 



Part V. 

HEAVENLY CONDITIONS ON EARTH. 

Chapter 37. 

twelve tribes in the united states. 

The twelve tribes of Israel, as described by Moses and 
Joshua were located in the Pacific Coast States, and extend over 
into Japan and China. The Pacific Coast States were described 
as the promised land and were divided according to the natural 
divisions of the country, in degrees of latitude and longitude. 
In this chapter we will describe the principle illustrated in the 
location of the tribes at a given distance in degrees, called the 
locating of the tribes and a nativity. The Pacific Coast States 
have been described as the place for the beginning of Bible his- 
tory. It was first divided into four parts and later into the 
five and seven tribes which became the twelve tribes of Israel. 
The birth of the children of Mother Earth, as described on the 
Pacific Coast, is the naming and locating of the tribes at the 
beginning of the cycle. This is the place for the beginning of 
the history of the age ending at Greenwich. Joshua located 
the twelve tribes in the Pacific Coast States and Jacob describes 
the children born in Europe-Asia but does not locate them. 

In Solomon's time the country contained five provinces 
which later were divided into seven and finally into ten tribes. 
The reason why there should be only ten tribes at this time is 
that the two tribes of Reuben and Gad are located east of the 
120th degree; which leaves the ten tribes west of the moun- 
tains. The Pacific Coast Country is described as Eve and the 
mother of all the children on the earth from which we can see 
the reason why all cycles should begin at this location. 

The Pacific Coast States are by nature, located so that the 
diflferent cycles within the 120-degree age can be described as 
tribes. It must be remembered that each age or cycle has a holy 
mountain. The first age of 120 degrees is represented in Mt. 
Whitney which is the first holy mountain as the Jerusalem for 
the five tribes of Judah, which later were called the Jews. The 
second cycle of 60 degrees consists of the seven tribes north of 
Judeah having Mt. Ephraim, which is Mt. Shasta, in the Siski- 
you Mountains, as the holy mountain for the age. The last 
cycles of 30 degrees is represented in the two mountains of 



172 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Tyre and Zidon, which are respectively the Olympic Mountains 
and Mt. Rainier in the State of Washington. We will call at- 
tention to the fact that the place originally located as the tribe 
of Issachar constituted the triangular location beween Mt. 
Rainier, Mt. Adams and Mt. St. Helens in the State of Washing- 
ton. This is the place which corresponds to Belgium for the 
cycle for Europe, when the age is killed. It is located between 
Galilee and Samaria and corresponds to the description given 
in the Bible. This place corresponds to Alsace-Lorraine and 
Belgium as the funeral pyre for the cycle for Europe and is 
called the Armagedden and Golgotha as the end of the cycle for 
the Christian age. 

The International Date Line at 180 degrees has been called 
the Euphrates and is the location for the tribe of Naphtali. Tur- 
key represents Naphtali for the cycle of Europe and the river 
Euphrates is located at the 45th degree longitude and is one of 
the quarter divisions of the earth, called a bad angle. From 
this can be seen that Turkey represents the end of the cycle and 
is to Europe the same as the British Columbia boundary line 
is to the Pacific Coast tribes. 

It will be seen that the tribes as located on the Pacific Coast 
liave been located to correspond to the degrees around the earth 
and the division of the heavens. In order to prove this we will 
describe the principal angles in the location of the tribes given 
in the Bible. San Francisco is located in Pisces, near Aries, 
which corresponds to the meridian in the heavens and is the 
principal location on the Pacific Coast and called Jericho. In 
the State of Washington, west of the mountain, is the location 
for Cancer, called Issachar, and is the end of the first 90-degree 
<jycle and a burying place for the age. The British Columbia 
boundary represents 180 degrees and is called Naphtali and is 
the end of the age north. Reuben as Sagitarius is the first bom 
and is located east of the mountains in Nevada and is calcu- 
lated as 120 degrees east from San Francisco, making the end 
of the age, as being near the Sodom-Gomorah country. The 
tribe of Simeon which is Aquarius is located as San Diego 
County and represents the borders of Mexico and the 60th de- 
gree angle from Jericho. Portland, Oregon, is located at a good 
angle in the upper end of the tribe of Manasseh as Taurus and 
represents the first 60 degrees of the cycle. The Shasta Moun- 
tains divided Ephraim and Manasseh which is Aries and Tau- 
rus representing the 30-degree angle. 



Part V— Chapter 37. 173 

The holy mountain of Mt. IWhitney has been described as 
Levi, and is Aquarius; (at this age separated from Simeon). 
It is located 30 degrees from Aries which is the 30-degree of 
the tribe of Benjamin (Pisces) and is the distance from San 
Francisco to Mt. Whitney. The tribe of Levi is located at the 
tribe of Judah which is Leo and corresponds to southern Cali- 
fornia. The tribe of Judah represents the 120th degree from 
San Francisco and is the end of the cycle. This tribe extends 
east to the desert at Death Valley and Arizona and to the Mex- 
ican borders. The two tribes of Dan and Asher are located on 
the coast and are described to extend over into China. These 
tribes are Libra and Scorpio located respectively 210 and 240 
degrees from San Francisco, which explains why these tribes 
extend to Asia and are located on the other side of the 180th 
degree. 

We realize that the description and location of the tribes 
are of no value to the students who are not familiar with this 
study, but this science is known to many who do know and 
understand the principle described. 

The Pacific age begins at 115 degrees, which includes the 
country from the Gulf of California in the south and north to 
the Canadian border. The dividing line, described in the Bible 
as the ''Jordan" is the eastern borders of the Sierra Nevada and 
Cascade Mountains, which is at the 120th degree. East of the 
mountains was called "on the other side of Jordan," and west 
of the mountains "beyond the Jordan." The real division is 
the mountains from the Gulf of California to British Columbia. 
The description begins with the tribes in the south and goes 
northward. There are three tribes on the east of the mountains 
which were divided by Moses and belong to his cycle. These 
are Reuben, Gad and Manasseh, bounded on the east by the 
115th degree. 

Mt. Whitney in California is located near the 36th degree 
north latitude and the tribe of Naphtali as Virgo is located 
twelve degrees north, at the entrance of the Puget Sound, which 
is at 48 degrees and corresponds to the meridian of the heavens. 
From this can be seen the reason why the United States borders 
do not extend north of the 49th degree. 

The Pacific Coast country was divided into four divisions, 
that is, the 24 degrees from the 30th degree to the 54th degree, 
were divided into four cycles of six degrees each and were 
called the twenty-four elders. The first quarter is in the south 



174 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

from the 30th degree in Mexico to the 36th degree at Mt. Whit- 
ney; the second quarter terminates at the location of the Sis- 
kiyou Mountains at the 42nd degree. The third quarter ends at 
the 48th degree in Washington and the fourth quarter ends at 
the 54th degree. 

The tribes, described in the Bible and located on the Pacific 
Coast have been divided by the degrees and this we will prove 
by the following description. Naphtali is the farthest north 
and is located north of the 48th degree and east of the 123rd 
degree. Zebulun is located between the 47th and 48th degree 
east of the 123rd degree. Issachar is located between the 46th 
and 47th degree east of the 123rd degree. Manasseh is located 
between the 41st and 46th degrees east of the 123rd degree. 
Asher is located along the coast west from the 123rd degree 
and extends to Asia at the 120th degree east of Greenwich. 
This tribe is also called Asher in Japan and Chinaa north of the 
42nd degree, The tribe of Ephraim is located between the 38th 
and 41st degree and between the 120th and 124th degree. Ben- 
jamin is located between the 36th and 38th degrees. Judah is 
located between the 34th and 36th degree. Simeon is located 
south of the 34th degree. Dan is located along the coast and 
is the coast range from the 35th to the 37th degree. The 
tribes of Benjamin and Ephraim also extend to Asia. Naph- 
tali, in the north (British Columbia) extends, when making a 
circle of the tribes, to the south and is then in Mexico and is 
called Naphtali in the south. The tribes of Reuben and Gad are 
east of the Mountains. 

The virgin Naphtali is located in Galilee next to the two 
sons of Zebedee and the Sea of Galilee corresponds to the Puget 
Sound. 

The holy mountains in California are located in what is 
known as Tulare county from Tulare lake to Owens lake, be- 
tween the 36th and 37th degrees, and include a number of 
national park reservations. In the Bible this place is called 
the tribe of Levi. 

REUBEN (SAGITARIUS). 

The tribe of Reuben is located in Nevada from the Colorado 
River in the south, west of the 115th degree and north of the 
36th degree. Reuben is bounded on the west by the Sierra 
Nevada Mountains; on the east by the desert and on the north 




Plate No. 7— Pacific Coast States Tribes. 



176 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

by the Humbolt River at the 41st degree. The tribe of Reuben 
in Europe corresponds to Spain and Portugal. 

GAD (CAPRICORN). . 

The tribe of Gad is located north of Reuben. It is bounded 
on the west by the 120th degree, on the south by the 41st de- 
gree at the Humbolt River, on the east by the 115th degree 
and on the north by the 46th degree at Columbia River to the 
Bitter Root Mountains. It takes in the corners of Nevada, 
Oregon and Idaho. In Europe the tribe of Gad corresponds to 
Russia. 

MANNASSEH (TAURUS). 

The half tribe of Manasseh, east is the territory east of the 
Cascade Mountains, containing what is known as eastern Wash- 
ington and northern Idaho. It is bounded on the west by the 
120th degree, on the south by the 46th degree, on the east by 
the 115th degree and on the north at the British Columbia 
boundary in the 48th degree. 

This is the section known as Bashan and called "the grain- 
ery of Egypt. Manasseh east corresponds to England's out- 
side possessions. 

SIMEON-LEVI (AQUARIUS). 

The tribe of Simeon is located on the west of the mountains 
and it received its share of territory from Judah. The tribe of 
Simeon corresponds to San Diego County, from the Colorado 
River to the Ocean. It included the northern part of Mexico 
from the 30th degree latitude to the Gulf of California as a 
southern boundary. Its northern boundary is the San Ber- 
nardino Mountains, south of the 34th degree. 

The tribe of Levi is separated from Simeon and is located 
in what is known as the ''Holy Mountains," and is in Tulare 
County, California. It includes Mt. Whitney and Kaweah 
Peak, both over 14,000 feet high, and are the highest mountains 
in the United States. The tribe of Levi includes the 3equoia 
National Park and is nothing but mountains. 

In Europe, the tribe of Simeon corresponds to Alsace- 
Lorraine, and the tribe of Levi corresponds to Switzerland. 

JUDAH (LEO). 

The tribe of Judah is described as having the most valua- 
ble land and is located in Southern California, west of the 



Part V—Cha/pter 37. 17T 

mountains. It includes the counties of Riverside, San Bernar- 
dino, Los Angeles, Ventura and Kern Counties, up to Tulare 
and Kings Counties in the mountains. Its northern boundary 
.was the Kings River and Lake Tulare at the 36th degree; the 
western boundary was the coast range and from Santa Barbara 
south to the Ocean at the 120th degree. The southern border 
was at the 34th degree. In Europe the tribe of Judah cor- 
responds to Germany. 

BENJAMIN (PISCES). 
The tribe of Benjamin is located between the territory of 
Judah on the south and Ephraim on the north. The easterm 
border is the mountains ; the southern boundary includes Fresno 
county up to the Kings River and Tulare Lake to the 37th de- 
gree; its western border is the coast range, including San 
Benito County, up to the Salinas River at Santa Cruz, then to 
the Ocean north of San Francisco to the 38th degree. The 
northern border is from the bay and the Sacramento River east 
on the 38th degree 30 minutes to the 120th degree in the moun- 
tains. The tribe of Benjamin is the San Joaquin Valley and cor- 
responds to Italy in Europe. 

DAN (SCORPIO). 

The tribe of Dan is located between Benjamin and the 
Ocean. It is that part of the state between the coast range 
and the Ocean from Santa Cruz to Santa Barbara. It includesL 
Monterey and San Louis Obispo counties. 

The northern part of Dan described in Judges 13:25 as' 
"the camp of Dan,'* is in the Phoenician country of British Col- 
umbia north of Idaho in the Rocky Mountains at 115 degrees 
west. The tribe of Dan corresponds to Austria-Hungary in 
Europe. 

EPHRAIM (ARIES). 

The tribe of Ephraim is located on the north of Benjamin 
in the Sacramento Valley and extends over the coast range to 
the Ocean. The western boundary extends along the Ocean 
from San Francisco Bay at the 38th degree to the Klamath 
River in the Siskiyou Mountains at the 41st degree 30 minutes 
on the north. The eastern border is the 120th degree east of 
the mountains ; and the southern border the San Francisco Bay 
and the 38th degree. It includes what is known as northern 
California from Oregon to San Francisco Bay. Ephraim in 
Europe corresponds to France. 



178 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

MANNASSEH (TAURUS). 

The tribe of Manasseh, west, is located in Oregon from 
the Siskiyou Mountains on the south to the Columbia River on 
the north. The eastern boundary is at the 120th degree east 
of the Cascade mountains. Mannasseh is bounded on the south 
by the Klamath River in the Siskiyou Mountains, at 41 degrees 
30 minutes on the west by the coast range, east of the 123rd 
degree north to the Columbia River. The north is bounded by 
the 46th degree. The tribe of Manasseh consists of the central 
part of Oregon. 

Manasseh in Europe corresponds to England. It is de- 
scribed as one with Ephraim; that is, England and France are 
one and Northern California and Oregon are one. 

ISSACHAR (CANCER). 

The tribe of Issachar is located in the Cascade Mountains 
in the State of V/ashington. The southern border is the 46th 
degree from the Columbia River, the western border is from 
the Columbia River at the Coast range eastward to Mt. Rainier 
at the 47th degree. Its northern boundary is the 47th degree at 
Mount Rainier and the National Park in the Cascade Moun- 
tains eastward to the 120th degree. The Columbia river at the 
120th degree is the eastern border. The mountains of Mt. 
Rainier, St. Helens and Mt. Adams are included in this terri- 
tory. Issachar corresponds to Holland-Belgium-Denmark in 
Europe. 

ASHER (LIBRA). 

The tribe of Asher is located along the coast and is the 
coast range, from the Siskiyou Mountains to the Strait of Juan 
de Fuca. On the north it is bounded by the 48th degree, on 
the east by the 123rd degree, but on the 47th degree it extends 
eastward to Mt. Rainier and then southwest to the 46th degree 
at the Columbia River. The tribe of Asher corresponds to 
Greece in Europe. 

ZEBULUN (GEMINI). 
The tribe of Zebulun is located on both sides of the Puget 
Sound in Washington. The eastern borders are the 120th de- 
gree at the Columbia River; the northern borders, the Snoho- 
mish Divide at the 48th degree and Puget Sound; the western 
borders, the coast range at the 123rd degree, and the southern 
border, the upper end of Puget Sound at Olympia on the 47th 
degree. The tribe of Zebulun corresponds to Scandinavia in 
Europe. 



Part V— Chapter 38. 



179 



NAPHTALI (VIRGO). 
The tribe of Naphtali is located in the farthest north. It 
is located north of the 48th degree from the Divide at Snoho- 
mish and includes Skagit and Whatcom Counties. It extends 
from the 120th degree in the Cascade Mountains, west to the 
123rd degree, and the north border is the British Columbia 




Plate 8 — Nations as Tribes. 



boundary at 49th degree as the Phoenician border, 
corresponds to Turkey in Europe. 

Chapter 38. 



Naphtali 



EGYPT, THE PYRAMIDS AND SPHINX. 

The country of the Nile Valley, called Egypt, has been 
referred to in nearly all books of the Bible, but the inhabitants, 
as a tribe of people, have not been described. It is only at the 



180 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

beginning and the ending of the age for Europe that the prin- 
ciple, illustrated in Egypt, as a thirty-degree space is described. 
Egypt is located at 30 degrees latitude and also 30 degrees 
longitude and is the dividing degree for the ages or cycles of 
time. Egypt has been described as a good location, of a saving 
or protecting nature, for nearly all the Bible stories described 
trips to Egypt for the purpose of avoiding persecution from 
some imaginary enemy. The saving principle in Egypt is that 
it is located at the angle of 30 degree, which is a good angle. 

It should be remembered that the 120th, 60th, and 30th 
degrees are the good angles of the earth, and from this can be 
seen the reason v^hy the Pacific Coast States and Egypt are so 
very important in the Bible stories, as Egypt represents Europe 
as an age in Aquarius and the Coast States Leo. 

The formation of Egypt is similar to the formation of 
the Pacific Coast States and the same principle in dividing the 
country was used in both places, that is, the country was ar- 
ranged as a horoscope and corresponds to the story as described 
about the Garden of Eden. It was divided into four parts ; the 
tree of life and the tree of knowledge are located in the center 
of this garden. This principle is described in another chapter 
but we will explain that the Nile river and the 31st degree longi- 
tude represents the tree of life and the 30th degree latitude the 
tree of knowledge. The Pyramids are located at the 30th de- 
gree and represent the principle of the tree of life and a holy 
place. It is the same principle as described in Mt. Sinai, the 
tower of Babel and the Mount of Olives, where the patriarch or 
savior of the age speaks face to face with God. The Pyramids 
were built to represent the end of the earth^s cycle. They are 
located at the very degree which represents the meridian, and 
corresponds to a point in the heavens where the ecliptic crosses 
the equator. 

When the philosophy of life, as illustrated in the Bible, and 
the laws of the universe, as pictured in the principle of the 
Pyramids, become known, the science of life and death will be 
a common knowledge and a great blessing to humanity. 

It is apparent that it was the Egyptians who were the 
scientific scholars in the past ages, and built the Pyra- 
mids as a silent evidence to illustrate the principle of the 
science of a universal law. The Jewish race, who formerly in- 
habited Palestine, has left the Bible as a record of the philoso- 
phy of life, illustrating the principle of eternal life, as a God- 



Part V— ^Chapter 38. * 181 

given law. From this can be seen that the last recorded history 
for the science of the laws of the universe and the philosophy of 
life, is the historic records from Egypt and Palestine. These 
doctrines were later included in the Greek national laws but 
became a lost art when the Roman powers established a personal 
God from Rome. 

We will briefly explain the system used in Egypt to show 
the operation of the law of nature, for it is nothing more nor 
less than the horoscope for the Nile Valley. We will first call 
attention to the Book of Joshua in the Bible, wherein is de- 
scribed the location of the tribes of Israel in the Pacific Coast 
States. This part of the country contains a distance of 24 de- 
grees, called the 24 Elders, and was divided into four divisions 
called Judah, Samaria, Galilee and Phoenicia. These divisions 
are by nature divided by Mountains and rivers at given de- 
grees of longitude and latitude and are described as the twelve 
tribes of Israel. The holy mountain for the 120-degree cycle 
was located at Mt. Whitney in California. The same principle 
as described for the Pacific Coast section is applied to the 
country of Egypt, but the tribes in America are described to 
begin south and end in the north, whereas in Egypt the system 
is reversed, the beginning is north and the ending is south. The 
distance in Egypt is from the 31st degree to the 23rd degree 
latitude, and from the 30th degree to the 34th degree east 
longitude. This is a distance of eight degrees latitude and four 
degrees longitude and includes the main part of Egypt. The 
distance for the Pacific Coast is 24 degrees for a '60-degree 
cycle and for Egypt the distance is 8 degrees for a 30-degree 
cycle, which shows that the larger distance is again reduced 
into three minor divisions. 

The valley was divided east from west by the Nile river 
and the 31st degree longitude. The first section is located as 
Lower Egypt, between the 31st and 30th degrees, and was 
called Egyptus Inferior; this division corresponds to Southern 
California, from Mexico at the 30th degree to Mt. Whitney at 
the 36th degree. 

The second section is located between the 30th and the 
28th degrees, north latitude. In this section at the 30th degree 
east the Pyramids are located. This section was called Hepta- 
nomis Arcadia, and corresponds to California from the 36th 
degree to the Southern boundary of Oregon at the 42nd degree. 

The third division, called Egyptus Superior, is located be- 



182 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

tween the 28th and 24 degrees. In this section the Oasis Magna 
is located (Oasis Dakhla) and corresponds to Oregon and Wash- 
ington from the 42nd degree to the 48th degree in Washington. 

The fourth and last division is located between the 24th 
and 23rd degrees and is called Dodecaschanus. This section 
corresponds to British Columbia from the 48th degree to the 
54th degree. 

That part of the country east of the 30th degree was de- 
scribed as belonging to Babylon, which means Asia, as the 30th 
degree marks the beginning of the European age. There are 
many places in Egypt shown on the maps called Heliopolis, 
Letopolis, Hermopolis and similar names ending in "opolis." 
These locations illustrate the same principle to Egypt as the 
names applied in the Bible to the provinces and mean terminal 
places, representing the cardinal localities. 

The writers of modern history have described that the Pyra- 
mids were built for the purpose of burying the remains of 
kings. We find, however, that the location of the Pyramids is 
the Memphis or holy mountains for Egypt. The Pyramids rep- 
resent the house of Aquarius which is the home of the planets 
Uranus and Neptune and were built to illustrate the principle 
of God's Laws. The Pyramids represent to Egypt the same 
principle as the Alps do to Europe, Mt. Whitney to America 
and the Himalaya Mountains to Asia. It is a sacred and holy 
place being a burying ground for the ages and cycles of time. 
The Pyramids are located at the 30th degree latitude and 31st 
degree longitude and is at the dividing of upper and lower 
Egypt. 

The country east of the Pyramids is similar to the country 
east of Mt. Whitney at 36 degrees latitude in California. The 
Arizona desert corresponds to the Arabian desert; the Gulf of 
California is similarly located as the Red Sea; the Nile River 
was used as a dividing degree as the mountains were used in 
America. Bath-Sheba was described as the mother of Solomon 
and is located at the Gulf of California, and Cleopatra cor- 
responds to the country located at the upper end of the Red 
Sea near the wilderness of Shur; which again corresponds to 
the wilderness of Zin in Arizona. There is perfect harmony in 
the nature of the country of Egypt and that of Arizona and 
California and the law which was illustrated to apply to these 
locations are the laws of the entire universe. This law has 
been lost to mankind but it will be found again and the science 
of life will be a common knowledge to all. 



Part V— Chapter 39. 183 

. The "Sphinx is located near the Pyramids and gives the dis- 
tance in degrees in the house of Aquarius which is the last 
house of the cycles for the heavens. The head of the Sphinx 
illustrates the head of a man and the body of the monument that 
of a lion. The head represents the house of Aquarius illus- 
trated in the man and the lion represents Leo. At the time of 
the end of the world the man and the lion are described to be a 
sign for the ending of time and the three planets Uranus, 
Saturn and Neptune are in these houses; represented by the 
Sphinx. We take it for granted that the Sphinx is a sign 
for the ending of time. The ending of the cycle two thousand 
years ago corresponds to the location of the Sphinx and the 
ending of the cycle in 1920 is illustrated by Switzerland and 
Germany which represents the same houses as the Sphinx, 
namely: Aquarius and Leo. 

The following ^description gives another illustration of the 
meaning of the Sphinx: If the head of the Sphinx was the 
head of a woman and the body of the monument is that of a 
lion, the head represents the house of Virgo and the body as a 
lion represents Leo. These houses correspond to the location 
for the end of the cycle as the place vv^here the age is killed and 
as this place is located near the 30th degree in the desert, it 
means the same to Egypt as Arizona does to the cycle for 
America. 

The location of the Sphinx corresponds to the principle il- 
lustrated in the International Date Line at 180 degrees. It is a 
place where space is divided east from west and is the location 
for the end of time in Aquarius. The heavenly equator crosses 
the ecliptic in Virgo and is shown in illustrations to cut off the 
head of Virgo. From this it will be seen that the head of Virgo 
is added to Leo, which is the reason why the Sphinx may have 
had the head of a woman and the body of a lion. This shows 
that the Sphinx illustrates the principle of the 180th degree 
and represents the end of the age up to the 30th degree east. 

Chapter 39. 

the great planets. 

The three great planets spoken of in the Bible are Uranus, 
Neptune and Saturn. The other planets are not included in 
Bible study. The entire study of the Bible is the description 
of the nature and movements of the planets Uranus, Neptune 
and Saturn. 



184 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

We will give a brief explanation of the character and de- 
scription of each of the three planets, but the expressions are 
astrological and not taken from the Bible. 

URANUS. 

Uranus, also called Hershel, was discovered by Sir John 
Hershel in 1781. Neptune was discovered in 1846. 

Uranus is the strongest of all planets and is called the Son 
of God. He is described as peculiar and eccentric, outspoken 
and often violent in manners, original and inventive. He will 
go to the extreme in anything, as in mercy and love, as well as 
in hate and anger. Uranus represents a principle out of the 
ordinary, radical to the extreme; whether for good or bad. 
Uranus produces artists as well as idiots; also an emotional 
love nature and the most despondent and sorrowful disposition. 
Life or death to a Uranus nature is of no value when a principle 
is involved. The nature of Uranus is human as the first prin- 
ciple. His home is the house of Aquarius, an airy, human 
house. Uranus governs people in authority, that is, in public 
office, and controls changes and traveling. The sun is the life- 
giver and controlling spirit of the entire Solar System, and 
reflects the power of the constellations to man. Uranus is as 
an electric light in a city or a house ; it lights the house but is 
not the life giver of the house. The planet Uranus is the head 
of the family and he is the one who produces the condition in 
the home. Uranus is the Son of God and gets his power and 
wisdom direct from God, which means that the Father and the 
son of man are one and represent eternal life. 

NEPTUNE. 

Neptune is about the same size as Uranus but is farther 
away from the sun. Neptune is spoken of as feminine and is 
of a watery nature of the lower house of Aquarius. Neptune 
is lost to our earth except at the beginning and ending of the 
cycles. 

Neptune represents the churches as a whole and as indi- 
vidual. She is a prophet and reformer in doctrines, creeds, and 
morals. She represents public institutions of the nature of 
hospitals, oijphan homes and fraternal orders. She is neither 
good nor bad, for her influence is according to the company 
she is in. If Neptune is with Uranus, it makes the greatest 



Part V-^Chapter 39. 185 

combination for good and if with Saturn she becomes a power 
for evil. The best explanation to illustrate the power of Nep- 
tune is to compare her with a church. When Neptune is good 
and with Uranus, she is a prophet and helps to build simply for 
the sake of doing good. When she is with Saturn she will build 
for the sake of money or for the power there is in it. Neptune 
will help Uranus to build up an organization for a good purpose 
and later will help Saturn to kill it. In the Bible Neptune is 
represented as a prophet. She is the Holy Ghost or the Spirit 
of things. She is the power behind the throne, v/hether for 
good or evil. She is the spirit of the congregation in the church 
and prayer meetings, as well as the spirit of mob rule or revolt. 
Neptune will produce a revolution and change a government. 
If she is with Saturn, it will be rebellion, panic and murder, 
but if she is with Uranus it is revolution with reorganization. 
Neptune produces poets, hypocrites and idealists. The leading 
traits of Neptune is the secret, mysterious and hidden nature of 
doing things, whether it is religion or murder. The influence 
of Neptune is of a spiritual or psychic nature and produces 
doctrines and philosophy. 

SATURN. 

Saturn is the Satan of old, and his influence is bad. He is 
envious, jealous, mistrustful, sordid, stubborn, a liar, and is 
never contented. When Uranus is with Saturn he is harmless 
and produces a steady, grave, studious nature; a true friend, 
profound, reliable and patient. Saturn gives a reliable nature 
to all undertakings, whether good or evil. He is slow, but sure, 
in love and hate. Saturn's real nature is to destroy. He is the 
death principle of nature; the winter and old age; the reaper 
who gathers in the harvest and the wine-press. iSaturn destroys 
but cannot build up except for selfish purposes. Saturn is 
represented as an old man with skinny fingers, long nails and 
unkept hair; a miser, fond of digging in the earth, mean and 
stingy. He is a devil in spirit, mind, and body, and will pro- 
duce an article according to his own nature and desires. The 
destructive influence of Satan is the power God gives him to 
produce. 

URANUS, NEPTUNE AND SATURN. 

The disposition and character of Jesus as a Savior, as pic- 
tured in the Bible, is the nature of Uranus; that of Saturn is 



186 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

the character of Satan, as a Devil ; and that of the Holy Ghost, 
as the spiritual adviser or prophet corresponds to Neptune. 
These three in combination are a power and the effect of the 
planets will be according to the house they are in. Saturn and 
Neptune have the power to kill Uranus when in opposition; 
Uranus and Neptune kill Saturn when in opposition, and when 
all three are together a world's power is produced according 
to the house they are in at the time. The main feature of these 
I three planets is that one is good, one is bad, and one is the 
■ spirit to produce results, one way or another. Uranus, Neptune, 
and Saturn give a combined power to the mind, which is the 
energy that can produce wonders. 

Chapter 40. 
description of the twelve tribes. 

The description and classification of the tribes is a topic 
by itself and worthy of detailed attention. We will only give 
the leading traits and general description of the tribes. The 
seven tribes of Israel is illustrated as the European nations and 
Judah is the opposition within Israel. The tribes, as a class of 
people, did not begin until the time of Abraham, Isaac and 
Jacob, and from the time of the splitting of the tribes. The 
first actual dividing of the race took place with Esau and 
Jacob. Esau goes south and becomes the father of the south- 
ern races; (India, Arabia, Turkey, Africa and Mexico), that 
is, the country south of the 36th degree, which represents the 
race of Edom and describe the difl^erence of character and dis- 
position of the two brothers. Esau was the cunning, sly hunter, 
who hunted for the purpose of eating. Esau is to be a servant 
of Jacob, for he received a material and worldly blessing when 
his brothers received a spiritual blessing. The children of Esau 
were called Edom and were given a fundamental trait of char- 
acter as soldiers or warriors, a traveling tribe, without perma- 
nent homes; traders and merchants. They are not tillers of 
the ground, nor shepherds. Gen. 25: and 37:. 

Jacob is of a different nature and belongs to the northern 
division. Jacob's disposition was to please in a quiet, unassum- 
ing way. They were shepherds and cultivators of the soil, with 
a desire for homes. Jacob is the father of the twelve tribes of 
Israel, which today are the nations of Europe and are called 
the Jews and Romans. 



Part V — Chapter 40. 



187 



Much could be written about the time of the change and 
where it is found in the Bible, but let it be understood that the 
races are the country and that the people are divided and live 
north and south of the 36th degree. The building of the new 
Jerusalem and the new temple is the establishing of the twelve 
tribes of Irsael, which consist of the leading nations of Europe. 

The tribe of Israel, as the House of Jacob, has twelve 
tribes. The House of Edom, as the House of Esau, has twelve 
tribes. The House of Ishmael has twelve tribes. The House of 
Manasseh has ten tribes. (The tribe of Manasseh is the last). 




Plate No. 9 — Tribes of Israel. 



The twelve tribes of Israel represent the best expression of 
character and we will combine the tribes with the characters of 
the nations of Europe and with the houses of the Zodiac. They 
all represent the same characteristics and disposition as ap- 



188 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

plied to the human race, and as the twelve characteristics rep- 
resent the twelve months of the year, we can apply the traits 
as illustrated to individuals. 

It should be remembered that the beginning and the ending 
of the months are not the same as the calendar months which 
begins on the first day of the month. The influence of Ephraim 
begins on the 21st of March and ends on April 20th. 

There is another very important feature to consider, and 
that is, when a person is born on the border of the country of 
a tribe or nation, that he will partake of the nature of both 
tribes. If a person be born within five days (degrees) from 
the borders of the month (tribe) he will partake of the nature 
of both. This is best illustrated by the Swiss people. There 
are Italian, French and German-Swiss; that is, they represent 
the border characteristics of both countries, as well as the char- 
acteristics of the Swiss nation. 

THE TRIBE OF EPHRAIM. 
(1) 

The tribe of Ephraim is represented by Joseph, the Zodia- 
cal sign is Aries, and its influence lasts from March 21 to April 
20. It corresponds to France. It is a double house, indicating 
a double nature. It represents the Apostle Simon-Peter. In 
the next generation it will represent the United States, both 
east and west. It represents the head of man and the leading 
nation, the mental temperament, the brain worker or schemer, 
the model and pattern maker, the lawyer and doctor. This tribe 
is dual in nature and indicates a person who has two natures of 
opposite character equally well defined. This tribe is the strong- 
est mentally. They are the leaders of all the races of the earth 
in the development of anything pertaining to the faculty of 
mentality. They are not one-sided and can produce the good as 
well as the evil both mentally and physically. The tribe of 
Ephraim is at the head of the department in whatever it under- 
takes; their criminals are as brainy as their scientists. They 
are not religious and take nothing for granted. The tribe is of 
middle stature, rather lean, with long face and neck, strong 
limbs, coarse hair and swarthy complexion. In disposition they 
are violent and quarrelsome, but ambitious, intrepid and deter- 
mined. The tribe belongs to the fiery elements, giving a quick 
temper, but they regret and forget as readily. They represent 



Part V-^Chapter 40. 189 

a flaming, blazing furnace. Their passion in love and anger is 
short, quick and furious, but when the fire is over, peace and 
order are restored. They live on brain-force and are fed on 
stimulants, more than on food. Their brain is their work-shop 
and they produce modes, fashion and ideas. They are neither 
farmers, sailors nor miners, as their homes and occupations are 
in large cities in institutions and factories. 

Gen. 49:22-23, "Joseph is a fruitful bough, even a fruitful 
bough by a well, whose branches run over the wall. The archers 
have sorely grieved him, and shot at him, and hated him;" etc. 

THE TRIBE OF MANASSEH. 
(2) 

The tribe of Manasseh is the partner of Ephraim. She 
represents the Zodiacal sign Taurus and corresponds to Eng- 
land, (but not to Great Britain) . The calendar month for Man- 
asseh is from April 20th to May 20th. It represents the Apos- 
tle Andrew, and is illustrated as the neck of man. The tribe 
represents strength, power and force, quality and quantity. This 
tribe is the richest in resources of minerals and land, always 
holding possessions in two or more places, but is not double 
natured. It is the tribe to manufacture, mechanically and to 
improve others* ideas. They are conceited, bigotted, ill-natured 
and unfeeling, great eaters and lovers of ease and home com- 
forts, fond of drink and are sensual. When educated, the bad 
nature is modified but not overcome. This tribe corresponds 
to the bull and the nature of the animal cannot be changed. 
They are short, thick-set, full-face, broad-shouldered and have 
a heavy neck, dark hair, sometimes curly. The female is a 
great lover of home, family and children. Whatever the Man- 
asseh tribe owns or controls, looks a little better to them than 
what others have. Their home is in the mountains and the 
development of natural resources is their greatest desire. They 
are not spiritual-minded but are good church-going people, fond 
of ceremony, rituals and display. Business is transacted in a 
methodical, systematic, slow and sure way. Their methods are 
scientific, orderly and reliable. They are of the earth triplicity. 
Their home work, and desires belong on earth and not in 
heaven. Their greatest and best qualities are in stock-raising 
and judging of animals, mining and farming; they take in the 



190 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

raw material and produce the finished article, and are one of 
the leading manufacturers of all tribes. 

Gen. 49:26, ''The blessing of thy father have prevailed 
above the blessing of my progenitors unto the utmost bound of 
the everlasting hills; they shall be on the head of Joseph, and 
on the crown of the head of him that was separate from his 
brethren." 

THE TRIBE OF ZEBULUN. 
(3) 

The tribe of Zebulun corresponds to the Apostle James, the 
sons of Zebedee, and is the house of Gemini. The Zodiacal 
month is from May 20th to June 21st. It is a masculine, double 
house and represents Scandinavia, but not Denmark, and cor- 
responds to the shoulders and arms of man. The tribe of Zebu- 
lun is the twins in more than one sense, for it represents the 
duality in nature. It is the principle of Adam and Eve, male 
and female, mountains and valleys, and a house for harbors and 
shipping. It is a restless but industrious tribe, fond of sports 
and hunting. They are scientific, judicious, fond of reading, 
ambitious of fame, moderate in eating and drinking, generally 
respected, and good members of society. They are tall and 
straight with long arms and hands. The tribe belongs to the 
airy triplicity and make good aviators or succeed with any 
trade with a perilous position above the ground. They are not 
miners, for underground work is opposite to their nature. How- 
ever, they make splendid caretakers of animals and are stock- 
raisers. They are, by nature, very religious with high hopes 
and aspirations. They respect old age and parents more than 
any other tribe. Zebulun is of a domestic nature, fond of fam- 
ily, home and children. They dress in dark clothing and are 
of steady, sober nature. They make good judges, ministers, 
and doctors, and are good neighbors and honorable friends. 

Gen. 49:13, ''Zebulun shall dwell at the haven of the sea, 
and he shall be for an haven of ships, and his border shall be 
unto Zidon." 

THE TRIBE OF ISAACHAR. 
(4) 

The tribe of Isaachar represents a double house. It cor- 
responds to the Zodiacal month from June 21st to July 22nd. 
It represents Cancer, the Crab, and corresponds to the breasts 



Part V— Chapter 40. 191 

and is a feminine house. The tribe of Isaachar is Holland- 
Belgium and Denmark and represents the Apostle John. The 
leading trait of this tribe is that they belong to the watery or 
liquid iriplicity of tribes. All their wealth and possessions must 
be gained through water, as by shipping, marine insurance, 
irrigation and condenseries, in fact anything by which liquid is 
manufactured into commercial commodities. Their home is on 
the ground and not in the air or mountains. Their greatest de- 
sire is for home and family life; they are the cooks and butlers 
of the world. The number of children they have is immaterial 
as they can take care of all and the more children the greater 
the blessing. They are not leaders in intellectual work and 
soon tire of study, but are the born workers and servants, for 
they will take contracts to manufacture for others in preference 
to speculations. There are two distinct traits of character in 
the Isaachar tribe; one is quick, active, witty, restless and full 
of life; the other is just the opposite, slow in action, both men- 
tally and physically one who stays home to do the family work 
in preference to mingling with others. There is no half-way 
or general disposition for they are either slow or quick. They 
are usually small of stature, well-developed, with a well-formed 
figure. They are usually drawn down in the back of the neck, 
with prominent shoulders and breast bones. They have reced- 
ing foreheads, prominent chins, large mouths, drooping eyelids, 
and a peculiar upward, shy look, instead of looking straight 
ahead. Many of this tribe become round shouldered and 
hunchbacked from very small injuries. Their complexion is 
either very light or very dark, hair coarse or exceptionally fine, 
their hands and feet are also either small or large, and so with 
their skin it is either coarse or fine. It is a tribe to be trusted, 
except when they rule over others, when they will make mis- 
takes and dominate. They will always maintain a prominent 
position in the world's history collectively and individually, for 
they are one of the cardinal races of the world. The Isaachar 
nature produces life's necessities and will be as prominently 
recognized as the life principle illustrated in the woman's 
breasts. 

Gen. 49:14, "Isaachar is a strong Ass, couching down be- 
tween two burdens ; and he saw that rest was good and the land 
that it was pleasant; and bowed his shoulder to bear, and be- 
came a servant unto tribute." 



192 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

THE TRIBE OF JUDAH. 
(5) 

The tribe of Judah corresponds to the Apostle Philip; the 
Zodiacal house is Leo, the Lion, and represents Germany. It 
is a masculine house and rules from July 22nd to August 23rd. 
It represents the heart of man and nations and is the tribe 
of fire, heat, force, vigor and energy. The nature of the tribe 
of Judah can be illustrated as a complicated engine capable of 
doing either very delicate or most powerful work. When the 
engine is in working order it can produce wonders, but when 
the engine is in the slightest way out of order, the engine stops. 
The Judah nature is complicated, full of regulations, measure- 
ments and divided into detailed organizations. This tribe is a 
well-formed universe within its own borders. They can do 
anything, imitate, invent, and work with head and hand as well. 
They are industrious, economical and practical. Their great- 
est detriment is their conceited nature, for they know that they 
have power and feel that the world and all in it depends on 
them. They do not work alone but must have partners or work 
as an organization. Their greatest strength is in their method 
of doing things, more than in actual work. The nature of 
Judah is fire, and when anyone gets near they get burned or 
stung. Their lower nature is of a violent form, with the whole 
heart or none, hot-tempered but not revengeful. They ' are 
happy, musical and congenial among their own, but out of 
place among strangers. The Judah tribe can attain to anything, 
for they excel in science, literature, arts, mechanics, and in pro- 
fessions. They are usually of medium stature with strong, set 
features; big bones; broad shoulders; well-set, strong chins; 
gray eyes; quick sight; light hair; large, round head; slanting 
forehead; complexion ruddy. Their disposition is bold, firm 
and generous ; ambitious and aspiring ; fond of sports and recre- 
ations; active, intrepid and very determined. The best illus- 
tration of Judah is to compare it with Germany. It is a fiery 
furnace, a melting pot or manufacturing plant, but when the 
rest of the nations put out the fire Germany, as an organiza- 
tion, is ruined. 

Gen. 49:8-11, "Judah thou art he whom thy brethren shall 
praise; thy hand shall be in the neck of thine enemies; thy 
father's children shall bow down before thee. Judah is a lion's 
whelp ; from the prey, my son, thou art gone up ; He washed his 
garments in wine, and his clothes in the blood of grapes." 



Part V— Chapter 40. 19S 

THE TRIBE OF NAPHTALI. 
(6) 

The tribe of Naphtali represents a feminine house. It cor- 
responds to the Apostle Bartholomew; the Zodiacal house of 
Virgo, the virgin, ruling from August 23rd to September 23rd. 
It represents Turkey. It also represents the bowels of man. 
The tribe of Naphtali is an earthy house of material elements; 
its strong points are eating and these people eat only what they 
want and not what they can get. Naphtali people will produce: 
only what appeals to them as good ; they are neither mechanics,, 
farmers nor miners. Science, literature and research appeals. 
to them. They always want the reason for this or that and 
have a full share of the ability to contrive and find ways and 
means for doing things. They are eminent as philosophers, 
judges, officers, composers, inventors and workers in arts. 
Their description is: a slender body above medium height; a 
ruddy dark complexion; round face; dark hair and eyes; well- 
formed but not handsome; a long crooked nose, and closed 
narrow lips. They are fond of learning; are ambitious, quick 
and active; given to study of languages and are good, graceful 
speakers. The tribe of Naphtali is like a hotel; it is a tran- 
scient stopping place, and only good for one thing or purpose 
at the time; for if they eat, they do nothing else and if they 
work they cannot eat. Their aim, hope and aspirations lie in 
their stomach and bowels and when feeding stops— friendship 
stops. They are good cooks, bakers and pastry-makers, but not 
home-makers. Their religious views are peculiar; if they think 
they are right, no power on earth can change them; they are 
reverently and religiously inclined but for ceremony only. The 
leading trait of Naphtali is that her life's work, be it religion,, 
science or business, has to come to her through her stomach. 

Gen. 49:21, "Naphtali is a hind let loose; he giveth goodly 
words." 

THE TRIBE OF ASHER. 

(7) 

The tribe of Asher corresponds to the house of Libra, illus- 
trated as a pair of scales. It means to balance and signifies 
the reins of man. The Zodiacal time is from September 23rd 
to October 23rd. It represents the Greek nation ; is a feminine 
cardinal house. The Apostle Matthew represents this tribe. 



194 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

The tribe of Asher belongs to the mental and airy triplicity; 
they work with their head, are good managers, having the 
ability to judge and reason. They are inclined to go to ex- 
tremes in happiness and sorrow and are rather unstable; they 
always look to the future to bring something unexpected to 
them. They have great mental and physical endurance; are 
original in thought and are not followers; they are by nature 
intuitive and make writers, poets, translators, editors, lawyers 
and speakers. They have a tall, straight body, rather slender; 
hair black or brov/n, and smooth; a well-featured round face; 
a straight nose, and a clear complexion, dark eyes, and are very 
good looking. They are spasmodically ambitious, talkative and 
fond of the opposite sex, with an even temper except when ill. 
They are not farmers nor mechanics, and dislike dirt or soiled 
garments. For employment they are best adapted as judges, 
editors, stenographers, clerks, milliners, music teachers and 
photographers. They are not good mothers nor housekeepers 
'but prefer a public position instead of housework. Their 
strongest trait of character is their intuitive and inspirational 
nature; their tools and ability come from within and they us- 
ually follow their natural inclinations. 

Gen. 49:20, ''Out of Asher his bread shall be fat, and he 
shall yield royal dainties." 

THE TRIBE OF DAN. 

(8) 
• 
The tribe of Dan represents the house of Scorpio, the Scor- 
pion or Eagle. The Zodiacal month is from October 23rd to 
November 22nd. It is a watery house and illustrates the re- 
productive parts of man. The tribe of Dan is Austria-Hungary, 
as a nation; and was represented as the Apostle Thomas. It 
is a feminine house and is a double or two-natured house, sim- 
ilar to Isaachar. It represents the male and female principle, 
as a divided nation. The Scorpion and the Eagle are two dis- 
tinct classes of animals, each with distinct traits, so also is the 
tribe of Dan. They are fruitful and are the parents of nations 
and man, through the generations of Naphtali and Dan must 
pass all future generations. It is a strong, healthy, vigorous 
tribe, stubborn and self-willed; determined in action and un- 
forgiving in spirit. They are reliable and make splendid man- 
agers and financiers, as they live up to their word and want 



Part V— ^Chapter 40. 195 

others to do the same. The tribe of Dan is of a middle stature, 
thick, well-set body, strong and robust; face large and broad, 
dark, palish complexion; thick, dark curly hair; short thick 
neck; ill-made and large feet; sometimes bow-legged. Their 
general disposition is not agreeable as they are conceited, void 
of feeling, and brutish. When educated they become reserved, 
but as they have the nature of the scorpion, the real nature 
cannot be hid. They have resources and applications but the 
method of using their gifts is crude. They have not the human 
motherly feeling for their children as others; for it is more of 
a matter of breeding stock than of having a family. Later in 
life, after experience and sorrow have been felt keenly, they 
become the best of citizens and friends. They are then the 
most reliable characters but do not like to be reminded of past 
transactions. The judgment of the old men of this tribe is as 
reliable as a life of experience can give and is usually given hon- 
estly. 

Gen. 49:16-17-18, ''Dan shall judge his people, as one of the 
tribes of Israel. Dan shall be a serpent by the way, an adder 
in the path, that biteth the horse heels, so that his rider shall 
fall backward. I have waited for thy salvation, Lord !" 

THE TRIBE OF REUBEN. 
(9) 

The tribe of Reuben represents the house of Sagitarius, 
illustrated as a bowman or archer. It represents the thighs of 
man, also Spain-Portugal as a nation. It is a double house in 
the sense of having double possessions; either in land, wealth 
or intellect. It rules from November 22nd to December 21st. 
The tribe is represented by the Apostle James (Alpheus) . This 
tribe is of a fiery nature, but neutral in disputes and troubles. 
These people are natural mathematicians, teachers and schol- 
ars. This is the tribe for ministers, priests and college profes- 
sors. They are the born prophets for the next world and are 
superstitious and want information ahead of time. They have 
an exceptional love nature, and a kind, good-hearted disposi- 
tion; are high-minded, honorable and are true friends. They 
are apt to run to extremes in their moral ideas. They get their 
experience early and their wealth later in life. All that a 
Reuben nature undertakes will come back to him in double 
measure, be it good or evil. They are well formed and good 



196 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

looking; rather tall, with slanting forehead, bald at the tem- 
ples; free and open countenance. They are bold, active and 
generous, fond of sports and recreations. They are honorable 
and can be trusted and depended on. They are fairly good bus- 
iness people and like to be independent; and dislike to take 
orders. The Reuben nature is not one to accumulate wealth or 
possessions, but they live for what there is in life, let it be 
education, travel or religion. Their desires are high, their road 
long, and with limited means they never reach their goal. 

Gen. 49:3, "Reuben thou art my first born, my might, and 
the beginning of my strength, the excellency of dignity, and 
the excellency of power, Unstable as water, thou shall not excel ; 
because thou wentest up to my father's bed; then defilest thou 
it: he went up to my couch." 

THE TRIBE OF GAD. 

(10) 

The tribe of Gad is called the house of Capricorn and rep- 
resents a Goat. It is also shown as the knees of man. It repre- 
sents Russia as a nation and the Apostle Thaddeus (Judas). 
The Zodiacal month is from December 21st to January 20th. 
It is an earthy tribe, of a very material mind and disposition, 
dissatisfied, unstable and discontented. They can be lead in 
any and all directions and will follow blindly. When aroused 
to anger they become wild and uncontrolable and when in 
danger they lose their reason entirely. They belong to the 
serving class of labor, in mines, farms, and industries of 
nature. Their thoughts and desires are for worldly goods and 
personal comfort. When this tribe is educated they want to 
change and reorganize; they will tear down and want complete 
destruction before they begin to build again. Their strong 
trait is their rural desires for agricultural life, whether in the 
woods or mines, or fishing, hunting, or in the mills. They are 
not musical and tire of study; they can learn from illustration 
easily, but not from books. They are not intelligently inde- 
pendent and their religion is handed down to them ready made. 
This tribe is a great eater and likes strong drinks and tobacco. 
Their weakness is in their kidneys and they are subject to 
rheumatism. They are built short and slender with long thin 
face, straggling beard and hair ; long chin ; coarse hair ; narrow 
chest; long, small neck; weak knees and walk with a peculiar 



Part V— Chapter 40. 197 

gait. Their entire appearance is of a bony nature ; wiry, tough 
and strong. The real nature of the tribe of Gad is like a truck 
horse or a goat, they must be looked after, fed and driven in 
order to be productive. 

Gen. 49:19, "Gad, a troop shall overcome him: but he shall 
overcome at the last." 

THE TRIBE OF SIMEON-LEVI. 
(11) 

The tribes of Simeon and Levi are one. It is a double- 
natured tribe and represents the house of Aquarius. It is illus- 
trated as a water carrier and represents the legs of man. The 
Apostle Simon, and Tubel-Cain as well as the holy tabernacle 
illustrations describe the tribe of Simeon. The Zodiacal month 
is from January 20th to February 19th. The countries of 
Switzerland as Levi, and Alsace-Lorraine as Simeon represent 
this tribe. The nature of this tribe is double in the sense of an 
upper and lower portion, a spiritual and material, as well as a 
saving and destructive nature. The upper chamber or brain 
is the spiritual or airy nature of the house; the lower is the 
killing and destructive place where death becomes a birth. 
Their profession or business is to divide heaven and hell as 
places. They are either in the salvation of man as ministers 
of the gospel, or as church workers, undertakers, or are butch- 
ers, all dealing with death. Their life thoughts and desires are 
on life and death. The higher type of the Levi nature gives the 
real philosophers. Their natures are not selfish and they live 
simply for the purpose of doing good. It is the good Samaritan 
as expressed in General Booth of the Salvation Army. The 
lower type are the historians, surgeons, taxidermists and care- 
takers of cemeteries. One desires to live in the mountains and 
the other in the valleys. They are of middle stature, well-set, 
have strong, long visage; sanguine complexion; are generally 
handsome, especially the females. They always look sad and 
worried, but determined; are good and kind-hearted with an 
even temper. They are scientific, fond of learning and are re- 
served. They are adapted for a professional career and noth- 
ing else, for they have no mechanical or industrial ability. 
Their strongest points are their intellectual and moral nature. 
It is easy for them to distribute the waters of life and give out 
salvation as free as air. Their mind is on heaven and hell; the 
church and the cemetery. 



198 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Gen. 49:5-6-7, "Simeon and Levi are brethren; instru- 
ments of cruelty are in their habitations. my soul, come not 
thou into their secret; unto their assembly, mine honor, be not 
thou united; for in their anger they slew a man, and in their 
self-will they digged down a wall. Cursed be their anger, for it 
was fierce; and their wrath, for it was cruel: I will divide 
them in Jacob, and scatter them in Israel." 

THE TRIBE OF BENJAMIN. 
(12) 

The tribe of Benjamin corresponds to the house of Pisces 
and is' illustrated as two fishes. It is called the house of the 
fisherman, and is the feet of man. The Zodiacal month is from 
February 19th to March 21st. It represents Italy as a nation 
and is a watery house. It is the house of Judas-Iscariot. This 
tribe is double in every sense of the word. It represents church 
and state ; honor and dishonor ; wealth and poverty ; intelligence 
and ignorance. There is no middle class, as a happy medium, 
in this tribe. They are either one or the other. The best illus- 
tration is given in the nature of Italy, as they have church and 
state in one and yet divided. The church is a spiritual organi- 
zation, but has become commercial; the government is for the 
benefit of the people but is operated for the good of the few. 
There is no one nation of Europe which can produce as complete 
a double nature as Italy. It is the priest and Judas as honor 
and dishonor. The general make-up of the tribe is a low stature, 
short limbs, inclined to be stout; ill-shaped and large feet. 
Their disposition is indolent, dull and lazy; caring for nothing, 
for they love ease and comfort. When educated they become 
specialists but are neither scientists nor philosophers. The 
brainier class is quicker in action, and may become clairvoyant 
and some have inventive ability but it is a case of individual 
ability and not as a tribe. The tribe of Benjamin is not a good 
nature; there is always something underhanded or tricky about 
them. They do not fight openly but will come back and stab you 
in the back. It is not the question how much good they can do 
in the world, but rather how much good they can get out of it. 
Always remember the Benjamin people are fishermen; they 
hand out a bait or put out a net to catch others. 

Gen. 49:27, ^'Benjamin shall raven as a wolf; in the morn- 
ing he shall devour the prey, and at night he shall divide the 
spoil." 



Part V — Chapter 41. 
Chapter 41. 



199 



HEAD OF MAN. 

It is a known fact that the Universe is formed globular, 
which is illustrated in the Sun, Stars and the earth. The Bible 
says that man is made in the image of God, and that heaven is 
within man. We will now explain what is meant by these ex- 
pressions. 




Plate No. 10 — Heaven Within Man. 



The head of man is globular and the principle applied to 
the heavens and the earth is also applied to man. The location 
of the twelve houses in the heavens are correspondingly located 
in the head of man as it is in the heavens. 

The two axis of the head are located at the front-top of 
the head and the throat. The axis at the top of the head is 



200 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

located in the benevolent and intuitive faculties and corresponds 
to twelve o'clock and the point in Pisces v^here the equator 
crosses the ecliptic. The opposite pole to Pisces is Virgo, which 
is located in the throat at six o'clock. 

The path of the ecliptic and the locating of the houses 
begins at Pisces in the front or upper part of the forehead, 
going downward over the face to the throat and neck, then up 
the back to the top of the head. In this circuit of the head the 
twelve signs of the Zodiac are located and represent faculties 
and character of man, the same as it is given in the heavens. 

The beginning of the houses in the heavens are at the 
vernal equinox and located at Pisces in the front-top part of 
the head. This part of th.e head represents benevolence and 
churchology and is illustrated as the jfishes, being a double 
watery house. 

Greenwich and Aries are located in the forehead above the 
eyebrows, at the reasoning and intellectual part of the head. It 
is illustrated as a sheep and is a fiery mental house. 

The eyes represent Taurus, the Bull, and the eyebrows the 
horns of the Bull. The faculties of the eyes are both spiritual 
and material. 

The airy house of Gemini, the Twins, is located at the Nose 
and is self-explanatory, as the nose is double and for air. 

The watery house of Cancer, the crab, is the mouth and the 
teeth correspond to the claws of the crab. The Bible says that 
Cancer is a place of destruction. 

The Chin represents the strength of the Lion and corre- 
sponds to the fiery house of Leo. Force and strength of char- 
acter are shown in the shape of the chin. 

The house of Virgo has been called a Virgin sitting in the 
gate and as Virgo is located in the throat, it is another descrip- 
tion of a gateway in man. It is the place from where time and 
space are calculated and is a boundary line for east and west. 

The double house of Libra is located at the base of the 
brain and is indicated as a pair of Scales. This house is the 
opposite of Aries, located on the forehead and these are the 
cardinal points of the head. The oil in the lamps, so often 
spoken of in ancient literature, is located here. 

The double house of the Scorpion is located above the base 
of the brain in the back of the head. Scorpio is a watery house 
representing sex, conjugality and love. 



Part V— Chapter 41. 201 

'Sagitarius, the Archer, is located where the faculties of 
«elf esteem and continuity are placed in the upper back part of 
the head and is a double fiery house. 

Capricorn, the Goat, is located at the ears, in the faculty 
of destructiveness. It is a cardinal and earthy house and is 
described as a prophet. 

The house of Aquarius, the water carrier, is located on the 
top of the head between Pisces and Sagitarius, where the facul- 
ties of morality, hope and spirituality are located. 

Much could be said regarding the location of the twelve 
houses and the description of character, disposition and ability, 
but as this has been described in the chapter on tribes, it will 
not be necessary. 

We will call attention to the four cardinal points of the 
head. They are Aries, the forehead ; Cancer, the mouth ; Libra, 
the base of the brain, and Capricorn, the ears. This is a very 
peculiar arrangement in nature and corresponds to the location 
of north, east, south and west. 

The Bible says that the Ox, the Lion, the Scorpion and the 
Man would be located at the four corners of the earth in the 
time of the end of the world. It will be seen that the location 
of these four houses is at the four corners of the head, and these 
four correspond to the nations at war described elsewhere. 

It depends on what house the planets were in at the time 
of birth whether the faculties and character of man are devel- 
oped or deficient. The house or organ the planets were in will 
be developed and it depends on the planets' aspect to each other 
whether it is for a good or detrimental purpose. Saturn pro- 
duces strength but for evil purposes. Uranus will always give 
a good character and develop the organ for good uses. Neptune 
will give reasoning or inspiration in the use of the organ she 
is in. This can be explained by comparison. If Neptune is 
located in Aries it means an inspiring mind or reasoning by in- 
tuition. If Uranus is located in Gemini the nose will be well 
developed and if Saturn is in Leo, the party will have strong 
broad chin but bad temper and disposition. When the planets 
pass from one house to another the organs or faculties will be 
affected according to the nature of the planets and at the time of 
the change. If it is known what house the planets were in at 
birth, it will be an easy study to follow : as Uranus stays seven 
years; Neptune, fourteen, and Saturn, two and one-half years 
in each house. 



u 



202 



Key to Bible and Heaven, 



Chapter 42. 

astrology. 

For the benefit of those familiar with the study of Astrology 
we will give a brief explanation of the system used in setting 
up a figure, as given in the Bible. The difference between the 
ordinary geocentric system and that used in the Bible is, that 
the Bible divides the 360-degree space into minor cycles, and 



vo 



270' 



^^ • CAtVOH J 









4?n. 



LEGACIES 



.^S^\i?^ 



I5T.CU5P 



^TH.CU5P 



ASCEftOANT. PERSONAL 
APPlRftHCE.OlSPOSVTlON 






^^^^.. 



'mimd I 

'HEIGHBORS 



WE5TERM ANGLE 
W^MLTRREi/iT/ONS 



^9 "^^'^^y. 



END OF 
LIFE 



f^a 



MADIR 

Plate No. 11 — Astrological Heaven. 

divides again the minor cycles into sideral units of clock time 
of 360 degrees as a unit of one. Another difference is, that 
Uranus and the Sun, is used as the leading power of the heavens 
from which to calculate time and events; and the aspects of 
Neptune and Saturn give the answer to events in the different 



Part V^Chapter 42. 203 

houses. Time is calculated in the usual way by the sun, moon 
and the houses as well as from the planets. The first two and 
the last two degrees of the houses occupying the cusps of the 
three 120-degree angles were calculated for eventful periods. 
Attention is called to the nature of the 4th, 8th and 12th houses 
illustrated in Plate No. 11. These houses represent the three 
120-degree cycles and in the nature of the houses, they illus- 
trate the end of the cycles. This shows that the prevailing 
astrological system of explaining the houses are the same as 
used in the Bible. The planet Uranus represents the male prin- 
ciple; Neptune, the female principle, and Saturn the earthly or 
Satanic elements. 

The cycles of time as calculated in the Bible correspond 
to the system used at the present time. The great or Solar 
cycle consists of 360 degrees as the basic number and 72 de- 
grees as the unit of one. This is the system used today in all 
scientific calculations, as in the measurement of the heavens, 
the earth, years, months, days, hours, minutes and seconds. 

In all descriptions the Bible divides the cycles into four 
divisions and into twelve parts; this division corresponds ta 
the four seasons of the year and the twelve months. This 
cycle of one-twelfth is again subdivided on the principle of 
days, hours, minutes and seconds. The unit of 24 hours con- 
sists of 144 degrees; and twelve hours equal 72 degrees, v/hich 
corresponds to the solar or clock timiC. From this it will be 
seen that a complete cycle is figured from the units of 72 
and 360 degrees, and is calculated from prime units of seconds 
of clock time, to the great cycle of 25,920 degrees and up to an 
endless distance of space. The great or heavenly cycle of 
25,920 degrees equals 360 degrees and these cycles are divided 
into a 120-degree cycle containing a period of time of 1008 
years. The minor or 60-degree cycle contains a period of 500 
years. This cycle is used when the conditions of the heavens 
are applied to the earth. The earth's distance of 360-degree 
cycles are also divided by the same method into smaller divis- 
ions, as the distance of 30 or 40 degrees or any other minor 
cycles called angles. 

The distance of Europe and also the distance for the Ten 
Tribes is for the 30-degree space cycle. A horoscope is set up 
for each cycle and calculated as a complete cycle of 360 degrees. 
This method was described as "wheels within wheels" and cor- 
responds to seconds within the cycle of minutes. 



204 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

The placing of the planets Uranus, Neptune, Saturn, Sun 
and Moon are the same as used in the Geocentric System and 
deductions are then made according to the laws which were 
given by Moses. 

The Israelites represent the ages on the earth and we will 
briefly explain what the meaning of the cycles of the heavens 
are which produce the condition on the earth. The students, 
who are not familiar with the Zodiac, should look at the illus- 
trations to get the meaning of this part of the study. 

The beginning of time for the earth is at Aries and the 
cycle for Adam represents this house, which is illustrated as 
a ram. The second house is Taurus, as Eve, and is illustrated 
as a bull. The third house is Gemini, represented as twins and 
described as Cain and Abel. These three houses represent the 
first cycle around the earth and illustrate the nature of the 
three planets in the three houses spoken of. Adam represents 
Uranus in the first cycle, Aries. Eve illustrates Neptune as a 
spiritual age in the second cycle of Taurus, the bull. The third 
cycle represents Saturn in Gemini, a double house, illustrating 
a two-sided nature in a good man and in a murderer as dem- 
onstrated in Cain and Abel. From this will be seen that Adam, 
as Uranus, represents creation in the cycle west of Greenwich, 
as Aries. Eve illustrates a spiritual life and philosophy which 
is represented in the Pacific Coast cycle. Saturn rules the 
cycle for Asia and Europe and represents the carnal nature. 
This principle is the foundation for all cycles which repeats the 
circuit around the earth, each cycle containing 360 degrees. 

It takes Uranus 84 years to travel in a cycle of 360 degrees ; 
it requires 42 years to the cycle of 180 degrees and 28 years for 
a space of 120 degrees ; 14 years to 60 degrees and seven years 
for 30 degrees. The other distances or angles in proportion to 
the length of space calculated. The 30-degree cycle is figured 
as a complete cycle of 360 degrees and Uranus makes a circuit 
of the 12 houses of this cycle in seven years; the other planets 
in proportion to their time in covering space. As an example 
we will say that we want a figure for a space of 30 degrees 
which corresponds to one house. A figure for the time is set 
and calculated as a 360-degree horoscope and divided into 
houses in the usual way. Uranus stays in each house seven 
months; Saturn in each house about two and one-half months 
and Neptune stays in each house a little over one year. This 
system will apply to man as well as to nations and all who are 



Part V— Chapter 43. 205 

familiar with the prevailing system will readily see the prin- 
ciple of operation. 

The system as used in the Bible is corrct as can be seen 
from the accurate calculations made for the formation and de- 
struction of nations and in the description of the present war. 

From the method of measuring time and space as described 
in the Bible we can see that the entire universe is measured 
as space on the same principle as a watch or clock and when the 
planets pass in the space of the heavens by looking at a watch or 
clock the location of the planets can be placed in the year, 
month, down to seconds of time. 

The scientific study of the Bible is to obtain a knowledge 
of the laws of the universe. It requires neither praying nor 
singing to understand the Bible, but common sense application, 
with the object in view of learning to understand it. The Bible 
is a text book for both the science and philosophy of life. Use 
the Bible as a guide and avoid the literature of those teaching 
a' personal God and Devil, for their literature is misleading. 
Learn first what the heavens mean and what produces the con- 
dition which is in the heavens, for the conditions in the heavens 
are the same as on earth and the method of applying them to 
the earth becomes a matter of simple repetition. 

The Bible has been sealed and considered to be a mystery, 
but it is now an open book. Study it and write about it for the 
guidance of others but avoid criticizing others' opinion; all are 
subject to mistakes, the writer as well as the reader. The Bible 
contains the Laws of God, so do not intentionally teach or write 
anything contrary to the Words of God. 

The Author is not at liberty at the present time to give 
any reason for and what the cause, method and from what 
source he has obtained the information contained in this book, 
but he may do so at some future time. 

Chapter 43. 

the meaning of bible names. 

The concordance of words and names given in the Bible 
is not the names of persons as human beings, but each word or 
name represents a principle describing the condition of the 
people, places and cycles of time. The names given in the Bible 
have similar meanings to the terms used in geographical and 
astrological literature, and describe locations, space and condi- 



206 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

tions implied by the nature of the name given. We will describe 
some of the most common words and names to show the system 
used, and what the meaning or significance is. It should be 
remembered that the Bible described the conditions of the 
houses in the heavens, the fixed stars and planets, and not an 
actual description of the earth. The condition in earth is re- 
produced from the heavens as it is in the heavens, so is it on 
earth ; from this it will be seen that the Bible is an Astrological 
text-book. 

Aaron; a teacher. Abel; vanity, mourning. Abi; m^y 
father. Abimelech; father of the king. Abram; a high father. 
Abraham; the father of a great multitude. Absalon; father of 
peace. Aceldama ; the field of blood. Achish ; thus it is, or how 
is this. Achor; trouble. Adam; earthy man, red. Adami; my 
man, red, earthy, human. Agrippa; one who causes great pain 
at his birth. Alexander; one who assists men. Alpheus; a 
thousand, learned, chief. Amalek; a people that licks up. Am- 
mon; a people, son of my people. Amorite; bitter, a rebel, a 
babbler. Ananias ; the cloud of the Lord. Andrew ; a stout and 
strong man. Antioch; speedy as a chariot. Antipas; for all, 
or against all. Apollyon ; one who exterminates. Aquila ; an 
eagle. Arabia ; evening, wild, and desert. Ararat ; the curse of 
trembling. Arcturus; a gathering together. Arimathea; a lion 
dead to the Lord. Asher; happiness. Asia; muddy. 

Baal; he that rules and subdues. Baalim; idols, masters, 
false Gods. Babel or Babylon; confusion or mixture. Bar- 
Jesus; son of Jesus or Joshua. Bar-Jona; son of Jona, or of a 
dove. Bashan; in the tooth, or in ivory. Bath-Sheba; the 
seventh daughter, or the daughter of satiety. Beer; a well. 
Belshazzar ; master of the treasure. Benjamin ; son of the right 
hand. Bethel; the house of God. Bethlehem; the house of 
bread. Beulah; married. 

Cain; possession or possessed. Cainan; possessor. Caleb; 
a dog, a crow, a basket. Calvary; the place of a skull. Canaan, 
trader, one that humbles and subdues. Chaldea; as demons, or 
as robbers. Cush; Ethiopians, black. Cushau; blackness, 
heat. 

Damascus; a sack full of blood. Dan; judgment, or he 
that judges. Daniel; judgment of God. David; well beloved, 
dear. Didymus ; a twin or double. Dothan ; the law or custom. 

Easter; the passover. Eden; pleasure or delight. Edom; 
red, earthy, of blood. Egypt ; that troubles or oppresses. Elia- 



Part V— 'Chapter 43. 207 

zar; help of God, court of God. Eli; my God. Elijah; God, the 
Lord. Elymas; a magician. Endor; fountain, eye of genera- 
tions. Ephesus; desire. Ephraim; that brings fruit. Ephron; 
dust. Er; watch or enemy. Esau; he that acts or finishes. 
Ethiopia; blackness, heat. Euphrates; that makes fruitful. 
Eve; living, enlivening. Ezekiel; the strength of God. Ezra; 
help or court. 

Felix; happy, prosperous. Festus; festival, or joyful. For- 
tunatus; lucky or fortunate. 

Gabriel; God is my strength. Gad; a band, happy. Gala- 
tia; white, the color of milk. Galilee; wheel, revolution, heap. 
Gaza; strong or a goat. Gilgal; wheel revolution. Golgotha; 
a heap of skulls. 

Ham; hot, heat, brown. Haran; mountainous country. 
Havilah; that suffers, pain, that prings forth. Hebrews; the 
descendants of Heber. Heber ; one that passes, or anger. Hel- 
dai ; the world. Hermes ; Mercury ; gain or refuge. Herod ; the 
glory of the skin. 

Isaac ; laughter. Isaiah ; the salvation of the Lord. Israel ; 
who prevails with God. Issachar; reward. 

Jacob; that supplants. Jerah; the moon or month. Jeri- 
cho; his moon or month. Jerusalem; vision or peace. Jordan; 
the river of judgment. Joshua; the Lord, the- Savior. Jews; 
Judas ; and Judah ; the praise of the Lord. Jupiter ; the father 
that helpeth. 

Kedemah; oriental. Kittim; they that bruise, or gold, or 
coloring. Korah; bald, frozen. 

Leban; white or a brick. Laish; a lion. Lebanon; white 
or incense. Lot; hidden, covered. Lucas, Lucius, Luke; lumi- 
nous. Lucifer, bringing light. 

Magdalen; elevated, magnificent. Mamre; rebellious, or 
bitter. Mannasseh; forgetfulness, he that is forgotten. Mara; 
bitter. Memphis: by the mouth. Mercurius; an orator or an 
interpreter; Michel; who is perfect. Moses; taken out of the 
water. 

Nahash; snake or serpent. Naphtali; that struggles or 
fights. Niger; black. Nod; vagabond. 

Olympas; heavenly. Paul; small, little. Peniel; face or 
vision of God. Peor; halo or opening. Persia; that cuts or 
divided, or a nail, or horseman, gryphon. Peter; rock or 
stone. Pharaoh; that disperses, that spoils. Phinehas; aspect, 
face or trust. Pilate; who is armed with a dart. Pontius; 



208 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

marine, belonging to the sea. Potiphar; bull of Africa, a fat 
bull. 

Rachal; injurious, or perfumer. Rachel, sheep. Ram; ele- 
vated, sublime. Rebe; the fourth or square. Rehoboth; spaces, 
places. Reuben ; who sees the son, the vision of the son. Rome ; 
strength, power. Rufus; red. Ruth; drunk. 

Salem, Salmon, Salome; peace, complete, perfect. Sam- 
aria; his prison, his throne, his diamond. Sarai, Saraah; lady, 
princess of multitude. Satan; contrary, adversary, enemy, ac- 
cuser. Saul, demanded, lent, ditch, hell. Sheba; captivity, old 
age. Shem; name, renown. Shiloh; sent, peace, abundance. 
Shinar; watch of him that sleeps. Shittim; that turn away or 
divert. Sidon, Zidon; hunting, fishing, venison. Silas; three 
or the third. Silvanus; who loves the forest. Simeon; that 
hears, that is heard. Simon; that hears, obeys. Sin; bush. 
Sinai; a bush, enmity. Sion; noise, tumult. Sirion; a breast- 
plate, deliverance. Sivan; a bush or thorn. Smyrna; myrrh. 
So; a measure for grain. Sodom; their escort, their cement. 
Solomon; peaceable, perfect. 

Tamar; palm, palmtree. Tammus; concealed. Tarsus; 
winged, feathered. Teman; the south. Teritus; the third. 
Tertullus; a liar, an imposter. Tetrarch; governor of a fourth 
part. Thomas; a twin. Tubal; the earth, the world, that is 
carried or led. Tubal-cain; worldly possessions. Tyre, Tyrus; 
strength, rock, sharp. 

Ur, Uri ; light, fire, a valley ; Urim and Thummim ; light and 
perfection. Uzzah; strength, goat. 

Vashni; the second. Vashti; that drinks. 

Zarah; east, brightness. Zebedee; abundant, portion. 
Zebulun; dwelling. Zenas; living. Zillah; shadow. Zilpah; 
distillation. Zion; monument, sepulchre, raised up. Zoar; 
little, small. 



Part VL 

• THE UNIVERSAL LAW. 

Chapter 44. 
science of the heavens. 

The heavens constitute the eternal space of the Universe, 
wherein our solar system and millions of other solar systems 
are located. The law governing the movements or operations of 
the elements in the heavens is called the will or word of God 
and is described as the science and philosophy of life. The 
scientific study of this universal law is called astronomy and 
the philosophical principle is termed theology. This universal 
law of the heavens and the science of life have been given in 
the Bible and illustrated in the stories describing the life of the 
patriarchs as the leaders of Israel. This same law or principle 
has also been described in all ages of the past by tribes or races 
of people in all parts of the world in what is known as mytho- 
logical tales. The best and most scientific description of this 
law is given in what is known as Astrology, excluding the mun- 
dane or fortune-telling part of the study. 

The description of this law, as given in the Bible, is per- 
fect, but the peculiar method employed in illustrating it is mis- 
leading, for a system adhering to a personal worship is de- 
scribed. It is apparent that the Bible was written in one of the 
Uranian (Uro-anna) cycles of time when the population of the 
earth could get this knowledge from a heavenly source. And in 
order to preserve this law for future generations, the peculiar 
method of describing it, in the Bible, was employed. The sys- 
tem used in the Bible is described in other chapters and given 
as the history for a particular race of the earth for a period of 
6,000 years. The scientific or astronomical description of this 
law is described in the chapters on heaven. 

It may not be out of place to state that the science of As- 
tronomy is the outgrowth of the ancient study called Astrology. 
The word **Astro" or "Astral" means stars and the word **logy'* 
means logic. The study of the stars is called Astronomy and 
today the logic study is called Theology and these two studies 
together are called Astrology. 

The ancients illustrated the heavens in maps or charts 
giving names to the different constellations which are used 
today. 



210 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

The system used at the present time in dividing the 
heavens and earth into cycles of 360-degree periods is of ancient 
origin and is described in astrological books. The location and 
description of the constellations of fixed stars w^ere given to the 
very degree but the method employed by the ancients to measure 
the heavens has not been known for centuries. The key to this 
knowledge will be found in the Bible and anyone familiar with 
the study of Astronomy or Astrology will readily see the system 
used. It is not for us to say, or give a reason why, this know- 
ledge should not be known or understood. The Bible says, that 
God in his wisdom would reveal this knowledge to man in his 
own way and in the proper time, and the very year is described. 
From this can be seen that the law of the universe is not con- 
trolled by man and that the elements of nature including man 
are simply tools in the fulfillment of the law. 

The elements of nature produce a life-giving principle on 
this earth, as well as on the rest of the planets and in the oper- 
ation of this law the human being is born, lives and dies. God 
in his wisdom did not make this law for the glorification and 
com.fort of one and for a hell punishment to others as this law 
is based on the universal principle in creation. The beginning 
or creating of life is to change a former condition into a new 
expression and the length of time for the manifestation and 
grovTth of this life depends on the nature of the being. When 
this life principle has made its manifestation in whatever form 
it may exist, it unfolds, grows and decays, wherein it again 
changes the existing conditions and produces a new form of ex- 
pression. It depends entirely on the nature and character of 
the being, at the time of the change, in what form the next ex- 
pression of life will manifest. It is the law of the universe that 
all life manifests from the lower to a higher form of existence, 
which can be compared by the life of Jesus, as he left a material 
life to live a spiritual life in the heavens. This principle is also 
described in the stories about the children of Israel ; they were 
represented as human beings, but it is the principle of life 
which is described. The characters described in the Bible as 
the children of Israel, represent a living creative principle, com- 
paratively illustrated in the movements of the planets and is the 
actual description of the law for all life. It should be remem- 
bered that the law of the heavens is to manifest in cycles, which 
is described in the movements of the planets. And this law is 
comparatively the law for all life, illustrating that man lives 



Part VI— Chapter 44. . 211 

after passing out of the body, as death means the end of a cycle. 
From the stories given in the Bible describing the operations 
of the three planets in cycles of time can be seen that the life 
of man on earth is comparatively the same as the life of the 
planets. 

The planet Uranus has been described to illustrate the con- 
ditions in the heavens and is spoken of as a man who lived and 
dies as a human being. When his cycle of time was complete, 
and the patriarch represented in him had finished his life work, 
he ascended to heaven where he continued to live with his 
father. This story is similar to the old Greek and Roman 
mythological fables, when their myth life was finished on earth, 
someone prosecuted them and killed the leading spirit of the age. 
In these myth stories are described, that when the party spoken 
of had terminated the life on earth, he or she, went to heaven 
and became one of the fixed stars of the constellations. The 
topic in the stories of the Greek Gods is well known and we will 
only say that the story described in the life of Jesus corresponds 
to the myth Gods of old. The life work of Jesus was to live right 
and to teach man the philosophy of life, but his Christian prin- 
ciples and doctrines were not understood and at the end of his 
time he was tortured to death. The multitude who crucified 
Christ was the same people who had listened to the doctrines of 
Christianity. He said the law had to be fulfilled and he had to 
die and go to his father in the heavens. The life story of Jesus 
as given in the Bible, is a very lamentable description of a per- 
fect life and is a fairly good illustration of the life lived by the 
average human being today ; for, the life of Jesus is a compara- 
tive description of the life lived by man in the flesh. We can 
see that after the termination of the life in the flesh, the human 
beings take on the form of a spiritual being and live in the 
heavens in the realm of spirits. This is one of the best illustra- 
tions of what the philosophy of life teaches and that life is not 
destroyed in death. 

The scientific study of the Universe called Astronomy, con- 
sists in the actual measurement of space in the heavens and the 
movement of the different solar systems and planets in their 
respective orbits. The science of Astronomy can be compared 
with the science of geography, as one measures the heavens and 
the other the earth, but neither of these sciences deals with the 
influences of the elements of nature, which produce the condi- 
tions in the heavens and on the earth. Geographers pay no at- 



212 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

tention to the conditions in the heavens which produce the 
climate and the seasons of the year, as their work consists of the 
measurement of the physical earth. The same can be said of 
Astronomers, as they simply measure time and space and do not 
realize that there is a universal law which produces all condi- 
tions in the heavens and on the earth. In the study known as 
Astrology, the principles of life promulgated by both Astronomy 
and Geography, as well as Theology, are included. These three 
sciences combined, teach the law in its completeness and are 
described in the Bible as the word or God. From this it will be 
seen that the Astronomical study consists of the physical science 
of the heavens. The geographical study describes the nature of 
this earth and the theological study consists of the philosophical 
conclusions of what life is, as produced by the elements in the 
heavens and on earth. 

The science of Astrology teaches what are the elements of 
nature, which produce the conditions and life on this earth. The 
fundamental principle of the science of Astrology is not under- 
stood any more than the other sciences, and a personal system 
has been adopted instead of a universal. So also with Theology ; 
both sciences apply the principles as taught to man, whereas 
they should be applied to the universe. When this mistake is 
known, and corrected, it will be found that the sciences of 
astrology and theology will become exact sciences and not be- 
fore. 

It is not our intention to criticize and find fault with others, 
but to correct mistakes as we see them. Our aim is to make 
statements of facts and to explain what is meant by these state- 
ments, in comparing them with the erroneous teachings of the 
past. 

The idea that Jesus was a human being is not a fact, as he 
was a Christ or Savior in principle and represents the Christian 
era. The Christian theological conception of what constitutes the 
heavens is as much a mistake as the doctrines they teach. The 
principle described in the Bible of the trinity of God in the heav- 
ens simply means the dividing of the heavens into cycles of three 
divisions. The trinity of God in the heavens is at the present 
time scientifically described in the different magnitudes of the 
stars. The stars in the heavens are described to be in the first, 
second or third, etc., magnitudes from each other. The differ- 
ent magnitudes, therefore, means the many heavens referred 
to. In order to get the distance and number of stars in each of 



Part VI— Chapter 44. 213 

the different magnitudes or heavens, the ancients multiplied or 
divided each magnitude by three and the result obtained is the 
number of stars in each magnitude. 

From this it will be seen that the heavens described in the 
Bible consist of the trinity of God and that this same God-given 
principle is expressed in every living form in existence. The 
trinity of life has been expressed in many terms, such as father, 
son and holy ghost; or heaven, hell and eternal life. It is also 
called Astronomy, Geography, and Theology, or Saturn, Uranus 
and Neptune, and many other names, which consists in dividing 
the universal law into the expressions of three. Let it be dis- 
tinctly understood that life in the heavens and on earth consists 
in the trinity of God. 

We have described what constitutes the different cycles of 
time and space and how many degrees there are to each period. 
We wish to call the attention of astronomers to this system of 
calculating space in the heavens. It is a known fact that the 
exact degrees in years in the celestial sphere are not known. As 
far as we know it is a guess between 70 and 83 years to each 
degree. We have proved without a question or doubt, that this 
cycle consists of 72 years to each degree. From this can be seen, 
that the great cycle consists of 25,920 years and not a specula- 
tive figure from 25,000 to 27,000 years. There is also another 
very important fact we will call astronomers' attention to and 
that is, that in 1920 the pole of the celestial ecliptic will be a 
little over one degree (80 years) from the pole star. This is the 
time which is described in the Bible as the passover, and it will 
be found to be the exact degree of the celestial pole and cor- 
responds to the sideral degree of the north pole. In the year 
2000 the celestial pole will be on the very degree of the pole star. 

We have repeatedly made the statement that the law of the 
universe is written in the Bible and that this law is not under- 
stood. We will describe the fundamental principles as given 
in the Bible and it will be found to be the description of our 
solar system's revolution around another centre. 

The Bible described that there are three heavens to calcu- 
late time in and that they are called the Terrestrial plain, the 
Celestial plain and the Earth or natural plain. The heaven or 
plain of the earth consists of the space wherein our earth and 
seven other planets move around our sun. The Celestial heaven 
is the circuit of our solar system among the constellations called 
fixed stars. The last and great Terrestrial heavens is the 



214 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

space or circuit in the heavens known as the "Milky Way," 
"Galaxy," or "Light of Heavens." The three distances, circuits 
or spaces of the heavens have been calculated on the same prin- 
ciple as we calculate the earth's orbit around the sun. The 
heavens have been divided into twelve houses and ordinarily 
called the twelve signs of the Zodiac. Each of these distances is 
calculated on the Universal principle which is described in the 
chapter on cycles of time. 

The creative law of the heavens is the same as the laws 
which govern the human races on earth. This creative princi- 
ple can be compared with our solar system and the life on 
earth. The sun, comparatively speaking, has a family of eight 
children; the seven planets and the earth. Each of these 
planets has again children which are the moons belonging to 
the planets. The principles shown in the operation of the solar 
systems are the same which govern the human race; for each 
child of the heavens and earth represents part of the great unit 
for all, called God. The Bible illustrates this creative principle 
of the heavens in the stories described to take place on this 
earth and at the same time says that a similar condition exists 
in the heavens. The sun is given as the cause or father of cre- 
ation on this plain of existence and the three planets Uranus, 
Neptune and Saturn represent the effect or condition produced. 
In the three planets, a descriptive illustration is given showing 
what the nature of the planets are and the conditions produced 
on this earth by them. We have previously mentioned that the 
study of the operation of the Universe consists of the three 
principles described in Astronomy, Geography and Theology. 
The three great planets represent the principles given in these 
sciences and are spoken of in the Bible as the word of God. The 
laws of the heavens are described to correspond to the law gov- 
erning the planet Uranus and this study is at the present time 
called Astronomy. The principle illustrated in the planet 
Saturn corresponds to the condition the earth produces and is 
called Geography. The planet Neptune is described to give 
reasoning or inspiring conditions and represents the study of 
Theology. 

The period of time, as calculated in the heavens, consists 
of a cycle of one thousand years and is called an ecliptic period. 
This ecliptic cycle of the heavens corresponds to the cycle of 
Uranus in his orbit and also the ecliptic period comparing the 
relation of the north pole to the pole star. 



Part VI— Chapter 44. 215 

The precession of the equinoxes are described in the Bible 
by the travels of the children of Israel westward around the 
earth, and the different cycles represent the ages of the patri- 
archs. The ecliptic distance of the heavens is calculated on the 
earth from the orbit of Uranus around the sun and corresponds 
to a belt, around the earth at 36 degrees north latitude, of 120 
degrees longitude each. The ecliptic period at the pole consists. 




Plate No. 12 — Space, Time and Cycles. 

of 24 hours, Astronomically calculated, but it takes the celestial 
pole 24,000 sideral years for a complete circuit. The distance 
calculated for the earth by the precession of the equinoxes at 
36 degrees north latitude consists of 25,920 years as figured in 
degrees. 

The principle illustrated in Saturn corresponds to the law 
as described in the circuit of Uranus. Saturn represents the 



216 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

earth and his circuit around the sun corresponds to the Moon's 
complete cycle around the earth. Saturn requires 291/^ years 
to complete his circuit around the sun and the Moon encircles 
the earth in 29% days. Saturn and the Moon^s cycles corre- 
spond, that is, the Moon's sideral time of 27 1-3 days from new 
moon to new moon corresponds to Saturn's period. The years 
as here given are from equinoctial calculations. The planet 
Neptune makes a circuit of the heavens in 164 years and this 
time corresponds to six times the circuit of Saturn and the 
Moon, as six times 27 1-3 equals 164 years and this is the cycle 
of Neptune. 

From this comparative description can be seen, that the 
entire universe is figured in cycles and that there are cycles 
within cycles all based on the same law. 

The conclusions to be reached from the study of the Bible 
and the heavens are, that the heavens are a real place or space 
and not an imaginary location somewhere in the clouds. 

Chapter 45. 
equinoctial influence. 

The science called the precession of the equinoxes for the 
earth is a very common topic and we will only say, that it is 
caused by the earth's motion and revolution in space around the 
sun. The method of calculating the precession of the equinoxes 
in the heavens and for the earth for spring and autumn is the 
same, and consists in the measurement of space on the ecliptic 
for the sun and the earth. The Modern astronomical calcula- 
tions divide the distance of the heavens and earth into four 
periods of 90 degrees each and when the earth's polarity strikes 
one of the four dividing degrees, the seasons of the year are 
changed and this is called the precession of the equinoxes. The 
four cycles for the earth are called spring, summer, autumn and 
winter, and are calculated from Greenwich in 90-degree angles. 

The ancient Bible writers describe that the heavens and the 
earth, beside being divided into four divisions of 90-degree 
cycles, were also calculated in three cycles of 120 degrees each 
and called the ages of the patriarchs. The method of dividing 
the heavens into three cycles of 120 degrees each is in the sys- 
tem called precession of the equinoxes. The place in the heavens 
from which to calculate time and space is the point where the 
ecliptic crosses the equator in Pisces. From this it will be seen 



Part VI— 'Chapter 45. 217 

that the precession of the equinoxes is figured on the ecliptic 
from Pisces westward in cycles. The first ecliptic cycle for the 
earth is calculated from Greenwich to 120 degrees west and as 
the ecliptic circuit is apparently located at 36 degrees north 
latitude, the degree from which to calculate will be 120 degrees 
west longitude and 36 degrees north latitude. The second 120- 
degree cycle is calculated to and from the 240th degree west 
longitude. The ancient Bible writers describe cycles containing 
a given number of degrees, by the precession of the equinoxes, 
but only the cycle of 90 degrees is used by scientific astronomers 
at the present time. 

The time required for the precession of the equinoxes in 
cycles for the earth, corresponds to the time in which the 
planets Uranus, Neptune and Saturn make their respective cir- 
cuits around the sun. The life history of the patriarchs which 
is described in the Bible is given in the circuit of Uranus as an 
age, in the precession of the equinoxes and illustrated in the 
travels of the children of Israel westward. The planets Nep- 
tune and Saturn are shown to describe the conditions and in- 
fluences which existed at the time, caused by the change of the 
equinoctial seasons. From this it will be seen, that it is the law 
of the heavens and earth, which is described in the Bible and 
that the conditions produced by the planets and by the preces- 
sion of the equinoxes, constitute the law and word of God. 

The six ages described in the history of the patriarchs given 
in the Bible, corresponds to the six great constellations, located 
near the pole and represent a period of time for 6,000 years. 
The names of the six constellations are given in the same order 
as described in the Bible for the patriarchs. The constellations 
are named in the following order : Cassiopeia, Camelo Pardalis, 
Ursa Major, Ursa Minor, Draco, and Cepheus. The six cycles 
of Bible time are named, Adam, Noah, Abraham, Moses, David 
and Jesus. 

The six ag^s represent 1,000 years each and describe the 
changing of the earth^s polarity by the precession of the equi- 
noxes. It begins with the birth of Adam in the beginning of 
time and terminates with the destruction of the Christian age. 
The new cycle after the Christian age is called the Millenium 
and describes a new heaven and earth, after which time the 
cycles of Bible history will be repeated. The Old Testament 
describes the changing of cycles for Asia and Europe, and the 
New Testament describes the destruction of the old cycle and 
also gives the conditions of the New World in the United States. 



218 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

The change in the cycles of time from Europe to America, 
is caused by the changing of polarity in an angle of 120 degrees 
westward, commonly called the precession of the equinoxes. 
This changing of polarity is based on a universal law, for all the 
equinoctial time and space in the heavens and on the earth cor- 
responds. From this it will be seen that the Moon's cycle around 
the earth, as well as the cycles of the earth and sun are measured 
by the same system and the precession of the equinoxes for the 
Moon and the earth correspond to the equinoxes for all cycles 
in the heavens. The Bible describes the precession of the equi- 
noxes as the passover and at this time a peculiar condition is 
produced on the earth. The old cycle east of the changing degree 
is described as destroyed, when the new or western cycle begins. 
The period of time required for the earth to change polarity in 
this passover is 216 years; which corresponds to a distance of 
space in the heavens of three degrees of seventy-two years to 
each degree. This time is divided so that two degrees of 144 
years are calculated before and 72 years after, the actual change 
of polarity takes place. 

It should be remembered that the heavens and the earth 
are calculated in cycles of 360 degrees divided into minor ages, 
and that this 360-degree cycle represents 6,000 years. There 
are three 120-degree cycles which represent 2,000 years each, 
and six 60-degree cycles representing a period of time each of 
1,000 yars. The 30-degree cycle contains twelve cycles of 500 
years each, which are subdivided into twelve minor ages of 40 
degrees in space, making the 24,000 degrees in all. 

The distance in the heavens is measured from the point 
where the ecliptic crosses the equator in Pisces and is called 
"right ascension." The earth is measured from Greenwich 
which is 30 degrees west of Pisces and is calculated in degrees 
of longitude west. At the present time, Greenwich is the divid- 
ing point from which the polarity of the earth is calculated, but 
by the precession of the equinoxes the polarity of the earth will 
change to the 120th degree west longitude in the year 1920. 

The conditions produced by the changing of polarity are 
being fulfilled in the development of the United States by the 
emigration from Europe to America. The first 144 years (2 
degrees) represent the time from 1776 to the passover in 1920 
and the second period of 72 years represents the cycle west of 
the changing degree, which is given in detail in the chapter on 
the United States. 



Part Vl-^Chapter 45. 219 

The ending of the cycle for Europe takes place in 1918 
and the beginning of the cycle for the American continent is in 
1920-1921. This is the period of time described in the Bible 
in the death of the Christian age and as the beginning of time 
in a new heaven and earth. A similar condition is described in 
the Bible at the passover for the ages of Abraham, Moses and 
David. Their cycles extended from Europe to the Pacific Coast 
and each age is repeated when the precession of the equinoxes 
takes place. 

The cycle described in the New Testament is for the Pa- 
cific Coast west, at the 120th degree of longitude, but as the 
Pacific Ocean is west of the 124th degree, this cycle is described 
in latitude beginning at the 24th degree in the south and ending 
at the 54th degree in the north., A distance of 30 degrees is 
also given from the 30th to the 60th degree and contains twelve 
houses. The description for the space south of 32 degrees 30 
minutes latitude is written as belonging to the cycle of Europe, 
The space between the 30th and the 50th degree represents the 
two 120-degree cycles from Greenwich to 240 degrees west. 
The 40-degree space from the 26th degree to the 66th degree, 
was divided into cycles of 10 degrees each by the usual angles, 
the same as the 40-degree distance of Europe. The main dis- 
tance or space is from the 30th to the 54th degrees, which are 
divided into four cycles of six degrees each, and called the 
twenty-four elders. This space corresponds to the center of the 
ecliptic circle and within this radius is described the location 
of the twelve tribes in the Book of Joshua and also the provinces 
called Judah, Samaria and Galilee. 

The following description will show how the 360-degree 
cycles are reduced into minor cycles. The space of 30 degrees 
from the 30th to the 60th degree represents a cycle of 360 de- 
grees divided into twelve houses. The space of 15 degrees from 
the 30th to the 45th degree equals 180 degrees and from the 
30th to the 37th degree 30 minutes, a 90-degree space. The 
space of 360 degrees is divided into angles of three, the same 
way. The distance of 30 degrees from the 30th to the 60th 
degree is divided into three cycles of 10 degrees each and repre- 
sents a distance of 120 degrees. From the 30th to the 40th 
degree is an angle of 120 degrees and from the 30th to the 50th, 
an angle of 240 degrees. The space of 5 degrees from the 30th 
to the 35th degree equals an angle of 60 degrees and from the 
30th to the 32nd degree 30 minutes equals an angle of 30 degrees 



220 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

or one house. From this it will be seen that 360 degrees equals 
30 degrees, 180 degrees equals 15 degrees, 90 degrees equals 7 
degrees 30 minutes, and 45 degrees equals 3 degrees 45 minutes. 
The distance of 120 equals 10 degrees, 60 degrees equals 5 de- 
grees, and 30 degrees equals 2 degrees 30 minutes, and 15 de- 
grees equals 1 degree 15 minutes degrees of latitude. 

The books of the New Testament from Matthew to Revela- 
tion describe a distance from the 26th to the 96th degree and 
misled the translators to believe that these books were written 
in the years, which were described as degrees, in the New age. 
The book of Revelation is calculated from the 96th degree west 
longitude from the 120th degree and corresponds to the location 
at 216 degrees west or 144 degrees east longitude; which again 
corresponds to the very year when the cycles of time changed 
by the precession of the equinoxes. The book of Revelation de- 
scribes the three cycles beginning in Asia including Europe and 
terminates in the New World in America. The year 35 A. D. 
corresponds to 1920 and as all Bible ages end at 96 A. D., the 
difference of 60 years will be added to 1920, which is 1980. The 
year 1980 is divided by the cycle of 360 and leaves us at 180 
degrees west which is at the International Date Line at the end 
of time given in the New Testament. 

The period of time given in each of the books of the New 
Testament contains 32 years; which represents the distance of 
32 degrees. The time is calculated from the death of Christ in 
the 33rd year to the end, which is described in the different dis- 
tances in degrees. Each of the books describes a given dis- 
tance and represents space. This is a positive proof that all the 
books of the Bible are figured in degrees. The books were not 
written in these years, as pertaining to the age, but were 
written for the degrees constituting the Christian age. 

The law of the Universe, spoken of in the Bible as the 
words and will of God, is the law which governs the life-giving 
elements in the heavens and on earth, and this is the God-given 
power ordinarily called the influence of the Sun, stars and 
planets. This law or influence may be expressed in different 
terms and called dinamic, magnetic, electric, force or power, and 
consists in the automatic transmission or polarization of the 
will of the creator, also called the infinite mind of God. We do 
not know of a better word to use in expressing this law than 
the term "influence of the elements," which expresses this power 
in whatever form it may manifest. The law of the universe 



Part VI— Chapter 45. 221 

which produces this influence on the earth can as an example, be 
compared to an electric generating plant. We will, as an illus- 
tration, say that the 48 great constellations in the heavens com- 
pare to that many electric dinamic headquarters and that the 
fixed stars within these constellations become transformers, 
being separate solar systems within the constellations. Our 
solar system can be compared to one of these dinamic substations 
producing a wireless energy to the eight planets of this unit and 
this energy is the word of God which is termed influence of the 
elements. 

It is supposed to be a scientific fact today that the sun's 
rays produce a direct heat and life-giving power on this earth, 
but it will be found that the sun does not produce this energy 
as it consists of a reflected magnetic influence from other 
greater solar systems. From this it may be seen that our sun 
is one of many suns in the celestial heavens and when our solar 
system passes through space in its circuits, it gets its power 
from other solar systems similar to the energy the planets, earth 
and moon gets from the sun. As this dinamic energy is reflected 
through space it must necessarily strike the objective point in 
given angles of degrees and this measurement of space in the 
heavens is given in the Bible as good and bad angels. 

We have stated that it is not the direct rays of the sun 
which produce the life-giving principle on this earth, but that 
it is a reflected energy operated similar to a wireless electric- 
magnetic instrument, which sends and receives messages ac- 
cording to the angle of adjustment. The distance from the sun 
to the earth is 93,000,000 miles and if it is the actual direct heat 
of the sun, which heats the earth, the entire surface of the earth 
where the sun's rays strike would obtain equal light and heat 
after passing this great distance. But instead of an equal dis- 
tribution of the life-giving power it is reflected on this earth 
into zones which today are termed the life regions or belts. The 
heat and cold atmospheric waves strike within a few miles of 
each other; which proves that it is not the direct rays of the 
sun but a megnetic influence sent to a place atuned to this infin- 
ite law. One of these magnetic belts has been described in the 
Bible as the 24 Elders, which corresponds to the temperate zone 
of the life regions of the earth and the influence of the elements 
have been described within this zone in the history of creation 
for 6,000 yars. 

We have described the comparative location of this ecliptic 



222 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

belt around the earth in degrees and within this belt can be ap- 
plied the conditions of the heavens which is produced on this 
earth. It may be earthquakes, cyclones, rain, or sunshine ac- 
cording to the angle which the different parts of the earth are 
atuned. Many systems of calculating climatic conditions are 
used today and Almanacs published giving approximate weather 
forecasts, but as the houses of the heavens have not been known 
and applied to the circuit around the earth, the calculations nec- 
essarily have been general instead of specific. 

The universal principle of calculating in angles from the 
fixed stars and planets, to the different locations on the earth 
will give the climatic and weather conditions on this earth. The 
nature of the stars corresponds to the influence described for the 
planets and the nature of the houses the fixed stars are in also 
corresponds to the nature of the houses around the earth, as 
well as to man which is described in another chapter. 

It should be remembered that the law of the Universe is 
harmonious and that the law of the elements of the heavens will 
equally apply to man as a God-given principle. A message from 
the Pleiades corresponds to a message of love and good will 
from Venus. A message from Antares corresponds to a call 
from Mars with war and pestilence. Messages from Alphard 
and Regulus correspond to those sent by Saturn meaning de- 
struction, death and the end of the cycle, and so on with the 
rest of the stars. The magnetic energy or influence which the 
constellations and fixed stars produce on our sun is in harmony 
with the power which the sun sends to the planets and earth, as 
a reflected energy can only produce what it received. So also 
with the conditions which exist on this earth, as the elements 
of nature produce the conditions here and if man cares to ob- 
serve this law, he may study it and know the will of the eternal 
father. 

There is a principle illustrated in the description given in 
the Bible of the place *Teniel." The place Peniel is located in 
the constellation Scutum Sobiesii at the beginning of Sagitarius 
and indicates that this place is endowed by nature to produce 
spiritual gifts if developed. These psychic or spiritual gifts 
have been known and used in all ages, but during the Roman 
age, the development of these natural gifts for spiritual pur- 
poses have been prohibited by laws. The principle described 
in Peniel means vision of God or to obtain knowledge of God; 
which again we call spiritual development, clear-seeing and 



Part VI—Chapte7- 45. 223 

clear-hearing, etc. The ancients also called the principle illus- 
trated in Peniel the "philosopher's stone," the ''light within,'' 
and *'Urim and Thummim." Many scientists called alchemists 
have for centuries been experimenting in chemical laboratories 
to find the philohopher's stone, not knowing what they were 
looking for, but expecting to find a mineral stone. The law or 
power hidden in the terms used as the Philosopher's stone and 
Peniel is not for a material or earthly use, but for the purpose 
of developing the inner or soul principle of man while in the 
flesh. God in his wisdom has hidden this law as well as the 
knowledge and power which can be obtained by the use of these 
gifts. It is, however, a universal law, and to those whose aim 
is not entirely of a material nature and who do not live for self 
alone, these gifts can be developed, but for others they cannot. 

During the change in the cycles of time the elements of 
nature produce an influence on this earth when this soul- 
building power within man is intensified and the human race 
becomes the most enlightened in both spiritual and material 
knowledge. This God-given power is a reflected energy from 
the heavens, produced in cycles or waves and it depends on the 
physical condition in which man is, when this energy strikes 
him and v/hat he does with it after he receives it. 

The proper use of man's vitality is illustrated in the term 
'Teniel," and the abuse is called, "The unpardonable sin against 
the Holy Ghost," which means that when man lives in material, 
sensual pleasures and abuses the law, he sins against the most 
precious gifts of God. The reason why this kind of sin is called 
"unpardonable" is, that the life-giving power is wasted, and 
cannot be restored, because God has given this power as a life- 
building principle for an eternal life. 

If man lives according to the law of God, this power be- 
comes a blessing, but if man's vitality, as a soul-building power 
is abused, he becomes a mere animal and lives now and hereafter 
in environments to correspond to his nature. 

As there is a creative power of the heavens so is there 
also a destroying or counteracting influence to harmonize the 
law of creation. And it depends on man's physical condition 
at the time when this influence is produced, if it builds or de- 
stroys his body. This detrimental influence of the elements has 
been shown very clearly at the present time in the disease called 
"Spanish Influenza." This same influence was also described in 
the Bible as Reuben's Mandrakes, and in the many diseases and 



224 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

pestilences spoken of for the time of the end. It is illustrated 
as the work of Satan who destroys the power of the Holy Ghost 
which God produces in man on this earth. We should realize 
that the Holy Ghost spoken of is Neptune and that the power of 
Satan is the influence which the planet Saturn produces. From 
this we may learn that in the laws of God a principle is involved 
and if we know this law, we may live according to his will. 

It is God's will that this knowledge shall only be given to 
those who seek it, as it is said, *'iSeek ye first the kingdom of 
heaven and all other things shall be added unto you;" which 
means that the philosopher's stone shall be found only by those 
who seek after the kingdom of God. If this knowledge is worth 
having it is worth looking for; ''Seek and ye shall find, knock 
and it shall be opened unto you." From this it will be seen that 
God in his wisdom has given laws and ordinances which must 
be followed, and in obeying God's laws the rewards will be a 
heavenly condition both now and hereafter. 

Some of the teachers of the philosophy of the Christian 
and other religions, do not understand this law of life, but in the 
new dispensation this law will be revealed to them and they 
will see God and know his will. 

We have mentioned that the angels (angles) of the heavens 
produce a given influence on the earth and that this influence 
would be according to the conditions and nature of the place 
where this influence is produced. The places in the heavens 
called angels (angles) which produce the conditions on earth 
spoken of, consist of living intelligent beings and the influence 
they produce is according to the laws of nature. If an influence 
is produced from the angles of 90 degrees, at the poles of the 
earth, warm and pleasant climatic conditions could not be ex- 
pected, and so also from places in the heavens where darkness 
and ignorance prevails. Good cannot come from a place where 
there is no good, any more than to expect darkness to produce 
light. There are places in the heavens to correspond to every 
environment and form of life and the places where the human 
and other beings live in the heavens, is according to the nature 
of the beings. From this will be seen that the angels of the 
heavens are in the environments of the place and that the being 
who lives at the diflferent angles in degrees corresponds to the 
nature of the place. 

This can be illustrated in the nature of Germany whieh pro- 
duced a German environment and also to the influence pro- 



Part VI — Chapter 45. 225 

duced by the people of the United States, as they produce an 
American influence. In emigrating to another nation one be- 
comes an influence of that nation on this earth as he does when 
emigrating to a life in the heavens. 

The Bible states that life in the next form of expression 
in the heavens is rewarded according to the nature and environ- 
ments of the being here, and that men and others in the next 
life will live according to his desires and reap the harvest of 
that which he has produced in the flesh. If man lives in ignor- 
ance, as animals, and produces evil conditions for himself and 
others, he will find his level when he enters the next world and 
get his reward according to what he is, and so also for those 
who aim to do good and live according to the law. We should 
remember that man after passing out of the body, enters a life 
in the heavens and that the place where he then lives is calcu- 
lated in angles of degrees the same as it is on the earth, and 
that he, as a being, becomes one of the spirits within this angle. 
From this it will be seen, that man becomes one of the angels 
of the heavens according to his nature and that he is as much 
of an angel of God on earth now, as he will be after passing 
out of the body of flesh. 

We have reproduced charts of the heavens copied by G. P. 
Serviss from Heis's Atlas Celestis. These charts are apparently 
the best illustrations of the heavens in existence today, and will 
be of great help in applying the locations of the constellations 
to the earth. 

These charts will show the comparative locations of the 
constellations and fixed stars on the earth and can be used as 
reference when reading the Bible and the old mythological 
stories. 

It is apparent that mineral and other valuable resources 
can be discovered at the corresponding location on the earth to 
where the fixed stars are located in the heavens. In Europe 
the locations of the tribes are the nations and the stars can 
readily be located there. In the Pacific Coast States we have 
described the location of the tribes from the book of Joshua and 
the twelve charts will illustrate where the fixed stars are located 
within this area. For the sake of comparison, the location of 
the nations of Europe can be compared to the location of the 
tribes on the Pacific Coast, as the fixed stars are correspond- 
ingly located. When it is known what are the natural resources 
of the nations in Europe, it can be applied to the Pacific Coast 



226 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

States and the hidaen wealth of the country discovered. The 
mines of England, France and Belgium can be comparatively 
located withm a radius of a few miles in the Pacific Coast 
States. So also with the copper and iron mines of Scandinavia, 
which are comparatively located in the State of Washington 
and so with the resources of the rest of the nations of Europe. 
This can also be illustrated in the stories from the Bible where 
it says, that in the foot of the tribe of Asher will be found oil, 
iron and brass. The foot of the tribe of Asher is located in the 
western part of the State of Washington near the coast and 
south of the Olympic Mountains. Another good comparison 
can be given in the great Pleiades located in Taurus, correspond- 
ing to the location of the Blue Mountains in eastern Oregon. In 
this locality will be found one of the most valuable undiscov- 
ered mineral deposits of the world. In the State of Washington 
north of Mt. Adams and Mt. St. Helens will be found valuable 
coal deposits. In Death Valley in California will be found gold, 
silver and oil which is located within a triangular or wedge- 
shaped formation of the valley. When oil is discovered in 
Death Valley it will produce trouble for the other oil fields in 
California as this is the place Achor spoken of in the Bible. 
From this it will be seen that the nature and conditions in the 
heavens are the same as on earth, and that this knowledge can 
be applied in a practical scientific way for the guidance and 
benefit to man. We must remember, that as it is in the heavens 
so is it on the earth. God's words are the same when spoken 
in the heavens as when they are expressed on the earth. 

God, the Universe and man is not part of a part but is 
part of the whole unit of one. 

Chapter 46. 
the heavens and earth. 

The "celestial heavens" is the name given to the path of 
our solar system in the twelve houses of the heavens and within 
this path or circuit are located other solar systems, known as 
constellations or fixed stars. The name, nature and location of 
these fixed stars are copied from ancient records and given in 
a separate chapter. 

The method of applying the aspects of the fixed stars to 
the sun is the same as used by astrologers when calculating 
locations for the sun and planets in relations to the earth. It 



Pa7*t VI— Chapter 46. 227 

is in the well-known method of calculating the influences or 
aspects in angles of trine, squares, conjunction, parallel and op- 
position, etc. When calculating space in the heavens, the 
center or ecliptic point is located in Pisces and not, as it is on 
the earth, at Greenwich. From this point in the heavens, all 
longitude of right ascension for all stars is calculated. In the 
heavens Pisces is the first constellation of the Zodiac and Aries 
is the second and so on ; but on the earth Aries has been called 
the first house. This distinction is very important as the loca- 
tion of the constellations of the Zodiac for the heavens and earth 
will not correspond if this is not considered. 

It is apparent that the fundamental principle of the law 
of the heavens is not understood by Astronomers today, as they 
do not realize that the constellations and fixed stars move in 
circuits around a given center. However, they know that the 
stars move and call it ''Star drift." Astronomical text books 
contain some very surprising and far from scientific statements, 
as will be seen from the following extract copied from a modern 
text book: "The constellations have in consequence of the pre- 
cession of the equinoxes, drifted out of connection with the 
framework of the Zodiac which is formed with the signs as a 
basis. Thus the sign Aries becomes Pisces and Taurus be- 
comes Aries, etc." We will only say that there is no drifting in 
the heavens and that the constellations could not be out of con- 
nection with the Zodiac, because the Zodiac consists of twelve 
constellations and the Zodiac cannot drift out of place any more 
than the Sun, planets or the earth. We will call astronomers' 
attention to the distinction we have spoken of between Green- 
wich in Aries and the Meridian in Pisces and they will readily 
see their mistake. 

The original division of the heavens into constellations de- 
scribed by the ancients was in the dividing of the Terrestrial 
heavens into twelve houses or hours called the twelve tribes of 
Israel. These twelve tribes were divided into three groups of 
four tribes to each division. The first four houses consist of 
Sagitarius, Capricorn, Aquarius, and Pisces, and these four 
houses represent the space called 4 B. C. The next four houses 
begin with the dividing of space and time east and west and are 
Aries, Taurus, Gemini and Cancer, making the second cycle. 
The third and last division contains the houses of Leo, Virgo, 
Libra and Scorpio. These divisions of the heavens are 
again subdivided into many minor ages and called the descend- 
ants of the children of Israel. 



228 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

The three cycles consisting of the four houses each are cal- 
culated from Greenwich for the cycles of Europe, and from the 
first degree of Leo for America, and the first degree of Sagi- 
tarius for Asia. The dividing degree for these houses is at the 
120th degree east and west from Greenwich and is the dividing 
of the earth into three cycles of 120 degrees each, making 360 
degrees in all. 

The four degrees or houses east of this dividing point were 
called B. C. which means they were located east of Greenwich 
or east of one of the other 120-degree divisions. Each of these 
120-degree divisions consists of twelve houses and is figured as 
a complete cycle. The first degree of Aries begins at the 120th 
degree and in the cycle for Europe this is at Greenwich. For 
the American cycle, the first degree of Aries begins at the 120th 
degrees west longitude in Leo and is the same to America as 
Greenwich is to Europe. This dividing line given at Greenwich 
simply divides east from west. The Christian cycle described 
in the heavens began at 4 B. C. and for the earth it is described 
to have begun at 40 B. C. and to extend to 70 or 80 A. D. This 
means that all ages, the Christian age included, extend four 
houses east and eight houses west of Greenwich and illustrates 
that the Christian era consists of twelve houses as a complete 
age. 

The Christian cycle of time terminates in 1920 and the new 
age for America begins in 1921. The center from which to 
figure time and space for the coming age is the 120th degree 
west longitude. The same system is used in America as was 
used in Europe and there will be another 40 degrees east and 
80 degrees west from the 120-degree dividing line. The 40 
degrees east extends to the east coast of the United States and 
is the same place where Adam lived in the Garden of Eden and 
where Abraham and Moses had their troubles. The 80-degree 
west extends to the 200th degree west longitude. This system 
of measuring 40 degrees east and 80 degrees west to every 
120-degree cycle also applies to the cycle for Asia. The Asiatic 
age will begin in the year 4080 A. D. at the 120th degree east 
longitude. 

It will be found that in the study of the heavens, a system of 
parallel locations was described. This means that two or more 
planets or constellations which are located on the same degree 
of longitude are in parallel positions. As an example, we will 
say that the constellation Ursa Major and Leo are parallel, being 



Part VI— Chapter 46. * 229 

located on the same degree in longitude. The planets or stars 
may be in either north or south declination and still be in par- 
allel position to each other. From this it will be seen that a 
constellation located within the same degrees of longitude as a 
house, is termed to be in parallel position in that house. When 
our solar system passes through the twelve houses of the celes- 
tial heavens it becomes in conjunction and parallel position to 
all the constellations of the heavens. This is very important to 
know for when the sun is in the different locations, a condition 
or influence is produced and this influence is again reproduced 
and called aspects. The law of the heavens including this in- 
fluence of the Stars is the word of God and in this manner God 
speaks to man on thig^ earth. 

There are still in existence some of the old maps or charts 
showing how the ancients illustrated the conditions in the 
heavens and implied that the conditions of the heavens were the 
conditions on this earth. We have copied some of these charts 
to show that it contains the same system as described in the 
Bible. As an example, we will give the names of the three great 
divisions illustrated in the charts and it will be found to cor- 
respond to the stories given in the Bible. 

The constellation Cepheus is pictured with the well-known 
features of Jesus of Nazareth. The space covered by the picture 
is from 55 degrees east to 70 degrees west representing the 
location of Europe and the Atlantic Ocean. The constellation 
Cepheus represents the Christian age as a period of time which 
is described in other chapters. 

The constellation Camelo Pardalis is illustrated as a Camel 
and covers the space from the 45th degree to the 200th degree 
west longitude. The distance of the Camel extends from the 
Atlantic Ocean and includes the American continent to past the 
International Date Line in the Pacific Ocean. 

The constellation Draco (including Ursa Minor) repre- 
sents the third division and is illustrated as a great dragon. 
Draco covers the space from the 140th degree to the 300th 
degree west longitude, and is the space from the west coast of 
the American continent across the Pacific Ocean and Asia, to 
the 60th degree east at the dividing of Europe and Asia. 

The location of the constellations in the heavens measured 
in degrees on the ecliptic, corresponds to the location on the 
earth as figured in degrees east and west from the meridian. 

From the old illustrations of the heavens can be seen the 



230 * Key to Bible and Heaven. 

exact location of all the constellations and will help in memor- 
izing the names for the different localities in the heavens as well 
as on earth. Detailed description of the scientific meanings of 
these ancient charts will be found in nearly all Astronomical 
books and in the Greek and Roman mythological story books. 
These books are very common and are found in all public 
libraries. It should be remembered that these books do not 
contain myth stories but that it is a description of the heavens 
and earth similar to that given in the Bible. 

In studying the charts of the heavens it must be remem- 
bered that the first and the 360th degrees are calculated from 
Pisces and that this house contains the 30-degree east of Aries. 
We find that Casiopeia and Andromeda are located in parallel 
position with this house. The story that Andromeda was 
chained to a rock means that the age representing the house 
Pisces as Andromeda would be chained. This house represents 
the mind of man and it shows that during this age the mind 
of man would be chained to the rock of ignorance. The house 
of Pisces represents the Roman power which has ruled Europe 
in ignorance during the Christian age. 

The house of Aries is located from Greenwich to the 30th 
degree west and in this house are located the Triangle and 
Persius. The house Taurus, extends from the 30th to the 60th 
degree west longitude and includes Orion and Auriga. From 
this it will be seen that Aries and Taurus cover the distance 
from England across the Atlantic Ocean and that the head and 
the- horns of the bull, Taurus, are located in the Ocean east of 
the United States. 

The two houses of Gemini and Cancer cover the distance 
of the United States from the Atlantic to the 120th degree west 
longitude. The constellations of Auriga, Monoceros, Canis 
Minor and Major, Argo and the Lynx are in parallel with these 
houses. The location of Eridanus corresponds to the Gulf of 
Mexico. The house of Gemini covers the space in the eastern 
part of the United States, and Cancer represents the country 
west of the Mississippi to Utah and Arizona. In the house of 
Cancer is the place where the age is destroyed and as this is at 
the end of the cycle, it is located at what was known as Sodom 
and Gomorrah. 

The house Leo is located west from the 120th degree in the 
Pacific Coast States and from this degree the calculation for a 
new cycle of time is made. The constellation Ursa Major is 



Part VI— Chapter 46. 231 

located at the 153rd degree west, which corresponds to the 
123rd degree for the earth. This constellation and the Pleiades 
contains seven stars each from which the seven tribes or 
churches of Israel were located. Leo contains five stars and 
gave the location for the five other tribes of Judah as the tribes 
of the Lion. These two divisions of five and seven were origi- 
nally given from the Pacific Coast States. 

The 120th degree west is at the Pacific Coast States and 
west from this location we find the constellation Hydra con- 
taining most of the evil fixed stars of the heavens. The entire 
space of Hydra covers the distance of the Pacific Ocean because 
it extends from America to Asia and in this distance Leo, Virgo, 
Crater, Centourus, Bootes and Coma Berenices are located. 
Special attention is called to the location of the Sextans at 150 
degrees west at the equator. 

The houses of Libra and Scorpio are located in the Pacific 
Ocean and extend to the Coast of Japan and China. In this 
part of the world the Serpent, Ophiuchus, Hercules and Corona 
are located. Scorpio is the last house of the cycle, and is located 
east of China in the Ocean. 

Sagitarius is the first house of the third cycle and begins 
in the Southeastern part of China, terminating in the Himalaya 
Mountains. In the parallel of Sagitarius is located Sagitta, 
Aquilla, and Scutum Sobiesii. This is one of the most peculiar 
locations of all the places described in mythology, astronomy 
and the Bible. It is the birthplace or first house for all cycles. 
The location of the Archer's bow corresponds to the 120th de- 
gree east longitude and in the heavens it is located at 210 de- 
grees west. The bow Noah placed in the heavens at the time 
of the flood is the bow of Sagitarius and not a rainbow. 

Capricorn, in the heavens, begins at the 300th degree west 
and extends to the 330th degree west, which again corresponds 
to the location from Thibet to Persia and from the 90th to the 
60th degree east longitude. The two houses of Capricorn and 
Aquarius overlap each other and as these houses represent the 
dividing section of Asia and Europe the illustrations are pecul- 
iarly arranged. Capricorn and Aquarius cover the distance 
from the 90th to the 30th degree east longitude which is from 
Thibet to Egypt. The constellations Pisces Austrinus, Del- 
phines, Cygnus and Pegasus are located within this parallel. 

Aquarius is located from the 60th to the 30th degree east 
longitude and illustrates the end of the cycles with the termina- 



232 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

tion of Aquarius at Pisces. This house covers the distance of 
Persia and Turkey in Asia and is the place described in all Bible 
stories as the headquarters for the patriarchs. The Caspian 
Sea is located here which was called the well of Haran. The 
twelve children of Israel were born to Jacob, Rachael, Leah and 
the handmaids frohi this place. The closing or ending of the 
cycle is at the 30th degree east longitude where Pisces begins 
as a new cycle. The flying horse, Pegasus, does not extend into 
Pisces and that is the reason why the back part of the horse is 
cut off. Pegasus represents to the heavens the same as the 
Sphinx of Egypt does to the earth. The Pyramids are located 
at the 30th degree east longitude and have been given ks the 
place where the cycles end. 

It is shown in the stories described in the Bible that all 
cycles begin at the 40th degree east, but the main events of the 
cycle or life of the person described does not begin until the 
30th degree westward was reached. We have observed that the 
last 10 degrees of the age is where destruction of the cycles 
takes place and also where the party described begins 
to rule. From this we conclude that there is 10 degrees allowed 
for the old age and the same 10 degrees are used for the begin- 
ning of the cycle. The new and younger patriarchs of Israel 
became leaders before their forefathers died. From this can 
be seen, that the 10 degrees between the 30th and the 40th de- 
gree is where the change takes place. The city of Jerusalem in 
Palestine is located at the 35th degree east and that is the reason 
why the Ancients said that the Christian age would begin from 
this locality. The last ten degrees of the cycle extend east from 
Egypt to the Arabian desert and this is the location where the 
age previous to the Christian age was killed and from where 
the new or Christian age began. Pegasus is located at 20 de- 
grees in Aquarius at this location. 

The Christian age began 2000 years ago and we know that 
each age consists of thirty degrees and from this we can figure 
that the Christian cycle of time represents the new generation 
of Pisces for the space of Europe. At the time of the termina- 
tion of the old age at the end of the Aquarius cycle, the years 
were divided to be B. C. and A. D. and the cycle changed at 
the 30th degree east. The dividing of time into B. C. means 
before the Christian era and A. D. stands for after date or 
means during the Christian age. This division is calculated 
from the sixth degree of Pisces, being the ecliptic pole or Meri- 



Part VI— Chapter 46. 233 

dian of the heavens. In the year 1921, the ecliptic pole cor- 
responds in location to the 120th degree west, whereas the old 
cycle was calculated from Greenwich which again is from Aries. 

The Christian age began at 40 B. C. with the beginning of 
the Roman power and extends to 70 A. D. This is the space 
recorded for the cycle in Europe covering a period of time for 
2000 years. The nations of Europe from France and England 
to Turkey have been described as the disciples of Christ and 
represent Christianity as an age in the fishermen and Pisces as 
a cycle for the heavens. 

We have described the Zodiacal circuit around the earth, 
its divisions into twelve sections, called houses, and each house 
is described according to degrees on earth, corresponding to a 
similar location in the heavens. The distance for the Christiali 
cycle is described in the same manner but for this age a space 
of 30 degrees longitude is figured to contain the twelve houses 
and in this space the twelve nations of Europe are located. 
The nature and locations of the nations of Europe correspond 
to the nature of the constellations and the houses described 
around the earth. In another chapter, we have given the names 
of the nations and the corresponding names for the houses of the 
Zodiac, the names of the twelve tribes and disciples of Jesus, 
etc., to show who they are and their comparative nature. 

At the termination of all cycles when the earth's polarity 
is changed the cycle or age is killed. The destroying of the age 
takes place during the last seven years of the sideral cycle of 
2000 years. The Bible describes that at the end of the Christian 
age a great destruction is to take place, and gives a detailed 
description of the conditions which would prevail during this 
calamity. The predictions given in the Bible for this destruc- 
tion are being fulfilled in the present world's war. The time, 
place and the nations involved, are correctly described, showing 
that a condition would exist which would produce the war. 

The destruction of the Christian age takes place within 
ten degrees east of Greenwich, which is the location where the 
present war really takes place. The holy mountains for Europe 
are in Switzerland and represent the house of Aquarius which 
is the home or mansion for the planet Uranus. It is a scientific 
fact that Uranus has been passing through the house of Aquarius 
in the heavens during the world's war. Uranus entered Aquarius 
in 1912 and he will not be entirely out of this house before 1920 
and as the change of cycles takes place when Uranus leaves 



234 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Aquarius and enters Pisces, the new cycle will begin at that 
time. The Bible describes that at the end of the Christian age, 
which is illustrated in the life of Jesus as a man on earth and 
as the planet Uranus in the heavens, the earth is to be destroyed. 
The life or age of Jesus, corresponds to the period when our 
solar system passes in the heavens, through the house of Pisces 
representing the period for Europe. At the termination of this 
cycle of 1920 years and at the time when Uranus leaves the 
house of Aquarius, is the end of the age. The last seven years 
of this cycle is the time when the destruction of the age takes 
place, and the time when Uranus and Saturn are in direct op- 
position in the heavens. When Uranus is in the house of 
Aquarius, Saturn must be in Leo, in order to be in opposition to 
Uranus and as this is at the end of the age, Saturn kills Uranus. 
Leo is the house of Judah and corresponds to Germany and as 
Saturn has been in this house during the war, Germany is the 
cause of the war. Uranus was in the 25th degree of Aquarius 
and Saturn was in the 25th degree of Leo in October, 1918, when 
the war terminated, which means that the earthly life of Chris- 
tianity came to an end at that time. 

The three days described in the Bible as years from the 
death of Christ to the passover, representing the passing into 
the new age, are the three years from 1918 to 1921. It is during 
this uncertain period that Uranus is both direct and retrograde 
in motion which is described as the time that Jesus is in the 
grave when the old cycle dies and the American cycle begins. 

We have said that the Christian age begins at 40 degrees 
east and termin'ates at 70 to 80 degrees west. The location for 
the 80 degrees west is on the east coast of the United States. 
The Bible says that in forty days after the death of the Chris- 
tian age, that Christ ascended to heaven and began to rule in 
his spiritual kingdom. This means that the forty days referred 
to, represent the forty degrees across the United States from 
the 80th to the 120th degrees. A description is given that a 
spiritual Christian doctrine will come from the west coast of the 
United States and that Christ will rule his Millenium age from 
his home in the heavens. The cycles were calculated in degrees of 
longitude from 40 degrees east to 80 degrees west, and when 
this principle was applied to the Pacific Coast section it was 
figured in latitude from Mexico to British Columbia. The distance 
in Mexico from the 26th degree to the 33rd degree, corresponds 
to the distance of Europe from Greenwich east to Turkey and 



Part VI— Chapter 46. 235 

that is the reason why Mexico has been translated to correspond 
to the age of Egypt. This distance again corresponds to the 
seven years when the age is killed and is the border distance 
from the Rio Grande at the Gulf of Mexico to the Pacific Ocean. 

The distance of 30 and 40 degrees east of Greenwich has 
been described as the space for the Christian age, but for the 
time of the end, the space was figured up to the 45th degree at 
the Euphrates river. A figure or horoscope was set up for this 
space and the houses of the heavens were applied to the nations 
of Europe. The names of the nations and the corresponding 
houses and tribes of Israel have been given in another 
chapter. The constellations of fixed stars were also applied 
to the nations and when the planets, Uranus, Saturn and Nep- 
tune passed through the different houses of the heavens, the 
conditions produced were applied to the nations. 

The ancients describe four fixed stars as the principal con- 
stellations and these fixed stars have been referred to by nearly 
all astronomers 'as the leading stars of the heavens. They are 
Aldebaren, in Taurus; Regulus, in Leo; Antares, in Scorpio, 
and Fomalhaut, in Aquarius. In the Bible these same stars 
have been described according to the names of the houses they 
were located in, and given the name of the Bull, the Lion, the 
Scorpion, and the Man. The four fixed stars described, repre- 
sent the four leading nations at war at the present time. The 
Bull, and Aldebaren represent England; the Lion and Regulus 
stand for Germany; the Scorpion and Antares for Austria- 
Hungary; the Man and Fomalhaut is representing humanity in 
Switzerland. We have illustrated the location of these houses 
and constellations showing the reason why the ancients located 
them at the four cardinal houses for Europe at the time of the 
end. Anyone familiar with this study can readily see that the 
nature of the four fixed stars is applied to the houses as nations 
in which the stars are located. 

The next point to be considered is the distance of Europe 
as a horoscope for the twelve houses. The twelve nations of 
Europe represent a house of 30 degrees each and the distance 
figured in angles of a given number of degrees shows the rela- 
tion between the different nations. It should be remembered 
that the good angles are the spaces divided by three or triangles 
and that the bad or evil angles are the spaces divided by four 
or the square distances in space. We will give a brief explana- 
tion of what is meant by the nations being in friendly or antag- 



236 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

onistic relations to each other. When two nations are 30, 60 or 
120 degrees apart, they are friendly, but if 45, 90 or 180 de- 
grees apart they are antagonistic to each other. This method 
is called the figuring of aspects of the houses and is called good 
and bad angles. 

The conditions produced within the nations are caused by 
the movements of the planets through the houses and the dif- 
ferent aspects are caused by the nature of the planets in their 
position toward other planets. This can be explained by Saturn, 
who has always been a regular Satan, and when he is in a house 
representing a nation, that nation will act as a devil toward 
others. Saturn was in the house of Germany during the prin- 
cipal part of the war. These principles will be readily seen by 
those who understand this study and it will not be understood 
by others even if it were described in detail. 

We have described that the crucifying of Christ is illus- 
trated in the opposition of Uranus to Saturn which took place 
in October, 1918, and we have also said that the religion of 
the world is to be changed and the Churches destroyed. We will 
now give the reason why the Christian and other Churches are 
to be destroyed and the date when it is to take place. 

It is written that when the sign of the son of man is seen 
in the heavens that it is a sign for the time of the end. The 
planet Uranus represents the son of man and was discovered by 
Sir John Hershel in 1781 A. D., five year after the beginning 
of the time of the end. This is self explanatory and is a sign 
for the time of the end. In the year 1920 Uranus will be in the 
house of Pisces, representing Europe and Italy as a nation, and 
this is the year when Italy and the Church will be ruined. 
Saturn and Neptune are in Leo and Virgo which is located in 
the Pacific Coast States and from this place the destruction of 
the church takes place. The war stopped at the time when 
Saturn and Uranus were in the degree of opposition, so we 
take it for granted that the war on the Church will be over by 
August, 1920, and not before. 

It is written that there will be great suffering and crime in 
Europe from the year 1919 to 1920 and that this year is the 
most important in the history of the world. Peace will be re- 
stored in Europe when the international convention is held in 
Switzerland after the revolution has taken place. The dele- 
gates will not represent the government as in the peace con- 
ference in 1919, but will represent the common people. The 



Part VI — Chapter 47. 



237 



Austria-Hungarian nation will not take part in the meetings 
in Switzerland when these meetings are first held, but later. 
(John 20:24.) We calculate that peace on earth and good will 
to man will begin in 1921 and that all nations will aim to do 
right after this year. 

The conclusion to be reached from the study of the heavens 
and the Bible is, that the law of the Universe has been lost to 
the human race, and is found in the Bible. 




Plate 13 — Precessional Zones. 



Chapter 47. 

time and space in the heavens. 

The twelve houses of the heavens correspond to the twelve 
hours of the clock. The Meridian, in the heavens, is the point 
where the ecliptic crosses the equator and is described to be in 



238 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Pisces and corresponds to the top of the head of man. This 
point is located as twelve o'clock and the house Pisces cor- 
responds to the time between twelve and one o'clock. Astronomi- 
cal charts illustrate the twelve houses to contain two hours each. 

Time is figured from Aries and Greenwich, (the first house 
of the heavens) at one o'clock and calculated from the Meridian 
at twelve o'clock. This illustrates the reason why the mistake 
was made by the astronomers in locating the fixed stars 
and constellations in the houses, as they were figured from 
the Meridian at twelve o'clock and located in the houses from 
one o'clock. That is, observation is taken at England and cal- 
culated for the meridian in Egypt 

The rest of the houses are located in the regular order: 
Taurus, at two o'clock ; Gemini, at three o'clock ; Cancer, at four 
o'clock ; Leo, at five o'clock ; Virgo, at six o'clock ; Libra, at seven 
o'clock; Scorpio, at eight o'clock; Sagitarius, at nine o'clock; 
Capricorn, at ten o'clock ; Aquarius, at eleven o'clock ; and Pisces, 
at twelve o'clock. 

It will be found that there is harmony in all the arrange- 
ment that nature makes, which can be seen by the dividing of 
the heavens and earth, into time and space by the vernal and 
autumnal equinoxes. Time and space have been divided into 
angles of a given number of hours or degrees and in the Bible 
these angles have been called good and bad Angels. When man 
comes to realize that this system of dividing time is made by 
nature, he will not have to strike for shorter or longer hours of 
work. The good angles are formed by the division of the 
heavens into angles based on the multiple of three and the bad 
angles by multiples of four. From this it can readily be seen 
what is meant by the different angles or distances spoken of in 
the measurement of the heavens. The space in the heavens and 
the distance around the earth is figured by the same method as 
the hours of the clock. 

We have given a description of the earth, that it was laid 
out in a space of twelve houses and that each house counted as 
thirty degrees. This is a very simple arrangement as it means 
the same to the earth as if we were to arrange the twelve hours 
of the clock and call them houses. We will again give a gen- 
eral outline of what part of the earth corresponds to the time 
given by the clock. The Bible describes a circle around the 
earth where this calculation was made and this is at 36 degrees 
north latitude, which corresponds to the Mediterranean Sea in 



Part VI— ^Chapter 47. 239 

Europe, passing Thibet in Asia, and the Mason and Dixon line 
in the United States. In this line or circuit around the earth, we 
place the twelve hours of the clock and call them houses. Each 
one of these houses has 30 degrees which takes the place of 
minutes of the clock. 

The beginning of time is at one o'clock which is called the 
Greenwich degree of longitude. This line crosses Spain, Eng- 
land and France and from this point distance is counted east 
and west. We will first explain that the distance of Europe east 
of England consists of one hour of 30 degrees and if we look on 
an Atlas of the world, we find that 30 degrees east strikes at 
Egypt where the Pyramids are located. This distance corre- 
sponds to the time between twelve o'clock and one o'clock and 
has been called Pisces, the fishes. The time is changed at twelve 
o'clock and corresponds to when the sun in the heavens passes 
the point where it changes the seasons of the year and is called 
the vernal equinox. From this it will be seen that the time of 
twelve o'clock corresponds to Egypt and is the place for both 
the ending and beginning of time and is the meridian. 

The Atlantic Ocean, from England to the United States, 
contains about 70 degrees which is over two hours and this 
space is covered by the two houses of Aries and Taurus. It 
should be remembered that each house consists of 30 degrees 
and if we add the two houses of Gemini and Cancer, it brings 
us to the 120th degree west longitude, at the mountains on the 
Pacific Coast. It is now four o'clock and the end of the first 
cycle of time. West from the Pacific Coast States are the houses 
of Leo, Virgo, Libra and Scorpio and all four of these houses 
lie in the Pacific Ocean. The Bible describes this distance as 
the home of the Dragon where all the bad elements of the 
heavens are located. In the middle of the Pacific Ocean is the 
location on the earth opposite to the degree described as Green- 
wich in England and the Meridian in Egypt. These are located 
as six and seven o'clock at 150 degrees and 180 degrees west. 
This makes eight houses, or 240 degrees west from England and 
four houses or 120 degrees east from England. We are now at 
120 degrees on the east coast of China and the time is nine 
o'clock in the house Sagitarius. This is the place described in 
the Book of Daniel as the beginning of the time of the end and 
where Nebuchadnezzar began to rule. The house of Sagitarius 
is frolm the east coast of China to Thibet in the Himalaya Moun- 
tains. The next 30 degrees is from Thibet at 90 degrees east. 



240 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

to Persia at 60 degrees in the house of Capricorn at ten o'clock. 
The ihird house of the cycle is Aquarius at eleven o'clock from 
Persia at 60 degrees, to Egypt at 30 degrees. If we figure in 
degrees from Greenwich west, the east coast of China would be 
240^ degrees, Thibet 270, Persia 300, and Egypt 330 degrees 
west. We have now completed the circuit back to Egypt which 
is at twelve o'clock where Pisces begins. From this it will be 
seen that Aquarius is the house between eleven and twelve 
o'clock and is the end of all time. 

For the past 1920 years the center of population and civili- 
zation have been west of Egypt. The time previous to the 
Christian era up to 2000 B. C, the earth's center was east from 
Egypt to the east coast of China. In the time previous to 4000 
B. C, the center was in the United States. ^ This is the period 
described in the Bible as the Garden of Eden age and as far back 
as Bible history goes. The beginning of time is for the United 
States west from Greenwich, and the ending of time is the de- 
struction of the Christian age east of Greenwich. This com- 
pletes the age and illustrates what is meant by time and space. 

The books of the New Testament describe time as being 
divided into thirty-two years each and the spiritual life of 
Christianity is described to represent the Pacific Coast States. 
In all the books in the New Testament from Matthew to The 
Acts, the conditions on the Pacific Coast and the years given for 
that portion of the country, represent degrees of latitude; 
which means that when events are described to take place in 
a given year, it is the place in degrees of latitude which is 
described. 

The life story of Christ represents the space of Europe as 
an age, and includes Mexico as far north as the 32nd degree 30 
minutes latitude; and this space in all cycles has been called 
Egypt or Europe. Christ, as a cycle of time, died when at the 
32nd degree 30 minutes latitude, or as a man in his thirty-third 
year; which means that the cycle for Europe including Mexico, 
ends at the 32nd degree 30 minutes latitude when the new age 
begins at the Mexican borders of the United States as the spirit- 
ual life of Christ. 

This is best described from the book of St. Luke, where the 
first two chapters describe the time up to 8 A. D., which means 
the 8 degrees east of Greenwich, the location of the Alps Moun- 
tains and corresponds to 24 degrees latitude. Chapter 3 begins 
at 26 A. D., meaning the 26th degree north latitude, in Mexico. 



Part VI— Chapter 47. 241 

The fourth Chapter of St. Luke ends at 31 A. D., which makes- 
the four degrees called 4 B. C, for the beginning of all cycles of 
time and proves that it is the degrees referred to. In the cycle 
for two thousand years ago, Egypt was used as the dividmg line 
and the degrees north of the 30th degree in Palestine illustrated 
the same to Egypt as Mexico is to the Pacific Coast cycle. 

The life of Christ given in the New Testament contains seven 
years, beginning at 26 A. D. and ending at 33 A. D., which are 
the seven years when Uranus is in Aquarius. The years from 
26 to 33 A. D. represent Europe and Mexico, and from these de- 
grees, as years, begins the Pacific Coast Cycle. 

The years given as the Julian Calendar age are figured in. 
cycles of 360 degrees longitude calculated west, and the year 1920 
corresponds to 120 degrees west from Greenwich. The years, 
given from 26 A. D. in the New Testament are in degrees of 
latitude for the Pacific Coast cycle and when the Christian age 
dies at the age of 32 degrees 30 minutes, it is the beginning of 
a New Age with the boundary line at the Mexican borders. The 
three days after Christ died is represented in the three degrees 
from San Diego to Mt. Whitney, and when the age reaches the 
36th degree, it corresponds to the year 1920. From this it will 
be seen that the 36th degree latitude and the 120th degree longi- 
tude correspond to the year 1920. 

The book of Acts gives the locations of the country and 
events on the coast and the description given is perfect. The 
first seven chapters describe the time up to 1919; the ending of 
the old age. Chapter 8 describes Southern California at 34 
A. D. and also describes what the conditions are on the coast in 
this year. Chapter 9 describes the 35th and the 37th degrees, 
as 35 and 37 A. D., and the 10th Chapter includes as far north 
as the Shasta Mountains at 41 A. D., or 41 degrees north. The 
description for Oregon begins at Chapter 11:22, ending at the 
Chapter 13. The State of Washington is described in Chapter 
14. In Chapter 15 :2 begins the description of British Columbia, 
showing the change of nationality ; and the rest of the Chapters 
from the 16th to the 28th describe the country extending to the 
63rd degree north latitude. The names of the cities on the 
coast are given where the location is referred to in years. 

The Christian age came to an end in 1918 when Christ was 
32 years of age and the next two or three years are described 
as very uncertain in events. The year 34 A. D. corresponds to 
1919 of the present age and this is figured the same as all other 



242 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

years given in the Bible. Divide 1919 by 360, v^hich equals five 
circuits around the earth and leave 119 degrees (years) v^est 
from Greenwich. The 120th degree longitude, west is at the 
begiiming of the New Age in the Pacific Coast States and cor- 
responds to 1920 A. D. as a year. From this, alone, can be seen 
that the new cycle of time is for the Pacific Coast and that the 
description given in the Bible for the years after 34 is for the 
happenings there. 

It is not advisable to explain the prophecies for the New 
Age as it may be considered as premature propaganda for the 
Millenium. We are, at the present time, living at the end of the 
time of the end, and the events described in the Bible will 
shortly come to pass in the Pacific Coast States. 

Chapter 48. 
the constellations. 

The Bible says that the heavens are divided into three div- 
isions, and are illustrated as three separate heavens within the 
unit of the one great universal heaven. The greatest space of 
the heavens are called the 'Terrestrial Heavens" and within 
this space is the ** Celestial Heavens." The third or lowest 
heaven consists of the Zodiac of our solar system. The univer- 
sal law governing the conditions in the heavens is operated on 
the same principles as the law controlling the Moon's circuit 
around the earth and the earth and planets' relations to the sun 
in the sun's travels around the ecliptic within the Zodiac. 

The dividing of the great heavens into three parts illus- 
trates the principle of the trinity of God in the heavens ; being 
divided into three parts and yet remaining as one eternal power. 
The trinity of God as a unit of one in the heavens is manifest in 
all the minor divisions of the entire creative universe. The 
divisions of the unit of one into three parts is demonstrated in 
the three planets of Uranus, Neptune, and Saturn. The law or 
power of God has been illustrated in the influence as produced 
by these planets and is called the word of God. From this can 
be seen, that there is a law in the universe and in the operation 
of this law, a condition is produced which is called the influence 
of the Sun and planets, as the word of God. 

The law of the universe has been very carefully written in 
the Bible and described in the stories as pictured there. It is 
not the astrological aspects or influence of the planets which is 



Part VI— Chapter 48. 243 

explained, but it is the law of God as explained in the stories 
illustrated by the planets. We have been ignorant of this law 
but at the beginning of all new cycles of time, God reveals his 
will to man so that the human race will know his will and live 
.accordingly. 

We will describe some of the ruling principles of the celes- 
tial heavens and what the reasons are for the conditions pro- 
duced, which are spoken of in the Bible. In the book of Job, 
Chapter 38: 31 to 33, a reference is made to the celestial 
heavens as' a "God given law." 

The stars are mostly suns, the nearest of them at a dis- 
tance from us more than 500,000 times our distance from the 
^un, are of a size we cannot estimate, but are believed to be 
300 times larger than the earth ; they are of unequal brightness, 
and are, according to this standard, classified as of the first, 
second, down to the sixth magnitude ; those visible to the naked 
eye include stars from the first to the sixth magnitude; and 
number 3,000, while 20,000,000 are visible by the telescope; of 
these in the Milky Way alone there are 18,000,000 ; they are dis- 
tinguished by their colors as well as their brightness, being 
white, orange, red, green, and blue, according to their tempera- 
ture and composition ; they have from ancient date been grouped 
into constellations of the northern and southern hemispheres 
and of the Zodiac. 

The planets, unlike the sun, are all dark bodies, having no 
light of their own, and are seen and shine only by the light they 
receive from the sun. Those visible to the unaided eye are 
Mercury (rarely), Venus, Mars, Jupiter, Saturn and Uranus, 
but not Neptune, and these are readily distinguished by their 
clear steady light, so different from the twinkling light of the 
fixed stars. Six of the planets have satellites or moons revolv- 
ing around them in the same manner that the planets do around 
the sun, and they serve to light their respective planets at 
night in the same manner that our moon gives light to the earth. 

Our earth has but one satellite, the familiar Moon, which 
is 238,000 miles distant from us. It is 2160 miles in diameter 
and circles around the earth once in 28 days. 

The twelve divisions of the Zodiac consist of groups of 
stars, lying within 8 degrees on either side of the celestial 
ecliptic ; which is the great circle where the sun appears to move 
in the heavens, and corresponds to the line around the earth as 
the course of the moon. 



244 



Key to Bible and Heaven. 



The fixed stars, or groups of stars and the ecliptic circuit 
have been illustrated in Plate No. 2. The nature of the illus- 




Plate No. 14 — Polar Constellations. 

tration indicates the nature of the influence which the stars 
produce. 



Part VI— ^Chapter 48. 



245 



The fixed stars do not produce any influence on the earth, 
except at the beginning and ending of the cycles, when polarity 




Plate No. 15 — Polar Constellations. 

is changed, and when the planets Uranus, Saturn and Neptune 
pass from one house, or mansion, to another, and are in aspect 



246 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

to each other and to the fixed stars. The length of time for 
these aspects is 3 degrees. 

The distance or space, of the heavens is figured in degrees 
and calculated on and from the ecliptic. Longitude is the dis- 
tance in the Zodiac east and west of Pisces degree, measured 
on the ecliptic. Latitude is the distance as measured north and 
souih of the equator. Declination is not considered in Bible 
study. Right ascension (R. A.) is the correct time for a given 
place calculated from Pisces. 

The fixed stars are classified in the order written and the 
influence or condition produced by the stars are explained ac- 
cording to the method as used by the ancients. The names of 
the stars are from Arabian, Babylonian and Greek records, 
some of the expressions used are literal translations of the 
indication as used by the ancients. The descriptions and calcu- 
lations given in the Bible are according to the location and 
nature of the stars as here given. 

We have described that there are five circuits or belts of 
stars and that these constellations encircle the heavens. There 
is one belt of stars located south of the Zodiac and three north 
of the Zodiac. The first belt at the pole contains three constel- 
lations; the second belt, three and the others contain twelve 
constellations each. It is apparent that each belt contains eigh- 
teen degrees ; five times eighteen equals ninety, which is the dis- 
tance from the pole to the equator. These five belts have been 
applied to the earth and divided by three in the usual way into 
five belts of six degrees each; the ecliptic at the 36th degree 
represents the twelve houses of the Zodiac. From this it will 
be seen that the distance from the pole to the equator has been 
reduced from 90 degrees to 30 degrees in width and is calculated 
from the 24th degree to the 54th degree north latitude. 

The heavens and the earth are described to contain twenty- 
four degrees in width, termed in the Bible, *'the twenty-four 
elders," and is the temperate zone of the earth today, varying 
from the 24th to the 54th degree. 

We have described the locations of the twelve houses of the 
Zodiac in 30-degree distances around the earth and the ecliptic 
circuit as pictured in the heavens should be applied to the 
houses. The travels of the patriarchs are described in the 
movements of the planets, according to the location of the 
houses on the ecliptic. 

It is apparent that the heavens containing the three con- 



Part VI — Cfiapier 48. 



247 



stellations of Ursa Minor, Cepheus and Camelo Pardalis, which 
are located nearest to the pole, were figured as pole stars for 




Plate 16 — Polar Constellations. 

two thousand years each. The six constellations of Ursa Minor, 
Draco, Cepheus, Cassiopeia, Camelo Pardalis and Ursa Major 



248 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

were calculated as pole stars in one thousand-year cycles. The 
twelve constellations located north of the Zodiac from Andro- 
meda to Pegasus represent two thousand years each, constitut- 
ing the 24,000-year cycle. The twelve houses of the Zodiac con- 
tain 2,160 years each, which equal the 25,920 years as a complete 
cycle of space for the earth. 

The ancient Bible writers illustrated the law of the universe 
by picturing the constellations and described the different parts 
of the heavens as living beings. The constellations were illus- 
trated to contain a given number of degrees and to rule or 
produce an influence on the earth for a given length of time. We 
have copied some of these charts and will explain the system 
used in describing events. The recorded history given in the 
Bible is for 6,000 years and is described as the six days of cre- 
ation constituting a complete cycle for the earth. The 6,000- 
year cycle was divided into six 1,000-year cycles, which was 
again subdivided into many minor cycles. 

The meridian of the earth in the year 1920, taken at the 
120th degree west longitude, will correspond to the meridian of 
the heavens taken at 150 degrees in the constellation Sextans. 
At this time the meridian of the heavens and earth will cor- 
respond to the very degree of the poles in the heavens and on 
earth. The crossing or passing of this degree is called the pass- 
over and is the changing of the polarity of the Universe. When 
this change takes place, the old heavens and earth are destroyed 
and it is the beginning of time for the new heaven and earth. 
We have learned that previous to the time, when the polarity is 
changed that seven years of famine, disaster and pestilence, 
caused by the elements of nature, takes place on this earth. The 
location of this disaster takes place in the degrees on earth cor- 
responding to the location of the pole star in the heavens for the 
age. 

Near the pole is pictured the three constellations of Ce- 
pheus, Camelo Pardalis and Ursa Minor and these three repre- 
sent the Celestial heavens. The 6,000 years of Creation are 
represented in the three constellations which contain 2,000 years 
each as a cycle of time. It takes 6,000 years for our solar sys- 
tem to m^ake one-fourth of a revolution of the Celestial heavens 
and during this period the three constellations are figured as 
pole stars for our earth. From this it will be seen that there 
are three pole stars in the celestial heavens and that each con- 
stellation remains as a pole star for 2,000 years. At the present 



Part VI— Chapter 48. 249 

time the pole star is the star Polaris in the constellation Ursa 
Minor. 

In the year 1920 the earth's meridian position to the Celes- 
tial pole is on the very degree of the pole and in the year 2,000 
A. D. the earth's pole will be on the degree of the pole star 
Polaris. At the time when the north pole of the earth is on the 
corresponding degree of the poles in the Celestial and Terres- 
trial heavens, the change in the cycles of time takes place. This 
is called the passover or the end of the world and the beginning 
of a new heaven and earth. From this it will be seen that the 
pole represents the Terrestrial heavens, the three constellations 
represent the Celestial heavens and that the other constellations 
and the Zodiac represent our solar system and the earth. 

The location of the houses and constellations in the heavens 
are calculated from the ecliptic circle, and the conditions illus- 
trated in the constellations are literally applied to the earth. 
This is best illustrated in the constellation of Cassiopeia and 
Andromeda which are located north of Pisces and represent the 
distasce of Europe from Egypt to France. Pisces is the ruling 
house and Italy has been described as representing this house 
and the Roman Empire as a power illustrated as two fishes. 
The distance of Pisces begins at 30 degrees from Greenwich and 
Aries, where the Triangle is located and includes Persius. The 
rest of the houses contain 30 degrees each, making 360 degrees 
in all. 

Within the great constellations are located what is known 
as fixed stars and the location of these stars are calculated 
from the first degree of Pisces. This distance is called Right 
Ascension and is figured on the ecliptic westward in the heavens 
within the 360-degree radius. From this it will be seen 
that the name of right ascension in the heavens is the same as 
degrees of longitude when applied to a similar circuit on the 
earth. The fixed stars are described to be located at a given 
degree of R. A. or longitude west and correspondingly located in 
the houses. After having located the constellations and fixed 
stars in the heavens they were then located on the earth as they 
were in the heavens. 

The Bible describes the great constellations as the conti- 
nents and the fixed stars as the nations; which means that the 
continents are the parents of the nations and all are the chil- 
dren of mother earth. In the stories about the patriarchs and 
the children of Israel, the Bible illustrates, that when they were 



250 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Sit a given place on the earth, a certain condition prevailed. The 
place described is in degrees of longitude and the conditions pro- 
duced at the place are in the nature of the place, planets and 
stars. The age of the patriarchs is in degrees and the words 
spoken by them is the influence which the planets, stars and con- 
stellations produced on the earth. The influence or conditions 
produced on the earth by the constellations, fixed stars, sun and 
planets are called the words or laws of God. 

It is described in the Bible that ''a day is as a year and a 
year as a thousand years with the Lord," and this states iii 
specific terms what a cycle of time consists of. The time re- 
ferred to is calculated from the travels or circuits of the earth 
and Uranus around the sun in cycles. It is ordinarily termed 
that the sun moves one degree per day through the twelve 
houses of the heavens. It is, however, the motion of the earth 
in its orbit around the sun, which is meant. The earth travels 
in the twelve houses around the sun at the rate of one degree 
per day; which makes the 360 degrees or days to a complete 
cycle ; making ''one day as a year with the Lord." Uranus makes 
one revolution of the twelve houses around the sun in one 
thousand years (12 X 84 — 1008) and these years as degrees are 
as **a thousand years with the Lord." The system of dividing 
the heavens into sideral time and space is in the well-known 
method called precession of the equinoxes. By this method the 
cycles of the heavens are divided into the four seasons of the 
year and the twelve months. 

The Milky Way is the ecliptic path or highway of the 
heavens and corresponds to the ecliptic circuit of the sun and 
earth. It begins with the twelfth degree in Casiopeia which 
corresponds to the 12th degree of Pisces and contains twelve 
houses. The nature and shape of the Milky Way is similar to 
the Zodiac, the ecliptic circle around the earth and man as a 
universe. The creative and other elements of the heavens are 
correspondingly located in the Milky Way and constellations, as 
it is locatd in the Zodiac and in man. 

Astronomers' attention is called to the constellations located 
near Sagitary and Scutum Sobieskii; they will find that the 
black space named ''Coal Sack" in this region represents the 
creative elements of the Milky Way. And that the "Shooting 
Stars" coming from this part of the heavens, usually in Novem- 
ber, are the creative or birth-giving elements making new 
worlds. Anyone familiar with this study will readily see that 



Part VI— Chapter 48. 251 

the universal law of God is similarly applied to the Milky Way, 
as it is to the earth and man. We should remember that '*man 
is made in the image of God" and that ''as it is in the heavens 
so is it on earth;" from which we can reason that the Milky 
Way, solar system, planets, earth and man are made in the 
image of God as a universe. 

'We believe that the following method can be applied in cal- 
culating the great distances in the heavens and that it will prove 
to be scientifically correct. The same method is used as in cal- 
culating the earth's cycle on the ecliptic. 

The celestial heavens contain 25,920,000 degrees as miles, 
which is divided into three cycles of 864,000 each. This cycle of 
864,000 is again divided by twelve and equals 72,000 miles for 
each degree. The cycle of 25,920,000 is also divided into six 
parts containing 432,000 degrees each, which is again subdivided 
into three parts containing 144,000 each. The cycle of 25,920,- 
000 is divided into twelve parts of 2,160,000 each. 

Time and space in the heavens are calculated on the ecliptic 
circle from the pole of the heavens and called the meridian. This 
can best be explained by our earth as a globe, the center for the 
earth's circle being the North Pole. In the Celestial heavens 
the pole star in Ursa Minor is figured as the Polaris for this 
heaven and from this point all time and space on this earth is 
measured. From this it will be seen that all space is figured 
from the center of one circuit to the center of the other circuits. 
In other words, the north pole is the center from which to cal- 
culate for the earth, and the center of the path or ecliptic of the 
twelve houses for the earth, is the sun. The celestial heavens 
make a circuit of the terrestrial heavens and the center of each 
heaven is the pole. The observation or measurement of the dif- 
ferent distances from pole to pole in the heavens were figured 
in degrees and is called angles. 

There are 6,000 years or degrees at the poles, each containing 
72 years, making 432,000 years, which are divided into the three 
cycles. The 432,000 divided by three equals 144,000 years, 
which were described in the Bible as the population of the new 
heavens and earth. Rev. Chapt. 7:4. 

The grouping of the planets in the western heavens in 
December, 1919, is a peculiar arrangement, which takes place 
only in every 2000 years. Astronomers' attention is called to 
the position of the six planets within 30 degrees of a perfect 
opposition to Uranus and all in square to the Earth. There is 



252 Key to Bihile and Heaven. 

going to take place some unexplainable phenomena and we ven- 
ture to say that the sun will be the most interesting to observe. 
The ecliptic belt of the sun is where the sun spots are located 
and in the changing of its polarity there should be a sunspot 
visible of unusual magnitude. These sun spots should be visible 
between November, 1919, and December, 1920. If earthquakes 
take place during this period it will affect the entire earth and 
do a great deal of damage. It is our candid opinion that some 
natural disturbance will take place during this year, which will 
change the opinion of many regarding the operation of God's 
Laws. 

Chapter 49. 
astronomy. 

The chang^^g of cycles of time, which is described as the 
passover, is the changing of polarity for the earth, sun and 
the heavens. The cycles of time described in the Bible consists 
of 6,000 years which is the time required for our solar system 
to change pole stars. In the celestial heavens a cycle of time 
consists of 6,000 years which is an ecliptic cycle by precession, 
from one pole star to another. 

The North Star, Polaris, is at the present time pole star, 
but this star is not located at the very degree of the pole. The 
polarity is changed in the year 1920 when the celestial pole will 
be one degree distant from the pole star and at this time the 
earth and sun's polarity will be on the very degree of the pole. 
When the earth and solar system passes the degree of the pole 
it is called the passover, when the old heavens and earth are 
destroyed and a new cycle begins. 

The time required for this passover is 216 years, divided 
into three periods of 72 years each. When the earth's polarity 
gets within two degrees from the celestial pole the earth and 
all life on earth is influenced and a peculiar condition is pro- 
duced. We have described elsewhere the effect of the changing 
of polarity in detail, which is i)est shown by the history of the 
United States. 

The distance described as the universal pole contains three 
degrees, which is divided first in three great divisions of one 
degree each, and subdivided into six divisions of one-half degree 
each. The three degrees are also divided so that two degrees 
are calculated as one cycle and that the second cycle contains 



Part VI — Chapter 49. 



25a 



one degree. From this it will be seen that the pole consists of 
3 degrees of 72 years each and that 144 years represent one 




Plate No. 17 — Constellations. 

cycle as a period of time and also that the second division con- 
tains 72 years. At the time of the changing from the 144th to 



254 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

the 145Lh year, which is between the second and third degree, the 
polarity is changed, and at this degree is the exact location of 
the pole for the celestial heavens. The earth, sun and the entire 
celestial heavens are at the present time changing polarity and 
when the sun is in the 6th degree of Sagitarius in November, 
1920, is the time of the change. 

A condition is produced by the changing of polarity which 
will last for 72 years beginning in 1921 and terminating in 1992. 
This influence or condition which is produced on earth and the 
time required is self explanatory. The time for the beginning 
of the change is 144 years previous to 1920 which is 1776 A. D. 
The condition then produced was the making of the United 
States as a new center for the earth's population. The condition 
produced after 1921 is termed the Millenium, age v^hich is de- 
scribed in another chapter. 

The description given in the Bible regarding the travels of 
the children of Israel and in the ages which were given in lati- 
tude and longitude, are the description of a given location on 
the earth. It describes the ecliptic circuits of the sun, moon, 
and planets in the precessions of the heavens. The given dis- 
tances are calculated by the precession of the sun and moon in 
cycles of a given number of degrees and as the precession of all 
the stars and planets takes place at the same time, the calcula- 
tions made on the earth will correspond to the space in the 
heavens. 

The ecliptic circuit is located on the earth as it is in the 
heavens and extends one-half degree north and south of the 
Equator, which again corresponds to the location of the hori- 
zon. From this it will be seen, that the sun, moon and each of 
the stars and planets have ecliptic circuits and that it is simi- 
larly located in all parts of the heavens as it is on the earth. 

The conditions produced which is described in the travels 
of the children of Israel around the earth are the conditions 
produced by the precession of the equinoxes, when the sun and 
planets are correspondingly located in the heavens as the chil- 
dren of Israel were at the time described on the earth. 

It is a known fact that by the precession of the equinoxes, 
the seasons of the year are produced and it will now become a 
proven scientific fact, that when the earth and the rest of the 
elements of the heavens change polarity that a given condition 
is produced, which man has no more control over than he has 
in the changing of the equinoctial seasons. 



Part VI — Chapter 49. 



255 



The ecliptic circuit is known as the path of the sun in the 
heavens and also as the path of the moon around the earth. 




Plate No. 18 — Constellations. 
On Saturn it is located where Saturn's rings appear to be and 



256 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

on the sun it is where the sun-spots are located, which also en- 
circles the sun. 

The circumference and diameter of all the heavenly bodies 
correspond and the same system of measurement can be applied 
to the sun, moon and the planets as is used for the earth. All 
measurements for space and dimensions are to be calculated 
on and from the ecliptic circuits of any of the heavenly bodies, 
as well as on the circuit of the sun. 

There is no difference between the present astronomical 
method and that described in the Bible, astronomers calculate 
from the equator as a center and the Bible gives all dimensions 
from the ecliptic circle. 

It is very difficult for us to obtain the exact degree for the 
different measurement of the heavens, sun and planets and if 
we have made mistakes it should not be criticised, as it is in 
the principle involved and in the method employed we are inter- 
ested and not in the exact degrees, but we believe we are correct 
in all instances. 

The distance of the solar circuit is divided into 12 signs of 
30 degrees each making 360 degrees, which contain 72 miles each 
and equal 25,920 miles as a complete cycle. One-third of this 
distance contains 8,640 degrees and one-twelfth equals 2,160 
degrees. 

The sun's daily rotation is 25 degrees 92 minutes calculated 
on the sun's ecliptic. The sun rotates on its axis similar to the 
spinning motion of the earth and this peculiar action produces 
what is known as the short and long ascensions in the signs of 
the Zodiac. 

The sun's diameter is 32 minutes which consists of 864,000 
miles and three times its diameter is its circumference, which is 
2,592,000 miles. The sun's diameter of 864,000 miles is divided 
into 12 signs of 72,000 miles each. 

The sun's diameter 32 minutes is multiplied by 72 degrees 
and equals 2304 degrees as years and corresponds to the ages 
of the patriarchs given in the Bible. This distance is calculated 
for a 40-degree cycle, as follows: The sun's diameter of 32 
minutes X 3 equals 96 degrees, which we will make into a space 
of 30 degrees X 96 degrees, giving 2,880 miles or 40 degrees of 
72 years each. 

The sun's diameter of 32 minutes X 60 minutes equals 1920 
degrees as years. These dimensions represent a cycle of time, 
which can be understood by all. The age of Jesus as a man was 



Part Vl—Chavter 49. 257 

32 years and the cycle for the Christian age contains 1920 
years and is self explanatory. 

The solar precession of the equinoxes consists of 72 years 
and 14 precessions makes 1008 years, this was termed a com- 
plete cycle and called 14 generations in the Bible. This cycle 
corresponds to the circuit of Uranus around the sun, which 
was described in the stories of the pariarchs as an age. 

The sun, moon, and earth's cycles consist of 25,920 degrees, 
of 60 minutes each, which equals 432,000, that is, the celestial 
lieavens contain 60 minutes X 72 degrees which equals 432,000,^ 
which is again divided by three and equals 144,000, and spoken 
of in the Book of Revelation as the population for the earth at 
the beginning of the new age. 

The earth's circumference at the ecliptic is 25,920 miles 
and the earth's diameter is one-third of this distance or 8,640 
miles. The moon's diameter is one-twelfth of the earth's cir- 
cumference and equals 2,160 miles. The moon's circumference 
is three times its diameter at the ecliptic and contains 6,480 
miles, divided in 90-degree cycles of 72 degrees each. 

'Saturn and the moon's time and space correspond, that is^ 
the moon's measurement is applied to Saturn and multiplied 
100 times. Saturn's diameter is 72,000 miles multiplied by three 
and equals 216,000 miles which are the dimensions of Saturn. 

The precessions of the equinoxes, in seven-year cycles, for 
the moon also corresponds to the precession of Saturn, Neptune 
and Uranus. The precession of Saturn is calculated in 90- 
degree, Uranus in 30-degree and Neptune in 15-degree cycles. 

The distance from the sun to the earth is 90,000,000 miles 
calculated from and to the ecliptic circuits and this distance cor- 
responds to the space from the poles to the equator, and also 
from the meridian to the horizon. 

In all the books of the Bible a description is given of strife 
and contention between two factions or elements, it is between 
the Jews and Gentiles and the Romans against the Christians. 
These contending elements consist of the twelve tribes of Israel, 
which were divided into the seven tribes of Israel and the five 
tribes of Judah. We find that the earth's ecliptic circuit has been 
divided into fourteen divisions of 72 degrees each, making 
1008 degrees to a complete cycle. The seven tribes of Israel 
represent part of this circuit as a cycle of time, which were 
divided into the fourteen generations calculated by the preces- 
sions of the ecliptic. The earth has also been divided into five 



258 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

divisions located in opposite position and calculated in latitude. 
These five contain 72 degrees each, making 360 degrees to the 
cycle and the five distances of latitude represent the five tribes 
of Judah. From this we can see that the seven tribes represent 
the ecliptic circle in longitude of 504 degrees and that the dis- 
tance calculated in opposition, represents latitude. The cycles 
of time are calculated by the precession in degrees and we also 
find that at the end of a given age that the children of Israel 
were numbered, when a conflict takes place and the population 
was destroyed. This is self explanatory and means, that at the 
end of a cycle in degrees of longitude a contention is encountered 
in the degrees of latitude. These distances v/ere calculated in 
solar or sideral time in given number of degrees and the time, 
^pace and place were described to be located on earth as it were 
in the heavens. From this we can see that a cycle of time con- 
sists of 7 X 72 degrees or 504 degrees as years, which are cal- 
vculated in longitude and that the contending degrees of latitude 
at the end of this ecliptic cycle killed the population before the 
new age began. 

The meridian is calculated from Pisces and the North 
meridian is at Virgo. The ecliptic extends from Sagitarius 
to Gemini. The poles are located in 90-degree distances from 
the equator. The constellations of Aries and Libra are Polar 
signs and Capricorn and Cancer are Equatorial signs. Capri- 
corn south and Cancer north which makes Sagitarius on the 
eastern and Gemini on the western horizon with the meridian 
in Pisces. This makes it very clear that astronomers have made 
a scientific error in calculating the horizon for the equator and 
the meridian for the poles. 

There are two circles or belts of 24 degrees each extending 
from the poles and the equator. These polar belts have been 
called the Arctic circles and the equatorial belt, the Tropical 
circles of Cancer and Capricorn. The poles are at 90 degrees and 
24 degrees distance from the poles gives the location of the 
Arctic circles at the 66th degree, that is, the south Arctic 
circle extends from 6 degrees of Pisces to 24 degrees in Aries 
with Aries 1 degree at the pole. The Arctic circle extends from 
Virgo 6 degrees to Libra 24 degrees with Libra 1 degree at the 
pole. The equatorial or tropical belt extends 24 degrees north 
and south of the equator. The 24 degrees located north of the 
equator is called the tropic of Cancer which extends to 24 de- 
grees of Cancer in the west and 6 degrees of Sagitarius on the 



Part VI — Chapter 49. 



259 



east. The 24 degrees south of the equator is called the tropic 
of C^nricorn which extends to the 6 degrees of Gemini in the 




i^LATE No. 19 — Constellations. 
west and 24 degrees of Capricorn on the east. The equator is 
located at the first degree of Cancer and Capricorn. 



260 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

The location of these zones represent the extent of the 
earth's rotary motion, giving the exact degree for the sun's 
position north and south of the equator and thereby locating the 
ecliptic circle. 

We have described that there are belts or zones at the 
equator and at the poles extending 24 degrees in a circuit. We 
v^ill next describe two other very important belts which en- 
circle the earth from north to south and east to west. The belt 
from north to south is the meridian zone of 18 degrees in width 
encircling the earth and the heavens. It extends from 24 de- 
grees Aquarius to 12 degrees Pisces in the south and in the north 
from 24 degrees Leo to 12 degrees Virgo. It means that the 
meridian path contains 18 degrees in width as a circuit around 
the earth. The other circuit is the ecliptic circle of 18 degrees 
in width encircling the earth east to west. It extends from 24 
degrees Scorpio to 12 degrees Sagitarius in the east and in the 
west from 24 degrees Taurus to 12 degrees Gemini. This cir- 
circuit means that the ecliptic belt consists of 18 degrees in 
width encircling the earth. These belts are divided into three 
divisions of 6 degrees each, with the 6 degrees center described 
at the meridian and ecliptic. The meridian belt and the ecliptic 
circle forms a cross and corresponds to degrees of longitude and 
latitude, which were described as the tree of life and the tree of 
knowledge in the Bible and this is the cross all cycles or ages are 
crucified on. The extent of the ecliptic circle across the United 
States is 18 degrees, from Mexico to Canada. The 36-degree 
dividing line is the Mason and Dixon line and the equator of the 
earth at 30 degrees latitude is represented at the Mississippi 
river, and New Orleans, Louisiana. 

We will briefly describe the ecliptic circle of the earth and 
the method of calculating the precession of the equinoxes in 90- 
degree cycles. The meridian is a circle passing from north to 
south directly overhead at 12 o'clock noon and corresponds to 
degree of longitude. The horizon is the dividing point between 
two elevations and is the place on earth where the sun strikes 
the dividing degree between the northern and southern hemis- 
phere. A belt or circuit around the earth located at this degree 
is called the ecliptic circle. 

A cycle or age is calculated from the horizon in the east to 
the horizon in the west, and the center of the meridian directly 
overhead is called the Zenith. The length of time constituting 
an age is calculated in degrees of longitude and latitude meas- 



Part Vl^Chapter 49. 261 

ured by the system known as the precession of the equinoxes. 
A complete age is calculated in four 90-degree distances from 
the place on earth where the sun's ray strikes the eastern 
horizon. 

We have made the statement that the precession of the 
equinoxes are calculated from and on the ecliptic circle and not 
from the equator or the poles. We will now give the exact 
degree for the meridian and the horizon to prove that these 
statements are correct. In the first place the distinction should 
be made that there are four places to make calculations from. 
It is from the meridian, the poles, equator and the horizon. The 
method used at the present time is to calculate from the poles 
and the equator and the consequence is that fractions of years 
and days have to be used. 

We have described a belt around the earth and called it the 
ecliptic belt and shown from the description given in the Bible 
that this belt was located at the 36th degree north latitude. We 
will now show that it was the ecliptic circle representing the 
horizon which was described at this degree on earth. 

The degrees of latitude are calculated in 90-degree dis- 
tances north and south of the equator and in order to get the 
horizon we must know how far north and south of the equator 
it is located. We have learned from the Bible that the ecliptic 
circle is located 36 degrees north of the equator and that 36 
degrees on earth equals one-half degree in the heavens. In order 
to find the ecliptic circle we must know that it means to locate 
the center of the earth's rotary motion. The earth rotates on its 
axis so that its position to the sun extends 24 degrees north and 
south of the equator and the extremes of these degrees are 
called the tropics of Cancer and Capricorn. We have previously 
described the location of these tropics in degrees. If we take 
24 degrees north of the equator we have 24 degrees of Cancer 
and 24 degrees south of the equator on the east we have 24 de- 
grees Capricorn. From this can be seen that the center of the 
earth's rotary motion is at 48 degrees from the tropic of 
Cancer and 48 degrees from the tropic of Capricorn. The east- 
ern horizon is, therefore, at Sagitarius 6 degrees and the west- 
ern horizon at Gemini 6 degrees. After having located the 
eastern and western horizon it becomes an easy task to locate 
the meridian degrees. The meridian is located 90 degrees from 
the 6 degrees of Sagitarius and is at Pisces 6 degrees and Virgo 
6 degrees. From this it will be seen that the northern and south- 



262 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

ern poles rotate in a circuit of 24 degrees which are the dis- 
tances of the poles from the meridian and these circuits are 
called the Arctic circles. 

The equatorial distance is the two tropical belts containing 
48 degrees and the third belt at the meridian containing 18 
degrees, which means that the distance of 90 degrees is divided 
into three belts of 48 degrees, 24 degrees and 18 degrees respec- 
tively. These three belts are again divided into separate parts, 
the equatorial belt of 48 degrees is divided into four parts of 
12 degrees each, the Polar belt of 24 degrees is divided into three 
parts of 8 degrees each, and the meridian belt of 18 degrees 
contains three parts of 6 degrees each. When applying the loca- 
tion of these belts, to the ecliptic circle around the earth, the 
country is divided and time calculated accordingly. This prin- 
ciple can be readily understood and applied to the Pacific 
Coast States, which was divided into the separate divisions re- 
ferred to. San Francisco is located at the dividing point and 
corresponds to the meridian in Pisces and the rest of the dis- 
tances of 12 degrees, 8 degrees, and 6 degrees can be calculated 
in degrees of latitude from the location given in the book of 
Joshua. 

We now realize that the horizon on the east is located at 6 
degrees Sagitarius, that the meridian is located at 6 degrees 
Pisces and that the western horizon must be at 6 degrees 
Gemini with the northern meridian at 6 degrees Virgo. 

The ecliptic on earth is located at 36 degrees north latitude 
and this circuit is divided into four 90-degree ages by the winter, 
spring, summer, and fall ecliptic or equinoxes. The winter 
equinox takes place about February 25th, when the sun is in 
the '6th degree of Pisces. The spring equinox about May 27th 
when the sun is in the 6th degree of Gemini. The summer 
equinox about August 29th when the sun is in the 6th degree 
of Virgo. The fall equinox about November 28th, when the 
sun is in the 6th degree of Sagitarius. 

We will locate the ecliptic circle on earth as it is located in 
the heavens, and divide the four 90-degree distances from 
Greenwich and the meridian. The meridian corresponds to the 
36th d'egree east longitude and crosses the ecliptic at the 36th 
degree north latitude near Palestine in Turkey. The Greenwich 
degree is calculated from the equator and is the first degree of 
Aries being 36 degrees west from the meridian degree of 6 
degrees Pisces and crosses England and France. The 114th 



Part VI— Chapter 49. 



263 



degree east longitude corresponds to 90 degrees from meridian 
at the location of Sagitarius 6 degrees and this is on the east 



gH_^5 




Plate No. 20 — Constellations. 
coast of China. The western horizon is 90 degrees west from 
Palestine, which is in the Atlantic Ocean east of the United 



264 Key to Bible afid Heaven. 

States. The north meridian degree of 6 degrees is located in 
the Pacific Ocean at 156 degrees west from Greenwich and is 
the opposite location to that described for Palestine. 

It should be understood that it is the northern hemisphere 
of the earth which is described and that the degrees calculated 
for south of the ecliptic and equator is considered as the north 
and is described in latitude. The signs Leo and Virgo have 
been called a fiery furnace and it will be seen that they are 
located on the equator at the solstices. 

In describing the circuit westward the Bible describes the 
distance of 90 degrees from Greenwich which is in the United 
States and to the sign Cancer, which again corresponds to the 
degrees west when the age is killed. In describing the circuit 
west of the 120 degrees longitude, in the Pacific Coast States, 
the circuit is changed and is then calculated in degrees of lati- 
tude northward. The 30th degree north latitude and 120th de- 
gree longitude represent the equator and Cancer. At this degree 
the age was destroyed by Noah when he crossed the ocean and 
also called Sodom and Gomorrah. 

It will be seen that in describing the country north of the 
30th degree on the Pacific Coast, that it is the beginning of a 
new cycle in the sign Leo and that the 36th degree at Mt. Whit- 
ney in California is the center for the tribe of Judah. 

The location of the twelve tribes of Israel in the Pacific 
Coast States which is described in the book of Joshua, is so 
arranged in latitude in distances between the tribes that the 
country is divided into degrees and named in the same propor- 
tion as the location of the tribes around the heavens and earth. 
The locating and naming of these tribes northward to corre- 
spond to the ecliptic circuit is one of the greatest scientific 
problems of creation. The distance of 18 degrees from Mexico 
to British Columbia, which is from the 30th degree to the 48th 
degree of latitude, were given the names of the twelve signs of 
the heavens. The Pacific Coast States have been so arranged 
into the twelve tribes by locating them in latitude that the nature 
of the earth around the ecliptic circle corresponds to the nature 
of the land given in degrees. We have described the location of 
the tribes in another chapter and it will prove to be a study 
worth considering from a scientific standpoint. 

We have described that astronomers use the Greenwich 
degree and think they are using the meridian and that this is 
a mistake of vital importance. The sign of Pisces has been 



Part VI— Chapter 49. 265 

ignored and the excuse made that it is drifted out of the heavens. 
Astronomical calculations can only be made one way in the 
heavens and this method is called right ascension, but if the cal- 
culation is made in the opposite direction the space is one hour 
or degree short. The reason we refer to this topic again is, that 
as it is in the heavens so is it on earth, and we find that the same 
mistake is made on earth as it was in the heavens. The nautical 
law is, that when traveling around the earth and in passing the 
180th degree longitude, in the Pacific Ocean that time is set 
forward or backward one degree in order to correct the mistake 
that Greenwich is the meridian degree. 

We have described that the ecliptic circle is the horizon in 
the heavens and that it divides the earth in two halves of equal 
distances north and south. The earth rotates on its axis in 
angles of 18 degrees, 24 degrees and 48 degrees calculated from 
the equator and the poles. In other words, the earth swings 12 
degrees to one side and 24 degrees to the other side of the 
meridian. The center of the earth, therefore, is at the center 
of the rotating degree and not at the equator. From this it will 
be seen that the exact degree which divides the earth in two 
halves is at the 36th degree north latitude calculated from the 
meridian degree. 

The earth's rotary motion causes it to dip east and west of 
the meridian so that 204 degrees remain south and 156 degrees 
north. In this dipping motion of the earth, the system known 
as the precession of the equinoxes is produced and each rotary 
dip is called an age. The earth makes fourteen dips to a com- 
plete cycle and this was termed fourteen generations in the 
Bible. The distance on earth of 204 degrees constitutes the 
seven tribes of Israel and the five tribes of Judah represent the 
156 degrees as the opposition tribes; because they were located 
opposite as night is to day. For those familiar with astronomy 
the dipping motion of the earth and the calculations of time 
will be readily understood. 

The Solar or heavenly cycle of time and space consists of 
12 houses of 30 degrees which equals 360 degrees calculated as 
an ecliptic year for the sun, but the equatorial distance is 365 
degrees or years and fractions. The reason why the space at 
the ecliptic circle is shorter is that it measures the earth at its 
center or middle of the ball, and the equatorial circuit makes a 
longer way around as it extends both north and south of the 
earth's center. It is like measuring the circumference of an 



266 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

egg. It makes no difference in the measurement of an e^g 
whether it is held in an upright or slanting positian, but if the 
measurement were taken at an angular position and extends on 
both sides of the center towards the ends, the distance will be 
longer. The prevailing system is to calculate the long way and 
this is called the equatorial or equinoctial distance. From this 
it will be seen that time and space calculated by the equinoctial 
method gives two measurements, a long and a short. It will also 
be seen that the center of these two extremes will be the center 
of the space called the ecliptic. This can be shown in the cycles 
calculated for the moon. The moon's equinoctial cycles consist 
of 27 and 29 degrees and fractions, but the moon's ecliptic time 
is 28 degrees or years without fractions. 

Saturn's ecliptic time corresponds to the time given for the 
moon. Saturn remains 28 months or years in a sign, he makes 
the circuit of the 12 signs in 336 months or years ; that is, Saturn 
makes 36 circuits of the 12 signs of 28 years each in 1008 years. 

Uranus remains 7 years in a sign making the circuit of the 
12 signs in 84 years and 12 revolutions of 84 years each equals 
1008 years. 

Neptune remains 14 years in each sign and travels the 12 
houses in 168 years making 6 revolutions in 1008 years. 

We have made the statement that the ecliptical cycles for 
the heavens and earth correspond, which means that all cycles 
begin and end at the same time and that all measurements are 
calculated from and on the ecliptic. From this statement it 
will be seen that we have precession of the ecliptic as well as 
precession of the equinox. The cycles for the sun, planets, and 
earth, in fact, all space of the heavens, are calculated from the 
precession on the ecliptic circuits. The beginning and ending 
of the cycles on earth correspond to the distances in space in the 
celestial and terrestrial heavens. The Bible shows that an age 
consists of 1008 years and we will describe these cycles as an 
example. 

The solar and earth's ecliptic precession consists of 14 rota- 
tions of 72 degrees each making 1008 years. 

The solar cycle consists of 864 years which are divided into 
12 signs or houses containing 72 years each and these 12 signs 
are again divided into the two divisions containing 5 and 7 
signs each. The 5 signs of 72 years each contain 360 years and 
7 signs of 72 years each equals 504 years and the two together 
make the solar cycle of 864 years or thousands of years. 



Part Vl^Chapter 49. 267 

There are six 1008-year cycles, making 6048 years, which 
are divided by the 84-year cycle of Uranus. There are 72 de- 
grees to a cycle and 84 X 72 equals 6048 years as an age. 

The comparative ages given in degrees in distance between 
the fixed stars and constellations correspond to the sun and 
earth's ecliptic cycles. The earth's cycle in relation to the sun 
is calculated in 360 degrees and corresponds to days. The 360 
days are divided into 12 months of 30 days. The year is divided 
into the four equinoctial seasons of three months each or 90 
days and are also divided into ecliptic seasons of four months 
each or 120 days. The months are divided into four weeks and 
the weeks into cycles of six days. The six working days are 
divided into 24 hours each which again is divided into two 12- 
hour divisions. The length of time for a day is 12 hours but a 
day extends from sunrise to sunset and contains approximately 
14 hours, which leaves 10 hours of the 24 for night. 

The days and nights are divided into well-known subdivis- 
ions of hours, minutes, and seconds, constituting a complete 
cycle. One day contains 24 hours, three days 72 hours and six 
days contain 144 hours. A day of 24 hours is divided into three 
8-hour periods which is again divided into three parts and cor- 
responds to the space given for the diameter of the sun. It is 
unnecessary to explain the comparative description between the 
hours as here given and the distances in the celestial heavens 
as it is the same figures in hours which is given in thousands of 
degrees and years in the heavens. 

It will be seen that the twelve tribes of Israel correspond 
to the twelve hours of the day and that the opposition within the 
twelve tribes are the 5 hours during the night. The five tribes 
represent 5 of the 24 hours and are the five tribes of Judah. The 
time for the five tribes are from 9 o'clock to 4 o'clock at night, and 
as there are 24 hours to the cycles there are 10 tribes to represent 
this age. From this it will be seen that the seven tribes of 
Israel represent the time from sunrise to sunset and that the 
Judah tribes represent the hours of night. The system which we 
have described in days and hours is also applied to longitude 
and latitude as well as to the nations and man. 

The Bible describes that six days constitute a working 
day with the Lord and that the seventh day is the Sabbath. 
The changing from a working day to Sunday is called the pass- 
over and a day of rest. "A day is as a year or a thousand years 
with the Lord." 



268 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

We should realize that the entire universe moves in cycles 
and that the method of calculating space, distance and time, is 
in the precessions caused by the rotating and spinning motion 
of all the heavenly bodies in space. Our solar systems circuit is 
in the celestial heavens and v^e have learned that it makes its 
circuit in 2,592,000 years. The beginning of this year, cycle or 
age is at the 6th degree of Sagitarius, and we find that the pole 
star or ecliptic pole of the celestial heavens is in this location 
at the present time. From this can be seen that the pole of the 
celestial heavens is 90 degrees east of the meridian of the ter- 
restrial heavens and that this position indicates the beginning 
of a new cycle for our solar system. In other words, the meri- 
dian degree in the terrestrial heavens is in the center of the 
Milky Way and the celestial pole is on the ecliptic degree in 
Sagitarius which is the position of the earth to the sun at the 
beginning of all cycles. 

It is very important to know that Sagitarius is the rising 
sign and that the 6th degree is located at the horizon ; which we 
will explain. We have illustrated by the hours of the clock that 
the meridian corresponds to 12 o'clock at noon and the northern 
end of the meridian is at 12 o'clock at night, which means that 
there are 12 hours above and 12 hours below the horizon. The 
sun is in the southern hemisphere in the day and in the north- 
ern at night. The time then when the sun will pass from the 
north to the south will be 6 o'clock in the morning and the sunset 
will be 6 o'clock in the evening. The meridian degree is in 
Pisces being 12 o'clock and 6 signs east of the meridian is Sagi- 
tarius at the horizon, with Gemini at sunset in the west. The 
equator represents 4 o'clock in the morning and afternoon. The 
sun's ray extends over the earth 204 degrees which is the dis- 
tance from the horizon in the east to the equator in the west 
and corresponds to the distance from the east coast of China to 
the 90th degree longitude in the United States. From this we 
see that the sun's rays extend from 6 degrees Sagitarius to 1 
degree Cancer. 

We have previously described that the celestial heavens are 
the circuit of our solar system and that the ecliptic pole of this 
circuit is calculated from the location of the pole star in Ursa 
Minor. The pole star is located in degree of longitude to cor- 
respond to the location of iSagitarius in 90-degree angles from 
the other pole stars. 

We will next call attention to the Milky Way and its loca- 



Part VI — Chapter 49. 



269 



tion in the universe. The Milky Way is located in the very path 
which we have described as the ecliptic circuit and extends from 




Plate No. 21 — Constellations. 
Sagitarius in the east southward over the meridian in Casiopeia 
to Gemini in the west. This path or way is the ecliptic circuit 



270 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

for our solar system and is calculated the same in degrees and 
time as the ecliptic circle for the earth and sun. 

The Milky Way extends in space 204 degrees and covers the 
distance from sunrise to sunset. It is located in the seven signs 
from Sagitarius in the east going over the meridian in the south 
and terminates in Gemini at the equator. 

The meridian of the terrestrial heavens is the same to the 
celestial heavens as the sun's meridian is to the earth. It is 
the center of the circle from which to calculate time and space. 
The center or meridian of the universe is at the present time 
near Polaris, from which all calculations are made for the con- 
stellations. 

The sun's meridian therefore, must correspond to the 
earth's meridian as both obtained its meridian from the same 
center. As an example, we will say that this method is like 
drawing three circles, one inside the other of 360 degrees, and 
that the degree is at the same location for the three circles. 

The universe as a whole and the terrestrial and celestial 
heavens including the sun can be considered as centers. The 
measurements for the sun and the heavens are calculated on the 
basis of 360 degrees regardless of whether the circuits are 
large or small. When the measurement of the sun and the 
length of time for its circuit is known, it can be used to base all 
other calculations on. We will describe this principle by com- 
paring the measurement of the sun to the distances in the celes- 
tial and terrestrial heavens. The dimensions of the sun as a 
center compares to all space of the universe. 

The diameter of the sun is 32 minutes which is divided into 
four parts of 8 minutes each. In order to get the circumference 
of the sun and the circuits, we multiply the 8 minutes X 3 
which equals 24 minutes. From this it will be seen that the 
circumference of the sun is 24 minutes, which corresponds to 
the ecliptic circuits of the heavens, and that these circuits are 
made into 24 divisions. We have now made one great cycle of 
four parts into a smaller circle of 24 and this circle is again mul- 
tiplied three times which equals 72 minutes. We have now the 
sun and the heavens divided into four quarters of 8 minutes 
each, making 72 minutes, and this is again multiplied by four, 
equalling 288, which is the circumference in minutes. There 
are 60 minutes to one hour so we will make the 288 minutes 
into hours and divide 288 by 60 which equals 48 hours. We have 
now made the circumference of the sun and the space of the 



Part VI— 'Chapter 49. 271 

three heavens as ecliptic circuits to contain 48 hours of solar 
time. If we reduce the circuit of 48 hours to the original one- 
quarter of the circle we have 12 hours for the quarter distance. 
One-fourth of the space containing 72 parts of 12 hours each 
and if we multiply the 12 X 72 it equals 864. From this it will 
be seen that one-fourth or 90 degrees consists of 864 degrees 
or thousands of degrees and that this circuit is the celestial 
heavens. 

We will give the dimensions of the three planets to prove 
that all measurements of the heavens and earth correspond, and 
by referring to astronomical books these measurements can be 
verified. 

The diameter of Uranus corresponds in proportion to the 
diameter of the sun which is 32 minutes. The diameter of 
Uranus is 32,000 miles. The diameter of Neptune is one-half 
degree or 36,000 miles. 

The diameter of Saturn is 72,000 miles or one degree. 
Uranus has four moons and the distances of the moons in 
miles from Uranus corresponds to the ecliptic dimensions of the 
earth. Uranus' cycle of time is divided into four ages of 84 
years each containing 336 years, which is one-third of a complete 
cycle of 1008 years. 

We realize that the astrological system of calculating space 
in the heavens will not be understood by all, and some may con- 
demn it before knowing that it is a system, but we know it is 
scientific and correct. 

It is our mission to give the key to the secret of the heavens 
and let others explain the details. 

The Bible gives us the information that the secrets and 
knowledge of the heavens, whether obtained from this book or 
not, will be generally understood within one year from the time 
it first becomes known. 

We are living in the age described for the Apostle Paul and 
he was supposed to be a tentmaker by trade, at least the Bible 
is so translated that the profession of Paul was to build houses 
in the air as tents. The tenthouses Paul is described to build 
are the same kind of houses which are spoken of in this book 
and are houses in the heavens. 

"In my father's house are many mansions if it were not so 
I would have told you." 



272 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

Chapter 50. 
location of suns and stars. 

The following is a list of fixed Stars and Constellations 
copied from ancient records. 

The six 1,000-year periods are illustrated in the six great 
constellations located nearest to the pole. They are Cassiopeia, 
Camelo Pardalis, Ursa Major, Ursa Minor, Draco, and Cepheus. 

The twelve constellations pictured, located north of the 
Zodiac, represent the twelve hours of the great cycle. The first 
four are Andromeda, Persius, Auriga, and Lynx. The dividing 
degree begins at the 120th degree and contains the eight constel- 
lations of Leo Minor, Coma Berenices, Bootes, Hercules, Ophiu- 
chus, Aquilla, Sygnus, and Pegasus. The other smaller con- 
stellations placed between the greater, illustrate the nature of 
the place in the heavens where they are located. 

South of the twelve constellations are located what is 
known as the twelve houses of the Zodiac, beginning with Pisces 
as the first house, and ending with Aquarius, as the twelfth 
house. 

South of the twelve houses of the Zodiac are located an- 
other set of constellations in the following order, beginning 
with Cetus south of Pisces, as the first house. Cetus, Eridanus, 
Orion, and Monoceros constituting the first four. The other 
eight constellations begin with the great Hydra and include Sex- 
tans, Crater, Corvus, Centaurus, S. Cross, Altair and Pisces 
Austrinus. There are also other southern constellations, as 
Canis Major and Minor, Argo, Lepus, and Columba, which in- 
clude some very important stars. 

The list we have given of constellations and fixed stars of 
the Zodiac are mostly copied from books published about 2,000 
years ago, by Claudius Ptolemy. His books contain the scien- 
tific description of Astronomy and Astrology but do not describe 
the philosophy of life given in the Bible. 

We have given the nearest degrees published by Ptolemy 
but have purposely left out the minutes and seconds as unimpor- 
tant. It will be seen that the constellations and fixed stars are 
given to begin from Casiopeia and Diphta, in Cetus, v/hich are 
from Pisces and that latitude and R. A. is given to begin with 
the first degree of Pisces on the ecliptic. 

North of the Zodiac are located the following constella- 
tions: Cassiopeia, R. A. 12°°, Dec. 60°. Andromeda, R. A. 



Part VI— Chapter 50. 



273 



14, Dec. 30°. The Triangle, R. A. 27°. Dec. 32°°. Nebula of Per-^ 
seus, R. A. 38°°, Dec. 39°. Perseus, R. A. 46°°. Dec. 45°°. 
Auriga, R. A. 75°°, Dec. 65°. Ursa Major, R. A. 153°°, Dec. 




50°. Nebula in Ursa Major, R. A. 165, Dec. 56. Delphinus, 
R. A. 208°, Dec. 15°. Bootes, R. A. 212°, Dec. 20°. Arcturus, 
R. A. 213°, Dec. 20°. Ursa Minor, R. A 235°, Dec 75°. Corona, 



274 Key to Bible and Heaven, 

Eorealis, R. A. 235°, Dec. 30°. Serpens, R. A. 236° Dec. 16°. 
Hercules, R. A. 255°, Dec. 22°. Serpentarius, R. A. 260°, Dec. 
13°. Draco, R. A. 270°, Dec. 66°°. Lyra, R. A. 283°°, Dec. 38° 
Aquilla, R. A. 295°, Dec. 8°. Sagitta R A. 398°, Dec. 18°. Cygnus, 
R. A. 308°, Dec. 42°. Cepheus, R. A. 238° Dec. 68°=. Pegasus, 
R. A. 340°, Dec. 14°. 

South of Zodiac are located the following: Cetus, the 
Whale, R. A. 25°°, Dec. 12°. Hydrus, R. A. 28°, Dec. 66°=. 
Eridanus, R. A. 60°, Dec. 10°. Orion, R. A. 80°, Dec. 00°. Lepus, 
the Hare, R. A. 80°, Dec. 18°. Canis Minoris, R. A. 100°, Dec. 
20°. Canis Majoris, R. A. 105°, Dec. 20°=. Argo Navis, R. A. 
115°, Dec. 50. Corvus, the Crow, R. A. 185°°, Dec 15°°. Cen- 
taurus, R. A. 200°°, Dec. 50°. Lupus, the Wolf, R. A. 230°, Dec. 
45°. Ara, the Altar, R. A. 255°, Dec. 55°. Coron Australis R. A. 
1280°, Dec. 40°. Pisces Australis, R. A. 335°, Dec. 30°. 

EIGHTY FIXED STARS. 

1. Diphda: Whale's tail, Citus, (south end). Lat. 21° s. 
Dec. 19°° s. R. A 10°; self destruction by brute force, sickness, 
disgrace, misfortune, compulsory change. 2. Algenib: Pegasi, 
Lat. 13° n. Dec. 15° n. R. A. 2° ; dishonor, notoriety, violence, 
misfortune, the naked and poor professional beggar. 3. Andro- 
meda: Caput Andro, Alpheratz. Lat. 26° n. Dec. 29°° n. R. A. 
1°; independence, freedom, fortune, intellect, love, riches and 
honor. 4. Eaten Kaitos: Whale's belly, Citus. Lat. 20° s. Dec. 
11° s. R. A. 27°°; compulsory transportation, change or emi- 
gration, misfortune by accident or force, shipwreck with rescue. 
5. Al Pherg. Al Muachher (Piscium) ; Head of Typhon. Lat. 
5° n. Dec. 15°° n. R. A. 22°; preparedness, steadiness, deter- 
minedness, final success. 6. Andromeda Zona. Merach. Girdle 
of Andro. Lat. 26°° n. Dec. 35° n. R. A. 16°; love, beneficence, 
forgiveness and overcoming by kindness. 7. Sheritan. (Arietis). 
Ram's horn. Lat. 9° n. Dec. 20° n. R. A. 27°°; "cut off with 
a bloody wound," unscrupulously defeated, destroyed by fire, war 
or earthquake. 8. El Nath, El Natick, Ram's following horn. 
(Arietis). Lat. 10° n. Dec. 23°°=. R. A. 30; violence, brutish- 
ness, cruelty, premeditated crime, ''the death wound." 9. Men- 
kar. Whale's jaw, Citus. Lat. 12°° s. Dec. 4° n. R. A. 44°°; dis- 
ease disgrace, ruin, injury from beasts. 10. Algol. Medusae's 
head, Persei. Lat. 22° n. Dec. 41° n. R. A. 45° ; misfortune, vio- 
lence, decapitation, hanging, electrocution, mob violence. 11. Al- 
cyone, Pleiades, Bright Pleiad, Kesil, Karma, Kimah, 'The cen- 
tral sun." Lat. 4° n. Dec. 24° n. R. A. 55° ; "An immortal seal or 
type," love, blindness from fevers, accidents to the face. 12. 



Part VI— Chapter 50. 



275 



Hyades, first star in Taurus near Aldebaren in bull's head. Lat. 
6° s. Dec. 16°° n. R. A. 64° ; tears, sudden events, violence, fierce- 
ness, poisoning, blindness, wounds or hurts to the head by in- 




struments or fevers. 13. Aldebaren, Bull's south eye. Lat. 5° 
s. Dec. 16° n. R. A. 67°°; success in military occupation, 
honor, integrity, popularity, gain of power and wealth through 



276 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

others, "the subduing governor." 14. Rigel (nigel), Orion's left 
foot. Lat. 31°° s. Dec. 8° s. R. A. 77°°; benevolence, honor, 
riches and happiness. 15. Bellatrix, Orion's left shoulder. Lat. 
16° s. Dec. 6° n. R. A. 78° ; martial honor with sudden dis- 
honor, subject to accidents causing ruin and blindness. 16. 
Capella, Auragia's left shoulder. Lat. 23° n. Dec. 46° n. R. A. 
77°°; honor, wealth, friends, eminence, renown, public position 
of trust. 17. Phact. "Noah's dove," Columba. Lat. 57°° s. Dec. 
34°° s. R. A. 84°; beneficence, good fortune, hopefulness. 18. 
Auriga. Bull's north horn; Lat. 5° n. Dec. 29° n. A. R. 80° ; "the 
shepherd," neutrality for good or evil, fortune and eminence. 
19. Alhecka, Heka, Bull's south horn; Lat. 1° s. Dec. 22° n. 
R. A. 82° ; "the driver," violence, malevolence, danger by acci- 
dent. 20. Betelguese, Orion's right shoulder; Lat. 16° s. Dec. 
7° n. R. A. 87°° ; martial honor, preferment and wealth. 21. Pro- 
pus; Lat. 1° s. Dec. 23° n. R. A. 85°; strength, eminence and 
success. 22. Tejat, (Geminorum) ; Lat. 1° s. Dec. 22° n. R. A. 
92° ; violence, pride, overconfidence and sham.elessness. 23. Ge- 
mini, forward foot, Dirah; Lat. 1° s. Dec. 23° n. R. A. 94°; pro- 
tection, power and force, "the abused or beaten one." 24. Bright 
foot of Gemini, Alhena; Lat. 7° s. Dec. 16°° n. R. A. 98°°; lia- 
bility to accidents of the feet, "the wound in the tendon Achiles." 
25. iSirius, the dog star, Canis Majoris; 13°. Lat. 39° s. Dec. 16° 
s. R. A. 100° ; honor, renown and wealth. 26. Canupis, Oar of 
Argo; Lat. 76° s. Dec. 53°° s. R. A. 95°; evil changed to good, 
piousness, conservativeness. 27. Wesat, (Geminorum) ; Lat. 1° 
s. Dec. 22°° n. R. A. 108° ; violence, malevolence, chemical poison 
or gas, destructiveness as first principle. 28. Castor, Apollo, 
(Geminorum); Lat. 10° n. Dec. 32° n. R. A. 112°°; sudden 
changes in commerce for fame and honor, "a ruler yet to come." 
29. Pollux, Hercules, (Geminorum) ; Lat. 7° n. Dec. 28°° n. R. A. 
115°°; dignified malevolence, poison, "a heartless judge." 30. 
Procyon, Canis Minor; Lat. 16° s. Dec. 5° n. R. A. 113°°; activ- 
ity, violence, malevolence, hydrophobia, causes elevation termi- 
nating in disaster. 31. Ascellus north, (Cancri) Baalam's 
Ass; Lat. 3°° n. Dec. 22° n. R. A. 129°; patience, beneficence, 
courage, a heroic defiant leader. 32. Proespe, Nebula, Crab's 
breast; Lat. 1° n. Dec. 20°° n. R. A. 128°; disease, disgrace, ad- 
venture, insolence, wantonness, brutality, blindness. 33. Ascel- 
lus south, (Cancri) Khan; Lat. 1° n. Dec. 18° n. R. A. 130°°; "a 
resting place," "the mare Ass," the ending or stop. 34. Acubens, 
Crab's claw, (Cancri) ; Lat. 5° s. Dec. 13° n. R. A. 134°; activ- 
ity, malevolence, poison, liars and criminals. 35. Epsilon Leonis, 
Arych, the Lion's mouth; Lat. 10° n. Dec. 24°° n. R. A. 145°°; 



Part VI— Chapter 50. 



277 



direfulness, cruelty, heartlessness, brutishness and destructive- 
ness, ''he who reads." 36. Alphard, Hydra's heart; Lat. 22° s. 
Dec. 8°° s. R. A. 141°° ; death by drowning or poison, asphyxia- 




tion, sudden termination, immorality, revolting. 37. Regules, 
Lion's heart; Lat. 1° n. Dec. 12° n. R. A. 151° ; ''the crushing 
foot," violence, destructiveness, military honor of short dura- 



278 Key to Bible and Heaven. 

tion with ultimate failure, imprisonment and death. 38. Phi 
Leonis, Al Serpha, Lion's belly. Lat. 1° n. Dec. 10° n. R. A. 
157°°; ''the funeral pyre/' self destruction, acid poison, liquid 
explosive or fire, internal melting pot, lying, stealing, crime. 39. 
Zosma Lion's back; Lat. 14° n. Dec. 21° n. R. A. 167° ; benefit by 
disgrace, selfishness, unreasonableness, egotism, immorality, 
meanness, shamelessness. 40, Deneboia, Denebola Lion's tail; 
Lat. 12° n. Dec. 15° n. R. A. 176°; "swift judgment," despair, 
regrets, public disgrace, misfortune from elements of nature, 
happiness turned to anger. 41. Zavijani; Lat. 1°° n. Dec. 5° n. 
R. A. 175° ; ''correct weighing," beneficence, force, strength, com- 
bative movements, destructiveness. 42. Crater. The Cup, Cra- 
teria, "Holy cup or grail;" Lat. 17°° s. Dec. 14° s. R. A. 169°; 
honors and riches in disgrace, the purifier unto salvation, ideal- 
ity, psychic vision, intelligence. 43. Virgo, south wing; Lat. 1° 
n. Dec. 1° s. R. A. 184° ; refinement, honor, congeniality, order, 
loveableness. 44. Vendemiatrix (Virginis) ; Lat. 16° n. Dec. 11° 
n. R. A. 194° ; falsity, disgrace, stealing, wanton folly. 45. Caphir, 
Iclil, (Virginis) ; Lat. 3° n. Dec. 1° s. R. A. 189°; "an atone- 
ment offering," "the submissive one," a lovable character, cour- 
teous, refined. 46. Algorab, Corvus, in the crow or buzzard ; Lat- 
12° s. Dec. 16°° s=. R. A. 186; destruction, fiendishness, malevo- 
lence, repulsiveness, lying, the scavenger 47. Argus, the ship's 
stern; Lat. 59° s. Dec. 59°° s. R. A. 160°; peril usefulness, dig- 
nity, piousness, acquisitiveness. 48. Spica, Arista, (Virginis) ; 
Lat. 2° s. Dec. 10° s. R. A. 200° ; unscrupulousness, success, re- 
nown, riches, "the seed of wheat.' 49. Arcturus, Arctophilax, 
Bootes; Lat. 31° n. Dec. 20° n. R. A. 213°; riches, honors, high 
renown, self-determination. 50. Virgo's left foot; Lat. 1° s. Dec. 
13° s. R. A. 211°; swift violence, unreliability, argumentation, 
changeability. 51. Acrux, southern cross, Crucis, Roscroix; 
Lat. 53° s. Dec. 63° s. R. A. 185 ° ; religious ceremonial, magic, 
mystery, beneficence. 52. South scale of Libra, Zubenalgenubi ; 
Lat. 1° n. Dec. 16° s. R. A. 221° ; "the insufficient price," malevo- 
lence, obstruction, an unforgiving character, violent disease pro- 
ducing, lying crime. 53. North scale of Libra, Zubenalsche- 
mah; Lat. 9° n. Dec. 9° s. R. A. 228°; "the full price," benefi- 
cence, honor, riches, happiness, high ambition. 54. Agena, 
(Centauri) ; Lat. 44° s. Dec. 60° s. R. A. 209°; position, friend- 
ship, refinement, high morality, health, honor. 55. Bungula, 
(Centauri); Lat. 43° s. Dec. 60° s. R. A. 218°; beneficence, 
friends, position of honor, refinement. 56. Grafias, (Libra) ; Lat. 
7° n. Dec. 11° s. R. A. 240°; extreme malevolence, mercilessness, 
fiendishness, repulsiveness, the criminal. 57. Isidis (Scorpii) ; 



Part VI— Chapter 50. 



279 



Lat. 2° s. Dec. 22° s. R. A. 239° ; ''sudden assault," malevolence, 
immorality, shamelessness. 58. Front of Scorpio; Lat. 1° n. 
Dec. 20° s. R. A. 240° ; pestilence, contagious diseases, malice. 




stealing, mercilessness, crime. 59. Antares, Shiloh, (Scorpi) ; 
Lat. 5° s. Dec. 26°° s. R. A. 246° ; "it rends; tears," malevolence, 
destructiveness, liberality, broadmindedness. 60. Ophiuchu's 



280 Keij to Bible and Heaven. 



o o . 



knee, Ophinci, Serpentarius ; Lat. 7° n. Dec. 16° s. R. A. 256 
success in evil deeds, wastefulness, lost energy, perverted mor- 
als. 61. Rasalhagne, Head of Ophuchus, Ophinci; Lat. 36° n. 
Dec. 13° n. R. A. 263°; misfortune through woman, perverted 
tastes, mental depravity. 62. Lesuth, Scorpion's sting; Lat. 14° 
s. Dec. 36° s. R. A. 260° ; malevolence, acid poison, danger, des- 
perateness, low morals. 63. Yed, Ophuchi; Lat. 17° n. Dec. 3° 
s. R. A 242° ; revolution, immorality, shamelessness 64. Arch- 
er's bow, (Sagitari) ; Lat. 3° n. Dec. 21° s. R. A. 272°; success, 
high ambition, martial desires, keen perception, domination. 
65. Archer's fact. Nebula, (Sagitari) ; Lat. 1° n. Dec. 21°° s. R. 
A. 283°; blindness, explosives, fire, flaring heat, heroism, cour- 
age, defiance. 66. Vega Lyra; Lat. 62° n. Dec. 39° n. R. A. 278°°; 
beneficence, ideality, hopefulness, refinement, changeableness. 67. 
Eagle's tail, Aquilla; Lat. 36° n. Dec. 14° n. R. A. 285° ; capabil- 
ity to command, liberality, success in war, beneficence. 68. Ter- 
rebellum, Archer's tail, (Sagitari) ; Lat. 5° s. Dec. 28° s. R. A. 
293°° ; a fortune but with regret and disgrace, cunning, a merce- 
nary nature, repulsiveness. 69. Albireo, Swan's head, Cygni; 
Lat. 49° n. Dec. 28° n. R. A. 292° ; ''the song of the dying swan," 
beneficence in despair, a handsome person, neatness, lovableness. 
70. Altair, Aquilla, Ara, Bird of Jove; Lat. 29° n. Dec. 9° n. 
R. A. 297°°; great and sudden material wealth, ambition, com- 
mand, liberality. 71. Giedi, Goat's horn, (Capricorn) ; Lat. 7° 
n. Dec. 13°° n. R. A. 303°; ''the slain kid," beneficence, sacrifice, 
offering. 72. Heart of Goat, (Capricorni) ; Lat. 3° s. Dec. 21°° 
s. R. A. 313° ; disagreeableness, contemptibleness, instability, 
shamelessness. 73. Sea, Goat's belly, (Capricorni) ; Lat. 8° s. 
Dec. 24° s. R. A. 325° ; malevolence, destructiveness, uncontrol- 
lable temper. 74. Deneb, Algedi, (Capricorni) ; Lat. 3° s. 
Dec. 18°° s. R. A. 323°; "the judicial point of the goat," benefi- 
cence and destructiveness, sorrow, happiness, life and death. 
75. Sad Naschira, Goat's tail, (Capricorn) ; Lat. 3° s. Dec. 17° 
s. R. A. 326° ; overcoming by evil which is turned to success. 76. 
El Melik, (Aquari) ; Lat. 11° n. Dec. 1° s. R. A. 330° ; extreme 
and sudden destruction, persecution, lawsuits, death penalty. 
77. Fomalhaut, South fish; Lat. 21° s. Dec. 30° s. R. A. 343°; 
change from a material to a spiritual form of expression. 78. 
Archernar, Fridani, Cherub and Sword; Lat. 60° s. Dec. 58° s. 
R. A. 324° ; success in public office, beneficence, religion. 79. 
Markab, Wing of Pegasus; Lat. 20° n. Dec. 15° n. R. A. 345°°; 
honor riches, fortune, danger by fevers, violent death 80. 
Schet, Pegasi, Tail of western fish; Lat. 7° n. Dec. 7° n. R. A. 
359° ; extreme misfortune, suicide, drowning, murder. 









^^%^ 



\^ 



n\V <^ 









0-' 









.^^ c '^ " '' « % 



0^ 



-<^- 



■^ 



<<■ v^ 












-% 






-'3 ^ 







^^ ,0" 



..'«- 



A. ,n 



^,: v^' 






v\^' ^/>. 



H -7-^ 






■/' 



^^ i^ 






.V 



^\ 



- V^' 



.0^^ 



•>>. ^'t.- 



\^ 



,N X 



v^ .^- 



XV^^ ^^>.- 



■^ ..^^ 



>*.'^' 



.^ 



cV'^. 



.c,'^<^ 



'-^^^ 



.# ^> 



% .^Vv^ 



A- 



S^-^^. 



^. o> 



^^. 



